RAV4 Hybrid (2021) - Car TOYOTA - Free user manual and instructions

Product type	5-door hybrid car
Dimensions (L x W x H)	4600 x 1855 x 1685 mm
Wheelbase	2690 mm
Curb weight	1635 kg (2WD version)
Internal combustion engine	4-cylinder 2.5 L petrol, Atkinson cycle
Electric motor	Permanent magnet synchronous
Maximum combined power	219 hp (163 kW)
Transmission	CVT (continuously variable transmission) with sequential mode
Drivetrain	Front (2WD) or all-wheel (AWD-i)
Battery type	Nickel-metal hydride (Ni-MH) battery
Battery capacity	1.6 kWh
Combined consumption (WLTP)	4.5 L/100 km
CO2 emissions (WLTP)	102 g/km
Fuel tank	55 L
Fuel	Unleaded petrol 95 or 98 + regenerative braking charging
Main features	Self-charging hybrid, energy regeneration, Toyota Safety Sense (pre-collision, adaptive cruise control, lane departure alert, etc.)
Maintenance and cleaning	Engine oil change every 15,000 km or 1 year; cabin filter every 2 years; hybrid battery check at dealership
Safety	Front, side and curtain airbags; ABS, ESP, hill start assist
Spare parts and repairability	Tires 225/65 R17; front brake pads specific to hybrid; auxiliary 12V battery
General information	752-page manual available as PDF download

Frequently Asked Questions - RAV4 Hybrid (2021) TOYOTA

How to start the Toyota RAV4 Hybrid?

Press the brake pedal and press the POWER button. The hybrid system activates silently.

Do I need to charge the hybrid battery from a wall outlet?

No, the RAV4 Hybrid is not a plug-in hybrid. The battery charges automatically via regenerative braking and the internal combustion engine.

What is the most economical driving style?

Drive smoothly, anticipate braking, and use ECO mode to optimize fuel consumption.

How to maintain the cabin air filter?

The filter is located behind the glove box. Replace it every 2 years or 30,000 km.

What to do if a warning light comes on?

Refer to the warning lights section in the manual. If the red hybrid battery warning light comes on, stop the vehicle and contact a dealership.

Can I tow a trailer with this vehicle?

Yes, with an approved tow hitch. Maximum towing capacity is 1500 kg (braked). Check the manual for recommendations.

How to use adaptive cruise control?

Turn on the cruise control with the ON/OFF button, then set the speed. The radar maintains a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.

What type of engine oil to use?

Use 0W-16 oil certified API SP or ILSAC GF-6B. Check the manual for the exact quantity.

How to switch to all-electric (EV) mode?

Press the EV Mode button near the gear lever. EV mode works as long as the battery is sufficiently charged and speed is below ~50 km/h.

Where is the auxiliary 12V battery located?

The 12V battery is located in the trunk on the right side. It powers the accessories and starts the hybrid system.

USER MANUAL RAV4 Hybrid (2021) TOYOTA

Search by illustration

For safety and security	Make sure to read through them(Main topics: Child seat, theft deterrent system)	1
Vehicle status information and indicators	Reading driving-related information(Main topics: Meters, multi-information display)	2
Before driving	Opening and closing the doors and windows, adjustment before driving(Main topics: Keys, doors, seats)	3
Driving	Operations and advice which are necessary for driving(Main topics: Starting hybrid system, refueling)	4
Audio	Operating the Audio(Main topics: Audio/visual, phone, Connected Services)	5
Interior features	Usage of the interior features(Main topics: Air conditioner, storage features)	6
Maintenance and care	Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures(Main topics: Interior and exterior, light bulbs)	7
When trouble arises	What to do in case of malfunction and emergency(Main topics: 12-volt battery discharge, flat tire)	8
Vehicle specifications	Vehicle specifications, customizable features(Main topics: Fuel, oil, tire inflation pressure)	9
For owners	Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners	10
Index	Search by symptom
	Search alphabetically

For your information...... 8

Reading this manual....13

How to search......14

Pictorial index ......16

1 For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

Before driving....28

For safe driving .....29

Seat belts....31

SRS airbags....35

Front passenger occupant classification system .....45

Exhaust gas precautions..50

1-2. Child safety

Riding with children......51

Child restraint systems.....52

1-3. Emergency assistance

Safety Connect ......67

1-4. Hybrid system

Hybrid system features ....72

Hybrid system precautions 76

1-5. Theft deterrent system

Immobilizer system .....81

Alarm....84

2 Vehicle status information and indicators

2-1. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators 88

Gauges and meters (with 4.2-inch display) .....94

Gauges and meters (with 7-inch display) .....98

Multi-information display 103

Energy monitor/consumption screen.... 113

3 Before driving

3-1. Key information

Keys 120

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Side doors 127

Back door 133

Smart key system...... 147

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats 153

Rear seats......154

Driving position memory 156

Head restraints...... 159

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel...... 162

Inside rear view mirror... 163

Digital Rear-view Mirror. 165

Outside rear view mirrors 174

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows ...... 176

Moon roof 179

Panoramic moon roof.... 182

4 Driving

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle...... 189

Cargo and luggage ..... 196

Vehicle load limits ..... 199

Trailer towing 200

Dinghy towing 209

4-2. Driving procedures

Power (ignition) switch (vehicles without smart key system).... 210

Power (ignition) switch (vehicles with smart key system) 212

EV drive mode ...... 217

Hybrid transmission ..... 219

Turn signal lever ...... 223

Parking brake.... 224

Brake Hold 227

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch...... 229

AHB (Automatic High Beam) 232

Fog light switch 235

Windshield wipers and washer.... 236

Rear window wiper and washer.... 239

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap 241

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Toyota Safety Sense 2.0244

PCS (Pre-Collision System) 250

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) 258

RSA (Road Sign Assist) 268

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range ... 271

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) 282

Intuitive parking assist... 291

PKSB (Parking Support Brake).... 298

Parking Support Brake function (static objects) ..... 303

Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) 309

Rear view monitor system 313

Toyota parking assist monitor 321

Panoramic view monitor 334

Driving mode select switch 366

Trail Mode 367

Driving assist systems... 369

4-6. Driving tips

Hybrid vehicle driving tips 376

Winter driving tips...... 378

Utility vehicle precautions 381

5 Audio

5-1. Basic function

Buttons overview...... 387

Menu screen...... 389

Status icon 390

"Setup" screen 392

5-2. Basic information before operation

Initial screen.... 393

Touch screen 394

Home screen.... 396

Entering letters and numbers/list screen operation 397

Screen adjustment ..... 400

Linking multi-information display and the system .... 401

5-3. Connectivity settings

Registering/Connecting a Bluetooth® device ..... 402

Setting Bluetooth ^® details 406

Wi-Fi ^® Hotspot 414

5-4. Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

Apple CarPlay ^® /Android Auto ^TM 419

5-5. Other settings

General settings...... 426

Voice settings...... 430

Vehicle settings...... 431

5-6. Using the audio/visual system

Quick reference...... 432

Some basics 433

5-7. Radio operation

AM/FM/SiriusXM (SXM) radio 437

5-8. Media operation

USB memory...... 444

iPod/iPhone (Apple CarPlay) 446

Android Auto...... 449

Bluetooth ^® audio ..... 450

5-9. Audio/visual remote controls

Steering switches ..... 454

5-10. Audio settings

Setup...... 456

5-11. Tips for operating the audio/visual system

Operating information.... 458

5-12. Voice command system operation

Voice command system 470

Command list 473

5-13.Mobile Assistant operation

Mobile Assistant 477

5-14. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)

Quick reference...... 479

Some basics...... 480

Placing a call using the Bluetooth® hands-free system 484

Receiving a call using the Bluetooth®hands-free system 487

Talking on the Bluetooth ^® hands-free system..... 488

Bluetooth ^® phone message function.... 490

5-15.Phone settings

Setup...... 495

5-16.What to do if...

(Bluetooth®)

Troubleshooting ..... 505

5-17. Connected Services overview

Connected Services..... 509

Type A: Function achieved by using a smartphone or DCM 510

Type B: Function achieved by using DCM and the system 512

Type C: Function achieved by using DCM.... 513

Type D: Function achieved by using DCM and a smartphone 516

5-18. Connected Services operation

Toyota Apps.... 518

5-19.Setup

Toyota Apps settings .... 522

6 Interior features

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning system.... 524

Heated steering wheel/seat heaters/seat ventilators531

6-2. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list ...... 534

6-3. Using the storage features

List of storage features . 537

Luggage compartment features 541

6-4. Using the other interior features

Other interior features ... 546

Garage door opener ..... 557

7 Maintenance and care

7-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior .... 566

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior .... 569

7-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements 572

General maintenance.... 573

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs 576

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions.... 577

Hood.... 579

Positioning a floor jack .. 580

Engine compartment ..... 582

12-volt battery...... 588

Tires 590

Tire inflation pressure.... 605

Wheels 607

Air conditioning filter..... 609

Cleaning the hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vent and filter...... 611

Wiper insert replacement 615

Wireless remote control/electronic key battery...... 618

Checking and replacing fuses 621

Light bulbs.... 624

8 When trouble arises

8-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers ..... 634

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency 635

If the vehicle is trapped in rising water.... 636

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed.... 637

If you think something is wrong 641

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds 642

If a warning message is displayed.... 654

If you have a flat tire..... 658

If the hybrid system will not start 667

If you lose your keys ..... 668

If the fuel filler door cannot be opened 669

If the electronic key does not operate properly (vehicles with smart key system) 670

If the 12-volt battery is discharged 672

If your vehicle overheats 677

If the vehicle becomes stuck 680

9 Vehicle specifications

9-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.).... 684

Fuel information...... 694

Tire information ...... 696

9-2. Customization

Customizable features... 706

9-3. Initialization

Items to initialize...... 718

10 For owners

10-1. For owners

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners.... 720

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French).... 721

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French).... 722

Index

What to do if... (Trouble-shooting) 732

Alphabetical Index ..... 735

For your information

Main Owner's Manual

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your vehicle in terms of equipment.

Noise from under vehicle after turning off the hybrid system

Approximately five hours after the hybrid system is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products. Modification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system

The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as:

• Hybrid system
• Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system

● Toyota Safety Sense 2.0
- Anti-lock brake system
- SRS airbag system
- Seat belt pretensioner system

Be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.

High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as the conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances despite of their electromagnetic shielding.

Unwanted noise may occur in the reception of the mobile two-way radio.

Vehicle data recording

The vehicle is equipped with sophisticated computers that will record certain data, such as:

• Engine speed/ Electric motor speed (traction motor speed)
- Accelerator status
- Brake status
- Vehicle speed
• Operation status of the driving assist systems
- Images from the cameras Your vehicle is equipped with cameras. Contact your Toyota dealer for the location of recording cameras.

- Hybrid battery (traction battery) status

The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with which it is equipped.

These computers do not record conversations or sounds, and only record images outside of the vehicle in certain situations.

● Data Transmission

Your vehicle may transmit the data recorded in these computers to Toyota without notification to you.

- Data usage

Toyota may use the data recorded in this computer to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.

Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:

• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner
• Recorded image information can be erased by your Toyota dealer.

The image recording function can be disabled. However, if the function is disabled, data from when the system operates will not be avail-

able.

- To learn more about the vehicle data collected, used and shared by Toyota, please visit www.toyota.com/privacyvts/.

Usage of data collected through Safety Connect (U.S.mainland only)

If your Toyota has Safety Connect and if you have subscribed to those services, please refer to the Safety Connect Telematics Subscription Service Agreement for information on data collected and its usage.

- To learn more about the vehicle data collected, used and shared by Toyota, please visit www.toyota.com/privacyvts/

Event data recorder

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

● How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
- Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
- How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
- How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the

information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

● Disclosure of the EDR data

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:

• An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is obtained
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit However, if necessary, Toyota may:
• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

Perchlorate Material

Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/ hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include the airbags, seat belt pretensioners, wireless remote control batteries, and the batteries in the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters.

WARNING

■ General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.

Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.

Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.

WARNING

■General precaution regarding children's safety

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the side windows, the moon roof or the panoramic moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

Reading this manual

Explains symbols used in this manual

Symbols in this manual

Symbols	Meanings
	WARNING:Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or serious injury to people.
	NOTICE:Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to or a malfunction in the vehicle or its equipment.
123...	Indicates operating or working procedures.Follow the steps in numerical order.

Symbols in illustrations

Diagram showing a car interior with a highlighted vehicle and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Symbols	Meanings
	Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices.
	Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens).

Diagram of car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and umbrella with no stop sign indicating no restriction

Symbols	Meanings
	Indicates the component or position being explained.
	Means Do not, Do not do this, or Do not let this happen.

How to search

■Searching by name

● Alphabetical index: →P.735

ABS? SRS?

■Searching by installation position

- Pictorial index: P.16

Line drawing of a person reading an open book with a lightbulb above it, no text or symbols present

■Searching by symptom or sound

- What to do if... (Troubleshooting): →P.732

Illustration of a person reading a book with a lightbulb symbol above, next to a car with lightning bolts (no text or symbols present)

■Searching by title

- Table of contents: P.2

Illustration of a person reading an open book with a lightbulb above, symbolizing ideas or learning (no text or symbols present)

Pictorial index

Exterior

B P O N L G C D Q H I J K L I H J K L M F A E

The shape of the headlights may differ depending on the grade, etc.

A Side doors .....P.127

Locking/unlocking ......P.127

Opening/closing the side windows....P.176

Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key .....P.128, 670

Warning messages ......P.654

B Back door....P.133

Locking/unlocking P.134

Opening from inside the cabin ^* P.137

Opening from outside....P.135, 137

Warning messages ......P.654

C Outside rear view mirrors .....P.174

Adjusting the mirror angle....P.174

Folding the mirrors .....P.174

Defogging the mirrors ^* P.526

D Windshield wipers ......P.236

Precautions against winter season....P.378

To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer) ^* .....P.529

Precautions against car wash

(Rain-sensing windshield wipers) ^* P.567

Replacing the wiper insert ......P.615

Refueling method....P.241

Fuel type/fuel tank capacity .....P.685

F Tires P.590

Tire size/inflation pressure ......P.690

Winter tires/tire chain .....P.378

Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system ^* .....P.590

Coping with flat tires....P.658

G Hood....P.579

Opening P.579

Engine oil P.686

Coping with overheat....P.677

Warning messages ......P.654

Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving

(Replacing method: P.624, Watts: P.692)

H Headlights....P.229

I Turn signal lights P.223

J Parking lights P.229

K Daytime running lights....P.229

L Side marker lights....P.229

M Fog lights ^* P.235

N Stop lights/tail lights/turn signal lights.....P.223, 229

☐ Tail lights ......P.229

Back-up lights

Shifting the shift lever to R....P.219

P License plate lights....P.229
Q Side turn signal lights ^* P.223

*: If equipped

Instrument panel

E C D F A G K L H I A B J

A Power switch ......P.210, 212

Starting the hybrid system/changing the modes ..P.210, 212, 216

Emergency stop of the hybrid system.....P.635

When the hybrid system will not start ......P.667

Warning messages ^*1 P.654

B Shift lever....P.219

Changing the shift position....P.220

Precautions against towing .....P.637

When the shift lever does not move....P.221

C Meters P.94, 98

Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light P.94, 96, 98, 102

Warning lights/indicator lights P.88

When the warning lights come on....P.642

D Multi-information display .....P.103

Display....P.103

Energy monitor....P.113

When the warning messages are displayed....P.654

E Turn signal lever P.223

Headlight switch P.229

Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/ license plate lights/daytime running lights....P.229

Fog lights ^*1 P.235

F Windshield wiper and washer switch .....P.236

Rear window wiper and washer switch .....P.239

Usage.....P.236, 239

Adding washer fluid....P.587

Warning messages ......P.654

G Emergency flasher switch....P.634

H Hood lock release lever....P.579

I Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever....P.162

Adjustment ......P.162

J Air conditioning system....P.524

Usage.....P.524

Rear window defogger P.526

K Audio ^*1 P.387

Audio Plus ^*1,2

Premium Audio ^*1,2

L Fuel filler door opener switch....P.242

*1:If equipped

*2: Refer to "NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

Switches

A B E D C F G H I J K L

A Driving position memory switches ^ .....P.156
B Window lock switch P.178
C Power window switches....P.176
D Door lock switches P.131
E Outside rear view mirror switches....P.174
F "ODO TRIP" switch P.96, 101
G Instrument panel light control dial....P.96, 102
H Automatic High Beam switch P.232
Windshield wiper de-icer switch ^ P.529
J Camera switch ^ P.336
K Heated steering wheel switch*....P.531
L Power back door switch ^ P.137

*: If equipped

A B C D G F E D

A Meter control switches....P.104
B Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch....P.277
Cruise control switches Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range .....P.271
D Audio remote control switches* ......P.454
E LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch ......P.258
F Phone switch ^ ......P.482
G Talk switch ^ ......P.470

*: Vehicles with Audio Plus or Premium Audio, refer to "NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

A OFF B HI LO C D E F HOLD TRAIL ECO SPORT PUSH NORMAL EV MODE H G

A VSC OFF switch ......P.370
B Front seat heater switches*....P.531
C Front seat heater/seat ventilator switches*....P.532
D Parking brake switch .....P.224

Applying/releasing....P.224

Precautions against winter season .....P.379

Warning buzzer/message ......P.648, 654

E Brake hold switch P.227
F Trail Mode switch P.367
G Driving mode select switch....P.366
H EV drive mode switch P.217

*: If equipped

Interior

E J K E F J H A D C G I B

A SRS airbags....P.35
B Floor mats....P.28
C Front seats....P.153
D Rear seats....P.154
E Head restraints....P.159
F Seat belts....P.31
G Console box P.538
H Inside lock buttons....P.131
I Cup holders .....P.538
J Assist grips P.556
K Rear seat heater switches ^* P.531

*: If equipped

Ceiling

A B C D D C E I H G F

A “SOS” button ^1 .....P.67
B Auxiliary box....P.539
C Moon roof switches ^1 ......P.179
D Interior lights ^*2 P.534

Personal lights P.535

E Electronic sunshade switch ^1 .....P.182
F Vanity mirrors....P.546
G Sun visors....P.546
H Inside rear view mirror ^1 ......P.163

Digital Rear-view Mirror ^*1 P.165

I Garage door opener switches ^*1 P.557

*1:If equipped
*2: The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear.

1

1-1. For safe use

Before driving....28

For safe driving .....29

Seat belts....31

SRS airbags......35

Front passenger occupant classification system ....45

Exhaust gas precautions 50

1-2. Child safety

Riding with children.....51

Child restraint systems...52

1-3. Emergency assistance

Safety Connect ......67

1-4. Hybrid system

Hybrid system features ..72

Hybrid system precautions 76

1-5. Theft deterrent system

Immobilizer system .....81

Alarm....84

Before driving

Observe the following before starting off in the vehicle to ensure safety of driving.

Installing floor mats

Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.

1 Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into the floor mat eye-lets.

Diagram showing a car interior with labeled parts and a magnified inset highlighting a component with a washer.

2 Turn the upper knob of each retaining hook (clip) to secure the floor mats in place.

graph TD
    A["Circle Component"] --> B["Ring Structure"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
    note1["Arrow: Upward arrow"] --> A
    note2["A"] --> B

Always align the △marks . □

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle. This could lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

• When installing the driver's floor mat
• Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.
• Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat.
  ● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
• Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
• Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.

WARNING

Before driving

- Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor.

Diagram showing a vehicle interior with a directional arrow and a no-smoking symbol, indicating a restriction or prohibition.

With the hybrid system stopped and the shift lever in P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to make sure it does not interfere with the floor mat.

For safe driving

For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate position before driving.

Correct driving posture

C A D B

A Adjust the angle of the seat-back so that you are sitting straight up and so that you do not have to lean forward to steer. (→P.153)
B Adjust the seat so that you can depress the pedals fully and so that your arms bend slightly at the elbow when gripping the steering wheel. (→P.153)
C Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (→P.159)
D Wear the seat belt correctly. (→P.32)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

• Do not adjust the position of the driver's seat while driving. Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
• Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback. A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.
• Do not place anything under the front seats. Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
  ● Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.
• When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to feel tired. Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to continue driving and take a break immediately.

Correct use of the seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. ( P.32)

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to

properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (→P.52)

Adjusting the mirrors

Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside rear view mirror (if equipped), Digital Rear-view Mirror (if equipped) and outside rear view mirrors properly. (→P.163, 165, 174)

Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

■Wearing a seat belt

●Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
●Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including children.
Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
●To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.
- Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
●Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

■ Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P.32)

Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants, extending the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and avoiding belt contact with the rounding of the abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.

Illustration of two different positions of a person seated in seatbelt, one using a bandage and the other using a sling (no text or symbols)

■People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P.32)

■When children are in the vehicle

$$ \rightarrow \mathrm{P.60} $$

■Seat belt damage and wear

- Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door.

WARNING

• Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
• Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted. If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.
• Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
• Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer. Inappropriate handling may lead to incorrect operation.

Correct use of the seat belts

Illustration of a person sitting in a seat with a diagonal band (no text or symbols)

- Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder.

• Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.
• Adjust the position of the seatback.
  Sit up straight and well back in the seat.
• Do not twist the seat belt.

■Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.

- Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (→P.52)

- When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt, follow the instructions regarding seat belt usage. ( P.31)

■Seat belt extender

If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of charge.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt buckle being adjusted for a knot (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■ Using a seat belt extender

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

WARNING

• Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.
• Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
  ●The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.

NOTICE

■When using a seat belt extender

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

Fastening and releasing the seat belt

1 2 A

1 To fasten the seat belt, push the plate into the buckle until

a click sound is heard.

2 To release the seat belt, press the release button A

Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully.

■Automatic locking retractor (ALR)

When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold a child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more.

Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)

A 1 2

1 Push the seat belt shoulder anchor down while pressing the release button A
2 Push the seat belt shoulder anchor up while pressing the release button A

Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click.

WARNING

■Adjustable shoulder anchor

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

Seat belt pretensioners (front and outboard rear seats)

The pretensioners help the seat belts to quickly restrain the occupants by retracting the seat belts when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal collision or a vehicle roll-over.

The pretensioners do not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a minor side impact or a rear impact.

Diagram of a car interior showing multiple people seated in the backseat with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols present)

■Replacing the belt after the pre-tensioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.

WARNING

■Seat belt pretensioners

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

• Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision.
• If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Toyota dealer.

SRS airbags

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

SRS airbag system

■ Location of the SRS airbags

A B C D D A B C D E

▶ SRS front airbags

A SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag

Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components

B SRS knee airbag

Can help provide driver protection

c SRS seat cushion airbag

Can help restrain the front passenger

▶ SRS side and curtain shield airbags

D SRS side airbags

Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants

E SRS curtain shield airbags

• Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats
• Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the event of vehicle rollover

■SRS airbag system components

A B C D E F G H I J K F D E H F Q N P O N M L F G

A Front impact sensors
B "AIR BAG ON" and "AIR BAG OFF" indicator lights
C Front passenger airbag
D Side impact sensors (front door)
E Curtain shield airbags
F Seat belt pretensioners and force limiters
G Side impact sensors (front)
H Side airbags
I Seat cushion airbag
J Front passenger's seat belt buckle switch
K Driver's seat belt buckle switch
L Driver's seat position sensor
M Driver airbag

N Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors)
Knee airbag
P SRS warning light
Q Airbag sensor assembly

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram above. This information includes crash severity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.

■If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

• Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc., may be sustained from SRS airbags, due to the extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by hot gases.
  ●A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
  ● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the front seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.

●The windshield may crack.

●The hybrid system will be stopped and fuel supply to the engine will be stopped. (→P.80)

●The brakes and stop lights will be controlled automatically. (→P.370)

●The interior lights will turn on automatically. (→P.535)

●The emergency flashers will turn on automatically. (→P.634)

●For Safety Connect subscribers, if any of the following situations

occur, the system is designed to send an emergency call to the response center, notifying them of the vehicle's location (without needing to push the "SOS" button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency services. (→P.67)

- An SRS airbag is deployed.

- A seat belt pretensioner is activated.

- The vehicle is involved in a severe rear-end collision.

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)

●The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situations:

• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in which the front of the vehicle underrides, or goes under, the bed of a truck
  ●Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will activate.
  ●The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied.
  ●The SRS seat cushion airbag on the front passenger seat will not operate if the occupant is not wearing a seat belt.
  ■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
  ●The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).
  ● Both SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of a side collision on either side.
  ● Both SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of vehicle rollover.
  ●Both SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a severe frontal collision.

■Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision

The SRS front airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

●Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface
●Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
●Landing hard or falling

Diagram illustrating vehicle collision and impact on a car, showing four scenarios with collision and impact indicators.

The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situations shown in the illustration.

●The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.
●The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.

Two cartoon-style cars on a flat surface, one rolling down the ground and the other standing upright (no text or symbols)

■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)

The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS

front airbags may occur.

●Collision from the side
●Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover

Diagram illustrating vehicle collision scenarios with arrows indicating movement and damage points

■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.

• Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment
  ●Collision from the side at an angle

Diagram showing two car side profiles with arrows indicating downward motion (no text or symbols)

The SRS side airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.

●Collision from the front
- Collision from the rear
●Vehicle rollover

Diagram showing three views of a car with directional arrows indicating top, front, and side views (no text or symbols)

The SRS curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-speed frontal collision.

• Collision from the rear
  ●Pitching end over end

Diagram showing three car trajectories on a surface, illustrating dynamic movement (no text or symbols)

■When to contact your Toyota dealer

In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
●The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS front airbags to inflate.

Top-down line drawing of a car showing side and top views with curved arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

●A portion of a door or its surrounding area is damaged, deformed or has had a hole made in it, or the

vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

Top-down line drawing of a car showing front and rear views with directional arrows (no text or symbols)

●The pad section of the steering wheel, dashboard near the front passenger airbag or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

- The front passenger's seat cushion surface is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

Line drawing of a car interior showing multiple seats and seat compartments (no text or symbols)

●The surface of the seats with the SRS side airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and seat (no text or symbols)

● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the SRS curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

Line drawing of a car exterior view showing front and rear panels (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

●The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

●The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:

Since the risk zone for the driver's airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breast-bone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:

WARNING

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.

Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

- If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.

- If the seat belt extender has been connected to the front seat belt buckles but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the seat belt, the SRS front airbags will judge that the driver and front passenger are wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the SRS front airbags may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.

Illustration of a person's seatbelt with a no-smoking symbol nearby

●The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seat-back adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
- Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (→P.52)

WARNING

- Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard.

Diagram showing two scenarios of a person seated in car seats, each with a 'no' symbol indicating no prohibition.

- Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger.

Diagram showing two scenarios of a child inside a vehicle, one with a no-smoking symbol and the other with a no-smoking symbol.

• Do not allow the front seat occupants to hold items on their knees.
• Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.

Illustration of a person sitting in a car seat with a pink prohibition symbol (no text or labels)

- Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seat toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.

Illustration of a child sitting in a car seat with a 'no' symbol indicating no restriction.

- Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad and lower portion of the instrument panel. These items can become projectiles when the SRS driver, front passenger and knee air bags deploy.

Diagram of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and umbrella with no stop sign indicating no restriction

- Do not attach anything to areas such as a door, windshield, side windows, front or rear pillar, roof side rail and assist grip.

Diagram showing car safety instructions with a no-smoking symbol and directional arrows indicating movement

WARNING

- Vehicles without smart key system: Do not attach any heavy, sharp or hard objects such as keys and accessories to the key. The objects may restrict the SRS knee airbag inflation or be thrust into the driver's seat area by the force of the deploying airbag, thus causing a danger.

Diagram showing a car's seatbelt with a no-smoking symbol, indicating no vehicle use or absence.

• Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.
• If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it.

• Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags and SRS seat cushion airbag inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the SRS airbags. Such accessories may prevent the SRS side airbags and SRS seat cushion airbag from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the SRS side airbags and SRS seat cushion airbag to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

• Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components or the front doors. Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

• Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
• If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door or side window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
• If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Toyota dealer.
• Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may not deploy in the event of a collision.

WARNING

■Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.

● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS air-bags

● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars, roof side rails, front door panels, front door trims or front door speakers

● Modifications to the front door panel (such as making a hole in it)

● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment

● Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows, winches or roof luggage carrier

- Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system

● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD players

● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability

Front passenger occupant classification system

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the front passenger airbag and seat cushion airbag in the front passenger side.

System components

A B C D PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ON

A SRS warning light
B Driver's and front passenger's seat belt reminder light
C "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light
D "AIR BAG ON" indicator light

WARNING

■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

●Wear the seat belt properly.

Make sure the front passenger's seat belt plate has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.

WARNING

Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.

• Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g. seatback pocket).
• Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
• Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seat-back with their legs.

• Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.

• Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.

• If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.
• When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (→P.55)
• Do not modify or remove the front seats.
• Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the front passenger occupant classification system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

WARNING

● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks.
- Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface.
- Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
- Adjust the front passenger seat so that the head restraint does not touch the ceiling. If the head restraint is left in contact with the ceiling, the system may not detect the front passenger properly, leading to improper operation of the airbags.

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

■Adult *1

Indicators/warning lights	“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights	“AIR BAG ON”
	SRS warning light Off
	Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light	Off^*2 or flashing^*3
Devices	Front passenger airbag Activated
	Front passenger seat cushion airbag	Activated^*2 or deactivated^*3

Child *4

Indicators/warning lights	“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights	“AIR BAG OFF” or “AIR BAG ON”*4
	SRS warning light Off
	Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light	Off*2 or flashing*3
Devices	Front passenger airbag	Deactivated or activated*4
	Front passenger seat cushion airbag	Deactivated or activated*2, 4

■Child restraint system with infant *5

Indicators/warning lights	“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights	“AIR BAG OFF” *6
	SRS warning light Off
	Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light	Off*2 or flashing*3
Devices	Front passenger airbag	Deactivated
	Front passenger seat cushion airbag

Unoccupied

Indicators/warning lights	“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights	“AIR BAG OFF”
	SRS warning light	Off
	Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Devices	Front passenger airbag	Deactivated
	Front passenger seat cushion airbag

■There is a malfunction in the system

Indicators/warning lights	“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights	“AIR BAG OFF”
	SRS warning light	On
	Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Devices	Front passenger airbag	Deactivated
	Front passenger seat cushion airbag

*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique and posture.

*2: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt.

^*3 :In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

*4: For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convertible seat, the system may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors which may affect this can be the physique or posture.

*5: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (→P.55)

^*6 : In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to install the child restraint system properly. ( P.52)

Exhaust gas precautions

Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust gases if inhaled.

WARNING

Exhaust gases contain harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases to enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

■ Important points while driving

- Keep the back door closed.

- If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the back door is closed, open the side windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

When parking

- If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop the hybrid system.

- Do not leave the vehicle with the hybrid system operating for a long time. If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

- Do not leave the hybrid system operating in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the hybrid system is operating, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.

Exhaust pipe

The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.

Riding with children

Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehicle.

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt.

• It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental contact with the shift lever, wiper switch, etc.
• Use the rear door child-protector lock or the window lock switch to avoid children opening the door while driving or operating the power window accidentally. (→P.132, 178)
• Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch body parts, such as the power window, hood, back door, seats, etc.

WARNING

■When children are in the vehicle

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the side windows, the moon roof (if equipped), the panoramic moon roof (if equipped) or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

Child restraint systems

Before installing a child restraint system in the vehicle, there are precautions that need to be observed, different types of child restraint systems, as well as installation methods, etc., written in this manual.

Use a child restraint system when riding with a small child that cannot properly use a seat belt. For the child's safety, install the child restraint system to a rear seat. Be sure to follow the installation method that is in the operation manual enclosed with the restraint system.

Table of contents

Points to remember: P.52

Child restraint system: P.54

When using a child restraint system: P.55

Child restraint system installation method

• Fixed with a seat belt: P.56
• Fixed with a child restraint LATCH anchor: P.61
• Using an anchor bracket (for top tether strap): P.63

Points to remember

The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. as well as Canada now require the use of child restraint systems.

• Prioritize and observe the warnings, as well as the laws and regulations for child restraint systems.
• Use a child restraint system until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt.
• Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.

WARNING

■When a child is riding

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system which is correctly installed. For installation details, refer to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system. General installation instructions are provided in this manual.

WARNING

Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the weight and size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

- Holding a child in your or someone else's arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield or between the holder and the interior of the vehicle.

■Handling the child restraint system

If the child restraint system is not properly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving, or an accident.

- If the vehicle were to receive a strong impact from an accident, etc., it is possible that the child restraint system has damage that is not readily visible. In such cases, do not reuse the restraint system.

Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided with the child restraint system manufacturer and that the system is properly secured.

- Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.

- If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the luggage compartment.

Child restraint system

■Types of child restraint system installation methods

Confirm with the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system about the installation of the child restraint system.

Installation method Page
Seat belt attachment P.
Child restraint LATCH anchors attachment		P.61
Anchor brackets (for top tether strap) attach-ment		P.63

When using a child restraint system

■When installing a child restraint system to a front passenger seat

For the safety of a child, install a child restraint system to a rear seat. When installing the child restraint system to a front passenger seat is unavoidable, adjust the seat as follows and install the child restraint system.

• Adjust the seatback angle to the most upright position.
• Move the front seat fully rearward.
• If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. Otherwise, put the head restraint in the upper most position.

Illustration of a car seat with rotation arrows indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■When using a child restraint system

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat.

WARNING

A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. When installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, adjust the seat-back angle to the most upright position, move the seat to the rearmost position, even if the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated. If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint.

Illustration of a child seated in a car seat inside a vehicle, with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

- Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front or rear pillars, or roof side rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

Illustration of a person sitting in a car seat with a no-smoking symbol (no text or labels present)

When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder.
- Use a child restraint system suitable to the age and size of the child and install it to the rear seat.
- If the driver's seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat.

Safety instruction illustration showing passenger and child car seatbelting with no stop symbol

- Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system.

Child restraint system fixed with a seat belt

A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.

■Installing child restraint system using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)

Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation

manual enclosed with the child restraint system.

■Rear-facing — Infant seat/convertible seat

1 Adjust the rear seat.

If there is a gap between the child restraint system and the seatback, adjust the seatback angle until good contact is achieved.
2 Place the child restraint system on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt seat assembly (no text or symbols)

3 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Diagram of a car seatbelt mechanism showing a key inserted into the seat (no text or symbols present)

4 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it

in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

Diagram of a car seatbelt buckle being lifted, showing a hand holding the seat (no text or symbols present)

5 While pushing the child restraint system down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

Diagram of a car seatbelt mechanism showing two directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols present)

6 After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely. (→P.60)

■Forward-facing — Convert- ible seat

1 Adjust the seat.

When using the front passenger seat: If installing the child restraint system to the front passenger seat is unavoidable, refer to P.55 for front passenger seat adjustment.

When using the rear seat: If there is a gap between the child restraint system and the seatback, adjust the seatback angle until good contact is achieved.

2 If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. (→P.160)

Diagram of a car seat assembly with a pink upward arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

3 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

Line drawing of a car seat assembly with two seats and rear seats (no text or symbols)

4 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the

buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with a red arrow indicating the seatbelt (no text or symbols present)

5 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

Diagram of a car seatbelt buckle being lifted, showing the seat and seat area with a hand adjusting the belt (no text or symbols present)

6 While pushing the child restraint system into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to

check that it cannot be extended.

Diagram of a car backseat with two seatbelt buckle straps, one highlighted with a pink arrow (no text or symbols present)

7 If the child restraint has a top tether strap, follow the child restraint manufacturer's operation manual regarding the installation, using the top tether strap to latch onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P.63)
8 After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely. (→P.60)

■ Booster seat

1 If installing the child restraint system to the front passenger seat is unavoidable, refer to P.55 for front passenger seat adjustment.
2 High back type: If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint system, and the head restraint can be

removed, remove the head restraint. (→P.160)

Diagram of a car seatbelt mechanism with a pink upward arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols present)

3 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

▶ Booster type

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with a seatbelt resting inside, no text or symbols present

▶ High back type

Line drawing of a car backseat with seat, seats, and rear seats (no text or symbols)

4 Sit the child in the child restraint system. Fit the seat belt to the child restraint system according to the manufacturer's instructions and insert the plate into the

buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's shoulder and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (→P.31)

Line drawing of a child wearing a car seatbelt, sitting inside a vehicle (no text or symbols)

■Removing a child restraint system installed with a seat belt

Press the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.

When releasing the buckle, the child restraint system may spring up due to the rebound of the seat cushion. Release the buckle while holding down the child restraint system.

Since the seat belt automatically reels itself, slowly return it to the stowing position.

Diagram of a car seatbelt mechanism showing a highlighted grip and seat (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■When installing a child restraint system

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

• Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child's neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.
  ● Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
  ● Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure that it has been securely installed.
  ●After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
• When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder.
  ● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

WARNING

- When securing some types of child restraint systems in rear seats, it may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and low on your hips. If it does not, or if it interferes with the child restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

- When installing a child restraint system in the center rear seat, adjust both seatbacks at the same angle. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely restrained and this may cause death or serious injuries in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

■When installing a booster seat

To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to the child. (→P.33)

■ Do not use a seat belt extender

If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Child restraint system fixed with a child restraint LATCH anchor

■Child restraint LATCH anchors

LATCH anchors are provided for the outboard rear seats.

Diagram of a car seat with a magnified inset showing a mechanical component (no text or symbols present)

■When installing in the rear outboard seats

Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system.

1 Adjust the seat.

If there is a gap between the child restraint system and the seatback, adjust the seatback angle until good contact is achieved.

2 If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed,

remove the head restraint. (→P.160)

Diagram of a car seatbelt mechanism with a pink upward arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

▶ With flexible lower attachments
3 Latch the hooks of the lower attachments onto the LATCH anchors.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child

restraint system indicates A

the presence of a lower connector system.

Diagram illustrating car seatbelting instructions with labeled parts and safety symbols

▶ With rigid lower attachments
3 Latch the buckles onto the LATCH anchors.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child

restraint system indicates A the presence of a lower connector system.

Diagram illustrating car seatbelting instructions with labeled parts and safety symbols

4 If the child restraint has a top tether strap, follow the child restraint manufacturer's operation manual regarding the installation, using the top tether strap to latch onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P.63)
5 After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely. (→P.60)

■When installing in the rear center seat

There are no LATCH anchors behind the rear center seat. However, the inboard LATCH anchors of the outboard seats, which are 17.3 in. (440 mm) apart, can be used if the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions permit use of those anchors with the anchor spacing stated.

Child restraint systems with rigid lower attachments cannot be installed in the center seat. This type of child restraint system can only be installed in the out-board seat.

■Laws and regulations pertaining to anchors

The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2. Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used. This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE J1819.

WARNING

■When installing a child restraint system

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

- When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system.

● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.
● Never attach two child restraint system attachments to the same anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child restraint system attachments and may break. If the LATCH anchors are already in use, use the seat belt to install a child restraint system in the center seat.

- When securing some types of child restraint systems in rear seats, it may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and low on your hips. If it does not, or if it interferes with the child restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

- If the seat is adjusted, reconfirm the security of the child restraint system.

Using an anchor bracket (for top tether strap)

■ Anchor brackets (for top tether strap)

Anchor brackets are provided for each rear seat.

Use anchor brackets when fixing the top tether strap.

▶ Outboard rear seats

TOP-TETHER A B

A Anchor brackets
B Top tether strap
▶ Center rear seat

TOP-TETHER CENTER SEAT A B

A Anchor bracket
B Top tether strap

■Fixing the top tether strap to the anchor bracket

Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system.

▶ Outboard rear seats
1 Remove the head restraint. (→P.160)

Illustration of a car seatbelt with a pink upward arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

2 Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched. (→P.60)

B A

A Hook
B Top tether strap

3 If the head restraint does not interfere with the child

restraint system installation, install the head restraint.

Illustration of a pink downward arrow pointing to a gray electronic component on a bed (no text or symbols)

▶ Center rear seat

1 Adjust the head restraint to the upmost position.

If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint system, and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. (→P.160)

Diagram showing a vehicle's seatbelt mechanism with an upward arrow, no text or symbols present

2 Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched.

When installing the child restraint system with the head restraint being raised, be sure to have the top tether strap pass underneath the head restraint.

B A

A Hook

B Top tether strap

■Laws and regulations pertaining to anchors

The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.

Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.

This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE J1819.

WARNING

■When installing a child restraint system

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Firmly attach the top tether strap and make sure that the belt is not twisted.

- Do not attach the top tether strap to anything other than the anchor bracket.

●After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.

● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

WARNING

● Center rear seat: When installing the child restraint system with the head restraint being raised, after the head restraint has been raised and then the anchor bracket has been fixed, do not lower the head restraint.

Safety Connect\*

*: If equipped

Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Connect is supported by Toyota's designated response center, which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.

Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equipped vehicles.

By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and Conditions, as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is available at Toyota.com in the United States, Toyotapr.com in Puerto Rico and Toyota.ca in Canada. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such then-applicable Terms and Conditions.

System components

A B C

A Microphone
B "SOS" button
C LED light indicators

■Certification for the Safety Connect

FCC ID: BEJTL19BNN

IC: 2703H-TL19BNN

FCC/IC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacture could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This equipment complies with IC RSS-102 radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled environment.

The antennas used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of least 20cm from all persons.

FCC/IC AVERTISSEMENT:

Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:

● Automatic Collision Notification*

Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service providers. (→P.70)

*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2

● Stolen Vehicle Location

Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (→P.70)

● Emergency Assistance Button

("SOS")

Connects drivers to response-center support. ( P.70)

● Enhanced Roadside Assistance

Provides drivers various on-road assistance. ( P.71)

Subscription

After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services.

A variety of subscription terms are available for purchase. Contact your Toyota dealer, call the following appropriate Customer Experience Center or push the "SOS" button in your vehicle for further subscription details.

● The United States

1-800-331-4331

- Canada

1-888-869-6828

- Puerto Rico

1-877-855-8377

■Safety Connect Services Information

- Phone calls using the vehicle's Bluetooth® technology will not be possible when Safety Connect is active and in use.

●Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Toyota models (in the contiguous United States only). Contact with the Safety Connect response center

is dependent upon the telematics device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or receive emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service Agreement are required. A variety of subscription terms are available; charges vary by subscription term selected and location.

●Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle Location are available in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, Puerto Rico and Canada, and Enhanced Roadside Assistance are available in the United States, Puerto Rico and Canada.

●Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance, Stolen Vehicle and Enhanced Road Assistance are not available in the U.S. Virgin Islands. For vehicles first sold in the U.S. Virgin Islands, no Safety Connect services will function in or outside the U.S. Virgin Islands.

●Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications Act and the device is not TTY compatible.

Languages

The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English, Spanish, and French. Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling.

■When contacting the response center

You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.

Safety Connect LED light Indicators

When the power switch is turned to ON, the red indicator light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indicator light comes on, indicating that the service is active.

The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage conditions:

● Green indicator light on = Active service
● Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process
- Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction (contact your Toyota dealer)
- No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active

Safety Connect services

■Automatic Collision Notification

In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to automatically call the response center. The responding agent receives the vehicle's location and attempts to speak with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services provider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent to the location.

■Stolen Vehicle Location

If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a police report, call the Customer Experience Center at 1-800-331-4331 in the United States, 1-877-855-8377 in Puerto Rico or 1-888-869-6828 in Canada, and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service.

In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle. Further information is available at Toyota.com in the United States, Toyotapr.com in Puerto Rico and Toyota.ca in Canada.

Emergency Assistance Button ("SOS")

In the event of an emergency on the road, push the "SOS" button to reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will determine your vehi-

cle's location, assess the emergency, and dispatch the necessary assistance required.

If you accidentally press the "SOS" button, tell the response-center agent that you are not experiencing an emergency.

■Enhanced Roadside Assistance

Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already included warranty-based Toyota roadside service.

Subscribers can press the "SOS" button to reach a Safety Connect response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Enhanced Roadside Assistance services and their limitations, please see the Safety Connect Terms and Conditions, which are available at Toyota.com in the United States, Toyotapr.com in Puerto Rico and Toyota.ca in Canada.

Safety information for Safety Connect

Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.

■Exposure to radio frequency signals

The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.

In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies.

● ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
● NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement) Report 86 [1986]
- ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) [1996]

Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and industries reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard (C95.1).

The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to those standards.

Hybrid system features

Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics different from conventional vehicles. Be sure you are closely familiar with the characteristics of your vehicle, and operate it with care.

The hybrid system combines the use of a gasoline engine and an electric motor (traction motor) according to driving conditions, improving fuel efficiency and reducing exhaust emissions.

System components

A B C

The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual item.

A Gasoline engine
B Front electric motor (traction motor)
C Rear electric motor (traction motor)

■When stopped/during start off

The gasoline engine stops* when the vehicle is stopped. During start off, the electric motor (traction motor) drives the vehicle. At slow speeds or when

traveling down a gentle slope, the engine is stopped* and the electric motor (traction motor) is used.

When the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) is not being charged.

*: When the hybrid battery (traction battery) requires charging or the engine is warming up, etc., the gasoline engine will not automatically stop. (→P.73)

■During normal driving

The gasoline engine is predominantly used. The electric motor (traction motor) charges the hybrid battery (traction battery) as necessary.

■When accelerating sharply

When the accelerator pedal is depressed heavily, the power of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is added to that of the gasoline engine via the electric motor (traction motor).

■When braking (regenerative braking)

The wheels operate the electric motor (traction motor) as a power generator, and the hybrid battery (traction battery) is charged.

■Regenerative braking

In the following situations, kinetic energy is converted to electric energy and deceleration force can be obtained in conjunction with the recharging of the hybrid battery (traction battery).

●The accelerator pedal is released while driving with the shift lever in D or S.
●The brake pedal is depressed while driving with the shift lever in D or S.

■EV indicator

The EV indicator comes on when the vehicle is driven using only the electric motor (traction motor) or the gasoline engine is stopped.

The on/off operation of the EV indicator can be changed. (→P.109)

EV

■ Conditions in which the gaso- line engine may not stop

The gasoline engine starts and stops automatically. However, it may not stop automatically in the following conditions*:

●During gasoline engine warm-up
● During hybrid battery (traction battery) charging
- When the temperature of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is high or low
- When the heater is switched on
*: Depending on the circumstances, the gasoline engine may also not stop automatically in other situations.

■ Charging the hybrid battery (traction battery)

As the gasoline engine charges the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery does not need to be charged from an outside source. However, if the vehicle is left parked for a long time the hybrid battery (traction battery) will slowly discharge. For this reason, be sure to drive the vehicle at least once every few months for at least 30 minutes or 10 miles (16 km). If the hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes fully discharged and you are unable to start the hybrid system, contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Charging the 12-volt battery

→P.674

■ After the 12-volt battery has discharged or when the terminal has been removed and installed during replace, etc.

The gasoline engine may not stop even if the vehicle is being driven by the hybrid battery (traction battery). If this continues for a few days, contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle

There may be no engine sound or vibration even though the vehicle is able to move with the “READY” indicator is illuminated. For safety, make sure to shift the shift lever to P and apply the parking brake when parked.

The following sounds or vibrations may occur when the hybrid system is operating and are not a malfunction:

●Motor sounds may be heard from the engine compartment.
● Sounds may be heard from the hybrid battery (traction battery) under the rear seats when the hybrid system starts or stops.
- Relay operating sounds such as a snap or soft clank will be emitted from the hybrid battery (traction battery), under the rear seats, when the hybrid system is started or stopped.
● Sounds from the hybrid system may be heard when the back door is open.
● Sounds may be heard from the transmission when the gasoline engine starts or stops, when driving at low speeds, or during idling.
●Engine sounds may be heard when accelerating sharply.
● Sounds may be heard due to regenerative braking when the brake pedal is depressed or as the accelerator pedal is released.

●Vibration may be felt when the gasoline engine starts or stops.
●Cooling fan sounds may be heard from the air intake vent under the rear seat.
■ Maintenance, repair, recycling, and disposal
Contact your Toyota dealer regarding maintenance, repair, recycling and disposal. Do not dispose of the vehicle yourself.

Vehicle proximity notification system

When driving with the gasoline engine stopped, a sound, which changes in accordance with the driving speed, will be played in order to warn people nearby of the vehicle's approach. The sound will stop when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 22 mph (35 km/h).

■ Vehicle proximity notification system

In the following cases, the vehicle proximity notification system may be difficult for surrounding people to hear.

In very noisy areas
●In the wind or the rain

Also, as the vehicle proximity notification system is installed on the front of the vehicle, it may be more difficult to hear from the rear of the vehicle compared to the front.

If “Proximity Notification System Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” is displayed on the multi-information display

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Predictive efficient drive (vehicles with navigation system)\*

*: This function can only be used in the mainland U.S.A. It cannot be used in other states and territories, including Alaska and Hawaii.

This system operates based on the driving situation and traffic information to enhance fuel economy.

For details about Predictive efficient drive, refer to "NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

■Predictive deceleration support

- When the vehicle approaches to predictive deceleration support points registered in the navigation system, the “Reference operation range” (A) of the ECO Accelerator Guidance (→P.105) on the multi-information display will be turned off to encourage the driver to reduce excessive acceleration.

graph TD
    A["A"] --> B["Eco Zone"]
    B --> C["Eco Zone"]

● The engine braking force will

be increased according to the driving conditions to more efficiently charge the hybrid battery (traction battery) after the accelerator pedal is released.

■Predictive SOC control

The following types of control are performed based on data such as road and traffic information during route guidance by the navigation system to help ensure that the vehicle efficiently uses electricity.

• When there is a long downhill slope along the route, the system reduces the hybrid battery (traction battery) level before reaching the slope to help ensure charging capacity for regenerative braking while traveling downhill.
• When traffic congestion is predicted along the route, the system helps ensure a certain battery level before reaching congested roads to reduce the frequency of starting the engine to charge the hybrid battery (traction battery) due to low battery levels.

Hybrid system precautions

Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it is a high voltage system (about 650V at maximum) as well as contains parts that become extremely hot when the hybrid system is operating. Obey the warning labels attached to the vehicle.

System components

A WARNING 警告 AVERTISSEMENT OCTOPOЖНО HIGH VOLTAGE INSIDE 内部高电压 内部高电压 HAUTE TENSION A LINTEREUR BICOKOE HAPRAJNME BHUTRI DO NOT remove these covers and/or connectors. このカバーおよびコネクタは絶対に取りはずさないでください. 不要断型送类電子和/或连接器。 NE PAS enlever ces couvercles et connecteurs. не убирайте эти комплия и/или коннекторы. B H G F E D C

The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual item.

A Warning label
B Service plug
C Rear electric motor (traction motor)
D Hybrid battery (traction battery)
E High voltage cables (orange)
F Front electric motor (traction motor)
G Power control unit
H Air conditioning compressor

Running out of fuel

When the vehicle has run out of fuel and the hybrid system cannot be started, refuel the vehicle with at least enough gasoline to make the low fuel level warning light ( P.649) go off. If there is only a small amount of fuel, the hybrid system may not be able to start. (The standard amount of fuel is about 2.3 gal. [8.8 L, 1.9 Imp.gal.], when the vehicle is on a level surface. This value may vary when the vehicle is on a slope. Add extra fuel when the vehicle is inclined.)

Electromagnetic waves

● High voltage parts and cables on hybrid vehicles incorporate electromagnetic shielding, and therefore emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances.

- Your vehicle may cause sound interference in some third party-produced radio parts.

■Hybrid battery (traction battery)

The hybrid battery (traction battery) has a limited service life. The lifespan of the hybrid battery (traction battery) can change in accordance with driving style and driving conditions.

■ Starting the hybrid system in an extremely cold environment

When the hybrid battery (traction battery) is extremely cold (below approximately -22^ [-30^] ) under the influence of the outside temperature, it may not be possible to start the hybrid system. In this case, try to start the hybrid system again after the temperature of the hybrid battery increases due to the outside temperature increase etc.

WARNING

■High voltage precautions

This vehicle has high voltage DC and AC systems as well as a 12-volt system. DC and AC high voltage is very dangerous and can cause severe burns and electric shock that may result in death or serious injury.

● Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace the high voltage parts, cables or their connectors.

●The hybrid system will become hot after starting as the system uses high voltage. Be careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature, and always obey the warning labels attached to the vehicle.

● Never try to open the service plug access hole located underneath the rear seats. The service plug is used only when the vehicle is serviced and is subject to high voltage.

Diagram showing a car interior with a mounted device and a close-up view of the internal components (no text or symbols)

■Road accident cautions

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury:

● Pull your vehicle off the road, shift the shift lever to P, apply the parking brake, and turn the hybrid system off.

- Do not touch the high voltage parts, cables and connectors.

WARNING

• If electric wires are exposed inside or outside your vehicle, an electric shock may occur. Never touch exposed electric wires.
• If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle, leave the vehicle as soon as possible. Never use a fire extinguisher that is not meant for electric fires. Using even a small amount of water may be dangerous.
• If your vehicle needs to be towed, do so with four wheels raised. If the wheels connected to the electric motor (traction motor) are on the ground when towing, the motor may continue to generate electricity. This may cause a fire. ( P.637)
  Carefully inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that liquid has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system may have been damaged. Leave the vehicle as soon as possible.
  ▶ AXAH54L models*
• If a fluid leak occurs, do not touch the fluid as it may be strong alkaline electrolyte from the hybrid battery (traction battery). If it comes into contact with your skin or eyes, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water or, if possible, boric acid solution. Seek immediate medical attention.
  *: The model code is indicated on the Certification Regulation Label. (→P.684)

AXAL54L models*

• Do not touch the battery if liquid is leaking from or adhering to it. If electrolyte (carbonic-based organic electrolyte) from the hybrid battery (traction battery) comes into contact with the eyes or skin, it could cause blindness or skin wounds. In the unlikely event that it comes into contact with the eyes or skin, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water, and seek immediate medical attention.
• If electrolyte is leaking from the hybrid battery (traction battery), do not approach the vehicle. Even in the unlikely event that the hybrid battery (traction battery) is damaged, the internal construction of the battery will prevent a large amount of electrolyte from leaking out. However, any electrolyte that does leak out will give off a vapor. This vapor is an irritant to skin and eyes and could cause acute poisoning if inhaled.
• Do not bring burning or high-temperature items close to the electrolyte. The electrolyte may ignite and cause a fire.
  *: The model code is indicated on the Certification Regulation Label. (→P.684)
  ■ Hybrid battery (traction battery)
  ●AXAL54L models*: Your vehicle contains a sealed lithium-ion battery.
  *: The model code is indicated on the Certification Regulation Label. (→P.684)

WARNING

- Never resell, hand over or modify the hybrid battery. To prevent accidents, hybrid batteries that have been removed from a disposed vehicle are collected through Toyota dealer. Do not dispose of the battery yourself.

Unless the battery is properly collected, the following may occur, resulting in death or serious injury:

• The hybrid battery may be illegally disposed of or dumped, and it is hazardous to the environment or someone may touch a high voltage part, resulting in an electric shock.
• The hybrid battery is intended to be used exclusively with your hybrid vehicle. If the hybrid battery is used outside of your vehicle or modified in any way, accidents such as electric shock, heat generation, smoke generation, an explosion and electrolyte leakage may occur.

When reselling or handing over your vehicle, the possibility of an accident is extremely high because the person receiving the vehicle may not be aware of these dangers.

- If your vehicle is disposed of without the hybrid battery having been removed, there is a danger of serious electric shock if high voltage parts, cables and their connectors are touched. In the event that your vehicle must be disposed of, the hybrid battery must be disposed of by your Toyota dealer or a qualified service shop. If the hybrid battery is not disposed of properly, it may cause electric shock that can result in death or serious injury.

Hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vent

There is an air intake vent under the right side of the rear seat for the purpose of cooling the hybrid battery (traction battery). If the vent is blocked, charging/discharging of the hybrid battery (traction battery) may become limited.

Line drawing of a car interior showing the front and side views of a vehicle (no text or symbols)

NOTICE

■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vent
- Make sure not to block the air intake vent with anything, such as a seat cover, plastic cover, or luggage. If the vent is blocked, the charging/discharging of the hybrid battery (traction battery) may become limited.
- When dust etc. has accumulated in the air intake vent, clean it with a vacuum cleaner to prevent the vent from clogging.
- Clean the air intake vent regularly to prevent the charging/discharging of the hybrid battery (traction battery) from being restricted.

NOTICE

• Do not get water or foreign materials in the air intake vent as this may cause a short circuit and damage the hybrid battery (traction battery).
• Do not carry large amounts of water such as water cooler bottles in the vehicle. If water spills onto the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery may be damaged. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
  There is a filter installed to the air intake vent. When the filter remains noticeably dirty even after cleaning the air intake vent, filter cleaning or replacement is recommended. For information regarding filter cleaning or replacement, refer to P.611.
• If “Maintenance Required for Traction Battery Cooling Parts See Owner’s Manual” is shown on the multi-information display, the air intake vent and filter may be clogged. Refer to P.611for information on how to clean the air intake vent.

Emergency shut off sys- tem

When a certain level of impact is detected by the impact sensor, the emergency shut off system blocks the high voltage current and stops the fuel pump to minimize the risk of electrocution and fuel leakage. If the emergency shut off system activates, your vehicle will not restart. To restart the hybrid system, contact your Toyota dealer.

Hybrid warning message

A message is automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in the hybrid system or an improper operation is attempted.

If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

If a warning light comes on, a warning message is displayed, or the 12-volt battery is disconnected

The hybrid system may not start. In this case, try to start the system again. If the “READY” indicator does not come on, contact your Toyota dealer.

Immobilizer system

The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the hybrid system from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's on-board computer.

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.

Operating the system

▶ Vehicles without smart key system

The indicator light flashes after the key has been removed from the power switch to indicate that the system is operating. The indicator light goes off after the registered key has been inserted into the power switch to indicate that the system has been canceled.

Diagram showing car interior with dashboard, steering wheel, and lock icon labeled in Chinese

▶ Vehicles with smart key system

The indicator light flashes after the power switch has been turned to OFF to indicate that the system is operating. The indicator light goes off after the power switch has been turned to ACC or ON to indicate that the system has been canceled.

Diagram showing car interior with steering wheel, dashboard, and lock icon labeled in Chinese

System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system.

■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction

• If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
• If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle

■Certification for the immobilizer system

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, American Samoa, Guam, Saipan and Puerto Rico

FCC ID:MOZRI-57BTY

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-3

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

■To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

Alarm

*: If equipped

The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is detected.

The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set:

• Vehicles without smart key system: A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the wireless remote control or key. (The doors will lock again automatically.)
• Vehicles with smart key system: A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry function, wireless remote control or mechanical key. (The doors will lock again automatically.)
  ● The hood is opened.

Setting/canceling/stop- ping the alarm system

■Items to check before locking the vehicle

To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following:

• Nobody is in the vehicle.
  ● The side windows and moon roof (if equipped) or pan-

oramic moon roof (if equipped) are closed before the alarm is set.

- No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.

Setting

Close the doors and hood, and lock all the doors. The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds.

The security indicator changes from being on to flashing when the system is set.

Diagram showing a car interior with a lock icon and a speech bubble pointing to the lock symbol.

■Canceling or stopping

Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm:

• Unlock the doors.
• Turn the power switch to ACC or ON, or start the hybrid system. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)

System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.

■Triggering of the alarm

The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:

(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)

● A person inside the vehicle opens a door or hood, or unlocks the vehicle using an inside lock button.

Line drawing of a car door open showing a person inside (no text or symbols)

●The 12-volt battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked. (→P.672)

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with hands inserting a component (no text or symbols)

■Alarm-operated door lock

In the following cases, depending on the situation, the door may automatically lock to prevent improper entry into the vehicle:

• When a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door and the alarm is activated.
  ●While the alarm is activated, a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door.
• When recharging or replacing the 12-volt battery.

■Customization (Canada only)

The alarm can be set to activate when the key (vehicles without smart key system) or mechanical key (vehicles with smart key system) is used to unlock. (Customizable features: →P.707)

NOTICE

■To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

2

2-1. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators 88

Gauges and meters (with 4.2-inch display)....94

Gauges and meters (with 7-inch display) .....98

Multi-information display 103

Energy monitor/consumption screen.... 113

Warning lights and indicators

The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster, center panel and outside rear view mirrors inform the driver of the status of the vehicle's various systems.

Instrument cluster

For the purpose of explanation, the following illustrations display all warning lights and indicators illuminated.

■With 4.2-inch display

READY RSTM RCTA POT OFF OFF SET REAR PARK ABS HOLD BRAKE (H) HOLD #D

The units used on the meters and some indicators may differ depending on the target region.

■With 7-inch display

The display of the speedometer can be selected from two types, analog or digital. ( P.109)

When analog speedometer is displayed

ABS BRAKE PARK SET OFF CHANGE MODE ECO BEANS RECTA BSM OFF OFF OFF HOLD HOLD

The units used on the meters and some indicators may differ depending on the target region.

When digital speedometer is displayed

ABS BRAKE PARK SET ECO EV MODE BEAVY REAR BSM RCTA OFF HOLD

The units used on the meters and some indicators may differ depending on the target region.

Warning lights

Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle's systems.

(U.S.A.)

Brake system warning light ^*1 (→P.642)

(Canada) (Red)

Brake system warning light ^*1 (→P.642)

(Yellow)

Brake system warning light ^*1 (→P.642)

Charging syste warning light*1 (→P.642)

High coolant temperature warning light ^*2 (→P.643)

Hybrid system over- heat warning light ^*2 (→P.643)

Low engine oil pressure warning light ^*2 (→P.643)

(U.S.A.)

Malfunction indicator lamp ^*1 (→P.643)

(Canada)

Malfunction indicator lamp ^*1 (→P.643)

SRS warning light ^*1 (→P.644)

(U.S.A.)

ABS warning light ^*1 (→P.644)

(Canada)

ABS warning light ^*1 (→P.644)

(Red/yellow)
Electric power steering system warning light ^*1 (→P.644)

(Flashes or illuminates)

PCS warning light ^*1 (→P.645)

(Orange)

LTA indicator ( P.645)

(Flashes)

(Flashes)

(Flashes)

(Flashes)

(U.S.A.) (Flashes)

(Canada) (Flashes)

Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator ^*3 (if equipped) ( P.646)

PKSB OFF indicator ^*1 (if equipped) ( P.646)

RCTA OFF indicator ^*1 (if equipped) ( P.647)

Slip indicator light ^*1 (→P.647)

Brake Override System/Drive-Start Control/PKSB (if equipped) warning light ^*2 (→P.648)

Brake hold operated indicator ^*1 (→P.648)

Parking brake indicator (→P.648)

Parking brake indicator (→P.648)

Tire pressure warning light ^*1 (if equipped) ( P.649)

Low fuel level warning light ( P.649)

Driver's and front passenger's seat belt reminder light (→P.649)

Rear passengers' seat belt reminder lights (if equipped) (→P.650)

*1: These lights turn on when the power switch is turned to ON to

indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the light does not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

*2: This light illuminates on the multi-information display with a message.

*3:Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator turns on when the power switch is turned to ON while the Intuitive parking assist function is on. It will turn off after a few seconds.

WARNING

If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on when you start the hybrid system, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if this occurs.

Indicators

The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle's various systems.

Turn signal indicator ( P.223)

Headlight indicator ( P.229)

(U.S.A.)

Tail light indicator ( P.229)

(Canada)

Headlight high beam indicator ( P.232)

Automatic High Beam indicator ( P.232)

Fog light indicator (if equipped) ( P.235)

Smart key system indicator ^*1 (if equipped) ( P.212)

Cruise control indicator ( P.271)

Dynamic radar cruise control indicator ( P.271)

Cruise control "SET" indicator ( P.271)

LTA indicator ^*2 (→P.263)

Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator ^*3,4 (if equipped) ( P.293)

PKSB OFF indicator ^*3,5 (if equipped) ( P.299)

Slip indicator light ^*5 (→P.370)

VSC OFF indicator ^3,5 (→P.370)

PCS warning light ^*3,5 (→P.252)

BSM outside rear view mirror indicators ^*5,6 (if equipped) ( P.283)

BSM indicator (if equipped) ( P.283)

RCTA OFF indicator ^*3,5 (if equipped) ( P.283)

Brake hold standby indicator ^*5 (→P.227)

Brake hold operated indicator ^*5 (→P.227)

Security indicator ( P.81, 84)

"READY" indicator (→P.210, 212)

Low outside temperature indicator ^*7 (→P.95, 101)

EV indicator ( P.73)

Parking brake indicator ( P.224)

(U.S.A.)

Parking brake indicator ( P.224)

(Canada)

EV drive mode indicator ( P.217)

Eco drive mode indicator ( P.366)

Sport mode indicator ( P.366)

Trail Mode indicator ( P.367)

"AIR BAG ON/OFF" indicator*5,8 (→P.45)

*1: This light illuminates on the multi-information display with a message.
*2: Depending on the operating conditions of the system, the color and state (illuminated/blinking) of the indicator change.
*3: The light comes on when the system is turned off.
*4:Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator turns on when the power switch is turned to ON while the Intuitive parking assist function is on. It will turn off after a few seconds.
*5: These lights turn on when the power switch is turned to ON to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not turn on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
*6: This light illuminates on the outside rear view mirrors.
*7: When the outside temperature is approximately 37^ F (3°C) or lower, the indicator will flash for approximately 10 seconds, then stay on.
*8: This light illuminates on the center panel.

■BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) outside rear view mirror indicators (if equipped)

In order to confirm operation, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators illuminate in the following situations:

- When the power switch is turned to ON while the BSM function is

enabled on the screen of the multi-information display.

●When the BSM function is

enabled on the screen of the multi-information display while the power switch is in ON.

If the system is functioning correctly, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators will turn off after a few seconds.

If the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators do not illuminate or do not turn off, there may be a malfunction in the system. If this occurs, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Gauges and meters (with 4.2-inch display)

The meters display various drive information.

Meter display

A B C D E 68°F 12:00 P 000 1000ml I H G F

The units used on the meter and display may differ depending on the target region.

A Hybrid System Indicator

Displays the Hybrid System Indicator ( P.95)

B Outside temperature ( P.95)

C Clock ( P.97)

D Multi-information display

Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data ( P.103)

Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs ( P.654)

E Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed

F Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

G Odometer and trip meter

Odometer:

Displays the total distance that the vehicle has been driven

Trip meter:

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last

reset. Trip meters "A" and "B" can be used to record and display different distances independently.

H Shift position and shift range indicator

Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range ( P.219)

☐ Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature

■The meters and display illuminate when

The power switch is in ON.

Hybrid System Indicator

A B C D E PWR CHG OFF A B C ECO D

A READY OFF area

Shows that the hybrid system is not operating.

B Charge area

Shows regeneration* status.

Regenerated energy will be used to charge the hybrid battery (traction battery).

C Hybrid Eco area

Shows that gasoline engine power is not being used very often.

The gasoline engine will automatically stop and restart under various conditions.

D Eco area

Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an Eco-friendly manner.

By keeping the indicator needle within Eco area, more Eco-friendly driving can be achieved.

E Power area

Shows that an Eco-friendly driving range is being exceeded (during full power driving etc.)

*: When used in this manual, "regeneration" refers to the conversion of energy created by the movement of the vehicle into electrical energy.

In the following situation, the Hybrid System Indicator does not operate.

●“READY” indicator is not illumi-

nated.

● The shift lever is in a range other than D or S.

■Outside temperature display

- In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change.

- When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])

- When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)

- When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

●Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40^ ( -40^ ) to 122^ ( 50^ ).

- When the outside temperature is approximately 37^ F ( 3^ C) or lower, the indicator will flash for approximately 10 seconds, then stay on.

■Liquid crystal display

→P.104

WARNING

■The information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

For example, there is a lag between the driver's shifting and the new shift range appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or injury.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the engine and its components

The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red zone ("H"). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (→P.677)

Using the "ODO TRIP" switch

Switches the items of the odometer, trip meter A and trip meter B by pressing the "ODO TRIP" switch.

When the trip meter is dis- played, pressing and holding the switch will reset the trip meter.

Diagram showing a hand pointing to a device with a magnified inset highlighting the finger location.

Instrument panel light control

The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted by turning the dial.

1 2

1 Brighter
2 Darker

■Instrument panel brightness adjustment

The instrument panel brightness levels when the tail lights are on and off can be adjusted individually. However, when the surroundings are bright (daytime, etc.), turning on the tail lights will not change the instrument panel brightness.

Adjusting the clock

The clock can be adjusted on the audio system screen.

▶ Vehicles with Audio
→P.427
▶ Vehicles with Audio Plus or Premium Audio
Refer to "NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

Gauges and meters (with 7-inch display)

The meters display various drive information.

Meter display

The display of the speedometer can be selected from two types, analog or digital. ( P.109)

▶ Analog speedometer

A B C D 12:00 MPH 0km/h P 68°F 0DO 1000 ml I H G F E

The units used on the meter and display may differ depending on the target region.

A Hybrid System Indicator

Displays the Hybrid System Indicator ( P.100)

B Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed

C Clock (→P.102)

D Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

E Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature

F Odometer and trip meter

Odometer:

Displays the total distance that the vehicle has been driven

Trip meter:

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different distances independently.

G Outside temperature ( P.101)
H Multi-information display

Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data ( P.103)

Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs ( P.654)

I Shift position and shift range indicator

Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range ( P.219)

▶ Digital speedometer

A B C D 0 MPN 0 km/h 12:00 P 68°F ODD 1000 nl I H G F E

The units used on the meter and display may differ depending on the target region.

A Hybrid System Indicator

Displays the Hybrid System Indicator ( P.100)

B Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed

C Clock ( P.102)

D Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

E Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature

F Odometer and trip meter

Odometer:

Displays the total distance that the vehicle has been driven

Trip meter:

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different distances independently.

G Outside temperature ( P.95)

H Multi-information display

Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data ( P.103)

Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs ( P.654)

I Shift position and shift range indicator

Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range ( P.219)

■The meters and display illuminate when

The power switch is in ON.

■When changing driving mode

Speedometer color is changed following the selected driving mode or when Trail Mode is turned on. (→P.366, 367)

Hybrid System Indicator

graph TD
    A["A"] --> B["B"]
    B --> C["C"]
    C --> D["D"]
    D --> E["E"]
    E --> F["PWR"]
    F --> G["ECO"]
    G --> H["CHG"]
    H --> I["OFF"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

A READY OFF area

Shows that the hybrid system is not operating.

B Charge area

Shows regeneration ^* status. Regenerated energy will be used to charge the hybrid battery (traction battery).

C Hybrid Eco area

Shows that gasoline engine power

is not being used very often.

The gasoline engine will automatically stop and restart under various conditions.

D Eco area

Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an Eco-friendly manner.

By keeping the indicator needle within Eco area, more Eco-friendly driving can be achieved.

E Power area

Shows that an Eco-friendly driving range is being exceeded (during full power driving etc.)

*: When used in this manual, “regeneration” refers to the conversion of energy created by the movement of the vehicle into electrical energy.

In the following situation, the Hybrid System Indicator does not operate.

●“READY” indicator is not illuminated.
● The shift lever is in a range other than D or S.

■ Outside temperature display

● In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change.

• When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
• When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)

- When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

●Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40^ ( -40^ ) to 122^ ( 50^ ).

- When the outside temperature is approximately 37^ F (3°C) or lower, the indicator will flash for approximately 10 seconds, then stay on.

■Liquid crystal display

→P.104

Customization

Settings (e. g. meter display) can be changed on the screen of the multi-information display. (→P.109)

WARNING

■The information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

For example, there is a lag between the driver's shifting and the new shift range appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or injury.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the engine and its components

The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red zone ("H"). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (→P.677)

Using the "ODO TRIP" switch

Switches the items of the odometer, trip meter A and trip meter B by pressing the "ODO TRIP" switch.

When the trip meter is dis- played, pressing and holding the switch will reset the trip meter.

Diagram showing a device with a magnified inset highlighting a specific component, likely for instructional or diagnostic purposes.

Instrument panel light control

The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted by turning the dial.

1 2

1 Brighter
2 Darker

■Instrument panel brightness adjustment

The instrument panel brightness levels when the tail lights are on and off can be adjusted individually. However, when the surroundings are bright (daytime, etc.), turning on the tail lights will not change the instrument panel brightness.

Adjusting the clock

The clock can be adjusted on the audio system screen.

▶ Vehicles with Audio
→P.427
▶ Vehicles with Audio Plus or Premium Audio
Refer to "NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

Multi-information display

The multi-information display is used to display fuel efficiency related information and various types of driving-related information. The multi-information display can also be used to change the display settings and other settings.

Display contents

Following information is dis- played on the multi-information display.

■Vehicles with 4.2-inch display

Diagram showing car interior with steering wheel, dashboard, and control panel labeled A, B, C

A Driving support system information

Displays recognized signs while the RSA system (if equipped) is operating. ( P.268)

Displays an image when the following systems are operating and a

menu icon other than selected:

• LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

(→P.258)

- Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range (→P.271)

B Menu icons (→P.104)

C Information display area

A variety of information can be displayed by selecting a menu icon.

Additionally, warning or suggestion/advice pop-up displays will be displayed in some situations.

■Vehicles with 7-inch display

A B C

A Driving support system information

Displays recognized signs while the RSA system (if equipped) is operating. (→P.268)

Displays an image when the following systems are operating and a

menu icon other than selected:

• LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (→P.258)

- Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range (→P.271)

B Information display area

A variety of information can be displayed by selecting a menu icon.

Additionally, warning or suggestion/advice pop-up displays will be displayed in some situations.

C Menu icons (→P.104)

■The multi-information display is displayed when

The power switch is in ON.

■When changing driving mode

Background color of the multi-information display is changed following the selected driving mode or when Trail Mode is turned on. (→P.366, 367)

■Liquid crystal display

Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.

Changing the display

The multi-information display is operated using the meter control switches.

A B C OK D

A Scroll the screen*/switch the display*/move the cursor
B Press: Enter/Set Press and hold: Reset/Display customizable items
C Return to the previous screen
D Call sending/receiving and history display (if equipped) Linked with the hands-free system, sending or receiving

call is displayed. For details regarding the hands-free system, refer to P.479(vehicles with Audio) or "NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL" (vehicles with Audio Plus or Premium Audio).

*: On screens where the screen can be scrolled and the display can be switched, a scroll bar or a round icon that shows the number of registered screens is displayed.

WARNING

■Caution for use while driving

For safety, avoid operating the meter control switch while driving as much as possible, and do not look continuously at the multi-information display while driving. Stop the vehicle and operate the meter control switch. Failure to do so may cause a steering wheel operation error, resulting in an unexpected accident.

Menu icons

Information related to each icon can be displayed by selecting the icon with the meter control switches.

Some of the information may be displayed automatically depending on the situation.

Icon Display
	Driving information display (→P.105)
	Driving support system information display (→P.107)
[YASK]	Audio system-linked display (if equipped) (→P.107)
	Vehicle information display (→P.108)
[2CKA]	Settings display (→P.109)
	Warning message display (→P.112)

Driving information dis- play

Select to display fuel consumption data in various forms.

■Speedometer display/Distance to empty (4.2-inch display)

A—25 MPH B—125 miles

A Speedometer display Displays the vehicle speed.
B Distance to empty Displays the driving range with

remaining fuel. ( P.107)

Fuel Economy

Following information is displayed.

A Distance to empty

Displays the driving range with remaining fuel. ( P.107)

B Current fuel economy

Displays the instantaneous current fuel Economy.

C Average fuel economy

Displays the average fuel economy since the function was reset or the average fuel economy after starting or refueling. ^*1, 2, 3

The average fuel economy selected by “Fuel Economy” on the screen is displayed. (→P.109)

*1: Use the displayed fuel consumption as a reference only.
*2: Average fuel economy since the function was reset can be reset by pressing and holding OK
*3: Average fuel economy after starting is reset each time the hybrid system stops.
■ ECO Accelerator Guidance/“Eco Score”
Displays a reference operation

range for using the accelerator pedal according to driving conditions, and a score result that evaluates the current driving status.

A Eco Zone B Eco Score 80 Start Cruise Stop

A ECO Accelerator Guidance
B "Eco Score"
ECO Accelerator Guidance

A B C D Eco Zone

A ECO area
Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an Eco-friendly manner.
B Power area

Shows that an Eco-friendly driving range is being exceeded (during full power driving etc.).

C Current acceleration
D Reference operation range

A zone is displayed in blue under the Eco area which can be used as a reference operation range for using the accelerator pedal according to driving conditions such as starting off and cruising.

The ECO Accelerator Guidance display changes according to the driving status, such as when starting off or cruising.

It is easier to drive in an Eco-friendly manner by driving according to the display showing the accelerator pedal operations and staying within the reference operation range.

"Eco Score"

The driving status for the following 3 situations are evaluated in 5 levels: Smooth start-off acceleration (“Start”), driving without sudden acceleration (“Cruise”) and smooth stopping (“Stop”).

Each time the vehicle is stopped, a score result is displayed out of a perfect score of 100 points.

A Eco Score 80 B Start C Cruise D Stop

A Score result
B "Start"
C "Cruise"
D "Stop"

How to read the bar display:

After starting off, “Eco Score” display does not start until the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).

The “Eco Score” is reset each time the vehicle starts off to start a new evaluation.

When the hybrid system stops, the current total score result is displayed.*

*: The score result is displayed only when “Eco Score” is selected for “Trip Summary”. (→P.109)

Distance to empty

● This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
- When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated. When refueling, turn the power switch to OFF. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the power switch to OFF, the display may not be updated.
- When “Refuel” is displayed, the remaining fuel amount is low and the distance that can be driven with the remaining fuel cannot be calculated.
Refuel immediately.

■ ECO Accelerator Guidance/“Eco Score” will not operate when

The ECO Accelerator Guidance/“Eco Score” will not operate in the following situations:

●The Hybrid System Indicator is not operating.
●The vehicle is being driven using the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range.

Driving support system information display

■Driving support system information display

Select to display the operational status of the following systems:

● LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) ( P.258)
● Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range ( P.271)

■Navigation system-linked display (if equipped)

Select to display the following navigation system-linked information.

• Route guidance
• Compass display

Audio system-linked display (if equipped)

Select to enable selection of an audio source or track on the display.

Vehicle information display

■Drive information

2 items that are selected using the “Drive Info Items” setting (average speed, distance and total time) can be displayed vertically.

The displayed information changes according to the “Drive Info Type” setting (since the system was started or between resets). ( P.109)

Use the displayed information as a reference only.

Following items will be displayed.

- "Trip"

• "Average Speed": Displays the average vehicle speed since hybrid system start*
• "Distance": Displays the distance driven since hybrid system start*
• "Total Time": Displays the elapsed time since hybrid system start*

*: These items are reset each time the hybrid system stops.

• "Total"

• "Average Speed": Displays the average vehicle speed since the display was reset*
• "Distance": Displays the distance driven since the display was reset*
• “Total Time”: Displays the elapsed time since the display

was reset ^*

*: To reset, display the desired item and press and hold OK

■Energy monitor

→P.113

■AWD system display

A B A C A A D

A Torque distribution display

Displays the drive status of each wheel in 6 steps from 0 to 5.

B G-force display*

Displays the size and direction of the G-force applied to the vehicle via changes to the position of the ball on the display.

C Maximum G-force course*

This item is linked with the G-force display and the course of the past movement of the ball is displayed.

Press and hold to reset the record.

D Wheel spin display

When a tire is spinning, its icon on the display changes its color and blinks.

*: This item is displayed only when driving mode is set to sport mode.

Settings display

Vehicle settings and the content displayed on the screen can be changed by using the meter control switches.

■Setting procedure

1 Operate or of the meter control switches and select

2 Operate or of the meter control switches and select the desired item.

- If the function is turned on and off or the volume, etc. is changed on the setting screen, the setting is changed each time is pressed.

- For functions that allow operation contents, display contents, etc., of function to be selected, the setting screen is displayed by pressing and holding OK When the setting screen is displayed, select the setting or desired value (time, etc.) with OK

3 After changing the settings, press of the meter control switches.

■ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (→P.258)

Select to set up the following items.

● “Lane Center”

Select to enable/disable the lane

centering function.

- “Steering Assist”

Select to enable/disable steering wheel assistance.

- “Sensitivity”

Select to set the lane departure alert sensitivity.

- "Sway Warning"

Select to enable/disable the vehicle sway warning.

- “Sway Sensitivity”

Select to set the vehicle sway warning sensitivity.

■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (→P.250)

Select to set up the following items.

- PCS on/off

Select to enable/disable the pre-collision system.

- “Sensitivity”

Select to change the pre-collision warning timing.

■ BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (if equipped) (→P.282)

Select to set up the following items.

● BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) on/off

Select to enable/disable the BSM system.

● "Brightness"

Select to switch the brightness of the outside rear view mirror indicators. ( P.283)

- "Sensitivity"

Select to change the alert timing for an approaching vehicle.

■ (Intuitive parking assist) (if equipped) (→P.291)

Select to set up the following items.

● Intuitive parking assist on/off

Select to enable/disable the Intuitive parking assist.

- "Volume"

Select to set the volume of the buzzer which sounds when the Intuitive parking assist is operated.

■RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) (if equipped) (→P.282)

● RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) on/off

Select to enable/disable the RCTA system.

- "Volume"

Select to change the RCTA buzzer volume.

■ PKSB (Parking Support Brake System) (if equipped) (→P.298)

Select to enable/disable the Parking Support Brake function.

■ RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped) (→P.268)

Select to set up the following items.

● Road Sign Assist on/off

Select to enable/disable the RSA system.

- “Notification method”

Select to change each notification method used to notify the driver when the system recognizes excess speed and Do Not Enter sign.

● "Notification Level"

Select to change each notification level used to notify the driver when the system recognizes a speed limit sign.

■ Vehicle Settings

● PBD (Power Back Door) (if equipped) (→P.137)

Select to set up the following items.

- System settings

Select to enable/disable the power back door system.

- “Hands Free”*

Select to enable/disable the Hands Free Power Back Door.

- "Opening Adjustment"

Select the open position when power back door is fully open.

- “Volume”

Select to set the volume of the buzzer which sounds when the power back door system operates.

*: Vehicles with Hands Free Power Back Door

- “TPWS” (Tire Pressure Warning System) (if equipped) (→P.593)

- "Set Pressure"

Select to initialize the tire pressure warning system.

- "Change Wheel" (except for models made in Japan* without tire inflation pressure display function)

Select to register the ID codes of the tire pressure sensors to the tire pressure warning system.

- “Change Wheel” (for models made in Japan* without tire inflation pressure display function)

Select to change the tire pressure warning system sensor ID code set. To enable this function, a second set of tire pressure warning system sensor ID codes must be registered by a Toyota dealer. For information regarding changing the registered ID code set, contact your Toyota dealer.

*: The country of production is written on the Certification Regulation Label. (→P.684)

● “Scheduled Maintenance” ( P.573)

Select to reset the scheduled maintenance information (message indicating maintenance is required and distance until the next maintenance) after all maintenance is performed.

Settings

- "Language"

Select to change the language on the multi-information display.

- "Units"

Select to change the units of measure displayed.

● “Meter Type” (7-inch display)

Select to change the speedometer display.

• E(EV indicator) (→P.73)

Select to enable/disable the EV indicator.

● (Driving information display settings)

Select to set up the following items.

- "Hybrid System"

Select to enable/disable the ECO Accelerator Guidance ( P.105).

- "Fuel Economy"

Select to change the display on Fuel Economy ( P.105).

● ♪ (Audio settings) (if equipped)

Select to enable/disable screen.

● Vehicle information display settings)

- "Display Contents"

Select to set up the following items.

"Energy monitor":

Select to enable/disable the Energy monitor ( P.113)

"AWD":

Select to enable/disable the AWD system display ( P.108).

- "Drive Info Type"

Select to change the drive information type display between trip and total. ( P.108).

- "Drive Info Items"

Select to set the items on the upper

and lower side of the drive information screen from three items, average speed, distance and total time.

- “Trip Summary”

Select to set the items displayed when the power switch is turned off.

- "Pop-Up Display"

Select to enable/disable the following pop-up displays, which may appear in some situations.

• Intersection guidance display of the navigation system-linked system (if equipped)
• Incoming call display of the hands-free phone system (if equipped)
  • Audio operation (if equipped)
  • Volume operation (if equipped)
  • Voice control (if equipped)
  ● "MID OFF"

A blank screen is displayed.

- “Default Settings”

Select to reset the meter display settings.

■ Suspension of the settings display

● In the following situations, operation of the settings display will be temporarily suspended.
- When a warning message appears on the multi-information display
- When the vehicle begins to move
● Settings for functions not equipped to the vehicle are not displayed.
- When a function is turned off, the related settings for that function are not selectable.

WARNING

■ Cautions during setting up the display

As the hybrid system needs to be operating during setting up the display, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE

■During setting up the display

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the hybrid system is operating while setting up the display features.

Warning message display

Select to display warning messages and measures to be taken if a malfunction is detected. (→P.654)

Suggestion function

Displays suggestions to the driver in the following situations. To select a response to a displayed suggestion, use the meter control switches.

■Suggestion to turn on the headlights

If the headlight switch is in other than ☐, and the vehicle speed is 3 mph (5 km/h) or higher for a certain amount of time when the surroundings are

dark, a suggestion message will be displayed.

■Suggestion to turn off the headlights

If the headlights are left on for a certain amount of time after the power switch has been turned off, a suggestion message will be displayed.

When the headlight switch is in the AUTO position: The message asking if you wish to turn the headlights off is displayed. To turn the headlights off, select "Yes".

If the driver's door is opened after the power switch is turned off, this suggestion message will not be displayed.

Customization

The suggestion function can be turned on/off. (Customizable features: →P.708)

Energy monitor/con- sumption screen

You can view the status of your vehicle on the multi-information display and the audio system screen*.

*: For navigation system or multi-media system

System components

C B A

A Audio system screen
B Multi-information display
C Meter control switches (→P.101)

Energy monitor

The energy monitor can be used to check the vehicle drive status, hybrid system operation status and energy regeneration status.

■Display

▶ Multi-information display

Press or of the meter control switches on the steering

wheel and select, and

then press or to select the energy monitor display.

▶ Audio or Audio Plus (vehicles without Data Communication Module)

1 Press the "MENU" button.
2 Select "Info" on the "Menu" screen.

If a screen other than "Energy monitor" is displayed, select "Energy".

▶ Audio or Audio Plus (vehicles with Data Communication Module)/Premium Audio

1 Press the "MENU" button.
2 Select "Info" on the "Menu" screen.
3 Select "ECO" on the "Information" screen.

If a screen other than "Energy monitor" is displayed, select "Energy".

■Reading the display

The arrows will appear in accordance with the energy flow.

When there is no energy flow, arrows will not be displayed.

The color of the arrows will change as follows

Green: When the hybrid battery (traction battery) is regenerated or charged.

Yellow: When the hybrid battery (traction battery) is in use.

Red: When the gasoline engine is in use.

▶ Multi-information display

A C D B

The image shows all the arrows as an example. The actual display will vary depending on conditions.

A Gasoline engine
B Hybrid battery (traction battery)
C Front tire
D Rear tire*

*: For FF vehicles, the arrows to D are not displayed.

▶ Audio system screen

A B C D E F

The image shows all the arrows as an example. The actual display will vary depending on conditions.

A Gasoline engine
B Front electric motor (traction motor)
C Hybrid battery (traction battery)

D Rear electric motor (traction motor)
E Front tire
F Rear tire*

*: For FF vehicles, the arrows to F are not displayed.

Audio system screen ("Home" screen)

graph TD
    A["A"] --> B["B"]
    B --> C["C"]
    C --> A

The image shows all the arrows as an example. The actual display will vary depending on conditions.

A Gasoline engine
B Hybrid battery (traction battery)
C Tire

■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) status

The display changes in 8 levels according to the remaining charge amount of the hybrid battery (traction battery).

●The figure shows the multi-information display as an example for explanation.
●These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

Diagram showing two rectangular containers labeled A and B with bidirectional arrows indicating movement or flow (no text or symbols beyond labels)

A Low
B High

■Remaining charge amount warning of hybrid battery (traction battery)

●The buzzer sounds intermittently when the hybrid battery (traction battery) remains without charging while the shift lever is in N, or the remaining charge amount drops below a certain level. If the remaining charge amount drops further, the buzzer sounds continuously.
- When a warning message is shown on the multi-information display and the buzzer sounds, follow the instructions displayed on the screen to perform trouble-shooting.

Consumption

■Display

▶ Audio or Audio Plus (vehicles without Data Communication Module)

1 Press the "MENU" button.
2 Select "Info" on the "Menu" screen.
3 Select "Trip information" or "History".

▶ Audio or Audio Plus (vehicles with Data Communication Module)/Premium Audio

1 Press the "MENU" button.
2 Select "Info" on the "Menu" screen.
3 Select "ECO" on the "Information" screen.
4 Select "Trip information" or "History".

■Trip information

If a screen other than “Trip information” is displayed, select “Trip information”.

The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

Trip Information 8:34 Avo Spd. After Start Regenerated =50Wh MPG 20 MPH Flanked Time After Start 02:03 Range 26 miles A B C 15min 10 5 0 Current History Energy Clear

A Fuel consumption in the past 15 minutes
B Regenerated energy in the past 15 minutes

One symbol indicates 50 Wh. Up to 5 symbols are shown.

C Current fuel consumption
D Resetting the consumption data
E Average vehicle speed since the hybrid system was

started

F Elapsed time since the hybrid system was started
G Cruising range ( P.117)

Average fuel consumption for the past 15 minutes is divided by color into past averages and averages attained since the power switch was last turned to ON. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

History

If a screen other than "History" is displayed, select "History".

The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

History 8:34 Previous Best 5.0 MPG Latest 5.0 MPG Start 12/31 12/31 12/31 12/31 12/31 New mn/dd Trip Information Energy D Update Clear E A B C B MPG

A Best recorded fuel consumption
B Latest fuel consumption
C Previous fuel consumption record

• Audio and Audio Plus:

Displays the daily average fuel consumption. (Instead of the date, "Trip 1" through "Trip 5" will be displayed.)
- Premium Audio:

Displays the daily average fuel consumption.

D Updating the latest fuel consumption data
E Resetting the history data

The average fuel consumption history is divided by color into past averages and the average fuel consumption since the last time updated. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

■ Updating the history data

Update the latest fuel consumption by selecting “Update” to measure the current fuel consumption again.

■ Resetting the data

The fuel consumption data can be deleted by selecting "Clear".

Cruising range

Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.

This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

3

3-1. Key information

Keys 120

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Side doors.... 127

Back door.... 133

Smart key system ..... 147

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats 153

Rear seats.... 154

Driving position memory 156

Head restraints...... 159

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel ...... 162

Inside rear view mirror 163

Digital Rear-view Mirror165

Outside rear view mirrors 174

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows ..... 176

Moon roof...... 179

Panoramic moon roof.. 182

Keys

Key types

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

▶ Vehicles without smart key system

graph TD
    A["Car Locker A"] --> B["Mobile Phone"]
    A --> C["Car Locker B"]

A Master keys

Operating the wireless remote control function ( P.122)

B Key number plate

▶ Vehicles with smart key system

graph TD
    A["A"] --> B["B"]
    A --> C["C"]

A Electronic keys

• Operating the smart key system (→P.147)
• Operating the wireless remote control function (→P.122)

B Mechanical keys

C Key number plate

■When riding in an aircraft

When bringing a key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.

■Key battery depletion

▶ Vehicles without smart key system
●The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
●The battery will become depleted even if the wireless key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the wireless key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (→P.618)
- The wireless remote control does not operate.
• The detection area becomes smaller.
▶ Vehicles with smart key system
●The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
- If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display when the hybrid system stops.
●To reduce key battery depletion when the electronic key is to not be used for long periods of time, set the electronic key to the battery-saving mode. (→P.148)
As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery

when necessary.

• The smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate.
• The detection area becomes smaller.
• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.

You can replace the battery by yourself ( P.618). However, as there is a danger that the electronic key may be damaged, it is recommended that replacement is carried out by your Toyota dealer.

● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
• TVs
- Personal computers
- Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
- Table lamps
- Induction cookers

If a message regarding the state of the electronic key or power switch mode, etc. is shown (vehicles with smart key system)

To prevent trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle, leaving the vehicle carrying the electronic key on your person without turning the power switch to OFF or other passengers from unintentionally taking the key out of the vehicle, etc., a message that prompts the user to confirm the state of the electronic key or power switch mode may be shown on the multi-information display. In those cases, follow the instructions on the display immediately.

If "Key Battery Low Replace Key Battery" is displayed on the multi-information display (vehicles with smart key system)

The electronic key has a low battery. Replace the electronic key battery. (→P.618)

■Replacing the battery

→P.618

■ Confirmation of the registered key number

The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your Toyota dealer for details.

If “A New Key has been Registered Contact Your Dealer for Details” is displayed on the multi-information display (vehicles with smart key system)

This message will be displayed each time the driver's door is opened when the doors are unlocked from the outside for approximately 10 days after a new electronic key has been registered. If this message is displayed but you have not had a new electronic key registered, ask your Toyota dealer to check if an unknown electronic key (other than those in your possession) has been registered.

NOTICE

■To prevent key damage
- Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
- Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.
- Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer, etc.
- Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to such materials.
- Do not disassemble the keys.

NOTICE

• Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the keys.
• Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio systems and induction cookers.
• Do not place the keys near medical electrical equipment such as low-frequency therapy equipment or microwave therapy equipment, and do not receive medical attention with the keys on your person.
  ■Carrying the electronic key on your person (vehicles with smart key system)

Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly.

In case of a smart key system malfunction or other key-related problems (vehicles with smart key system)

$$ \rightarrow \mathrm{P}. 6 7 0 $$

■When an electronic key is lost (vehicles with smart key system)

$$ \rightarrow \mathrm{P}. 6 6 8 $$

Wireless remote control

The keys are equipped with the following wireless remote control:

▶ Vehicles without smart key system

A B C D

A Locks all the doors ( P.127)
B Sounds the alarm ( P.123)
C Unlocks all the doors ( P.127)
D Opens the side windows ^* (→P.127)

*: This setting must be customized at your Toyota dealer.

▶ Vehicles with smart key system

A B C D E HOLD HOLD

A Locks all the doors ( P.127)
B Unlocks all the doors ( P.127)
C Opens the side windows ^1 and the moon roof ^1,2 or panoramic moon roof ^*1,2 ( P.127)

D Opens and closes the power back door ^*2 (→P.137)
E Sounds the alarm ( P.123)

*1: These settings must be customized at your Toyota dealer.

*2:If equipped

■Theft deterrent panic mode

▶ Vehicles without smart key system

When (pressed for longer than about 1 second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.

To stop the alarm, press any button on the key.

Illustration of a person running away from a car with lightning bolts and a mobile phone emitting smoke (no text or symbols)

▶ Vehicles with smart key system

When (\$) pressed for longer than about 1 second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.

To stop the alarm, press any button on the electronic key.

Illustration of a car being hit by a moving phone, with lightning and motion lines indicating speed (no text or symbols)

■ Conditions affecting operation

▶ Vehicles without smart key system

The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the following situations.

• When the wireless key battery is depleted
  ●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
• When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless communication device
• When the wireless key is in contact with, or is covered by a metallic object
• When other wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby
• If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window
  ▶ Vehicles with smart key system →P.148

■Certification for wireless remote control

FCC ID:HYQ23ABE

FCC ID:HYQ12BFW

NOTE:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

The FCC ID is affixed inside the equipment. You can find the ID when replacing the battery.

BCS Access Systems US LLC

TPM Sensor Model: 335098 FCC ID: GQ4-72T IC: 1470A-53T

RKE Transmitter Model: 336600 FCC ID: GQ4-73T IC: 1470A-54T

Integrated Receiver Model: 337136 FCC ID: GQ4-50R CAN RSS-GEN/CNR-GEN

MADE IN U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicable aux appareils radio exempts de licence.

WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by BCS Access Systems US LLC could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

The term "IC:" before the radio certification

Using the master key (vehicles without smart key system)

Diagram showing a car key with two curved arrows labeled 1 and 2 indicating rotational or directional movement.

1 Releasing

To release the key, press the button.

2 Folding

To stow the key back in its case, push the key back to the stowed position while pressing the button.

Using the mechanical key (vehicles with smart key system)

To take out the mechanical key, slide the release lever A and take the key out.

The mechanical key can only be inserted in one direction, as the key only has grooves on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt to insert it.

After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key. (→P.670)

Diagram showing a car door panel being inserted into a control panel, with labeled component A and directional arrows indicating movement.

■If you lose your keys

→P.668

If a wrong key is used

The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism.

Side doors

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless remote control, key or door lock switch.

Unlocking and locking the doors from the outside

■Using the entry function (vehicles with smart key system)

Carry the electronic key to enable this function.

Illustration showing two-step steps of a mobile phone control device: one with a remote control and the other with a hand holding a key.

1 Grip the driver's door handle to unlock the door. Holding the driver's door handle for approximately 2 seconds unlocks all the doors. Grip the front passenger's door handle or rear door handle (some models) to unlock all the doors*.

Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle.

The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the doors are locked.

*: The door unlock settings can be

changed. ( P.128)

2 Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the upper part of the door handle) to lock the doors.

Check that the door is securely locked.

■ Using the wireless remote control

▶ Vehicles without smart key system

1 HOLD 2

1 Locks all the doors

Check that the door is securely locked.

2 Unlocks all the doors

Pressing the button unlocks the driver's door. Pressing the button again within 5 seconds unlocks the other doors.

Press and hold to open the side windows.*

*: This setting must be customized at your Toyota dealer.

▶ Vehicles with smart key system

1 2 HOLD HOLD

1 Locks all the doors

Check that the door is securely locked.

2 Unlocks all the doors

Pressing the button unlocks the driver's door. Pressing the button again within 5 seconds unlocks the other doors.

Press and hold to open the side windows and moon roof (if equipped) or panoramic moon roof (if equipped).*

*: This setting must be customized at your Toyota dealer.

■Using the key

▶ Vehicles without smart key system

Diagram illustrating car safety instructions with labeled steps 1 and 2 showing a vehicle and steering wheel assembly.

1 Locks all the doors

Turn and hold to close the side windows.*

2 Unlocks all the doors

Turning the key unlocks the driver's door. Turning the key again within 5 seconds unlocks the other doors.

Turn and hold to open the side windows.*

*: These settings must be customized at your Toyota dealer.

▶ Vehicles with smart key system

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (→P.670)

■ Switching the door unlock function (vehicles with smart key system)

It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote control.

1 Turn the power switch to OFF.

2 When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and

hold , or for approximately 5 seconds while pressing and holding .

The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and repeat step 2.)

Multi-information display/Beep	Unlocking function
Exterior: Beeps 3 timesInterior: Pings once	Holding the driver's door handle unlocks only the driver's door.
	Holding the passenger's door handle or pressing the back door opener switch unlocks all the doors.
Exterior: Beeps twiceInterior: Pings once	Holding a door handle or pressing the back door opener switch unlocks all the doors.

Vehicles with alarm: To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open and close a door once after the settings have been changed. (If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after

is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.) In a case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (→P.84)

Operation signals

Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)

Side windows and moon roof (if equipped) or panoramic moon roof (if equipped): A buzzer sounds to

indicate that the side windows and moon roof or panoramic moon roof are operating using the wireless remote control.

■Security feature

▶ Vehicles without smart key system If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked using the wireless remote control, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.

▶ Vehicles with smart key system If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again. (However, depending on the location of the electronic key, the key may be detected as being in the vehicle. In this case, vehicle may be unlocked.)

■When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part of the door handle (vehicles with smart key system)

If the door will not lock even when the topside sensor area is touched, try touching both the topside and underside sensor areas at the same time.

When gloves are being worn, remove the gloves.

Illustration of a hand holding a tool with a magnified inset showing a curved object (no text or symbols)

■Door lock buzzer (vehicles with smart key system)

If an attempt to lock the doors using the smart key system is made when a door other than the door you are locking is open, a buzzer sounds

continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close all the doors, and lock the vehicle once more.

■Setting the alarm (if equipped)

Locking the doors will set the alarm system. ( P.84)

■Conditions affecting the operation of the smart key system or wireless remote control

▶ Vehicles without smart key system →P.123

▶ Vehicles with smart key system →P.148

If the smart key system (if equipped) or the wireless remote control does not operate properly

● Vehicles with smart key system: Use the mechanical key to lock and unlock the doors. (→P.670)

- Replace the key battery with a new one if it is depleted. (→P.618)

■If the 12-volt battery is discharged

The doors cannot be locked and unlocked using the smart key system (if equipped) or wireless remote control. Lock or unlock the doors using the key (vehicles without smart key system) or mechanical key (vehicles with smart key system). (→P.128, 670)

Customization

Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed. (Customizable features: →P.709)

WARNING

■To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.

Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant could be thrown out of the vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury.

- Ensure that all doors are properly closed and locked.

- Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving. Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.

- Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.

■When opening or closing a door

Check the surroundings of the vehicle such as whether the vehicle is on an incline, whether there is enough space for a door to open and whether a strong wind is blowing. When opening or closing the door, hold the door handle tightly to prepare for any unpredictable movement.

WARNING

When using the wireless remote control, key or mechanical key and operating the power windows, moon roof (if equipped) or panoramic moon roof (if equipped)

Operate the power window, moon roof or panoramic moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the side window, moon roof or panoramic moon roof. Also, do not allow children to operate the wireless remote control, key or mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the side window, moon roof or panoramic moon roof.

Unlocking and locking the doors from the inside

■Using the door lock switch

Diagram showing car interior with labeled buttons and directional arrows, highlighting a specific component in the first panel.

1 Locks all the doors
2 Unlocks all the doors

■ Using the inside lock buttons

Diagram showing car interior control panel with two zoomed-in views labeled 1 and 2, highlighting a hand gesture.

The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handle even if the lock buttons are in the lock position.

■Locking the front doors from the outside without a key

1 Move the inside lock button to the lock position.
2 Close the door.

▶ Vehicles without smart key system The door cannot be locked if the key is in the power switch.
▶ Vehicles with smart key system The door cannot be locked if the power switch is in ACC or ON, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.

Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.

■Open door warning buzzer

If the vehicle speed reaches 3 mph (5 km/h), a buzzer sounds to indicate that the door(s) or the hood is not fully closed.

The open door(s) or hood is displayed on the multi-information display.

When all the doors are locked with the entry function (vehicles with smart key system), wireless remote control or key

●The doors cannot be unlocked with the door lock switch.
●The door lock switch can be reset by unlocking all the doors with the entry function (vehicles with smart key system), wireless remote control or key.

Rear door child-protector lock

The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set.

Diagram illustrating car door seat adjustment with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement or change.

1 Unlock
2 Lock

These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors.

Automatic door locking and unlocking systems

The following functions can be set or canceled:

For instructions on customizing, refer to P.706.

Function Operation
Speed linked door locking function	All doors are automatically locked when vehicle speed is approximately 12mph (20 km/h) or higher.
Shift position linked door locking function	All doors are automatically locked when shifting the shift lever to position other than P.
Shift position linked door unlocking function	All doors are automatically unlocked when shifting the shift lever to P.
Driver's door linked door unlocking function	All doors are automatically unlocked when driver's door is opened within approximately 45 seconds after turning the power switch to OFF.

Back door

The back door can be locked/unlocked and opened/closed by the following procedures.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Before driving

● Make sure that the back door is fully closed.
If the back door is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving and hit nearby objects or luggage in the luggage compartment may be thrown out, causing an accident.

- Do not allow children to play in the luggage compartment. If a child is accidentally locked in the luggage compartment, they could get heat exhaustion or other injuries.

- Do not allow a child to open or close the back door. Doing so may cause the back door to operate unexpectedly, or cause the child's hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing back door.

■ Important points while driving

- Keep the back door closed while driving. If the back door is left open, it may hit near-by objects or luggage in the luggage compartment may be thrown out, causing an accident.

● Never let anyone sit in the luggage compartment. In the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.

■Back door handles

Do not hang any object to the back door handles. If any object is hung, the back door may suddenly shut, causing parts of the body to be caught, resulting in death or serious injury.

■Operating the back door

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in death or serious injury.

- Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the back door before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the back door to suddenly shut again after it is opened.

- When opening or closing the back door, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe.

- If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back door is about to open or close.

- Use caution when opening or closing the back door in windy weather as it may move abruptly in strong wind.

WARNING

● Vehicles without power back door: The back door may suddenly shut if it is not opened fully. It is more difficult to open or close the back door on an incline than on a level surface, so beware of the back door unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the back door is fully open and secure before using the luggage compartment.

Illustration showing a person loading a car into a container with a 'no' symbol, likely indicating no vehicle use or no restriction.

● Vehicles with power back door: The back door may suddenly shut if it is not opened fully, while on a steep incline. Make sure that the back door is secured before using the luggage compartment.
- When closing the back door, take extra care to prevent your fingers, etc. from being caught.

Cartoon illustration showing a person inside a vehicle with a 'no' symbol, indicating no violation or prohibition.

● Vehicles without power back door: When closing the back door, make sure to press it lightly on its outer surface. If the back door handle is used to fully close the back door, it may result in hands or arms being caught.

• Do not pull on the back door damper stay (vehicles without power back door) ( P.137) or back door spindle (vehicles with power back door) ( P.144) to close the back door, and do not hang on the back door damper stay (vehicles without power back door) or back door spindle (vehicles with power back door). Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the back door damper stay (vehicles without power back door) or back door spindle (vehicles with power back door) to break, causing an accident.
• Vehicles without power back door: If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the back door, it may suddenly shut again after being opened, causing someone's hands, head or neck to be caught and injured. When installing an accessory part to the back door, using a genuine Toyota part is recommended.

Unlocking and locking the back door from the outside

■Using the entry function (vehicles with smart key system)

Carry the electronic key to enable this function.

Diagram showing car door panel installation with two labeled parts and a worker inspecting the exterior panel

1 Unlocks all the doors

The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the doors are locked.

2 Locks all the doors

Check that the door is securely locked.

■ Using the wireless remote control

→P.127

Operation signals

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked using the entry function (if equipped) or wireless remote control. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)

■Security feature

▶ Vehicles without smart key system

If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked using the wireless remote control, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.

▶ Vehicles with smart key system

If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again. (However, depending on the location of the

electronic key, the key may be detected as being in the vehicle. In this case, vehicle may be unlocked.)

Unlocking and locking the back door from the inside

■Using the door lock switch

→P.131

Opening/closing the back door (vehicles without power back door)

Open

Raise the back door while pressing up the back door opener switch.

Diagram of a car showing front and rear side views with an arrow indicating movement or change (no text or symbols present)

Close

Lower the back door using the back door handle A and make sure to push the back door down from the outside to close it.

Be careful not to pull the back door sideways when closing the back door with the handle.

A

Luggage compartment light

The luggage compartment light turns on when the back door is opened with the luggage compartment light switch on.

When the power switch is turned to OFF, the light will go off automatically after 20 minutes.

1 2

1 On
2 Off

■If the back door opener is inoperative

The back door can be unlocked from the inside.

1 Remove the cover.

To prevent damage, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

Diagram showing a car interior with a close-up of a screwdriver inserted into a component, no text or symbols present.

2 Loosen the screw.

Diagram of a screwdriver inserted into a mechanical component with a curved arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols present)

3 Turn the cover.

Diagram of a vehicle interior showing a handle mechanism with a pink arrow indicating direction (no text or labels)

4 Move the lever.

Diagram of a screwdriver inserted into a mechanical component, showing a pink arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

5 When installing, reverse the steps listed.

■Open door warning buzzer →P.131

NOTICE

■Back door damper stays

The back door is equipped with damper stays that hold the back door in place.

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door damper stay, resulting in malfunction.

Diagram of a car interior showing airflow or force vectors around the dashboard frame (no text or symbols)

• Do not attach any foreign objects, such as stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives to the damper stay rod.
• Do not touch the damper stay rod with gloves or other fabric items.
• Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the back door.
• Do not place your hand on the damper stay or apply lateral forces to it.

Opening/closing the back door (vehicles with power back door)

■Using the wireless remote control

Press and hold the switch.

The power back door automatically opens/closes.

Pressing the switch while the power back door is opening/closing stops the operation. When the switch is pressed and held again during the halted operation, the back door will perform the reverse operation.

HOLD UP

■Using the power back door switch on the instrument panel

Press and hold the switch.

The power back door automatically opens/closes.

Unlock the back door before operating.

Pressing the switch while the power back door is opening/closing stops the operation. When the switch is pressed and held again during the halted operation, the back door will perform the reverse operation.

Diagram showing car steering wheel and car seat with a highlighted parking sign indicating upward movement

■ Using the back door opener switch

When the back door is unlocked: Press the back door

opener switch.

When the back door is locked: While carrying the electronic key on your person, press and hold the back door opener switch.

The power back door automatically opens.

Pressing the switch while the power back door is opening/closing stops the operation.

Side view of a car showing the rear window, side door, and front panel with an arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

■ Using the power back door switch on the back door

Press the switch.

The power back door automatically closes.

Pressing the switch while the power back door is operating will stop the operation.

When the switch is pressed again during the halted operation, the back door will perform the reverse operation.

Line drawing of a car backrest with an inset showing a highlighted component (no text or symbols)

Lower the back door using the back door handle A

The back door closing assist ( P.140) will be activated, and the power back door will fully close automatically.

Technical diagram of a car interior showing labeled components and directional arrows indicating movement or flow.

■Using the kick sensor (vehicles with Hands Free Power Back Door)

The Hands Free Power Back Door enables automatic opening and closing of the power back door by putting your foot near the lower center part of the rear bumper and moving it away from the rear bumper. When operating the Hands Free Power Back Door, make sure that the power switch is in OFF, the Hands Free Power Back Door operation is enabled (→P.109) and you are carrying an electronic key.

1 While carrying an electronic key, stand within the smart key system operation range, approximately 11.8 to 19.7 in.

(30 to 50 cm) from the rear bumper.

A B C

A Kick sensor
B Hands Free Power Back Door operation detection area
C Smart key system operation detection area ( P.147)
2 Perform a kick operation by moving your foot to within approximately 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the rear bumper and then pulling it back.

Perform the entire kick operation within 1 second.

The back door will not start operating while a foot is detected under the rear bumper.

Operate the Hands Free Power Back Door without contacting the rear bumper with your foot.

If another electronic key is in the cabin or luggage compartment, it may take slightly longer than normal for the operation to occur.

A B

A Kick sensor

B Hands Free Power Back Door operation detection area

3 When the kick sensor detects that your foot is pulled back, a buzzer will sound and the back door will automatically fully open/close.

If a foot is moved under the rear bumper while the back door is opening/closing, the back door will stop moving.

If a foot is moved under the rear bumper again during the halted operation, the back door will perform the reverse operation.

Luggage compartment light

The luggage compartment light turns on when the back door is opened with the luggage compartment light switch on.

When the power switch is turned to OFF, the light will go off automatically after 20 minutes.

Diagram showing car seatbelt insertion into a vehicle's side panel, with labeled parts 1 and 2

1 On
2 Off

■Back door closer

In the event that the back door is left slightly open, the back door closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position.

Whatever the state of the power switch, the back door closer operates.

■Power back door operating conditions

The power back door can automatically open and close under the following conditions:

• When the power back door system is enabled. (→P.109)
• When the power switch is in ON, in addition to the above for the opening operations, the back door operates for any of the following conditions:
• Parking brake is engaged
  • The brake pedal is depressed
  • The shift lever is in P.

Operation of the power back door

●A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash twice to indicate that the back door is opening/closing.
- When the power back door system is disabled, the power back door does not operate but it can be opened and closed by hand.
- When the power back door automatically opens, if an abnormality due to people or objects is detected, operation will stop.

Jam protection function

Sensors are equipped on both sides of the power back door. If anything obstructs the power back door while it is closing, the back door will automatically operate in the opposite direction or stop.

Technical line drawing of a car interior frame with arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

■Fall-down protection function

While the power back door is opening automatically, applying excessive force to it will stop the opening operation to prevent the power back door from suddenly shutting.

■Back door closing assist

If the back door is lowered manually when the back door is stopped at an open position, the back door will fully close automatically.

■Back door reserve lock function

This function is a function which reserves locking of all doors, beforehand, when the power back door is open.

When the following procedure is performed, all the doors except the power back door are locked and then power back door will also be locked at the same time it is closed.

1 Close all doors, except the back door.
2 During the power back door closing operation, lock the doors using the smart key system from the side doors ( P.127) or the wireless remote control. ( P.127)

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that all the doors have been closed and locked.

• If the electronic key is placed inside the vehicle after starting a close operation via the door reserve lock function, the electronic key may become locked inside the vehicle.
• If the power back door does not fully close due to the operation of

the jam protection function, etc., while the back door is automatically closing after a door reserve lock operation is performed, the door reserve lock function is canceled and all the doors will unlock.

●Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that all the doors are closed and locked.
■Hands Free Power Back Door operating conditions (vehicles with Hands Free Power Back Door)

The Hands Free Power Back Door will open/close automatically when the following conditions are met:

●The Hands Free Power Back Door operation is enabled (→P.109)
●The power switch is in OFF.
●The electronic key is within the operational range. (→P.147)
● A foot is put near the lower center part of the rear bumper and moved away from the rear bumper.

The power back door may also be operated by putting a hand, an elbow, a knee, etc. near the lower center part of the rear bumper and moving it away from the rear bumper. Make sure to put it close enough to the center part of the rear bumper.

■ Situations in which the Hands Free Power Back Door may not operate properly (vehicles with Hands Free Power Back Door)

In the following situations, the Hands Free Power Back Door may not operate properly:

• When a foot remains under the rear bumper
• If the rear bumper is strongly hit with a foot or is touched for a while

If the rear bumper has been touched for a while, wait for a short time before attempting to operate the Hands Free Power Back Door again.

• When operated while a person is too close to the rear bumper
• When an external radio wave source interferes with the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle (→P.148)
• When the vehicle is parked near an electrical noise source which affects the sensitivity of the Hands Free Power Back Door, such as a pay parking spot, gas station, electrically heated road, or fluorescent light
• When the vehicle is near a TV tower, electric power plant, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
• When a large amount of water is applied to the rear bumper, such as when the vehicle is being washed or in heavy rain
• When mud, snow, ice, etc. is attached to the rear bumper
• When the vehicle has been parked for a while near objects that may move and contact the rear bumper, such as plants
• When an accessory is installed to the rear bumper

If an accessory has been installed, turn the Hands Free Power Back Door operation setting off.

■Preventing unintentional operation of the Hands Free Power Back Door (vehicles with Hands Free Power Back Door)

When an electronic key is in the operation range, the Hands Free Power Back Door may operate unintentionally, so be careful in the following situations.

• When a large amount of water is applied to the rear bumper, such as when the vehicle is being washed or in heavy rain
• When dirt is wiped off the rear

bumper

• When a small animal or small object, such as a ball, moves under the rear bumper
• When an object is moved from under the rear bumper
• If someone is swinging their legs while sitting on the rear bumper
• If the legs or another part of someone's body contacts the rear bumper while passing by the vehicle

- When the vehicle is parked near an electrical noise source which affects the sensitivity of the Hands Free Power Back Door, such as a pay parking spot, gas station, electrically heated road, or fluorescent light

- When the vehicle is near a TV tower, electric power plant, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

- When the vehicle is parked in a place where objects such as plants are near the rear bumper

● If luggage, etc. is set near the rear bumper

- If accessories or a vehicle cover is installed/removed near the rear bumper

- When the vehicle is being towed To prevent unintentional operation, turn the Hands Free Power Back Door operation setting off. (→P.109)

■When reconnecting the 12-volt battery

To enable the power back door to operate properly, close the back door manually.

■If the back door opener is inoperative

The back door can be unlocked from the inside.

1 Remove the cover.

To prevent damage, cover the tip of

the screwdriver with a rag.

Diagram showing car door and internal component with a magnified inset highlighting the switch mechanism.

2 Loosen the screw.

Diagram of a mechanical component with a screwdriver inserted, showing a curved arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols present)

3 Turn the cover.

Diagram of a mechanical component inside a rectangular housing, showing internal structure with a pink arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

4 Move the lever.

Diagram of a screwdriver inserted into a mechanical component with a pink arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols present)

5 When installing, reverse the steps listed.

Customization

Settings (e.g. power back door opening angle) can be changed. (Customizable features: →P.711)

WARNING

■Back door closer

In the event that the back door is left slightly open, the back door closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position. It takes several seconds before the back door closer begins to operate. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the back door, as this may cause bone fractures or other serious injuries.

Diagram showing a car interior with a 'no stop sign' symbol and a magnified view of a collision impact on the ground.

Use caution when using the back door closer as it still operates when the power back door system is canceled.

Power back door

Observe the following precautions when operating the power back door.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

- Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obstacles or anything that could cause any of your belongings to get caught.

- If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back door is about to open or close.

- If the power back door system is turned off while the back door is operating automatically, the automatic operation is stopped. The back door then has to be operated manually. Take extra care when on an incline, as the back door may open or close unexpectedly.

- If the operating conditions of the power back door are no longer met, a buzzer may sound and the back door may stop opening or closing. The back door then has to be operated manually. Take extra care when on an incline, as the back door may open or close abruptly.

● On an incline, the back door may suddenly shut after it opens. Make sure the back door is fully open and secure.

In the following situations, the power back door may detect an abnormality and automatic operation may be stopped. In this case, the back door has to be operated manually. Take extra care when on an incline, as the back door may open or close abruptly.

- When the back door contacts an obstacle

- When the 12-volt battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the power switch is turned to ON or the hybrid system is started during automatic operation

- If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the back door, it may suddenly shut again after being opened, causing someone's hands, head or neck to be caught and injured. When installing an accessory part to the back door, using a genuine Toyota part is recommended.

WARNING

Jam protection function

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the back door fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.
●The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the object that is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.

■Hands Free Power Back Door (if equipped)

Observe the following precautions when operating the Hands Free Power Back Door.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

- Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obstacles or anything that could cause any of your belongings to get caught.

- When putting your foot near the lower center part of the rear bumper and moving it from the rear bumper, be careful not to touch the exhaust pipes until they have cooled down sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes can cause burns.

- Do not leave the electronic key within the effective range (detection area) of the luggage compartment.

NOTICE

■Back door spindles

The back door is equipped with spindles that hold the back door in place.

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door spindle, resulting in malfunction.

Diagram of a car interior showing structural components and airflow direction (no text or labels)

• Do not attach any foreign objects, such as stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives to the spindle rod.
• Do not touch the spindle rod with gloves or other fabric items.
• Do not attach heavy accessories to the back door. When attaching, ask your Toyota dealer for details.
• Do not place your hand on the spindle or apply lateral forces to it.

■To prevent back door closer malfunction

Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the back door closer is operating. Applying excessive force may cause the back door closer to malfunction.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the power back door

Make sure that there is no ice between the back door and frame that would prevent movement of the back door. Operating the power back door when excessive load is present on the back door may cause a malfunction.

- Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the power back door is operating.

●Take care not to damage the sensors (installed on the right and left edges of the power back door) with a knife or other sharp object. If the sensor is disconnected, the power back door will not close automatically.

■Hands Free Power Back Door precautions (if equipped)

The kick sensor is located behind lower center part of the rear bumper. Observe the following to ensure that the Hands Free Power Back Door function operates properly:

- Keep the lower center part of the rear bumper clean at all times. If the lower center part of the rear bumper is dirty or covered with snow, the kick sensor may not operate. In this situation, clean off the dirt or snow, move the vehicle from the current position and then check if the kick sensor operates. If it does not operate, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

- Do not apply coatings that have a rain clearing (hydrophilic) effect, or other coatings, to the lower center part of the rear bumper.

- Do not park the vehicle near objects that may move and contact the lower center part of the rear bumper, such as grass or trees. If the vehicle has been parked for a while near objects that may move and contact the lower center part of the rear bumper, such as grass or trees, the kick sensor may not operate. In this situation, move the vehicle from the current position and then check if the kick sensor operates. If it does not operate, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

- Do not subject the kick sensor or its surrounding area to a strong impact. If the kick sensor or its surrounding area has been subjected to a strong impact, the kick sensor may not operate properly. If the kick sensor does not operate in the following situations, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

- The kick sensor or its surrounding area has been subjected to a strong impact. - The lower center part of the rear bumper is scratched or damaged.

- Do not disassemble the rear bumper.

- Do not attach stickers to the rear bumper.

- Do not paint the rear bumper.

NOTICE

- If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the power back door, disable the Hands Free Power Back Door. (→P.109)

Changing settings of the power back door system (vehicles with power back door)

The settings of the power back door system can be changed by displaying the “Vehicle Settings” - “PBD” screen from the

screen of the multi-informa- n display. (→P.109)

The changed power back door settings are not reset by turning the power switch to OFF. In order to restore the original settings, they need to be changed back on the

screen of the multi-information play.

Adjusting the open position of the back door (vehicles with power back door)

The open position of the power back door can be adjusted.

1 Stop the back door in the desirable position. (→P.137)
2 Press and hold the power back door switch on the back door for approximately 2 seconds.

When the settings are completed, the buzzer sounds 4 times.

When opening the back door the next time, the back door will stop at that position.

Diagram of a car interior showing the front compartment and a highlighted switch (no text or symbols present)

■ Canceling the adjusted open position of the back door

Press and hold the power back door switch on the back door for approximately 7 seconds.

After the buzzer sounds 4 times, it sounds twice more. When the power back door does the opening operation the next time, the door will open to the initial settings position.

Line drawing of a car interior showing the front panel and door, with an inset close-up of a button labeled 'Close' pointing to it (no text or symbols on the main diagram)

Customization

The opening position can be set with the multi-information display. (→P.109)

Priority for the stop position is given to the last position set by either the power back door switch on the back door or multi-information display.

Smart key system\*

*: If equipped

The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket. The driver should always carry the electronic key.

• Locks and unlocks the side doors (→P.127)
• Locks and unlocks the back door (→P.134)
• Starts the hybrid system (→P.212)

Antenna location

A B C A B D A B C D

A Antennas outside the cabin (front)
B Antennas outside the cabin (rear) (if equipped)
C Antenna outside the luggage compartment

D Antennas inside the cabin

■Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)

A B

A When locking or unlocking the doors
The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of the front door handles, rear door handles (if equipped) and back door opener switch. (Only the doors detecting the key can be operated.)
B When starting the hybrid system or changing power switch modes

The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.

If an alarm sounds or a warning message is displayed

An alarm sounds and warning message displays shown on the multi-information display are used to protect against unexpected accidents or theft of the vehicle resulting from erroneous operation. When a warning message is displayed, take appropriate measures based on the displayed message.

When only an alarm sounds, circumstances and correction procedures are as follows.

- When an exterior alarm sounds once for 5 seconds

Situation	Correction procedure
An attempt was made to lock the vehicle while a door was open.	Close all of the doors and lock the doors again.

- When an interior alarm pings continuously

Situation	Correction procedure
The power switch was turned to ACC while the driver's door was open (or the driver's door was opened while the power switch was in ACC).	Turn the power switch to OFF and close the driver's door.

■Battery-saving function

The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key battery and the 12-volt battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in operation for a long time.

● In the following situations, the smart key system may take some time to unlock the doors.
- The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.
- The smart key system has not been used for 5 days or longer.
- If the smart key system has not been used for 14 days or longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at any doors except the driver's door. In this case, take hold of the driver's door handle, or use the wireless remote control or the

mechanical key, to unlock the doors.

■Turning an electronic key to battery-saving mode

- When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the electronic key from receiving radio waves.

Press twice while pressing

and holding .

Confirm that the electronic key indicator flashes 4 times.

While the battery-saving mode is set, the smart key system cannot be used. To cancel the function, press any of the electronic key buttons.

Diagram of a car door with control panel and indicator lights, showing '=OLD' function buttons

●Electronic keys that will not be used for long periods of time can be set to the battery-saving mode in advance.

■Conditions affecting operation

The smart key system uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart key system, wireless remote control and immobilizer system from operating properly.

(Ways of coping: →P.670)

• When the electronic key battery is depleted
  ●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
• When the electronic key is in con-

tact with, or is covered by the following metallic objects

• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
  • Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
  • Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
  • Media such as CDs and DVDs

- When other wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby

- When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio waves

- Portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication devices

- Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves

• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)

• Digital audio players

- Portable game systems

- If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window

- When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic devices

- When parking in a coin-operated parking lot (Radio waves used to detect vehicles may affect the smart key system.)

■Note for the entry function

● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases:
- The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
- The electronic key is on the instrument panel, luggage cover or floor, or in the door pockets or glove box when the hybrid system

is started or power switch modes are changed.

- Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle.

- As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the electronic key can be used to unlock the vehicle.

● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the hybrid system if the electronic key is near the window.

●The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is within the effective range. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)

- If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)

●Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.

- When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition signals will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recognition signals will be given.

- If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within

the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:

- Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)

- Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key system. (→P.148)

- If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.

●The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again, or use the lock sensor on the lower part of the door handle.

●A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.

- If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.

■When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods

● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle.

●The smart key system can be deactivated in advance. (→P.710)

●Battery-saving mode can reduce the power consumption of electronic keys. (→P.148)

■To operate the system properly

Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle.

Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not operate.)

■If the smart key system does not operate properly

- Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (→P.670)

● Starting the hybrid system: →P.671

Customization

Settings (e.g. smart key system) can be changed. (Customizable features: →P.709)

If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting, refer to the explanations for the following operations.

- Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (→P.127, 670)

● Starting the hybrid system and changing power switch modes: →P.671

●Stopping the hybrid system: →P.214

■Certification for the smart key system

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, American Samoa, Guam, Saipan and Puerto Rico

FCC ID: NI4TMLF15-1

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

FCC ID:HYQ23AAY

FCC ID:HYQ14FBC

NOTE:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

NOTE:

■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

●People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the smart key system antennas. (→P.147)

The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.

- Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.

Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

Ask your Toyota dealer for details on disabling the entry function.

Front seats

The seats can be adjusted (longitudinally, vertically, etc.). Adjust the seat to ensure the correct driving posture.

Adjustment procedure

▶ Manual seat

1 2 3

1 Seat position adjustment lever
2 Seatback angle adjustment lever
3 Vertical height adjustment lever (driver's side only)

Power seat (driver's side only)

Diagram of car seat assembly with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating movement or positioning

1 Seat position adjustment switch
2 Seatback angle adjustment switch
3 Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch
4 Vertical height adjustment switch
5 Lumbar support adjustment switch

■When adjusting the seat

Take care when adjusting the seat so that the head restraint does not touch the ceiling.

WARNING

■When adjusting the seat position
Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.

WARNING

- Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.

Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

Make sure to leave enough space around the feet so they do not get stuck.

●Manual seat only: After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position.

■Seat adjustment

To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat more than necessary.

If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident. Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Rear seats

Reclining adjustments and folding the seatbacks can be done with lever operation.

Adjustment procedure

Pull the seatback angle adjustment lever A and adjust the seatback angle.

Diagram showing car seatbelting mechanism with directional arrows and labeled component A

WARNING

■When operating the seatback

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

- Keep other passengers from being hit with the seatback.

- Do not bring your hands close to the moving parts or between the seats, as well as do not let any part of your body get caught.

WARNING

●After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position. If the seatback is not securely locked, the red marking will be visible. Make sure that the red marking is not visible.

Diagram showing car seatbelt switch and no-noise symbol in a vehicle seatbelt, with magnified view of the switch.

Folding down the rear seatbacks

■Before folding down the seatbacks

1 Park the vehicle in a safe place.

Apply the parking brake ( P.224) and shift the shift lever to P. ( P.220)

2 Adjust the position of the front seat and the angle of the seatback. (→P.153)

Depending on the position of the front seat, if the seatback is folded backward, it may interfere with the operation of the rear seat.

3 Lift up and push down the head restraints of the rear outboard seats, and lower the head restraint of the rear center seat. (→P.159)

4 Stow the armrest of the rear seat if it is pulled out. ( P.556)

This step is not necessary when operating the left side seat only.

■ Folding down the seat-backs

While pulling the seatback angle adjustment lever Afold the seatback down.

Diagram showing airflow or traffic flow from a vehicle seat to the dashboard, with labeled component A and directional arrows.

■Returning the rear seat-backs

To avoid trapping the seat belt between the seat and the inside of the vehicle, pass the seat belt outside the seat belt guide A and then return the seatback securely to the locked position.

A

WARNING

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

■When folding the rear seat-backs down
- Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving.
- Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.
- Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the luggage compartment while driving.
- Do not allow children to enter the luggage compartment.
- Do not operate the rear seat if it is occupied.
● Be careful not to get feet or hands caught in the moving parts or joints of the seats during operation.
- Do not allow children to operate the seat.
■After returning the rear seat-back to the upright position
● Make sure that the seatback is securely locked in position by lightly pushing it back and forth. If the seatback is not securely locked, the red marking will be visible. Make sure that the red marking is not visible.

Diagram showing car seatbelt switch and no stop sign in a vehicle, with magnified view of the switch being lifted.

- Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.

Driving position memory\*

*: If equipped

This feature automatically adjusts the driver's seat to suit your preferences.

Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver's seat) can be recorded and recalled by pressing a button.

Two different driving positions can be recorded into memory.

Each electronic key can be registered to recall your preferred driving position.

Recording/recalling a driving position

■Recording procedure

1 Check that the shift lever is in P.
2 Turn the power switch to ON.
3 Adjust the driver's seat to the desired positions.
4 While pressing the "SET" button, or within 3 seconds after the "SET" button is pressed, press button "1" or "2" until the buzzer sounds.

If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwrit-

ten.

1 2 SET

■Recall procedure

1 Check that the shift lever is in P.
2 Turn the power switch to ON.
3 Press one of the buttons for the driving position you want to recall until the buzzer sounds.

1 2 SET

■To stop the position recall operation part-way through

Perform any of the following:

- Press the "SET" button.

- Press button "1" or "2".

- Operate any of the seat adjustment switches.

■ Seat positions that can be memorized (→P.153)

The adjusted positions other than the position adjusted by lumbar support switch can be recorded.

■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the power switch to OFF

Recorded seat positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver's door is opened and another 60 seconds after it is closed again.

In order to correctly use the driving position memory function

If a seat position is already in the furthest possible position and the seat is operated in the same direction, the recorded position may be slightly different when it is recalled.

■When recalling the driving position

Take care when recalling the driving position so that the head restraint does not touch the ceiling.

■If the 12-volt battery is disconnected

The memorized positions are erased.

■When the recorded seat position cannot be recalled

The seat position may not be recalled in some situations when the seat position is recorded in a certain range. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

■Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.

Registering/recall/cancel- ing a driving position to an electronic key (mem- ory recall function)

■Registering procedure

Record your driving position to button "1" or "2" before performing the following:

Carry only the key you want to register, and then close the driver's door.

If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be recorded properly.

1 Check that the shift lever is in P.
2 Turn the power switch to ON.
3 Recall the driving position that you want to record.
4 While pressing the recalled button, press and hold the door lock switch (either lock or unlock) until the buzzer sounds.

If the button could not be registered, the buzzer sounds continuously for approximately 3 seconds.

1 2 SET

■Recall procedure

Make sure that the doors are

locked before recalling the driving position. Carry the electronic key that has been registered to the driving position, and then unlock and open the driver's door using the smart key system or wireless remote control.

The driving position will move to the recorded position.

If the driving position is in a position that has already been recorded, the seat will not move.

■Cancelation procedure

Carry only the key you want to cancel and then close the driver's door.

If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be canceled properly.

1 Check that the shift lever is in P.
2 Turn the power switch to ON.
3 While pressing the "SET" button, press and hold the door lock switch (either lock or unlock) until the buzzer sounds twice.

If the button could not be canceled, the buzzer sounds continuously for approximately 3 seconds.

■Recalling the driving position using the memory recall function

● Different driving positions can be registered for each electronic key. Therefore, the driving position that is recalled may be different depending on the key being carried.
- If a door other than the driver's

door is unlocked with smart key system, the driving position cannot be recalled. In this case, press the driving position button which has been set.

Customization

Settings (e.g. the unlock door settings of the memory recall function) can be customized. (Customizable features: →P.712)

Head restraints

Head restraints are provided for all seats.

WARNING

■Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

• Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
• Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
  ● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position.
• Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

Vertical adjustment

Front seats

1 2 A

1 Up

Pull the head restraints up.

2 Down

Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button

A.

■ Center rear seat

1 2 A

1 Up

Pull the head restraints up.

2 Down

Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button

A.

■Outboard rear seats

Head restraints cannot be adjusted.

■Adjusting the height of the head restraints (front seats)

Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

Side profile illustration of a person with shoulder and arm anatomy, showing anatomical alignment (no text or symbols)

■Adjusting the center rear seat head restraint

Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.

Removing the head restraints

Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button A.

If the head restraint touches the ceiling, making the removal difficult, change the seat height or angle. (→P.153)

A

Installing the head restraints

■Front and center rear seats

Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position.

Press and hold the lock release button A when lowering the head restraint.

Diagram showing a sewing machine head with a pink downward arrow and labeled component 'A'

■Outboard rear seats

Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lowest lock position.

Illustration of a gray electronic component with two legs and a pink downward arrow pointing to its base (no text or symbols)

Steering wheel

Adjustment procedure

1 Hold the steering wheel and push the lever down.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel, showing steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols)

2 Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically.

After adjustment, pull the lever up to secure the steering wheel.

Diagram of a car's steering wheel and dashboard with three pink arrows indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■Caution while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■After adjusting the steering wheel

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident, and resulting in death or serious injury. Also, the horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.

Sounding the horn

To sound the horn, press on or close to the mark.

Interior view of a car showing steering wheel and dashboard with a highlighted directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Inside rear view mir- ror\*

*: If equipped

The rear view mirror's position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view.

Adjusting the height of rear view mirror

The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture.

Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down.

Diagram showing a hand holding a tool interacting with a shaded object, with a pink double-headed arrow indicating vertical displacement (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■Caution while driving

Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving. Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

Anti-glare function (vehicles with manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror)

Reflected light from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by operating the lever.

1 2

1 Normal position
2 Anti-glare position

Anti-glare function (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror)

Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind, the reflected light is automatically reduced.

Changing automatic anti-glare function mode on/off

When the automatic anti-glare function is in ON mode, the indicator A illuminates.

The function will set to ON mode each time the power switch is turned to ON.

Pressing the button turns the function to OFF mode. (The indicator

A also turns off.)

▶ Vehicles without garage door opener

A

▶ Vehicles with garage door opener

A

■To prevent sensor error (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror)

To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them.

▶ Vehicles without garage door opener

Diagram showing a car rearview mirror with a tool inserted, and its side view with arrows indicating force or motion (no text or symbols)

▶ Vehicles with garage door opener

Line drawing of a device with a handle and two views of the lid (no text or symbols)

Digital Rear-view Mirror

*: If equipped

The Digital Rear-view Mirror is a system that uses the camera on the rear of the vehicle and displays its image on the display of the Digital Rear-view Mirror.

The Digital Rear-view Mirror can be changed between optical mirror mode and digital mirror mode by operating the lever.

The Digital Rear-view Mirror allows the driver to see the rear view despite obstructions, such as the head restraints or luggage, ensuring rear visibility. Also, the rear seats are not displayed and privacy of the passengers is enhanced.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■Before using the Digital Rear-view Mirror

● Make sure to adjust the mirror before driving. (→P.167)
- Change to optical mirror mode and adjust the position of the Digital Rear-view Mirror so that the area behind your vehicle can be viewed properly.

• Change to digital mirror mode and adjust the display settings.
  As the range of the image displayed by the Digital Rear-view Mirror is different from that of the optical mirror, make sure to check this difference before driving.

System components

Diagram showing car interior control panel with labeled buttons A, B, C, D and connection points E

A Icon display area

Displays icons, adjusting gauge, etc. ( P.167)
B Lever

Operate to change between digital mirror mode and optical mirror mode.

C Menu button

Press to display the icon display area and select the item you want to adjust.

D Select/adjust button

Press to change the setting of the item you want to adjust.

E Camera indicator

Indicates that the camera is operating normally.

Changing modes

Operate the lever to change between digital mirror mode and optical mirror mode.

Diagram showing a car interior component with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement or rotation.

1 Digital mirror mode

Displays an image of the area behind the vehicle.

will illuminate in this mode.

2 Optical mirror mode

Turns off the display of the Digital Rear-view Mirror allows it to be used as an optical mirror.

■Digital mirror mode operating condition

The power switch is turned to ON.

When the power switch is changed from ON to OFF or ACC, the image will disappear after several seconds.

■When using the Digital Rear-view Mirror in digital mirror mode

- If it is difficult to see the displayed image due to light reflected off the Digital Rear-view Mirror, the camera being dirty or covered with water droplets, or if lights of a vehicle behind your vehicle or the displayed image are bothering you, change to optical mirror mode.

- When the back door is open, the Digital Rear-view Mirror image may not display properly. Before

driving, make sure the back door is closed.

• If the display is difficult to see due to reflected light, close the sun-shade for the moon roof (if equipped) or the electronic sun-shade for the panoramic moon roof (if equipped).
  ● Any of the following conditions may occur when driving in the dark, such as at night. None of them indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Colors of objects in the displayed image may differ from their actual color.
• Depending on the height of the lights of the vehicle behind, the area around the vehicle may appear white and blurry.
  • Automatic image adjustment for brighter surrounding image may cause flickering.

If it is difficult to see the displayed image or flickering bothers you, change to optical mirror mode.

●The Digital Rear-view Mirror may become hot while it is in digital mirror mode.
This is not a malfunction.
●Depending on your physical condition or age, it may take longer than usual to focus on the displayed image. In this case, change to optical mirror mode.
- Do not let passengers stare at the displayed image when the vehicle is being driven, as doing so may cause motion sickness.

■When the system malfunctions

If the symbol shown in the illustration is displayed when using the Digital Rear-view Mirror in digital mirror mode, the system may be malfunctioning. The symbol will disappear in a few seconds. Operate the lever, change to optical mirror mode and have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Diagram showing a door panel with a cursor pointing at the bottom panel and a button, no text or symbols present.

Adjusting the mirror

■Adjusting the mirror height

The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture.

Change to optical mirror mode, adjusting the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down.

Illustration of a car seatbelt buckle being adjusted, showing no text or symbols

■Display settings (digital mirror mode)

Settings of the display in the digital mirror mode, on/off operation of the automatic anti-glare function, etc. can be changed.

1 Press the menu button.

The icons will be displayed.

Diagram of a car front panel with directional control buttons and a pink arrow pointing to the bottom panel.

2 Press the menu button repeatedly and select the item you want to adjust.

3 Press or to change the setting.

The icons will disappear if a button is not operated for approximately 5 seconds or more.

Icons	Settings
	Select to adjust the brightness of the display.
	Select to adjust the area displayed up/down.
	Select to adjust the area displayed to the left/right.
	Select to adjust the angle of the displayed image.
	Select to zoom in/out the displayed image.
Icons Settings
	Select to enable/disable the automatic anti-glare function.*Responding to the brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind, the reflected light is automatically adjusted.The automatic anti-glare function is enabled each time the power switch is changed to ON.
	Select to displayHomeLink® Training Tutorial to assist customers to train their Garage Door Opener System. (→P.557)
	Select to change the language of the Homelink® Training Tutorial.

*: This is a function for the optical mirror mode, however, the setting can also be changed while using the digital mirror mode.

■Enabling/disabling the automatic anti-glare function (optical mirror mode)

The automatic anti-glare function in the optical mirror mode can be enabled/disabled. The setting can be changed in both the digital mirror mode and the optical mirror mode.

▶ When using the digital mirror mode

→P.167

▶ When using the optical mirror mode

1 Press the menu button.

The icons will be displayed.

2 Press the menu button repeatedly and select

The setting display will be displayed.

OFF ON

3 Press or to enable (ON)/disable (OFF) the automatic anti-glare function.

The icons will disappear if a button is not operated for approximately 5 seconds or more.

■Adjusting the display (digital mirror mode)

• If the displayed image is adjusted, it may appear distorted. This is not a malfunction.
• If the brightness of the Digital Rear-view Mirror is set too high, it may cause eye strain. Adjust the Digital Rear-view Mirror to an appropriate brightness. If your eyes become tired, change to optical mirror mode.
  ●The brightness of the Digital Rearview Mirror will change automatically according to the brightness of the area in front of your vehicle.

■To prevent the light sensors from malfunctioning

To prevent the light sensors from malfunctioning, do not touch or cover them.

Diagram showing a car interior with a hand pressing down on the windshield and a hand holding a device, alongside a close-up of the dashboard (no text or symbols present)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■While driving

• Do not adjust the position of the Digital Rear-view Mirror or adjust the display settings while driving.
  Stop the vehicle and operate the Digital Rear-view Mirror control switches.
  Failure to do so may cause a steering wheel operation error, resulting in an unexpected accident.

●Always pay attention to the vehicle's surroundings.

The size of the vehicles and other objects may look different when in digital mirror mode and optical mirror mode.

When backing up, make sure to directly check the safety of the area around your vehicle, especially behind the vehicle.

Additionally, if a vehicle approaches from the rear in the dark, such as at night, the surrounding area may appear dim.

■To prevent causes of fire

If the driver continues using the Digital Rear-view Mirror while smoke or odor comes from the mirror, it may result in fire. Stop using the system immediately and contact your Toyota dealer.

Cleaning the Digital Rear-view Mirror

■Cleaning the mirror surface

If the mirror surface is dirty, the image on the display may be difficult to see.

Clean the mirror surface gently using a soft dry cloth.

■Cleaning the camera

If the camera lens is dirty, the displayed image may not be clear. In this case, clean it with a soft cloth dampened with water or a swab.

The camera

The camera for the Digital Rear-view Mirror is located as shown.

Line drawing of a vehicle's front and side views, showing a close-up of the dashboard handle (no text or symbols)

The cooling fan

There is a cooling fan in the Digital Rear-view Mirror. Cooling fan sounds may be heard when using the system.

NOTICE

■To prevent the Digital Rear-view Mirror from malfunctioning
- Do not use detergents, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol to clean the mirror. They may discolor, deteriorate or damage the mirror surface.
- Do not smoke, use matches, use cigarette lighters or allow open flames near the mirror. It may damage the mirror or cause a fire.
- Do not remove, disassemble or modify the mirror.
■To prevent the camera from malfunctioning
- Observe the following precautions, otherwise the Digital Rear-view Mirror may not operate properly.
- Do not strike or hit the camera or subject it to a strong impact, as the camera installation position and angle may be changed.
- Do not remove, disassemble or modify the camera.
- Do not allow an organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coating to adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.

• When cleaning the camera lens, wipe the camera lens with a damp soft cloth. Do not strongly rub the camera lens, as it may be scratched and will not be able to transmit a clear image.
• When applying colored film (including transparent film) to the rear window glass, do not apply it to the area in front of the camera. If film is applied to the area in front of the camera, the image from the camera may not display properly.
• Do not subject the camera to a strong impact as this could cause a malfunction. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not block the vent holes of the mirror. Otherwise, the mirror may be hot, leading to a malfunction or a fire.

Line drawing of a remote control panel with arrows indicating motion or force (no text or symbols)

If you notice any symptoms

If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the following table for the likely cause and the solution.

If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Symptom Likely cause Solution
The image is difficult to see.	The mirror surface is dirty.	Clean the mirror surface gently, using a soft dry cloth.
	Sunlight or headlights are shining directly into the Digital Rear-view Mirror.	Change to optical mirror mode.(If the light is coming through the moon roof [if equipped] or panoramic moon roof [if equipped], close the sunshade or electronic sunshade.)
	The vehicle is in a dark area.The vehicle is near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant, or other location where strong radio waves or electrical noise may be present.The temperature around the camera is extremely high/low.The ambient temperature is extremely low.It is raining or humid.Sunlight or headlights are shining directly into the camera lens.The vehicle is under fluorescent lights, sodium lights, mercury lights, etc.Exhaust gas is obstructing the camera.	Change to optical mirror mode.(Change back to digital mirror mode when the conditions have improved.)
	Foreign matters such as water droplets or dust is on the camera lens.	Wipe the camera lens with a damp soft cloth.
Symptom Likely cause Solution
The image is difficult to see.	The luggage in the luggage compartment is reflected off the rear window glass and obstructing the camera.	· Change to optical mirror mode.· Move the luggage to a position where it does not obstruct the camera or cover it with a black cloth to reduce the amount it is reflected off the rear window glass.
	The rear window glass is fogged up.	Change to optical mirror mode. After defogging the rear window using the rear window defogger (→P.526), use the digital mirror mode again.
	The outside of the rear window glass is dirty.	Use the rear window wiper to remove dirt.
	The inside of the rear window glass is dirty.	Wipe the inside of rear window glass with a damp soft cloth.
The image is out of alignment.	The back door is not fully closed.	Fully close the back door.
	The camera or its surrounding area has received a strong impact.	Change to optical mirror mode and have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
The display is dim and displayed.	The system may be malfunctioning.	Change to optical mirror mode and have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
goes off.
is displayed.	The Digital Rear-view Mirror is extremely hot.(The display will gradually become more dim. If the temperature continues to increase, the Digital Rear-view Mirror will turn off.)	Reducing the cabin temperature is recommended to reduce the temperature of the mirror.(will disappear when the mirror becomes cool.)If does not disappear even though the mirror is cool, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
The lever cannot be operated properly.	The lever may be malfunctioning.	Change to optical mirror mode and have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.(To change to optical mirror mode, press and hold the menu button for approximately 10 seconds.)

Outside rear view mirrors

The rear view mirror's position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view.

■Defogging the mirrors (if equipped)

The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. (→P.526)

WARNING

■ Important points while driving

Observe the following precautions while driving.

Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

- Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

- Do not drive with the mirrors folded.

● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.

■When the mirror defoggers are operating (if equipped)

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.

Adjustment procedure

1 To select a mirror to adjust, press the switch.

A B

A Left

B Right

2 To adjust the mirror, press the switch.

D A C R B

A Up

B Right

C Down

D Left

■Mirror angle can be adjusted when

The power switch is in ACC or ON.

Folding the mirrors

Push the mirror back in the direction of the vehicle's rear.

Diagram showing a car door seatbelt with a pink curved arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■When a mirror is moving

To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught by the moving mirror.

Power windows

Opening and closing the power windows

The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.

Operating the switch moves the side windows as follows:

1 2 3 4

1 Closing
2 One-touch closing *
3 Opening
4 One-touch opening *

*: To stop the side window partway, operate the switch in the opposite direction.

■The power windows can be operated when

The power switch is in ON.

- Operating the power windows after turning the hybrid system off

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the power switch is turned to ACC or OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

Jam protection function

If an object becomes jammed

between the side window and the window frame while the side window is closing, side window movement is stopped and the side window is opened slightly.

■ Catch protection function

If an object becomes caught between the door and side window while the side window is opening, side window movement is stopped.

■When the power window cannot be opened or closed

When the jam protection function or catch protection function operates unusually and the side window cannot be opened and closed, perform the following operations with the power window switch of that door.

- Stop the vehicle. With the power switch in ON, within 4 seconds of the jam protection function or catch protection function activating, continuously operate the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction or one-touch opening direction so that the side window can be opened and closed.

- If the side window cannot be opened and closed even when performing the above operations, perform the following procedure for function initialization.

1 Turn the power switch to ON.
2 Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction and completely close the side window.
3 Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pulling the switch in the one-touch closing direction, and hold it there for approximately 6 seconds or more.
4 Press and hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening direction. After the side window is completely opened, continue holding the switch for an additional 1 second or more.

5 Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pushing the switch in the one-touch opening direction, and hold it there for approximately 4 seconds or more.
6 Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction again. After the side window is completely closed, continue holding the switch for a further 1 second or more.

If you release the switch while the side window is moving, start again from the beginning.

If the side window reverses and cannot be fully closed or opened, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

■Door lock linked power window operation

●The power windows can be opened and closed using the key (vehicles without smart key system) or mechanical key (vehicles with smart key system). ^* (→P.128, 670)
●The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control.* (→P.127)
● Vehicles with alarm: The alarm may be triggered if the alarm is set and the power window is closed using the door lock linked power window operation function. (→P.84)

*: These settings must be customized at your Toyota dealer.

■Power window open reminder function

▶ Vehicles without smart key system The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display when the key has been removed from the power switch and the driver's door is opened with the power windows open.

▶ Vehicles with smart key system The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display when the power switch is turned to OFF and the driver's door is opened with the power windows open.

Customization

Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (Customizable features: →P.712)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ Closing the power windows

The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the operation for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the power windows. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it is recommended to use the window lock switch. (→P.178)
- Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a power window is being operated.

Safety warning illustration showing a hand holding a fuse with a 'no' symbol indicating no hazard, alongside a vehicle interior scene.

WARNING

- When using the wireless remote control, key or mechanical key and operating the power windows, operate the power window after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the side window. Also, do not let a child operate the power window by the wireless remote control, key or mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the power window.

- When exiting the vehicle, turn the power switch to OFF, carry the key and exit the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.

■Jam protection function

●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.

The jam protection function may not work if something gets jammed just before the side window is fully closed. Be careful not to get any part of your body jammed in the side window.

■ Catch protection function

●Never use any part of your body or clothing to intentionally activate the catch protection function.

●The catch protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the side window is fully opened. Be careful not to get any part of your body or clothing caught in the side window.

Preventing accidental operation (window lock switch)

This function can be used to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.

Press the switch.

The indicator A will come on and the passenger windows will be locked.

The passenger windows can still be opened and closed using the driver's switch even if the lock switch is on.

A

■The window lock switch can be operated when

The power switch is in ON.

■When the 12-volt battery is disconnected

The window lock switch is disabled. If necessary, press the window lock switch after reconnecting the 12-volt battery.

Moon roof\*

*: If equipped

Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt it up and down.

Operating the moon roof

■ Opening and closing

Diagram showing a device's door and close-up of the open status card with directional arrows indicating movement.

1 Opens the moon roof*

The moon roof stops slightly before the fully open position to reduce wind noise.

Press the switch again to fully open the moon roof.

2 Closes the moon roof*

*: Lightly press either side of the moon roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.

■Tilting up and down

Diagram showing a device with labeled parts and directional arrows, including 'UP DOWN' and numbered annotations 1 and 2.

1 Tilts the moon roof up *
2 Tilts the moon roof down *

*: Lightly press either side of the moon roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.

■The moon roof can be operated when

The power switch is in ON.

■Operating the moon roof after turning the hybrid system off

The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the power switch is turned to ACC or OFF. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

Jam protection function

If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.

Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sun-shade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.

■ Door lock linked moon roof operation

●The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. ^* ( P.670)
●The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control.* (→P.127)
● Vehicles with alarm: The alarm may be triggered if the alarm is set and the moon roof is closed using the door lock linked moon roof operation function. (→P.84)
*: These settings must be customized at your Toyota dealer.

■When the moon roof does not close normally

Perform the following procedure:

1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Press and hold the "CLOSE" switch.*

The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds. Then it will close again and stop at the completely closed position.

3 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.

*: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning.

If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

■If the moon roof does not move normally

If the moon roof does not open or close normally or the automatic opening function does not operate, perform the following initialization procedure.

1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Press and hold the "DOWN" switch.*

The moon roof will stop at the tilt-up position. After that, it will open, close, tilt up, tilt down, and stop at the fully closed position.

3 Confirm that the moon roof has completely stopped and release the switch.

*: If you release the switch while the moon roof is moving, perform the procedure again from the beginning.

If, after performing the above procedures correctly, the moon roof still does not open or close normally or

the automatic opening function does not operate, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

■Moon roof open reminder function

The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display when the power switch is turned to OFF and the driver's door is opened with the moon roof open.

Customization

Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (Customizable features: →P.712)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

■ Opening the moon roof

- Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or head outside the vehicle while it is moving.

- Do not sit on top of the moon roof.

■ Opening and closing the moon roof

●The driver is responsible for moon roof opening and closing operations. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the moon roof. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the moon roof.

WARNING

- Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.

Diagram illustrating a device safety scenario with no protection symbols and labeled diagrams showing hand positioning and cleaning steps.

- When using the wireless remote control or mechanical key and operating the moon roof, operate the moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the moon roof. Also, do not let a child operate moon roof by the wireless remote control or mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the moon roof.

- When exiting the vehicle, turn the power switch to OFF, carry the key and exit the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.

■Jam protection function

●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.

The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof is fully closed. Also, the jam protection function is not designed to operate while the switch is being pressed. Take care so that your fingers, etc. do not get caught.

Panoramic moon roof\*

*: If equipped

Use the overhead switches to operate the panoramic moon roof and electronic sunshade.

Operating the electronic sunshade and panoramic moon roof

■ Opening and closing the electronic sunshade

Diagram showing car interior control panel with directional arrows and labeled parts 1 and 2

1 Opens the electronic sun-shade*

Slide and hold the switch backward. The electronic sunshade will fully open automatically.

2 Closes the electronic sun-shade*

Slide and hold the switch forward. The electronic sunshade will fully close automatically.

If the panoramic moon roof is not fully closed, it will close fully before the electronic sunshade closes.

*: Quickly slide and release the

switch in either direction to stop the electronic sunshade partway.

■Tilting the panoramic moon roof up and down

Press the switch to tilt the

panoramic moon roof up.*

When the panoramic moon roof is tilted up, the electronic sunshade will open to the half-open position of the roof.

*: Lightly press the switch again to stop the panoramic moon roof partway.

Press and hold the switch to tilt the panoramic moon roof down.

The panoramic moon roof can be tilted down only when it is in the tilt-up position.

Diagram showing car interior and dashboard shift with labeled components and directional arrow

■ Opening and closing the panoramic moon roof

Opens the panoramic moon roof*

Slide and hold the switch

backward. The panoramic moon roof and electronic sunshade will open automatically.

The panoramic moon roof can be opened from the tilt-up position.

*: Quickly slide and release the

switch in either direction to stop the panoramic moon roof partway.

Diagram showing car seatbelt adjustment with directional arrow and magnified view of seatbelt component

Closes the panoramic moon roof

Slide and hold the switch forward. The panoramic moon roof will fully close automatically.

Diagram showing car interior and seat assembly with a highlighted component and directional arrow indicating movement

■The panoramic moon roof can be operated when

The power switch is in ON.

■Operating the panoramic moon roof after turning the hybrid system off

The panoramic moon roof and electronic sunshade can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the power switch is turned to ACC or OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

Jam protection function

If an object is detected between the panoramic moon roof and the frame in the following situations, travel is stopped and the panoramic moon roof opens slightly.

●The panoramic moon roof is closing or tilting down.
●The electronic sunshade is closing.

■ Closing both the panoramic moon roof and electronic sun-shade

Slide the switch forward.

The electronic sunshade will close to the half-open position and pause. The panoramic moon roof will then fully close. Then the electronic sun-shade will fully close.

■ Door lock linked panoramic moon roof operation

●The panoramic moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.* (→P.670)

●The panoramic moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control. ^* (→P.127)

● Vehicles with alarm: The alarm may be triggered if the alarm is set and the panoramic moon roof is closed using the door lock linked panoramic moon roof operation function. (→P.84)

*: These settings must be customized at your Toyota dealer.

■When the panoramic moon roof or electronic sunshade does not close normally

Perform the following procedure:

1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Turn the power switch to ON.

3 Slide and hold the switch

or switch forward. Continue sliding and holding the switch for approximately 10 seconds after the panoramic moon roof or electronic sunshade closes and reopens. The panoramic moon roof and electronic sunshade will start to close.*

4 Check that the panoramic moon roof and electronic sunshade are fully closed and release the switch.

*: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning.

If the panoramic moon roof or electronic sunshade does not fully close even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

■Panoramic moon roof open reminder function

A buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display when the power switch is turned to OFF and the driver's door is opened with the panoramic moon roof open.

Customization

Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (Customizable features: →P.712)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ Opening and closing the electronic sunshade

- Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when the electronic sunshade is being operated.

Illustration showing a hand holding a phone with a 'No' symbol, next to an icon of a person falling into the phone.

- Do not let a child operate the electronic sunshade. Closing the electronic sunshade on someone can cause death or serious injury.

■ Opening the panoramic moon roof

- Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or head outside the vehicle while it is moving.

- Do not sit on top of the panoramic moon roof.

■ Opening and closing the panoramic moon roof

The driver is responsible for panoramic moon roof opening and closing operations. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the panoramic moon roof. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the panoramic moon roof.

WARNING

- Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when the panoramic moon roof is being operated.

Illustration showing two scenarios of a person experiencing a collision or explosion, with one scenario marked by a 'no' symbol and the other by a broken-out device.

- When using the wireless remote control or mechanical key and operating the panoramic moon roof, operate the panoramic moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the panoramic moon roof. Also, do not let a child operate panoramic moon roof by the wireless remote control or mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the panoramic moon roof.

- When exiting the vehicle, turn the power switch to OFF, carry the key and exit the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.

Jam protection function

●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the panoramic moon roof or electronic sunshade is fully closed. Also, the jam protection function is not designed to operate while the switch is being pressed. Take care so that your fingers, etc. do not get caught.

■To prevent burns or injuries

Do not touch the area between the underside of the panoramic moon roof and the electronic sun-shade. Your hand may get caught and you could injure yourself. Also, if the vehicle is left in direct sunlight for a long time, the underside of the panoramic moon roof could become very hot and could cause burns.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the panoramic moon roof

Before opening the panoramic moon roof, make sure that there are no foreign objects, such as stones or ice, around the opening.

- Do not hit the surface or edge of the panoramic moon roof with hard objects.

■After the vehicle has been washed or rained on

Before opening the panoramic moon roof, wipe any water off the panoramic moon roof. Otherwise, water may enter the cabin when the panoramic moon roof is opened.

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle..... 189

Cargo and luggage ..... 196

Vehicle load limits ..... 199

Trailer towing 200

Dinghy towing 209

4-2. Driving procedures

Power (ignition) switch (vehicles without smart key system).... 210

Power (ignition) switch (vehicles with smart key system).... 212

EV drive mode ...... 217

Hybrid transmission .... 219

Turn signal lever ...... 223

Parking brake...... 224

Brake Hold 227

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch...... 229

AHB (Automatic High Beam).... 232

Fog light switch ...... 235

Windshield wipers and washer.... 236

Rear window wiper and washer.... 239

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap 241

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Toyota Safety Sense 2.0 244

PCS (Pre-Collision System) 250

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) 258

RSA (Road Sign Assist) 268

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range 271

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) 282

Intuitive parking assist. 291

PKSB (Parking Support Brake).... 298

Parking Support Brake function (static objects) .... 303

Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles).... 309

Rear view monitor system 313

Toyota parking assist moni- tor 321

Panoramic view monitor 334

Driving mode select switch 366

Trail Mode 367

Driving assist systems. 369

4-6. Driving tips

Hybrid vehicle driving tips 376

Winter driving tips ..... 378

Utility vehicle precautions 381

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:

Driving procedure

■Starting the hybrid system

→P.210, 212

Driving

1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. ( P.219)

2 Release the parking brake. (→P.224)

If the parking brake is in automatic mode, the parking brake is released automatically when shifting the shift lever to any position other than P. ( P.224)

3 Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

■Stopping

1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

2 If necessary, set the parking brake. ( P.224)

If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P. ( P.219)

■Parking the vehicle

1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

2 Set the parking brake ( P.224), and shift the shift lever to P ( P.219).

3 Turn the power switch to OFF to stop the hybrid system.

4 Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.

If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.

■ Starting off on a steep uphill

1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. ( P.219)

2 Pull the parking brake switch and parking brake is set manually. (→P.224)

3 Release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

Parking brake automatic release function ( P.225)

■When starting off on a uphill

The hill-start assist control will activate. ( P.369)

For fuel-efficient driving

Keep in mind that hybrid vehicles are similar to conventional vehicles, and it is necessary to refrain from activities such as sudden acceleration, etc. Refer to “Hybrid vehicle driving tips”. (→P.376)

■Driving in the rain

- Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road could be slip-

pery.

●Drive carefully when it starts to rain, as the road surface could be especially slippery.
●Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.

■ ECO Accelerator Guidance ( P.105)

It is easier to drive in an Eco-friendly manner by driving while referring to the ECO Accelerator Guidance display. Also, by using the ECO Accelerator Guidance it is easier to increase the “Eco Score” evaluation.

- When starting off: While staying within the ECO Accelerator Guidance range, gradually depress the accelerator pedal and accelerate to the desired speed. If excessive acceleration is avoided, the “Start” score will increase.

- When driving: After accelerating to the desired speed, release the accelerator pedal and drive at a stable speed within the ECO Accelerator Guidance range. By keeping the vehicle within the ECO Accelerator Guidance range, the “Cruise” score will increase.

- When stopping: When stopping the vehicle, early releasing the accelerator pedal will cause the “Stop” score to increase.

■Restraining the hybrid system output (Brake Override System)

• When the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, the hybrid system output may be restrained.
  ●A warning message is displayed on the multi-information display while the system is operating.

$$ (\rightarrow \mathrm{P}. 6 4 8) $$

■Restraining sudden start (Drive-Start Control)

• When the following unusual operation is performed, the hybrid system output may be restrained.
• When the shift lever is shifted from R to D, D to R, N to R, P to D ^ , or P to R ^ (D includes S) with the accelerator pedal depressed, a warning message appears on the multi-information display. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed too much while the vehicle is in reverse.
  *: Depending on the situation, the shift lever may not be changed.
  ●While Drive-Start Control is being activated, your vehicle may have trouble escaping from the mud or fresh snow. In such case, deactivate TRAC (→P.370) to cancel Drive-Start Control so that the vehicle may be able to escape from the mud or fresh snow.
  ●Drive-Start Control does not work when Trail Mode is turned on.

■Breaking in your new Toyota

To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:

●For the first 200 miles (300 km): Avoid sudden stops.
●For the first 500 miles (800 km): Do not tow a trailer.
●For the first 600 miles (1000 km):
- Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
- Avoid sudden acceleration.
- Do not drive continuously in low gears.
- Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. ( P.685)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the "READY" indicator is illuminated. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.

■When driving the vehicle

• Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.

The driver should pay extra attention to pedestrians when the vehicle is powered only by the electric motor (traction motor). As there is no engine noise, the pedestrians may mis-judge the vehicle's movement. Even though the vehicle is equipped with the vehicle proximity notification system, drive with care as pedestrians in the vicinity may still not notice the vehicle if the surrounding area is noisy.
- Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials such as leaves, paper or rags. The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
During normal driving, do not turn off the hybrid system. Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, however, power assist to the steering will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer smoothly, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. In the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way: P.635
- Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill. Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. ( P.219)

WARNING

• Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving. Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Always check that all passengers' arms, head or other parts of their body are not outside the vehicle.

- Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.

■When driving on slippery road surfaces

● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle.

● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid.

● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected.

■When shifting the shift lever

• Do not let the vehicle roll backward while a forward driving position is selected, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R. Doing so may result in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
• Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
• Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
• Do not shift the shift lever to a driving position while the vehicle is moving backward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
• Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the hybrid system. Engine braking is not available with the hybrid system disengaged.
• Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

■If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)

Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.

■When the vehicle is stopped

• Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily.
  If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.

In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while stopped with the "READY" indicator is illuminated, and apply the parking brake as necessary.

- If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely apply the parking brake as needed.

● Avoid revving or racing the engine.

Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby.

■When the vehicle is parked

- Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun.

Doing so may result in the following:

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.

- The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.

- Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components.

- Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.

- Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.

- Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.

WARNING

● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the hybrid system and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the "READY" indicator is illuminated.
If the vehicle is parked with the shift lever in P but the parking brake is not set, the vehicle may start to move, possibly leading to an accident.

- Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the “READY” indicator is illuminated or immediately after turning the hybrid system off. Doing so may cause burns.

■When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the hybrid system off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to hybrid system overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.

When braking

• When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
  Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.

• If the electronically controlled brake system does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking. In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

●The brake system consists of 2 or more individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

■If the vehicle becomes stuck

Do not spin the wheels excessively when any of the tires is up in the air, or the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may damage the driveline components or propel the vehicle forward or backward, causing an accident.

NOTICE

■When driving the vehicle

• Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving, as this may restrain the hybrid system output.
• Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.

NOTICE

■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

- Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an extended period of time.

Doing so may damage the power steering motor.

- When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

■If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations.

- It may be difficult to control your vehicle.

●The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.

●The vehicle will lean abnormally.

Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

Information on what to do in case of a flat tire ( P.658)

■When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain, etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:

Engine stalling

●Short in electrical components

●Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following:

●Brake function

● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, hybrid transaxle (front and rear), etc.

● Lubricant condition for the bearings and suspension joints (where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

■When parking the vehicle

Always set the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.

Cargo and luggage

Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load.

WARNING

■Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compartment:

●Receptacles containing gasoline

Aerosol cans

■Storage precautions

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, may block the driver's vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or passengers, possibly causing an accident.

● Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possible.

- Do not stack anything in the luggage compartment higher than the seatbacks.

- Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations.

• At the feet of the driver

- On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)

- On the luggage cover (if equipped)

• On the instrument panel

- On the dashboard

• Secure all items in the occupant compartment.
• When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed directly behind the front seats.
  ●Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Capacity and distribution

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) - (Total weight of occupants)

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit —

(1) Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.

For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. (→P.199)

WARNING

■Capacity and distribution
- Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
Even if the total load of occupant' weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.

Calculation formula for your vehicle

graph TD
    A["Human Group 1"] --> B["Human Group 2"]
    B --> C["Output"]
    D["Human Group 3"] --> E["Human Group 4"]
    E --> F["Output"]
    G["Human Group 5"] --> H["Human Group 6"]
    H --> I["Output"]
    J["Human Group 7"] --> K["Human Group 8"]
    K --> L["Output"]
    M["Human Group 9"] --> N["Human Group 10"]
    N --> O["Output"]

A Cargo capacity
B Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) ( P.684)

When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are rid-ing in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows:

B^2 lb. (kg) - A ^1 lb. (kg) = C ^*3 lb. (kg)

*1:A = Weight of people
^2 :B = Total load capacity
^3 :C = Available cargo and luggage load

In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows:

C lb. (kg) - D ^4 lb. (kg) = E ^5 lb. (kg)

*4:D = Additional weight of people
^*5 :E = Available cargo and luggage

load

As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

• If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop the vehicle now and then during the trip to make sure the cargo remains in its place.
• Do not exceed 176.4 lb. (80 kg) cargo weight on the roof luggage carrier.

NOTICE

■When loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier (if equipped)

Be careful not to scratch the surface of the moon roof (if equipped) or the panoramic moon roof (if equipped).

WARNING

■When loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier (if equipped)

Observe the following precautions:

• Place the cargo so that its weight is distributed evenly between the front and rear axles.
• If loading long or wide cargo, never exceed the vehicle overall length or width. (→P.684)
  ●Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened on the roof luggage carrier.
• Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of gravity of the vehicle higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly and result in death or serious injury.

Vehicle load limits

Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, TWR (Trailer Weight Rating) and cargo capacity.

● Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): →P.684

Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.

● Seating capacity: →P.684

Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

● TWR (Trailer Weight Rating): →P.204, 684

TWR means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) that your vehicle is able to tow.

- Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.

■ Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. ( P.605)

WARNING

■Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle. It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident.

Trailer towing

Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-and-load-carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer can have an adverse impact on handling, performance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety and the safety of others, you must not overload your vehicle or trailer. You must also ensure that you are using appropriate towing equipment, that the towing equipment has been installed correctly and used properly, and that you employ the requisite driving habits.

Vehicle-trailer stability and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake performance and setting, trailer brakes, the hitch and hitch systems (if equipped).

To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with your trailer's characteristics and operating conditions.

Toyota warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing a trailer for commercial purposes.

Contact your Toyota dealer for further information about additional requirements such as a towing kit, etc.

Before towing

Check that the following conditions are met:

• Ensure that your vehicle's tires are properly inflated. (→P.690)
• Trailer tires are inflated according to the trailer manufacturer's recommendation.
  ● All trailer lights work as required by law.
  ● All lights work each time you connect them.
  ●The trailer ball is set at the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.
  ●The trailer is level when it is hitched. Do not drive if the trailer is not level, and check for improper tongue weight, overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes.
  ●The trailer cargo is securely loaded.
  ●The rear view mirrors conform to all applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes.

WARNING

■Trailer towing precautions

To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with the trailer's characteristics and operating conditions. Failure to do so could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Vehicle stability and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake setting and performance, and the hitch. Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer.

■To avoid accident or injury

●Do not exceed the TWR, unbraked TWR, GCWR, GVWR or GAWR.
- Adjust the tongue weight within the appropriate range. Place heavier loads as close to the trailer axle as possible.

- Do not exceed 65 mph (104 km/h), the posted towing speed limit or the speed limit for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner's manual, whichever is lowest. Slow down sufficiently before making a turn, in cross winds, on wet or slippery surface, etc. to help avoid an accident. If you experience a vehicle-trailer instability from reducing a certain speed, slow down and make sure you keep your vehicle speed under the speed of which you experience the instability.

• Do not make jerky, abrupt or sharp turns.
• Do not apply the brakes suddenly as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.

- Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue weight capacities.

- Do not use dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range when towing.

● Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill grades. Do not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long downhill grades.

● Vehicle-trailer instability is more likely on steep long downhills. Before descending steep or long downhill grades, slow down and downshift. Do not make sudden downshifts when descending steep or long downhill grades. Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.

- Do not tow a trailer when the compact spare tire is installed on your vehicle.

■When towing a trailer

Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.

- If the gross trailer weight exceeds unbraked TWR, trailer brakes are required. Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.

- Never tap into your vehicle's hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehicle's braking effectiveness.

WARNING

● Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there is danger of the trailer wandering into another lane.

Towing related terms

■GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross combination weight. The gross combination weight is the sum of the total vehicle weight (including the occupants, cargo and any optional equipment installed on the vehicle) and the weight of the trailer being towed (including the cargo in the trailer).

Line drawing of a car on a platform with a speedometer, no text or symbols present

■GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross vehicle weight. The gross vehicle weight is the total weight of the vehicle. When towing a trailer, it is the sum of the vehicle weight (including the occupants, cargo and any optional

equipment installed on the vehicle) and the tongue weight.

Line drawing of a car on a platform with a speedometer and cargo container nearby (no text or symbols)

■ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross axle weight. The gross axle weight is the load placed on each axle (front and rear).

A B

A Front GAWR
B Rear GAWR

■TWR (Trailer Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross trailer weight. The gross trailer weight is the sum of the trailer weight and the weight of the cargo in the trailer.

TWR is calculated assuming

base vehicle with one driver, one front passenger, hitch and hitch systems (if required).

Additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle will reduce the trailer weight rating so as not to exceed GCWR, GVWR and GAWR.

Simple line drawing of a balance scale with a cart and pointer (no text or symbols)

A (With brakes)

■ Unbraked TWR (Unbraked Trailer Weight Rating)

The trailer weight rating for towing a trailer without a trailer service brake system.

Simple line drawing of a balance scale with a cart and pointer, no text or symbols present

A (Without brakes)

■Tongue Weight

The load placed on the trailer hitch ball. ( P.204)

Simple line drawing of a mechanical device with a dial indicator and a cart on a surface (no text or symbols)

Weight limits

● The gross trailer weight must never exceed 1750 lb. (795 kg).
- The gross combination weight must never exceed 6670 lb. (3025 kg).
- The gross vehicle weight must never exceed the GVWR indicated on the Certification Regulation Label.
- The gross axle weight on each axle must never exceed the GAWR indicated on the Certification Regulation Label.

Diagram of a car seatbelt buckle with a black arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols present)

- If the gross trailer weight is over the unbraked TWR, trailer service brakes are required.

GCWR, TWR and Unbraked TWR

Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross combination weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight are all within the limits.

GCWR\*

6670 lb. (3025 kg)

*: This model meets the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE International per SAE J2807.

TWR\*

1750 lb. (795 kg)

*: This model meets the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE International per SAE J2807.

■Unbraked TWR \*

1000 lb. (450 kg)

*: This model meets the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE International per SAE J2807.

Trailer Tongue Weight

● A recommended tongue weight varies in accordance with the types of trailers or towing as described below.
- To ensure the recommended values shown below, the trailer must be loaded by referring to the following instructions.
- Tongue Weight
The gross trailer weight should be

distributed so that the tongue weight is 9% to 11%.

(Tongue weight /Gross trailer weight x 100 = 9% to 11%)

A B

A Gross trailer weight
B Tongue weight

The gross trailer weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight can be measured with platform scales found at a highway weighing station, building supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc.

Hitch

Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities.

Toyota recommends the use of Toyota hitch/bracket for your vehicle. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

• If you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Toyota dealer.
• Use only a hitch that conforms to the gross trailer weight requirement of your vehicle.
  ● Follow the directions supplied

by the hitch manufacturer.

● Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coating of grease.
- Remove the hitch ball whenever you are not towing a trailer. Remove the trailer hitch if you do not need it. After removing the hitch, seal any mounting holes in the vehicle body to prevent entry of any substances into the vehicle.

WARNING

Hitch

Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a higher weight, the operator must determine the maximum weight rating of the particular hitch assembly and never exceed the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer-hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight rating set by the trailer-hitch manufacturer can cause an accident resulting in death or serious personal injuries.

NOTICE

■When installing a trailer hitch

Use only the position recommended by your Toyota dealer. Do not install the trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.

Positions for towing hitch receiver and hitch ball

A B

A Weight carrying ball position: 43.3 in. (1100 mm)
B Hitch receiver pin hole position: 38.1 in. (969 mm)

■ Matching trailer ball height to trailer coupler height

No matter which class of tow hitch applies, for a more safe trailer hookup, the trailer ball setup must be the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.

Illustration of a car pulling a large block with a 'no' symbol above, no text or labels present

A B

A Coupler
B Trailer ball

Connecting trailer lights

Please consult your dealer when installing trailer lights, as incorrect installation may cause damage to the vehicle's lights. Please take care to comply with your state's laws when installing trailer lights.

NOTICE

■ Do not directly splice trailer lights

Do not directly splice trailer lights. Directly splicing trailer lights may damage your vehicle's electrical system and cause a malfunction.

Trailer towing tips

Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. Help to avoid an accident, death or serious injury, keep the following in mind when towing:

• Speed limits for towing a trailer vary by state or province. Do not exceed the posted towing speed limit.
• Toyota recommends that the vehicle-trailer speed limit is 65 mph (104 km/h) on a flat, straight, dry road. Do not exceed this limit, the posted towing speed limit or the speed limit for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner's manual, whichever is lowest. Instability of the towing vehicle-trailer combination (trailer sway) increases as speed

increases. Exceeding speed limits may cause loss of control.

• Before starting out, check the trailer lights, tires and the vehicle-trailer connections. Recheck after driving a short distance.
  ● Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in an area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel of the vehicle-trailer combination.

- Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice. Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move the trailer to right. (This is generally opposite to reversing without a trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have someone guide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an accident.

- As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-to vehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length.

- Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in the trailer jackknifing and a loss of

vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.

• Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
• Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making turn.
• Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making a wider than normal turning radius.
• Slow down before making a turn, in cross winds, on wet or slippery surfaces, etc.

Increasing vehicle speed can destabilize the trailer.

● Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.
- To maintain engine braking efficiency, when using engine braking, do not use the transmission in D.
- Instability happens more frequently when descending steep or long downhill grades. Before descending, slow down and downshift. Do not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or

long downhill grades.

• Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.
• Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle's hybrid system may overheat on hot days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when driving up a long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot. (→P.677)
• Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle's and the trailer's wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the transmission in P. Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do so only after performing the following:

1 Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
2 Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle's and trailer's wheels.
3 When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load.

4 Apply the parking brake firmly.
5 Shift into P and turn off the hybrid system.

- When restarting after parking on a slope:

1 With the transmission in P, start the hybrid system. Be sure to keep the brake pedal depressed.
2 Shift into a forward gear. If reversing, shift into R.
3 If the parking brake is in manual mode, release the parking brake. (→P.224)
4 Release the brake pedal, and slowly pull or back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.
5 Have someone retrieve the blocks.

Break-in schedule

If your vehicle is new or equipped with any new power train components (such as an engine, transmission, differential or wheel bearing), Toyota recommends that you do not tow a trailer until the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km).

After the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km), you can start towing. However, for the next 500 miles (800 km), drive the vehicle at a speed of less than 45 mph (72 km/h) when towing a trailer, and avoid full throttle acceleration.

Maintenance

- If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to the additional load.

(See "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".)

- Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately 600 miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.

■If trailer sway occurs

One or more factors (crosswinds, passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.) can adversely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing instability.

- If trailer swaying occurs:

• Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead. Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.
• Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to reduce speed. Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.

If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer should stabilize (if enabled, Trailer Sway Control can also help to stabilize the vehicle and trailer.).

●After the trailer swaying has stopped:

• Stop in a safe place. Get all occupants out of the vehicle.
• Check the tires of the vehicle and the trailer.
• Check the load in the trailer. Make sure the load has not shifted.

Make sure the tongue weight is appropriate, if possible.

- Check the load in the vehicle. Make sure the vehicle is not overloaded after occupants get in.

If you cannot find any problems, the speed at which trailer swaying occurred is beyond the limit of your particular vehicle-trailer combination. Drive at a lower speed to prevent instability. Remember that

swaying of the towing vehicle-trailer increases as speed increases.

Dinghy towing

Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.

Silhouette of a car approaching a parking van with an arrow, next to a pink prohibition symbol (no text present)

NOTICE

■To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with 4 wheels on the ground.
■To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission and AWD system

Never tow this vehicle with any of the wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the transmission and AWD system.

Diagram showing two parking lot scenarios with a car and a no-smoking symbol

Power (ignition) switch (vehicles with- out smart key system)

Starting the hybrid sys- tem

1 Pull the parking brake switch to check that the parking brake is set. (→P.224)
The parking brake indicator will come on.
2 Check that the shift lever is in P.
3 Firmly depress the brake pedal.
4 Turn the power switch to START to start the hybrid system.

If the "READY" indicator turns on, the hybrid system will operate normally.

Continue depressing the brake pedal until the "READY" indicator is illuminated.

READY PUSH

5 Check that the "READY" indicator is illuminated.

The vehicle will not move when the "READY" indicator is off.

■If the hybrid system does not start

The immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P.81) Contact your Toyota dealer.

■When the steering lock cannot be released

When starting the hybrid system, the power switch may seem stuck in OFF. To free it, turn the key while turning the steering wheel slightly left and right.

Diagram illustrating steering wheel and push button mechanism with directional arrows and labels

■When the ambient temperature is low, such as during winter driving conditions

• When starting the hybrid system, the flashing time of the "READY" indicator may be long. Leave the vehicle as it is until the "READY" indicator is steady on, as steady means the vehicle is able to move.
• When the hybrid battery (traction battery) is extremely cold (below approximately -22^[-30^] ) under the influence of the outside temperature, it may not be possible to start the hybrid system. In this case, try to start the hybrid system again after the temperature of the hybrid battery increases due to the outside temperature increase etc.
  ■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle

→P.74

If the "READY" indicator does not come on

In the event that the "READY" indicator does not come on even after performing the proper procedures

for starting the vehicle, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

When "Check Fuel Cap" is displayed on the multi-information display

→P.243

■If the hybrid system is malfunctioning

→P.80

WARNING

■When starting the hybrid system

Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the hybrid system under any circumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■When starting the hybrid system

If the hybrid system becomes difficult to start, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Changing power switch modes

A B C D PUSH ACC STOP

A OFF ("LOCK" position)

The steering wheel is locked and the key can be removed. (The key can be removed only when the shift lever is in P.)

B ACC ("ACC" position)

Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used.

C ON ("ON" position)

All electrical components can be used.

D START ("START" position)

For starting the hybrid system.

■Turning the key from ACC to OFF

1 Shift the shift lever to P.
2 Push in the key and turn it to OFF.

PUSH LEE

■Key reminder function

A buzzer sounds if the driver's door is opened while the power switch is in OFF or ACC to remind you to remove the key.

WARNING

■Caution when driving

Do not turn the power switch to OFF while driving. If, in an emergency and you must turn the hybrid system off while the vehicle is moving, turn the power switch only to ACC to stop the hybrid system. An accident may result if the hybrid system is stopped while driving. (→P.635)

NOTICE

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the power switch in ACC or ON mode for long periods of time without the hybrid system on.

Power (ignition) switch (vehicles with smart key system)

Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your person starts the hybrid system or changes power switch modes.

Starting the hybrid sys- tem

1 Pull the parking brake switch to check that the parking brake is set. (→P.224)

The parking brake indicator will come on.

2 Check that the shift lever is set in P.
3 Firmly depress the brake pedal.

and a message will be dis-

played on the multi-information display.

If it is not displayed, the hybrid system cannot be started.

4 Press the power switch shortly and firmly.

When operating the power switch, one short, firm press is enough. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch.

If the "READY" indicator turns on, the hybrid system will operate normally.

Continue depressing the brake pedal until the "READY" indicator is illuminated.

The hybrid system can be started

from any power switch mode.

READY POWER

5 Check that the "READY" indicator is illuminated.

The vehicle will not move when the "READY" indicator is off.

■If the hybrid system does not start

●The immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P.81) Contact your Toyota dealer.
- If a message related to start-up is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.

■When the ambient temperature is low, such as during winter driving conditions

- When starting the hybrid system, the flashing time of the "READY" indicator may be long. Leave the vehicle as it is until the "READY" indicator is steady on, as steady means the vehicle is able to move.

- When the hybrid battery (traction battery) is extremely cold (below approximately -22°F [-30°C]) under the influence of the outside temperature, it may not be possible to start the hybrid system. In this case, try to start the hybrid system again after the temperature of the hybrid battery increases due to the outside temperature increase etc.

■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle

→P.74

■If the 12-volt battery is discharged

The hybrid system cannot be started using the smart key system. Refer to P.672to restart the hybrid system.

Electronic key battery depletion →P.120

■Conditions affecting operation →P.148

Note for the entry function →P.149

■Steering lock function

● After turning the power switch to OFF and opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the power switch again automatically cancels the steering lock.
- When the steering lock cannot be released, "Push power switch while turning the steering wheel in either direction" will be displayed on the multi-information display. Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press the power switch shortly and firmly while turning the steering wheel left and right.

Diagram showing steering wheel and power button with directional arrows, likely illustrating steering or navigation system.

● To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be suspended if the hybrid system is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this case, refrain from operating the power switch. After about 10 seconds, the steering lock motor will resume functioning.

If there is a malfunction in the smart key system

If "Smart Key System Malfunction" is displayed on the multi-information display, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

If the "READY" indicator does not come on

In the event that the "READY" indicator does not come on even after performing the proper procedures for starting the vehicle, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

- When “Check Fuel Cap” is displayed on the multi-information display

→P.243

■If the hybrid system is malfunctioning

→P.80

Electronic key battery

→P.618

■Operation of the power switch

- If the switch is not pressed shortly and firmly, the power switch mode may not change or the hybrid system may not start.

- If attempting to restart the hybrid system immediately after turning the power switch to OFF, the hybrid system may not start in some cases. After turning the power switch to OFF, please wait a few seconds before restarting the hybrid system.

Customization

If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting, refer to P.671.

WARNING

■When starting the hybrid system

Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the hybrid system under any circumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■Caution while driving

If hybrid system failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■When starting the hybrid system

If the hybrid system becomes difficult to start, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer immediately.

■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the power switch

If the power switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

Stopping the hybrid sys- tem

1 Stop the vehicle completely.
2 If the parking brake is in manual mode, set the parking brake. (→P.224)

Check the parking brake indicator is illuminated.

3 Shift the shift lever to P.
4 Press the power switch shortly and firmly.

The hybrid system will stop, and the meter display will be extinguished.

5 Release the brake pedal and check that "ACCESSORY" or "IGNITION ON" is not shown on the multi-information display.

■Automatic hybrid system shut off feature

●The vehicle is equipped with a feature that automatically shuts off the hybrid system when the shift lever is in P with the hybrid system operating for an extended period.
●The hybrid system will automatically shut off after approximately 1 hour if it has been left running while the shift lever is in P.
●The timer for the automatic hybrid system shut off feature will reset if the brake pedal is depressed or if the shift lever is in a position other than P.
After the vehicle is parked, if the door is locked with the door lock switch (→P.131) from the inside or the mechanical key (→P.670) from the outside, the automatic hybrid system shut off feature will be disabled. The timer for the automatic hybrid system shut off feature will be re-enabled if the driver's door is opened.

WARNING

■ Stopping the hybrid system in an emergency

■When parking

• If you want to stop the hybrid system in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and hold the power switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. (→P.635) However, do not touch the power switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, however, power assist to the steering will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer smoothly, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
• If the power switch is operated while the vehicle is running, a warning message will be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer sounds.
• When restarting the hybrid system after an emergency shutdown, shift the shift lever to N and press the power switch shortly and firmly.
  Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Observe the following precautions.
  Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases to enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
• If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop the hybrid system.

WARNING

• Do not leave the vehicle with the hybrid system operating for a long time. If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
• Do not leave the hybrid system operating in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the hybrid system is operating, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.

Changing power switch modes

Modes can be changed by pressing the power switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    B --> C["3"]
    C --> D["IGNITION ON"]
    D --> E["POWER"]

1 OFF \*

The emergency flashers can be used.

2 ACC

Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used. "ACCESSORY" will be displayed on the multi-information display.

3 ON

All electrical components can be used.

"IGNITION ON" will be displayed on the multi-information display.

*: If the shift lever is in a position other than P when turning off the hybrid system, the power switch will be turned to ACC, not to OFF.

■Auto power off function

If the vehicle is left in ACC for more than 20 minutes or ON (the hybrid system is not operating) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the power switch will automatically turn to OFF. However, this function cannot entirely prevent the 12-volt battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the power switch in ACC or ON for long periods of time when the hybrid system is not operating.

NOTICE

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

• Do not leave the power switch in ACC or ON for long periods of time without the hybrid system on.
• If "ACCESSORY" or "IGNITION ON" is displayed on the multi-information display, the power switch is not in OFF. Exit the vehicle after turning the power switch to OFF.

When stopping the hybrid system with the shift lever in a position other than P

If the hybrid system is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P, the power switch will not be turned to OFF but instead be turned to ACC. Perform the following procedure to turn the switch to OFF:

1 Check that the parking brake is set.
2 Shift the shift lever to P.
3 Check that "ACCESSORY" is displayed on the multi-information display and press the power switch shortly and firmly.
4 Check that "ACCESSORY" or "IGNITION ON" on the multi-information display is off. Turns EV drive mode on/off

NOTICE

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not stop the hybrid system when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If the hybrid system is stopped in another shift lever position, the power switch will not be turned to OFF but instead be turned to ACC. If the vehicle is left in ACC, 12-volt battery discharge may occur.

EV drive mode

In EV drive mode, electric power is supplied by the hybrid battery (traction battery), and only the electric motor (traction motor) is used to drive the vehicle.

This mode allows you to drive in residential areas early in the morning and late at night, or in indoor parking lots etc. without concern for noises and gas emissions.

However, when the vehicle proximity notification system is active, the vehicle may produce sound.

Operating instructions

When EV drive mode is turned on, the EV drive mode indicator will come on. Pressing the switch when in EV drive mode will return the vehicle to normal driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]).

EV MODE EV MODE

■ Situations in which EV drive mode cannot be turned on

It may not be possible to turn EV drive mode on in the following situations. If it cannot be turned on, a buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-information display.

●The temperature of the hybrid system is high.
The vehicle has been left in the sun, driven on a hill, driven at high speeds, etc.
●The temperature of the hybrid system is low.
The vehicle has been left in temperatures lower than about 32^ F ( 0^ C) for a long period of time etc.

●The gasoline engine is warming up.

●The hybrid battery (traction battery) is low.

The remaining battery level indicated in the Energy monitor display is low. ( P.113)

● Vehicle speed is high.

●The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.

●The windshield defogger is in use.

Use the EV drive mode when it becomes available.

■ Switching to EV drive mode when the gasoline engine is cold

If the hybrid system is started while the gasoline engine is cold, the gasoline engine will start automatically after a short period of time in order to warm up.

In this case, you will become unable to switch to EV drive mode. After the hybrid system has started and the "READY" indicator has illuminated, press the EV drive mode switch before the gasoline engine starts to switch to EV drive mode.

■Automatic cancelation of EV drive mode

When driving in EV drive mode, the gasoline engine may automatically restart in the following situations. When EV drive mode is canceled, a buzzer will sound, the EV drive mode indicator will flash and go off and a message will be shown on the multi-information display.

●The hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes low.
The remaining battery level indicated in the Energy monitor display is low. ( P.113)

●Vehicle speed is high.

●The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.

Drive the vehicle for a while before attempting to turn on the EV drive mode again.

■Possible driving distance when driving in EV drive mode

EV drive mode's possible driving distance ranges from a few hundred meters to approximately 0.6 mile (1 km). However, depending on vehicle conditions, there are situations when EV drive mode cannot be used.

(The distance that is possible depends on the hybrid battery [traction battery] level and driving conditions.)

Fuel economy

The hybrid system is designed to achieve the best possible fuel economy during normal driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]). Driving in EV drive mode more than necessary may lower fuel economy.

WARNING

■Caution while driving

When driving in EV drive mode, pay special attention to the area around the vehicle. Because there is no engine noise, pedestrians, people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles in the area may not be aware of the vehicle starting off or approaching them, so take extra care while driving.

Hybrid transmission

Select the shift position depending on your purpose and situation.

Shift position purpose and functions

Shift position	Objective or function
P	Parking the vehicle/starting the hybrid system
R Reversing
N Neutral
D	Normal driving*1
S	S mode driving*2

*1: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noise, shift the shift lever to D for normal driving.
*2: By selecting shift ranges using S mode, you can control accelerating force and engine braking force.

■When driving with dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range activated

Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine braking, engine braking will not activate because dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range will not be canceled.

●While driving in S mode, down-shifting to 5 or 4. (→P.221)
- When switching the driving mode to sport mode while driving in D position. (→P.366)

■Restraining sudden start (Drive-Start Control)

→P.190

WARNING

■When driving on slippery road surfaces

Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in the vehicle skidding to the side or spinning.

NOTICE

■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) charge

If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charging, even when the engine is running. Therefore, if the vehicle is left with the shift lever in N for a long period of time, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will discharge, and this may result in the vehicle not being able to start.

Shifting the shift lever

D P R N + S-D - ↓ ↑ ← ← ← ←

While the power switch is in ON and the brake pedal depressed ^* , shift the shift lever while pushing the shift release button on the shift knob.

Shift the shift lever while

pushing the shift release button on the shift knob.

Shift the shift lever nor-

mally.

When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped and the brake pedal is depressed.

*: For the vehicle to be able to be shifted from P, the brake pedal must be depressed before the shift release button is pushed. If

the shift release button is pushed first, the shift lock will not be released.

Shift lock system

The shift lock system is a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever in starting.

The shift lever can be shifted from P only when the power switch is in ON, the brake pedal is depressed and the shift release button is pushed.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

First, check whether the brake pedal is being depressed.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted even though the brake pedal is depressed and the shift release button is pushed, there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.

Releasing the shift lock:

1 Pull the parking brake switch to check that the parking brake is set. (→P.224)
2 Turn the power switch to OFF.
3 Depress the brake pedal.
4 Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent tool. To prevent damage to the cover, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

Diagram showing car gear shift mechanism with labeled parts and directional arrow indicating motion

5 Press and hold the shift lock override button and then push the button on the shift knob.

The shift lever can be shifted while both buttons are pressed.

Diagram illustrating a mechanical device with directional arrows and a magnified inset showing the component's motion.

WARNING

■To prevent an accident when releasing the shift lock

Before pressing the shift lock override button, make sure to set the parking brake and depress the brake pedal.

If the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed instead of the brake pedal when the shift lock override button is pressed and the shift lever is shifted out of P, the vehicle may suddenly start, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Selecting the driving mode

→P.366

Changing shift ranges in S mode

When the shift lever is in the S position, the shift lever can be operated as follows:

s 4 1 2

1 Upshifting
2 Downshifting

The selected shift range, from S1 to S6, will be displayed on the multi-information display.

The initial shift range in S mode is set automatically to S3, S4 or S5 according to vehicle speed.

S mode

● You can choose from 6 levels of accelerating force and engine braking force.
●A lower shift range will provide greater accelerating force and engine braking force than a higher shift range, and the engine revolutions will also increase.
● To prevent the engine from over-revving, upshifting may automatically occur when the shift range is 4 or lower.
- When the shift range is 4 or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets the shift range to 6.

■Downshifting restriction warning buzzer

To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the shift lever is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)

If the “S” indicator does not come on or the “D” indicator is displayed even after shifting the shift lever to S

This may indicate a malfunction in the transmission system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately. (In this situation, the transmission will operate in the same manner as when the shift lever is in D.)

Turn signal lever

Operating instructions

Diagram illustrating car steering and steering wheel control, showing directional arrows and labeled parts with icons.

1 Right turn
2 Lane change to the right (move the lever partway and release it)
The right hand signals will flash 3 times.
3 Lane change to the left (move the lever partway and release it)
The left hand signals will flash 3 times.
4 Left turn

■Turn signals can be operated when

The power switch is in ON.

■If the indicator flashes faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not

burned out.

If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been performed

Operate the lever again.

■To discontinue flashing of the turn signals during a lane change

Operate the lever in the opposite direction.

Parking brake

The parking brake can be set or released automatically or manually. In automatic mode, the parking brake can be set or released automatically according to shift lever operation. Also, even in automatic mode, the parking brake can be set or released manually.

Operating instructions

■Using the manual mode

The parking brake can be set and released manually.

PARK (P) A B 1 2 C

A Parking brake indicator light (U.S.A.)
B Parking brake indicator light (Canada)
C Parking brake switch indicator

1 Pull the switch to set the

parking brake.

The parking brake indicator light and Parking brake switch indicator will turn on.

Pull and hold the parking brake switch if an emergency occurs and it is necessary to operate the parking brake while driving.

2 Push the switch to release the parking brake.

• Operate the parking brake switch while depressing the brake pedal.
• Parking brake automatic release function (→P.225)

Make sure that the parking brake indicator light and parking brake switch indicator turn off.

If the parking brake indicator light and parking brake switch indicator flash, operate the switch again. (→P.648)

■Turning the automatic mode on

While the vehicle is stopped, pull and hold the parking brake switch until a buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display.

EPB Shift Interlock Function Activated

When the automatic mode is turned on, the parking brake operates as follows.

• When the shift lever is shifted from P, the parking brake will be released, and the parking brake indicator light and parking brake switch indicator will turn off.
• When the shift lever is shifted to P, the parking brake will be set, and the parking brake indicator light and parking brake switch indicator will turn on.

Operate the shift lever with the vehicle stopped and the brake pedal depressed.

■Turning the automatic mode off

While the vehicle is stopped and depressing the brake pedal, press and hold the parking brake switch until a buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display.

EPB Shift Interlock Function Deactivated

■Parking brake operation

• When the power switch is not in ON, the parking brake cannot be released using the parking brake switch.
• When the power switch is not in

ON, automatic mode (automatic brake setting and releasing) is not available.

■Parking brake automatic release function

The parking brake will be released automatically when the accelerator pedal is slowly depressed under the following conditions:

The driver's door is closed
●The driver is wearing the seat belt
●The shift lever is in a forward or reverse position.
●The malfunction indicator lamp or brake system warning light is not illuminated

If the automatic release function does not operate, release the parking brake manually.

If "Parking Brake Temporarily Unavailable" is displayed on the multi-information display

If the parking brake is operated repeatedly over a short period of time, the system may restrict operation to prevent overheating. If this happens, refrain from operating the parking brake. Normal operation will return after about 1 minute.

If "Parking Brake Unavailable" is displayed on the multi-information display

Operate the parking brake switch. If the message does not disappear after operating the switch several times, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

■Parking brake operation sound

When the parking brake operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■Parking brake indicator light

●Depending on the power switch position/mode, the parking brake indicator light will turn on and stay

on as described below:

ON: Comes on until the parking brake is released.

Not in ON: Stays on for approximately 15 seconds.

- When the power switch is turned off with the parking brake set, the parking brake indicator light will stay on for about 15 seconds. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■When the parking brake switch malfunctions

Automatic mode (automatic brake setting and releasing) will be turned on automatically.

Parking the vehicle

→P.189

■Parking brake engaged warning buzzer

A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven with the parking brake engaged. "Parking Brake ON" is displayed on the multi-information display (with the vehicle reaching a speed of 5 km/h [3 mph]).

■If the brake system warning light comes on

→P.642

■Usage in winter time

→P.379

WARNING

■When parking the vehicle

Do not leave a child in the vehicle alone. The parking brake may be released unintentionally by a child and there is the danger of the vehicle moving that may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■Parking brake switch

Do not set any objects near the parking brake switch. Objects may interfere with the switch and may lead the parking brake to unexpectedly operate.

NOTICE

■When parking the vehicle

Before you leave the vehicle, shift the shift lever to P, set the parking brake and make sure that the vehicle does not move.

■When the system malfunctions

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the warning messages.

■When the parking brake cannot be released due to a malfunction

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if this occurs.

Brake Hold

The brake hold system keeps the brake applied when the shift lever is in D, S or N with the system on and the brake pedal has been depressed to stop the vehicle. The system releases the brake when the accelerator pedal is depressed with the shift lever in D or S to allow smooth start off.

Enabling the system

Press the brake hold switch to turn the brake hold system on

The brake hold standby indicator (green) A comes on. While the system is holding the brake, the brake hold operated indicator (yellow) B comes on.

HOLD A B HOLD

■Brake hold system operating conditions

The brake hold system cannot be turned on in the following conditions:

- The driver's door is not closed.

●The driver is not wearing the seat belt.

If any of the conditions above are detected when the brake hold system is enabled, the system will turn off and the brake hold standby indicator light will go off. In addition, if any of the conditions are detected while the system is holding the brake, a warning buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-information display. The parking brake will then be set automatically.

■Brake hold function

- If the brake pedal is left released for a period of about 3 minutes after the system has started holding the brake, the parking brake will be set automatically. In this case, a warning buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display.

● To turn the system off while the system is holding the brake, firmly depress the brake pedal and press the button again.

●The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle when the vehicle is on a steep incline. In this situation, it may be necessary for the driver to apply the brakes. A warning buzzer will sound and the multi-information display will inform the driver of this situation. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.

■When the parking brake is set automatically while the system is holding the brakes

Perform any of the following operations to release the parking brake:

●Depress the accelerator pedal. (The parking brake will not be released automatically if the seat belt is not fastened.)

- Operate the parking brake switch with the brake pedal depressed.

Make sure that the parking brake indicator light goes off. ( P.224)

■When an inspection at your Toyota dealer is necessary

When the brake hold standby indicator (green) does not illuminate even when the brake hold switch is pressed with the brake hold system operating conditions met, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer.

If “Brake Hold Malfunction Press Brake to Deactivate Visit Your Dealer” or “Brake Hold Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” is displayed on the multi-information display

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

■Warning messages and buzzers

Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.

■If the brake hold operated indicator flashes

→P.648

WARNING

■When the vehicle is on a steep incline

When using the brake hold system on a steep incline, exercise caution. The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle in such a situation.

■When stopped on a slippery road

The system cannot stop the vehicle when the gripping ability of the tires has been exceeded. Do not use the system when stopped on a slippery road.

NOTICE

■When parking the vehicle

The brake hold system is not designed for use when parking the vehicle for a long period of time. Turning the power switch to OFF while the system is holding the brake may release the brake, which would cause the vehicle to move. When operating the power switch, depress the brake pedal, shift the shift lever to P and set the parking brake.

Headlight switch

The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

Turning on the headlights

Operating the switch turns on the lights as follows:

U.S.A. (Type A)

Diagram illustrating car steering wheel and dashboard adjustment, with numbered instructions for adjusting the wheel's position.

1 The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, instrument panel lights, and daytime running lights (→P.230) turn on.
2 The headlights and all lights listed above (except daytime running lights) turn on.
3 The headlights, daytime running lights ( P.230) and all the lights listed above turn on and off automatically.
4

U.S.A. (Type B)

Diagram illustrating car steering wheel and steering wheel assembly with numbered instructions for turning and adjustment.

1 The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, instrument panel lights, and daytime running lights (→P.230) turn on.
2 The headlights and all lights listed above (except daytime running lights) turn on.
3 The daytime running lights turn on. (→P.230)
4 Off

▶ Canada

Diagram illustrating car steering wheel and steering wheel assembly with numbered instructions for adjustment or repair.

1 The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, instrument panel lights, and daytime running lights (→P.230) turn on.
2 The headlights and all lights listed above (except daytime running lights) turn on.
3 The headlights, daytime running lights ( P.230) and all the lights listed above turn on and off automatically.

■ AUTO mode can be used when

The power switch is in ON.

■Daytime running light system

● Vehicles without projector headlights: The daytime running lights illuminate using the same lights as the low beam headlight lights, and illuminate dimmer than the low beam headlight lights.
● Vehicles with projector headlights: The daytime running lights illuminate using the same lights as the parking lights and illuminate

brighter than the parking lights.

To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers during daytime driving, the daytime running lights turn on automatically when all of the following conditions are met. (The daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.) The hybrid system is operating The parking brake is released For the U.S.A.: The headlight switch is in the DRLor ^2 DOL AUTO* position
- For Canada: The headlight switch is in the ≥slant 0.01 ≤slant AUTO* position

*: When the surroundings are bright

The daytime running lights remain on after they illuminate, even if the parking brake is set again.

• For the U.S.A.: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch.
• Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.

■Headlight control sensor (if equipped)

The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield. Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction.

Line drawing of a car interior with a magnified inset showing a camera lens (no text or symbols)

■Automatic light off system

●When the headlights are on: The

lights turn off 30 seconds after the power switch is turned to ACC or OFF and a door is opened and closed. (The lights turn off immediately if on the key is pressed after all the doors are closed.)

- When only the tail lights are on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the power switch is turned to ACC or OFF and the driver's door is opened.

To turn the lights on again, turn the power switch to ON, or turn the light switch off once and then back to

or position.

Light reminder buzzer

▶ Vehicles without smart key system A buzzer sounds when the power switch is turned to ACC or OFF, the key is removed and the driver's door is opened while the lights are turned on.

▶ Vehicles with smart key system A buzzer sounds when the power switch is turned to ACC or OFF and the driver's door is opened while the lights are turned on.

■Automatic headlight leveling system (if equipped)

The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users.

■Windshield wiper linked head-light illumination (if equipped)

When driving during daytime with the headlight switch turned to AUTIF the windshield wipers are used, the headlights will turn on automatically after several seconds to help enhance the visibility of your vehi-

cle.

■12-volt battery-saving function

In order to prevent the 12-volt battery of the vehicle from discharging, if the headlights and/or tail lights are on when the power switch is turned to OFF, the battery saving function will operate and automatically turn off all the lights after approximately 20 minutes.

When any of the following are performed, the battery-saving function is canceled once and then reactivated. All the lights will turn off automatically 20 minutes after the battery-saving function has been reactivated:

- When the headlight switch is operated

●When a door is opened or closed

If "Headlight System Malfunction Visit Your Dealer" is displayed on the multi-information display

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Customization

Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is not running.

Turning on the high beam headlights

Diagram showing car steering wheel and dashboard with numbered instructions for joint movement or navigation

1 With the headlights on, push the lever away from you to turn on the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the center position to turn the high beams off.
2 Pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the high beams once.

You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.

AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) (if equipped)

AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) secures excellent visibility at intersections and on curves by automatically adjusting the direction of the light axis of the headlights according to vehicle speed and the degree of the tire's angle as controlled by steering input.

AFS operates at speeds of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.

AHB (Automatic High Beam)

The Automatic High Beam uses an in-vehicle front camera to assess the brightness of streetlights, the lights of vehicles ahead etc., and automatically turns the high beam on or off as necessary.

WARNING

■Limitations of the Automatic High Beam
Do not overly rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and turning the high beam on or off manually if necessary.
■To prevent incorrect operation of the Automatic High Beam system

Do not overload the vehicle.

Activating the Automatic High Beam system

1 Press the Automatic High Beam switch.

Diagram showing a car dashboard with steering wheel and a document labeled 'A' with an upward arrow, indicating a directional or process step.

2 Push the lever away from you with the headlight switch in the AUOP position.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will come on when the system is operating.

Diagram showing car steering wheel with a red arrow indicating left side and a speech bubble labeled 'A' pointing to the steering wheel.

■High beam automatic turning on or off conditions

• When all of the following conditions are fulfilled, the high beam will be automatically turned on (after approximately 1 second):
• Vehicle speed is above approximately 21 mph (34 km/h) or more.
  • The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.
  • There are no vehicles ahead with headlights or tail lights turned on.
  • There are few streetlights on the road ahead.
• If any of the following conditions are fulfilled, the high beam will be automatically turned off:
  • Vehicle speed drops below approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).
• The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.
  • Vehicles ahead have headlights or tail lights turned on.
  • There are many streetlights on the road ahead.

■Front camera detection information

●The high beam may not be automatically turned off in the following situations:

- When oncoming vehicles suddenly appear from a curve

• When the vehicle is cut in front of by another vehicle
• When vehicles ahead are hidden from sight due to repeated curves, road dividers or roadside trees
• When vehicles ahead appear from the faraway lane on a wide road
• When vehicles ahead have no lights

●The high beam may be turned off if a vehicle ahead that is using fog lights without using the headlights is detected.

●House lights, street lights, traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs may cause the high beam to switch to the low beams, or the low beams to remain on.

●The following factors may affect the amount of time taken to turn the high beam on or off:

- The brightness of headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of vehicles ahead

• The movement and direction of vehicles ahead

- When a vehicle ahead only has operational lights on one side

- When a vehicle ahead is a two-wheeled vehicle

- The condition of the road (gradient, curve, condition of the road surface etc.)

• The number of passengers and amount of luggage

●The high beam may be turned on or off when the driver does not expect it.

●Bicycles or similar objects may not be detected.

In the situations shown below, the system may not be able to accurately detect surrounding brightness levels. This may cause the low beams to remain on or the high beams to cause problems for pedestrians, vehicles ahead or other parties. In these cases, manually switch between the high and low beams.

- In bad weather (rain, snow, fog, sandstorms, etc.)

• The windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt, etc.
• The windshield is cracked or damaged
• The front camera is deformed or dirty
• When the temperature of the front camera is extremely high
• Surrounding brightness levels are equal to those of headlights, tail lights or fog lights
• When headlights or tail lights of vehicles ahead are turned off, dirty, changing color, or not aimed properly
• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a preceding vehicle
• When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and darkness
• When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or roads with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved roads, gravel roads, etc.)
• When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a winding road
• There is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or mirror
• The back of a vehicle ahead is highly reflective, such as a container on a truck
• The vehicle's headlights are damaged or dirty, or are not aimed properly
• The vehicle is listing or titling due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed, etc.
• The high beam and low beam are repeatedly being switched between in an abnormal manner
• The driver believes that the high beam may be causing problems or distress to other drivers or pedestrians nearby

If "Headlight System Malfunction Visit Your Dealer" is displayed on the multi-information display

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

■ Temporarily lowering sensor sensitivity

The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporarily lowered.

1 Turn the power switch to OFF while the following conditions are met.

●The headlight switch is in

AUTO position.

●The headlight switch lever is in high beam position.

●Automatic High Beam switch is on.

2 Turn the power switch to ON.

3 Within 60 seconds after step 2, repeat pulling the headlight switch lever to the original position then pushing it to the high beam position quickly 10 times, then leave the lever in high beam position.

4 If the sensitivity is changed, the Automatic High Beam indicator is turn on and off 3 times.

Automatic High Beam (headlights) may turn on even when the vehicle is stopped.

Turning the high beam on/off manually

■Switching to the low beam

Pull the lever to original position.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off.

Push the lever away from you to activate the Automatic High Beam system again.

Diagram showing a hand holding a car's steering wheel, with an inset highlighting the left side of the wheel.

■Switching to the high beam

Press the Automatic High Beam switch.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off and the high beam indicator will turn on.

Press the switch to activate the Automatic High Beam system again.

Diagram showing car steering wheel and driver's seat with labeled icons and directional arrow

Fog light switch\*

*: If equipped

The fog lights offer improved visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain and fog.

Operating procedure

#0 2 1

1 OFF ^1 or O ^2 Turns the fog lights off
2 Turns the fog lights on

*1: For the U.S.A.
*2:For Canada

■Fog lights can be used when

The headlights are on in low beam.

Windshield wipers and washer

Operating the lever can switch between automatic operation and manual operation, or can use the washer.

NOTICE

■When the windshield is dry Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

Operating the wiper lever

Operating the lever operates the wipers or washer as follows:

▶ Intermittent windshield wipers

Diagram showing car steering wheel and hand grip mechanism with directional arrows indicating motion or movement

5 1 2 3 4

1 OFF *1 or o *2 Off
2 INT *1 or 📋*2 Intermittent operation
3 LO ^1 or ^2 Low speed operation

4 HI ^1 or ^2 High speed operation
5 MIST ^1 or ^2 Temporary operation

*1: For the U.S.A.

*2:For Canada

If equipped, wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is selected.

6 7

6 Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency
7 Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

8

8 Washer/wiper dual operation

Pulling the lever operates the wipers and washer.

The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

▶ Rain-sensing windshield wipers

Diagram illustrating car steering wheel and hand grip mechanism with labeled parts and directional arrows

1 OFF *1 or o *2 Off
2 Rain-sensing operation
3 LO *1 or ▼ *2 Low speed operation
4 HI ^1 or ^2 High speed operation
5 MIST ^1 or ^2 Temporary operation

*1: For the U.S.A.

*2:For Canada

When "AUTO" is selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed.

The sensor sensitivity can be adjusted when "AUTO" is selected.

6 7

6 Increases the sensitivity
7 Decreases the sensitivity

8

8 Washer/wiper dual operation

Pulling the lever operates the wipers and washer.

The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

■The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when

The power switch is in ON.

■Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation

▶ Vehicles with intermittent wind-shield wipers

With low speed windshield wiper operation selected, wiper operation will be switched from low speed to intermittent wiper operation when the vehicle is stationary. (However, when the wiper intervals are adjusted to highest level, the mode

will not switch.)

▶ Vehicles with rain-sensing wind-shield wipers

With low speed windshield wiper operation selected, wiper operation will be switched from low speed to intermittent wiper operation when the vehicle is stationary. (However, when the sensor sensitivity is adjusted to the highest level, the mode will not switch.)

■ Raindrop sensor (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

●The raindrop sensor judges the amount of raindrops.

Line drawing of a car's front and rear side view showing the roof, window, and side door (no text or symbols)

• If the wiper switch is turned to the "AUTO" position while the power switch is in ON, the wipers will operate once to show that "AUTO" mode is activated.
• If the wiper sensitivity is adjusted to higher, the wiper may operate once to indicate the change of sensitivity.
• If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 185°F (85°C) or higher, or 5°F (-15°C) or lower, the automatic operation may not occur. In this case, operate the wipers in any mode other than “AUTO”.
  ■If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

WARNING

■Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in "AUTO" mode (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the windshield is subject to vibration in "AUTO" mode. Take care that your fingers or anything else does not become caught in the windshield wipers.
■Caution regarding the use of washer fluid

When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.
■When a nozzle becomes blocked

In this case, contact your Toyota dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the wipers on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

Rear window wiper and washer

The rear window wiper and washer can be used by operating the lever.

NOTICE

■When the rear window is dry

Do not use the wiper, as it may damage the rear window.

Operating the wiper lever

Operating the switch operates the rear wiper as follows:

Diagram illustrating car steering wheel and rear door control with labeled directional buttons and motion arrows

1 OFF *1 or o *2 Off
2 INT ^1 or --- ^2 Intermittent operation
3 ON ^1 or — ^2 Normal operation

*1: For the U.S.A.
*2:For Canada

1 MIST OUT INT LPG IN 200 300 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

4 Washer/wiper dual operation

Pushing the lever operates the wiper and washer.

The wiper will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

■The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when

The power switch is in ON.

■If no washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzle is not blocked if there is washer fluid in the washer fluid reservoir.

■Back door opening linked rear window wiper stop function

When the rear window wiper is operating, if the back door is opened while the vehicle is stopped, operation of the rear window wiper will be stopped to prevent anyone near the vehicle from being sprayed by water from the wiper. When the back door is closed, wiper operation will resume.*

*: The setting must be customized at your Toyota dealer.

■Reverse-linked rear window wiper function

When the shift lever is shifted to R when the front wipers are operating, the rear window wiper will operate once.

Customization

Setting of the reverse-linked function can be changed. (Customizable features: →P.714)

NOTICE

■When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.

■When a nozzle becomes blocked

In this case, contact your Toyota dealer.

Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the wiper on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

Opening the fuel tank cap

The fuel tank of your vehicle has a special structure, which requires a reduction in fuel tank pressure before refueling. After the opener switch has been pressed, it will take several seconds until the vehicle is ready for refueling.

Before refueling the vehicle

• Close all the doors and windows, and turn the power switch to OFF.
• Confirm the type of fuel.

Fuel types

→P.694

■Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

WARNING

■When refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.

●Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it. A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause injury.

- Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to come close to an open fuel tank.

- Do not inhale vaporized fuel. Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

- Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle. Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

- Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged. This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.

WARNING

When refueling

Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank:

• Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.
• Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.
• Do not top off the fuel tank.

NOTICE

Refueling

●Finish refueling within 30 minutes. If more than 30 minutes passes, the internal valve closes. In this condition, fuel may overflow during the refueling process. Press the fuel filler door opener switch again.
- Do not spill fuel during refueling. Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted surface.

Opening the fuel tank cap

1 Press the opener to open the fuel filler door.

The fuel filler door will open within about 10 seconds of the switch being pressed. Before refueling is possible, a message will be shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster to indicate the progress of the fuel filler door

opener.

Diagram showing a car seatbelt with a highlighted device and directional arrow, likely indicating vehicle status or navigation.

2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to open it and put it into the holder on the fuel filler door.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with highlighted components and directional arrows (no text or labels)

■If the fuel filler door cannot be opened

→P.669

Closing the fuel tank cap

After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap until you hear a click. Once the cap is released, it will turn slightly in the opposite direction.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with internal components and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

When "Check Fuel Cap" is displayed on the multi-information display

The fuel tank cap may be unfastened or loose. Turn the power switch to OFF, check the cap and tighten it securely. If the message remains, wait a few seconds and then turn the power switch to OFF once again.

WARNING

■When replacing the fuel tank cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

When refueling

When refueling your vehicle, make sure that the fuel filler door lock is not pushed by the fuel nozzle boot, etc., as this may cause a valve to close, possibly resulting in a fuel spill.

If the fuel filler door lock has been pushed, operate the fuel filler door opener switch in the vehicle before continuing to refuel.

Diagram of a mechanical device with a circular component and directional arrow, no text or symbols present

Toyota Safety Sense 2.0

The Toyota Safety Sense 2.0 consists of the following drive assist systems and contributes to a safe and comfortable driving experience:

Driving assist system

■PCS (Pre-Collision System)

→P.250

■LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

→P.258

■AHB (Automatic High Beam)

→P.232

■RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped)

→P.268

■ Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

→P.271

WARNING

Toyota Safety Sense 2.0

The Toyota Safety Sense 2.0 is designed to operate under the assumption that the driver will drive safely, and is designed to help reduce the impact to the occupants and the vehicle in the case of a collision or assist the driver in normal driving conditions.

As there is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control performance that this system can provide, do not overly rely on this system. The driver is always responsible for paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings and driving safely.

Sensors

Two types of sensors, located behind the front grille and wind-shield, detect information necessary to operate the drive assist systems.

A B

A Radar sensor
B Front camera

WARNING

■To avoid malfunction of the radar sensor

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the radar sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

- Keep the radar sensor and the radar sensor cover clean at all times.

A B

A Radar sensor

B Radar sensor cover

If the front of the radar sensor or the front or back of the radar sensor cover is dirty or covered with water droplets, snow, etc., clean it.

Clean the radar sensor and radar sensor cover with a soft cloth to avoid damaging them.

- Do not attach accessories, stickers (including transparent stickers) or other items to the radar sensor, radar sensor cover or surrounding area.

- Do not subject the radar sensor or its surrounding area to a strong impact. If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper has been subjected to a strong impact, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

- Do not disassemble the radar sensor.

- Do not modify or paint the radar sensor or radar sensor cover.

In the following cases, the radar sensor must be recalibrated. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.

- When the radar sensor or front grille are removed and installed, or replaced - When the front bumper is replaced

■To avoid malfunction of the front camera

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the front camera may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

- Keep the windshield clean at all times.

- If the windshield is dirty or covered with an oily film, water droplets, snow, etc., clean the windshield.

- If a glass coating agent is applied to the windshield, it will still be necessary to use the windshield wipers to remove water droplets, etc. from the area of the windshield in front of the front camera.

- If the inner side of the wind-shield where the front camera is installed is dirty, contact your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

A B

• Do not attach objects, such as stickers, transparent stickers, etc., to the outer side of the windshield in front of the front camera (shaded area in the illustration).
  A From the top of the windshield to approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm) below the bottom of the front camera
  B Approximately 7.9 in. (20 cm) (Approximately 4.0 in. [10 cm] to the right and left from the center of the front camera)
• If the part of the windshield in front of the front camera is fogged up or covered with condensation, or ice, use the windshield defogger to remove the fog, condensation, or ice. (→P.526)
• If water droplets cannot be properly removed from the area of the windshield in front of the front camera by the windshield wipers, replace the wiper insert or wiper blade.
• Do not attach window tint to the windshield.

• Replace the windshield if it is damaged or cracked. After replacing the windshield, the front camera must be recalibrated. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.

• Do not allow liquids to contact the front camera.

• Do not allow bright lights to shine into the front camera.
• Do not dirty or damage the front camera. When cleaning the inside of the windshield, do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens of the front camera. Also, do not touch the lens. If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact your Toyota dealer.
  ● Do not subject the front camera to a strong impact.
• Do not change the installation position or direction of the front camera or remove it.
• Do not disassemble the front camera.
• Do not modify any components of the vehicle around the front camera (inside rear view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.
• Do not attach any accessories to the hood, front grille or front bumper that may obstruct the front camera. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.
• If a surfboard or other long object is to be mounted on the roof, make sure that it will not obstruct the front camera.
• Do not modify the headlights or other lights.

Certification

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, American Samoa, Guam, Saipan and Puerto Rico

FCC ID: HYQDNMWR009

NOTE:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator (antenna) and your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE:

This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This equipment complies with ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets RSS-102 of the ISED radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more away from person's body.

NOTE:

A system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction in the system.

- In the following situations, perform the actions specified in the table. When the normal operating conditions are detected, the message will disappear and the system will become operational.

If the message does not disappear, contact your Toyota dealer.

Situation Actions
When the area around a sensor is covered with dirt, moisture (fogged up, covered with condensation, ice, etc.), or other foreign matter	To clean the part of the windshield in front of the front camera, use the windshield wipers or the windshield defogger of the air conditioning system ( P.526).
When the temperature around the front camera is outside of the operational range, such as when the vehicle is in the sun or in an extremely cold environment	If the front camera is hot, such as after the vehicle had been parked in the sun, use the air conditioning system to decrease the temperature around the front camera.If a sunshade was used when the vehicle was parked, depending on its type, the sunlight reflected from the surface of the sunshade may cause the temperature of the front camera to become excessively high.
	If the front camera is cold, such as after the vehicle is parked in an extremely cold environment, use the air conditioning system to increase the temperature around the front camera.
The area in front of the front camera is obstructed, such as when the hood is open or a sticker is attached to the part of the windshield in front of the front camera.	Close the hood, remove the sticker, etc. to clear the obstruction.

- In the following situations, if the situation has changed (or the vehicle has been driven for some time) and the normal operating conditions are detected, the message will disappear and the system will become operational.

If the message does not disappear, contact your Toyota dealer.

• When the temperature around the radar sensor is outside of the operational range, such as when the vehicle is in the sun or in an extremely cold environment
• When the front camera cannot detect objects in front of the vehicle, such as when driving in the dark, snow, or fog, or when bright lights are shining into the front camera

PCS (Pre-Collision System)

The pre-collision system uses a radar sensor and front camera to detect objects ( P.250) in front of the vehicle. When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with an object is high, a warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action and the potential brake pressure is increased to help the driver avoid the collision. If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with an object is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or help reduce the impact of the collision.

The pre-collision system can be disabled/enabled and the warning timing can be changed. ( P.252)

Detectable objects

The system can detect the following:

• Vehicles
• Bicyclists
• Pedestrians

System functions

■Pre-collision warning

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, a buzzer will sound and a warning message will be displayed on the multi-information display to urge the driver to take evasive action.

BRAKE!

■Pre-collision brake assist

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the system applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed.

■Pre-collision braking

If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or reduce the impact of the collision.

WARNING

■Limitations of the pre-collision system

The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings. Do not use the pre-collision system instead of normal braking operations under any circumstances. This system will not prevent collisions or lessen collision damage or injury in every situation. Do not overly rely on this system. Failure to do so may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

Although this system is designed to help avoid a collision or help reduce the impact of the collision, its effectiveness may change according to various conditions, therefore the system may not always be able to achieve the same level of performance. Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system and always drive carefully.

• Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision: P.254
• Conditions under which the system may not operate properly: P.255

- Do not attempt to test the operation of the pre-collision system yourself. Depending on the objects used for testing (dummies, cardboard objects imitating detectable objects, etc.), the system may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident.

■Pre-collision braking

- When the pre-collision braking function is operating, a large amount of braking force will be applied.

- If the vehicle is stopped by the operation of the pre-collision braking function, the pre-collision braking function operation will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds. Depress the brake pedal as necessary.

●The pre-collision braking function may not operate if certain operations are performed by the driver. If the accelerator pedal is being depressed strongly or the steering wheel is being turned, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly prevent the pre-collision braking function from operating.

In some situations, while the pre-collision braking function is operating, operation of the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is depressed strongly or the steering wheel is turned and the system determines that the driver is taking evasive action.

- If the brake pedal is being depressed, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly delay the operation timing of the pre-collision braking function.

■When to disable the pre-collision system

In the following situations, disable the system, as it may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:

●When the vehicle is being towed

WARNING

• When your vehicle is towing another vehicle
• When transporting the vehicle via truck, boat, train or similar means of transportation
• When the vehicle is raised on a lift with the hybrid system on and the tires are allowed to rotate freely
• When inspecting the vehicle using a drum tester such as a chassis dynamometer or speedometer tester, or when using an on vehicle wheel balancer
• When a strong impact is applied to the front bumper or front grille, due to an accident or other reasons
• If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehicle has been in an accident or is malfunctioning
• When the vehicle is driven in a sporty manner or off-road
• When the tires are not properly inflated
• When the tires are very worn
• When tires of a size other than specified are installed
  ●When tire chains are installed
• When a compact spare tire or an emergency tire puncture repair kit is used
• If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may obstruct the radar sensor or front camera is temporarily installed to the vehicle

Changing settings of the pre-collision system

■Enabling/disabling the pre-collision system

The pre-collision system can be enabled/disabled on the screen (→P.109) of the multi-information display.

The system is automatically enabled each time the power switch is turned to ON.

If the system is disabled, the PCS warning light will turn on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.

OFF Pre-Collision System OFF

■Changing the pre-collision warning timing

The pre-collision warning timing can be changed on the screen (→P.109) of the multi-information display.

The warning timing setting is retained when the power switch is turned to OFF. However, if the pre-collision system is disabled and re-enabled, the operation timing will return to the default setting (middle).

graph TD
    A["1: Car Top"] --> B["2: Car Bottom"]
    B --> C["3: Assembly Window"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

1 Early

2 Middle

This is the default setting.

3 Late

■Operational conditions

The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a detected object is high. Each function is operational at the following speed
●Pre-collision warning

Detectable objects Vehicle speed		Relative speed between your vehicle and object
Vehicles	Approx. 7 to 110 mph (10 to 180 km/h)	Approx. 7 to 110 mph (10 to 180 km/h)
Bicyclists and pedestrians	Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10 to 80 km/h)	Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10 to 80 km/h)

●Pre-collision brake assist

Detectable objects Vehicle speed		Relative speed between your vehicle and object
Vehicles	Approx. 20 to 110 mph (30 to 180 km/h)	Approx. 20 to 110 mph (30 to 180 km/h)
Bicyclists and pedestrians	Approx. 20 to 50 mph (30 to 80 km/h)	Approx. 20 to 50 mph (30 to 80 km/h)

●Pre-collision braking

Detectable objects Vehicle speed		Relative speed between your vehicle and object
Vehicles	Approx. 7 to 110 mph (10 to 180 km/h)	Approx. 7 to 110 mph (10 to 180 km/h)
Bicyclists and pedestrians	Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10 to 80 km/h)	Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10 to 80 km/h)

The system may not operate in the following situations:

• If a 12-volt battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time
• If the shift lever is in R
• When the VSC OFF indicator is illuminated (only the pre-collision warning function will be operational)

■Object detection function

The system detects objects based on their size, profile, motion, etc. However, an object may not be detected depending on the surrounding brightness and the motion, posture, and angle of the detected object, preventing the system from operating properly. (→P.255) The illustration shows an image of detectable objects.

Silhouette icons of a car, human figures, and a bicycle (no text or symbols)

■Cancelation of the pre-collision braking

If either of the following occur while the pre-collision braking function is operating, it will be canceled:

●The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly.
●The steering wheel is turned sharply or abruptly.

■Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision

- In some situations such as the following, the system may determine that there is a possibility of a frontal collision and operate.

• When passing a detectable object, etc.
• When changing lanes while overtaking a detectable object, etc.
• When approaching a detectable object in an adjacent lane or on the roadside, such as when changing the course of travel or driving on a winding road

Diagram showing two cars on curved road with traffic light propagation (no text or symbols)

• When rapidly closing on a detectable object, etc.
• When approaching objects on the roadside, such as detectable objects, guardrails, utility poles, trees, or walls
• When there is a detectable object or other object by the roadside at

the entrance of a curve

Diagram showing vehicle detection with a shaded area and directional arrows indicating signal flow or navigation

• When there are patterns or paint in front of your vehicle that may be mistaken for a detectable object
• When the front of your vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc.
• When overtaking a detectable object that is changing lanes or making a right/left turn

Diagram showing two cars on a road with sound waves indicating traffic or sensor detection (no text or symbols)

- When passing a detectable object in an oncoming lane that is stopped to make a right/left turn

Top-down diagram of two cars on a road with sound waves, no text or symbols present

- When a detectable object approaches very close and then stops before entering the path of your vehicle

- If the front of your vehicle is raised or lowered, such as when on an uneven or undulating road surface

- When driving on a road surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on an iron bridge

- When there is a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, or a protrusion in front of

your vehicle

- When passing under an object (road sign, billboard, etc.)

Diagram of a car driving on a road with sensor waves projecting onto a lane (no text or symbols)

- When approaching an electric toll gate barrier, parking area barrier, or other barrier that opens and closes

- When using an automatic car wash

- When driving through or under objects that may contact your vehicle, such as thick grass, tree branches, or a banner

Illustration of a car driving on a road with trees and a vehicle in motion (no text or symbols)

• When driving through steam or smoke
• When driving near an object that reflects radio waves, such as a large truck or guardrail
• When driving near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant, or other location where strong radio waves or electrical noise may be present

■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly

In some situations such as the following, an object may not be detected by the radar sensor and front camera, preventing the system from operating properly:

- When a detectable object is approaching your vehicle

- When your vehicle or a detectable object is wobbling

• If a detectable object makes an abrupt maneuver (such as sudden swerving, acceleration or deceleration)
• When your vehicle approaches a detectable object rapidly
• When a detectable object is not directly in front of your vehicle

Diagram showing two cars approaching a target vehicle with motion arrows, no text or symbols present

• When a detectable object is near a wall, fence, guardrail, manhole cover, vehicle, steel plate on the road, etc.
• When a detectable object is under a structure
• When part of a detectable object is hidden by an object, such as large baggage, an umbrella, or guardrail
• When multiple detectable objects are close together
• If the sun or other light is shining directly on a detectable object
• When a detectable object is a shade of white and looks extremely bright
• When a detectable object appears to be nearly the same color or brightness as its surroundings
• If a detectable object cuts or suddenly emerges in front of your vehicle
• When the front of your vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc.
• When a very bright light ahead, such as the sun or the headlights of oncoming traffic, shines directly into the front camera
• When approaching the side or front of a vehicle ahead
  • If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle
• If a vehicle ahead is narrow, such as a personal mobility vehicle
• If a preceding vehicle has a small rear end, such as an unloaded

truck

- If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end, such as a low bed trailer

Diagram showing a car approaching a truck with motion blur effect (no text or symbols)

• If a vehicle ahead has extremely high ground clearance

Diagram showing a car approaching a vehicle with motion lines (no text or symbols)

• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which protrudes past its rear bumper
• If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped, such as a tractor or side car
• If a vehicle ahead is a child sized bicycle, a bicycle that is carrying a large load, a bicycle ridden by more than one person, or a uniquely shaped bicycle (bicycle with a child seat, tandem bicycle, etc.)
• If a pedestrian/or the riding height of a bicyclist ahead is shorter than approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller than approximately 6.5 ft. (2 m)
• If a pedestrian/bicyclist is wearing oversized clothing (a rain coat, long skirt, etc.), making their silhouette obscure
• If a pedestrian is bending forward or squatting or bicyclist is bending forward
  • If a pedestrian/bicyclist is moving fast
  • If a pedestrian is pushing a stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or other vehicle
• When driving in inclement weather

such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm

• When driving through steam or smoke
• When the surrounding area is dim, such as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in a tunnel, making a detectable object appear to be nearly the same color as its surroundings
• When driving in a place where the surrounding brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel
  • After the hybrid system has started the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time
• While making a left/right turn and for a few seconds after making a left/right turn
• While driving on a curve and for a few seconds after driving on a curve
• If your vehicle is skidding
• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered

Two cars on a road with visible sound waves, no text or symbols present

• If the wheels are misaligned
• If a wiper blade is blocking the front camera
  • The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds
• When driving on a hill
• If the radar sensor or front camera is misaligned
• In some situations such as the following, sufficient braking force may not be obtained, preventing the system from performing properly:

• If the braking functions cannot operate to their full extent, such as when the brake parts are extremely cold, extremely hot, or wet

• If the vehicle is not properly maintained (brakes or tires are excessively worn, improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)

• When the vehicle is being driven on a gravel road or other slippery surface

■If VSC is disabled

• If VSC is disabled (→P.370), the pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision braking functions are also disabled.
  ●The PCS warning light will turn on and “VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision Brake System Unavailable” will be displayed on the multi-information display.

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

While driving on a road with clear white (yellow) lane lines, the LTA system warns the driver if the vehicle may deviate from the current lane or course*, and also can slightly operate the steering wheel to help avoid deviation from the lane or course*. Also, while the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is operating, this system will operate the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's lane position.

The LTA system recognizes white (yellow) lane lines or a course* using the front camera. Additionally, it detects preceding vehicles using the front camera and radar.

*: Boundary between asphalt and the side of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

Line drawing of a car front view with a smartphone mounted on the windshield (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■Before using LTA system

- Do not rely solely upon the LTA system. The LTA system does not automatically drive the vehicle or reduce the amount of attention that must be paid to the area in front of the vehicle. The driver must always assume full responsibility for driving safely by paying careful attention to the surrounding conditions and operating the steering wheel to correct the path of the vehicle. Also, the driver must take adequate breaks when fatigued, such as from driving for a long period of time.

●Failure to perform appropriate driving operations and pay careful attention may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

- When not using the LTA system, use the LTA switch to turn the system off.

■ Situations unsuitable for LTA system

In the following situations, use the LTA switch to turn the system off. Failure to do so may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Vehicle is driven on a road surface which is slippery due to rainy weather, fallen snow, freezing, etc.
● Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road.
● White (yellow) lines are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.
● Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or restricted lane due to construction work.

WARNING

● Vehicle is driven in a construction zone.
● A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are equipped.
- When the tires have been excessively worn, or when the tire inflation pressure is low.
- When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing

■Preventing LTA system mal- functions and operations per- formed by mistake

- Do not modify the headlights or place stickers, etc. on the surface of the lights.

- Do not modify the suspension etc. If the suspension etc. needs to be replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.

- Do not install or place anything on the hood or grille. Also, do not install a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.).

- If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Toyota dealer.

■Conditions in which functions may not operate properly

In the following situations, the functions may not operate properly and the vehicle may depart from its lane. Drive safely by always paying careful attention to your surroundings and operate the steering wheel to correct the path of the vehicle without relying solely on the functions.

- When the follow-up cruising display is displayed (→P.264) and the preceding vehicle changes lanes. (Your vehicle may follow the preceding vehicle and also change lanes.)

Diagram showing a dashed road with two cars ahead of a vertical lane (no text or symbols)

- When the follow-up cruising display is displayed (→P.264) and the preceding vehicle is swaying. (Your vehicle may sway accordingly and depart from the lane.)

- When the follow-up cruising display is displayed (→P.264) and the preceding vehicle departs from its lane. (Your vehicle may follow the preceding vehicle and depart from the lane.)

- When the follow-up cruising display is displayed (→P.264) and the preceding vehicle is being driven extremely close to the left/right lane line. (Your vehicle may follow the preceding vehicle and depart from the lane.)

● Vehicle is being driven around a sharp curve.

WARNING

- Objects or patterns that could be mistaken for white (yellow) lines are present on the side of the road (guardrails, reflective poles, etc.).

Isometric view of a car parked on a paved road with five vertical posts (no text or symbols visible)

● Vehicle is driven where the road diverges, merges, etc.

graph TD
    A["Top Left Road"] --> B["Top Right Road"]
    B --> C["Bottom Left Road"]
    C --> D["Bottom Right Road"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

●Repair marks of asphalt, white (yellow) lines, etc. are present due to road repair.

Diagram showing a car with motion trajectory indicated by dashed curved arrow (no text or symbols)

There are shadows on the road that run parallel with, or cover, the white (yellow) lines.

●The vehicle is driven in an area without white (yellow) lines, such as in front of a tollgate or checkpoint, or at an intersection, etc.

●The white (yellow) lines are cracked, "Botts' dots", "Raised pavement marker" or stones are present.

●The white (yellow) lines cannot be seen or are difficult to see due to sand, etc.

●The vehicle is driven on a road surface that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.

●The traffic lines are yellow (which may be more difficult to recognize than lines that are white).

● The white (yellow) lines cross over a curb, etc.

●The vehicle is driven on a bright surface, such as concrete.

- If the edge of the road is not clear or straight.

●The vehicle is driven on a surface that is bright due to reflected light, etc.

●The vehicle is driven in an area where the brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrances and exits of tunnels, etc.

●Light from the headlights of an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the camera.

●The vehicle is driven on a slope.

●The vehicle is driven on a road which tilts left or right, or a winding road.

●The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or rough road.

WARNING

●The traffic lane is excessively narrow or wide.
●The vehicle is extremely tilted due to carrying heavy luggage or having improper tire pressure.
●The distance to the preceding vehicle is extremely short.
●The vehicle is moving up and down a large amount due to road conditions during driving (poor roads or road seams).
- When driving in a tunnel or at night with the headlights off or when a headlight is dim due to its lens being dirty or it being misaligned.
●The vehicle is struck by a cross-wind.
●The vehicle is affected by wind from a vehicle driven in a nearby lane.
●The vehicle has just changed lanes or crossed an intersection.
● Tires which differ by structure, manufacturer, brand or tread pattern are used.
- When tires of a size other than specified are installed.
●Snow tires, etc. are equipped.
●The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds.

Functions included in LTA system

When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane or course*, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display, and a warning buzzer will sound to alert the driver.

When the warning buzzer sounds, check the area around your vehicle and carefully operate the steering wheel to move the vehicle back to the center of the lane.

Vehicles with BSM: When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane and that the possibility of a collision with an overtaking vehicle in the adjacent lane is high, the lane departure alert will operate even if the turn signals are operating.

*: Boundary between asphalt and the side of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

Diagram showing three cars on a road with directional arrows indicating motion, no text or symbols present

■Steering assist function

When the system determines

that the vehicle might depart from its lane or course*, the system provides assistance as necessary by operating the steering wheel in small amounts for a short period of time to keep the vehicle in its lane.

If the system detects that the steering wheel has not been operated for a fixed amount of time or the steering wheel is not being firmly gripped, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display and the function is temporarily canceled.

Vehicles with BSM: When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane and that the possibility of a collision with an overtaking vehicle in the adjacent lane is high, the steering assist function will operate even if the turn signals are operating.

*: Boundary between asphalt and the side of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

Top-down view of a road with multiple cars and a curved arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

■Vehicle sway warning func- tion

When the vehicle is swaying within a lane, the warning buzzer will sound and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display to alert the driver.

Diagram showing two cars on a road with a lightning bolt symbol indicating electric shock (no text or labels)

■Lane centering function

This function is linked with dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range and provides the required assistance by operating the steering wheel to keep the vehicle in its current lane.

When dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is not operating, the lane centering function does not operate.

In situations where the white (yellow) lane lines are difficult to see or are not visible, such as when in a traffic jam, this function will operate to help follow a preceding vehicle by monitoring the position of the preceding vehicle.

If the system detects that the steering wheel has not been operated for a fixed amount of time or the steering wheel is not being firmly gripped, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display and the function is temporarily canceled.

Diagram showing three cars driving on a curved road with directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Turning LTA system on

Press the LTA switch to turn the LTA system on.

The LTA indicator illuminates and a message is displayed on the multi-information display.

Press the LTA switch again to turn the LTA system off.

When the LTA system is turned on or off, operation of the LTA system continues in the same condition the next time the hybrid system is started.

LTA Turned ON Steering Assist Active

Indications on multi-information display

A C B D

A LTA indicator

The illumination condition of the indicator informs the driver of the system operation status.

Illuminated in white: LTA system is operating.

Illuminated in green: Steering wheel assistance of the steering assist function or lane centering function is operating.

Flashing in orange: Lane departure alert function is operating.

B Operation display of steering wheel operation support

Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving support system information display.

Indicates that steering wheel assistance of the steering assist function or lane centering function is operating.

Both outer sides of the lane are displayed: Indicates that steering wheel assist of the lane centering function is operating.

One outer side of the lane is displayed: Indicates that steering wheel assist of the steering assist function is operating.

Both outer sides of the lane are flashing: Alerts the driver that their input is necessary to stay in the center of the lane (lane centering function).

C Follow-up cruising display

Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving support system information display.

Indicates that steering assist of the lane centering function is operating by monitoring the position of a preceding vehicle.

When the follow-up cruising display is displayed, if the preceding vehicle moves, your vehicle may move in the same way. Always pay careful attention to your surroundings and operate the steering wheel as necessary to correct the path of the vehicle and ensure safety.

D Lane departure alert function display

Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving support system information display.

▶ Inside of displayed lines is white

Abstract white geometric shape with two pointed light streaks against a dark background (no text or symbols)

Indicates that the system is recognizing white (yellow) lines or a course*. When the vehicle departs from its lane, the white line displayed on the side the vehicle departs from flashes orange.

▶ Inside of displayed lines is black

Close-up of a white object with two thin white lines against a dark background, resembling a stylized lamp or abstract form (no text or symbols visible)

Indicates that the system is not able to recognize white (yellow) lines or a course* or is temporarily canceled.

*: Boundary between asphalt and the side of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

■Operation conditions of each function

●Lane departure alert function This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.

• LTA is turned on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more. ^*1
• System recognizes white (yellow) lane lines or a course ^2 . (When a white [yellow] line or course ^2 is recognized on only one side, the system will operate only for the recognized side.)

- Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.

- Turn signal lever is not operated. (Vehicles with BSM: Except when another vehicle is in the lane on the side where the turn signal was operated)

- Vehicle is not being driven around a sharp curve.

- No system malfunctions are detected. (→P.267)

*1: The function operates even if the vehicle speed is less than approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) when the lane centering function is operating.

^*2 :Boundary between asphalt and the side of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

●Steering assist function

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met in addition to the operation conditions for the lane departure alert function.

- Setting for "Steering Assist" in the

screen of the multi-information display is set to "ON". (→P.103)

- Vehicle is not accelerated or decelerated by a fixed amount or more.

- Steering wheel is not operated with a steering force level suitable for changing lanes.

- ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not operating.

- TRAC or VSC is not turned off.

- Hands off steering wheel warning is not displayed. (→P.267)

●Vehicle sway warning function

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.

- Setting for "Sway Warning" in the

screen of the multi-information play is set to "ON". (→P.103)

• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
• No system malfunctions are detected. (→P.267)
  ●Lane centering function

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.

• LTA is turned on.
• Setting for "Steering Assist" and

"Lane Center" in the screen of the multi-information display are set to "ON". (→P.103)

• This function recognizes white (yellow) lane lines or the position of a preceding vehicle (except when the preceding vehicle is small, such as a motorcycle).
• The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is operating in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 10 to 13 ft. (3 to 4 m).
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
• Vehicle is not being driven around a sharp curve.
• No system malfunctions are detected. (→P.267)
• Vehicle does not accelerate or decelerate by a fixed amount or more.
• Steering wheel is not operated with a steering force level suitable for changing lanes.
• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not operating.
• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
• Hands off steering wheel warning is not displayed. (→P.267)
• The vehicle is being driven in the center of a lane.
• Steering assist function is not operating.

■ Temporary cancelation of functions
- When operation conditions are no longer met, a function may be temporarily canceled. However, when the operation conditions are met again, operation of the function is automatically restored. (→P.265)
- If the operation conditions (→P.265) are no longer met while the lane centering function is operating, the buzzer may sound to indicate that the function has been temporarily canceled.
■Steering assist function/lane centering function
● Depending on the vehicle speed, lane departure situation, road conditions, etc., the driver may not feel the function is operating or the function may not operate at all.
- The steering control of the function is overridden by the driver's steering wheel operation.
- Do not attempt to test the operation of the steering assist function.
■Lane departure alert function
●The warning buzzer may be difficult to hear due to external noise, audio playback, etc.
- If the edge of the course ^* is not clear or straight, the lane departure alert function may not operate.
● Vehicles with BSM: It may not be possible for the system to determine if there is a danger of a collision with a vehicle in an adjacent lane.
- Do not attempt to test the operation of the lane departure alert function.
*: Boundary between asphalt and the side of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

■Hands off steering wheel warning

In the following situations, a warning message urging the driver to hold the steering wheel and the symbol shown in the illustration are displayed on the multi-information display to warn the driver. The warning stops when the system determines that the driver holds the steering wheel. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel when using this system, regardless of warnings.

Two gray icons: a car with lane markings and a steering wheel, both on a dark background (no text or symbols)

- When the system determines that the driver is driving without holding the steering wheel while the system is operating

If the driver continues to keep their hands off of the steering wheel, the buzzer sounds, the driver is warned and the function is temporarily canceled. This warning also operates in the same way when the driver continuously operates the steering wheel only a small amount.

- When the system determines that the vehicle may deviate from the lane while driving around a curve while the lane centering function is operating.

Depending on the vehicle condition and road conditions, the warning may not operate. Also, if the system determines that the vehicle is driving around a curve, warnings will occur earlier than during straight-lane driving.

- When the system determines that the driver is driving without hold-

ing the steering wheel while the steering wheel assist of the steering assist function is operating.

If the driver continues to keep their hands off of the steering wheel and the steering wheel assist is operating, the buzzer sounds and the driver is warned. Each time the buzzer sounds, the continuing time of the buzzer becomes longer.

■Vehicle sway warning function

When the system determines that the vehicle is swaying while the vehicle sway warning function is operating, a buzzer sounds and a warning message urging the driver to rest and the symbol shown in the illustration are simultaneously displayed on the multi-information display.

Simple icon of a steaming coffee cup on a saucer, no text or symbols present

Depending on the vehicle and road conditions, the warning may not operate.

■Warning message

If the following warning message is displayed on the multi-information display and the LTA indicator illuminates in orange, follow the appropriate troubleshooting procedure. Also, if a different warning message is displayed, follow the instructions displayed on the screen.

●“LTA Malfunction Visit Your Dealer”

The system may not be operating properly. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

●“LTA Unavailable”

The system is temporarily canceled

due to a malfunction in a sensor other than the front camera. Turn the LTA system off, wait for a little while, and then turn the LTA system back on.

●“LTA Unavailable at Current Speed”

The function cannot be used as the vehicle speed exceeds the LTA operation range. Drive slower.

Customization

Function settings can be changed. (→P.109)

RSA (Road Sign Assist)\*

*: If equipped

The RSA system recognizes specific road signs using the front camera to provide information to the driver via the display.

Line drawing of a car's frontview with a small rectangular object on the windshield and an arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols)

If the system judges that the vehicle is being driven over the speed limit, performing prohibited actions, etc. according to the recognized road signs, it notifies the driver through a visual notification and notification buzzer.

WARNING

■Before using the RSA

Do not rely solely upon the RSA system. RSA is a system which supports the driver by providing information, but it is not a replacement for a driver's own vision and awareness. Drive safely by always paying careful attention to the traffic rules.

Indication on the multi-information display

When the front camera recognizes a sign, the sign will be displayed on the multi-information display.

- When the driving support system information display is selected, a maximum of 3 signs can be displayed. (→P.103)

SPEED LIMIT 50 HOLD

- When a tab other than the driving support system information display is selected, the following types of road signs will be displayed. (→P.103)

• Speed limit sign
• Do Not Enter sign tion is necessary)

SPEED LIMIT 50

If signs other than speed limit signs are recognized, they will be displayed in an overlapping stack under the current speed limit sign.

Supported types of road signs

The following types of road signs, including electronic signs and blinking signs, are recognized.

A non-official or a recently introduced traffic sign may not be recognized.

Speed limit

Do Not Enter

Stop

Yield

(Notification function

In the following situations, the RSA system will notify the driver.

• When the vehicle speed exceeds the speed notification threshold of the speed limit sign displayed, the sign display will be emphasized and a buzzer will sound.
• When the RSA system recog-

nizes a do not enter sign and determines that your vehicle has entered a no-entry area, the displayed sign will flash and a buzzer will sound.

Depending on the situation, a notification function may not operate properly.

Setting procedure

→P.109

■Automatic turn-off of RSA sign display

In the following situations, displayed speed limit sign and/or do not enter signs will stop being displayed automatically:

●No sign has been recognized for a certain distance.
●The road changes due to a left or right turn, etc.

In the following situations, stop and yield signs will stop being displayed automatically:

●The system determines that your vehicle has passed the sign.
●The road changes due to a left or right turn, etc.

■ Conditions in which the function may not operate or detect correctly

In the following situations, RSA does not operate normally and may not recognize signs, display the incorrect sign, etc. However, this does not indicate a malfunction.

●The front camera is misaligned due to a strong impact being applied to the sensor, etc.
- Dirt, snow, stickers, etc. are on the windshield near the front camera.
● In inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or sand storms
●Light from an oncoming vehicle,

the sun, etc. enters the front camera.

●The sign is dirty, faded, tilted or bent, and if an electronic sign, the contrast is poor.
● All or part of the sign is hidden by the leaves of a tree, a pole, etc.
●The sign is only visible to the front camera for a short amount of time.
●The driving scene (turning, lane change, etc.) is judged incorrectly.
- If a sign not appropriate for the currently traveled lane, but the sign exists directly after a freeway branches, or in an adjacent lane just before merging.
●Stickers are attached to the rear of the preceding vehicle.
●A sign resembling a system compatible sign is recognized.
- Side road speed signs may be detected and displayed (if positioned in sight of the front camera) while the vehicle is traveling on the main road.
●Roundabout exit road speed signs may be detected and displayed (if positioned in sight of the front camera) while traveling on a roundabout.
●The front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load.
●The surrounding brightness is not sufficient or changes suddenly.
- When a sign intended for trucks, etc. is recognized.
●The speed information displayed on the meter and on the navigation system may be different due to the navigation system using map data.

■Speed limit sign display

If the power switch was last turned off while a speed limit sign was displayed on the multi-information display, the same sign displays again when the power switch is turned to ON.

If "RSA Malfunction Visit Your Dealer" is shown

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Customization

Some functions can be customized. (Customizable features: →P.109)

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

In vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates, decelerates and stops to match the speed changes of the preceding vehicle even if the accelerator pedal is not depressed. In constant speed control mode, the vehicle runs at a fixed speed.

Use the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range on freeways and highways.

● Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode ( P.274)
- Constant speed control mode (→P.279)

System Components

■Meter display

A SET 60 MPH B C SET

A Multi-information display
B Set speed

C Indicators

Operation switches

A B C + RES CANCEL - SET E D

A Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch
B “+RES” switch
Cruise control main switch
D Cancel switch
E “-SET” switch

WARNING

■Before using dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
●Driving safely is the sole responsibility of the driver. Do not rely solely on the system, and drive safely by always paying careful attention to your surroundings.

The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range provides driving assistance to reduce the driver's burden. However, there are limitations to the assistance provided.

Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system and always drive carefully.

• When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead: P.281
• Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not function correctly: →P.281

- Set the speed appropriately depending on the speed limit, traffic flow, road conditions, weather conditions, etc. The driver is responsible for checking the set speed.

● Even when the system is functioning normally, the condition of the preceding vehicle as detected by the system may differ from the condition observed by the driver. Therefore, the driver must always remain alert, assess the danger of each situation and drive safely. Relying solely on this system or assuming the system ensures safety while driving can lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

- Switch the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range setting to off, using the cruise control main switch when not in use.

WARNING

■ Cautions regarding the driving assist systems

Observe the following precautions, as there are limitations to the assistance provided by the system. Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Assisting the driver to measure following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is only intended to help the driver in determining the following distance between the driver's own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions.

It is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle's surroundings.

●Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range determines whether the following distance between the driver's own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead is within a set range. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in any given situation.

●Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle

The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range does not include functions which will prevent or avoid collisions with vehicles ahead of your vehicle.

Therefore, if there is ever any possibility of danger, the driver must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in order to ensure the safety of all involved.

■Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

Do not use dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range in any of the following situations. Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

●Roads where there are pedestrians, cyclists, etc.
In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
●On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients

Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

● At entrances to freeways and highways

WARNING

• When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from detecting correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)
• When there is rain, snow, etc. on the front surface of the radar or front camera
  ● In traffic conditions that require frequent repeated acceleration and deceleration
• When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing
• When an approach warning buzzer is heard often

Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

This mode employs a radar to detect the presence of vehicles up to approximately 328 ft. (100 m) ahead, determines the current vehicle-to-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from the vehicle ahead. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.

When driving on downhill slopes, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance may become shorter.

A

Diagram showing a car emitting signal waves from a road, with no text or symbols present.

B

Diagram showing two cars ahead of a road with traffic light dispersion (no text or symbols)

Top-down diagram of three cars on a road with dashed lane markings (no text or symbols)

C

Diagram showing three cars on a road with traffic signals and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

A Example of constant speed cruising

When there are no vehicles ahead

The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver.

B Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising

When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed appears

When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes (the stop lights will come on at this time). The system will respond to changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver. Approach warning warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.

When the vehicle ahead of you stops, your vehicle will also stop (vehicle is stopped by system control). After the vehicle ahead starts off, pressing the “+RES” switch or depressing the accelerator pedal (start-off operation) will resume follow-up cruising. If the start-off operation is not performed, system control continues to keep your vehicle stopped.

When the turn signal lever is operated and your vehicle moves to an over-taking lane while driving at 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the vehicle will accelerate to help to overtake a passing vehicle.

The system's identification of what is an overtaking lane may be determined solely based on the location of the steering wheel in the vehicle (left side driver position versus right side driver position.) If the vehicle is driven to a region where the overtaking lane is on a different side from where the vehicle is normally driven, the vehicle may accelerate when the turn signal lever is operated in the opposite direction to the overtaking lane (e.g., if the driver normally operates the vehicle in a region where the overtaking lane is to the right but then drives to a region where the overtaking lane is to the left, the vehicle may accelerate when the right turn signal is activated).

c Example of acceleration

When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower than the set speed

The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to constant speed cruising.

Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

1 Press the cruise control main

switch to activate the cruise control.

Dynamic radar cruise control indicator will come on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. Press the switch

again to deactivate the cruise control.

If the cruise control main switch is pressed and held for 1.5 seconds or more, the system turns on in constant speed control mode. (→P.279)

Radar Ready

2 Accelerate or decelerate, with accelerator pedal operation, to the desired vehicle speed (at or above approximately 20 mph [30 km/h]) and press the “-SET” switch to set the speed.

Cruise control "SET" indicator will come on.

The vehicle speed at the moment the switch is released becomes the set speed.

SET - SET SET 60 MPH

Adjusting the set speed

To change the set speed, press the “+RES” or “-SET” switch until the desired set speed is

displayed.

1 + RES CANCEL - SET 2

1 Increases the speed (Except when the vehicle has been stopped by system control in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
2 Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Press the switch. Large adjustment: Press and hold the switch to change the speed, and release when the desired speed is reached.

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

For the U.S. mainland and Hawaii

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h) ^1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph) ^2 each time the switch is pressed

Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 1 mph (1.6 km/h) ^1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph) ^2 increments for as long as the switch is held

▶ Except for the U.S. mainland and Hawaii

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h) ^1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph) ^2 each time the switch is pressed

Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 5 mph (8 km/h) ^1 or 5 km/h (3.1 mph) ^2 increments for as long as the switch is held

In the constant speed control mode ( P.279), the set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h) ^1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph) ^2 each time the switch is pressed

Large adjustment: The speed will continue to change while the switch is held.

*1: When the set speed is shown in "MPH"
*2: When the set speed is shown in "km/h"

Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

Pressing the switch changes the vehicle-to-vehicle distance as follows:

A 1 2 3

1 Long
2 Medium
3 Short

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is set automatically to long mode when the power switch is turned to ON.

If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the preceding vehicle mark A will also be displayed.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed. When the vehicle is stopped by system control, the vehicle stops at a certain vehicle-to-vehicle distance depending on the situation.

Distance options	Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long	Approximately 160 ft. (50 m)
Medium	Approximately 130 ft. (40 m)
Short	Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)

Resuming follow-up cruising when the vehicle has been stopped by sys- tem control (vehicle-to- vehicle distance control mode)

After the vehicle ahead of you starts off, press the “+RES” switch.

Your vehicle will also resume follow-up cruising if the accelerator pedal is depressed after the vehicle ahead of you starts off.

+ RES SET Push Cruise Control Switch or Press Accelerator to Resume

Canceling and resuming the speed control

2 + RES CANCEL 1

1 Pressing the cancel switch cancels the speed control.

The speed control is also canceled when the brake pedal is depressed. (When the vehicle has been

stopped by system control, depressing the brake pedal does not cancel the setting.)

2 Pressing the “+RES” switch resumes the cruise control and returns vehicle speed to the set speed.

Approach warning (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the display will flash and the buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a vehicle. Depress the brake pedal to ensure an appropriate vehicle-to-vehicle distance.

Diagram showing a car interior with steering wheel and dashboard, alongside a 3D rendered road view (no text or symbols)

■Warnings may not occur when

In the following instances, warnings may not occur even when the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is small.

- When the speed of the pre-

ceding vehicle matches or exceeds your vehicle speed

• When the preceding vehicle is traveling at an extremely slow speed
• Immediately after the cruise control speed was set
• When depressing the accelerator pedal

Selecting constant speed control mode

When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance. Select this mode only when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode does not function correctly due to a dirty radar, etc.

1 With the cruise control off, press and hold the cruise control main switch for 1.5 seconds or more.

Immediately after the switch is pressed, the dynamic radar cruise control indicator will come on. Afterwards, it switches to the cruise control indicator.

Switching to constant speed control mode is only possible when operating the switch with the cruise con-

trol off.

Diagram showing car steering wheel and dashboard with speedometer and directional arrow indicator

2 Accelerate or decelerate, with accelerator pedal operation, to the desired vehicle speed (at or above approximately 20 mph [30 km/h]) and press the "-SET" switch to set the speed.

Cruise control "SET" indicator will come on.

The vehicle speed at the moment the switch is released becomes the set speed.

Adjusting the speed setting: →P.276

Canceling and resuming the speed setting: →P.278

SET - SET

■ Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range can be set when

●The shift lever is in D.
●The desired set speed can be set when the vehicle speed is approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more.

(However, when the vehicle speed is set while driving at below approximately 20 mph [30 km/h], the set speed will be set to approximately 20 mph [30 km/h].)

■Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

The vehicle can accelerate by operating the accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the set speed resumes. However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the preceding vehicle.

■When the vehicle stops while follow-up cruising

• Pressing the “+RES” switch while the vehicle ahead stops will resume follow-up cruising if the vehicle ahead starts off within approximately 3 seconds after the switch is pressed.
• If the vehicle ahead starts off within 3 seconds after your vehicle stops, follow-up cruising will be resumed.

■Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations.

●VSC is activated.
●TRAC is activated for a period of time.
- When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off.
●The sensor cannot detect correctly because it is covered in some way.
●Pre-collision braking is activated.
●The parking brake is operated.
●The vehicle is stopped by system control on a steep incline.
●The following are detected when the vehicle has been stopped by

system control:

• The driver is not wearing a seat belt.
• The driver's door is opened.
• The vehicle has been stopped for about 3 minutes

If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled for any reasons other than the above, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.

■Automatic cancelation of constant speed control mode

Constant speed control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations:

●Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set vehicle speed.
●Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

●VSC is activated.

●TRAC is activated for a period of time.

- When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off.

●Pre-collision braking is activated. If constant speed control mode is automatically canceled for any reasons other than the above, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.

Brake operation

A brake operation sound may be heard and the brake pedal response may change, but these are not malfunctions.

■Warning messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the

message and follow the instructions. (→P.248, 654)

■When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead

In the case of the following and depending on the conditions, operate the brake pedal when deceleration of the system is insufficient or operate the accelerator pedal when acceleration is required.

As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the approach warning ( P.278) may not be activated.

● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving in the same lane
● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board, etc.)

Diagram showing two vehicles with a truck and a car, connected by a road with circular traffic indicators (no text or symbols)

●Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
- When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the detecting of the sensor
- When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the luggage compartment, etc.)

Two cars on a road with a curved speedometer, no text or symbols present

●Preceding vehicle has an

extremely high ground clearance

Illustration of a truck and a car on a road with sound waves (no text or symbols)

Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not function correctly

In the case of the following conditions, operate the brake pedal (or accelerator pedal, depending on the situation) as necessary.

As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, the system may not operate properly.

- When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow

Three curved road scenarios showing cars on different surfaces with motion indicators (no text or symbols)

- When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable

Two identical road scenarios showing cars emitting sound waves from a central road (no text or symbols)

●When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly
- When driving on a road surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on a bridge
●While the vehicle speed is

decreasing to the set speed after the vehicle accelerates by depressing the accelerator pedal

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)\*

*: If equipped

The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that has 2 functions:

● The BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) function
Assists the driver in making a decision when changing lanes
● The RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) function
Assists the driver when back- ing up
These functions use the same sensors.

WARNING

■ Cautions regarding the use of the BSM function

The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.

The BSM function is a supplementary function which alerts the driver that a vehicle is in a blind spot of the outside rear view mirrors or is approaching rapidly from behind into a blind spot. Do not overly rely on the BSM function. As the function cannot judge if it is safe to change lanes, over reliance could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

As the system may not function correctly under certain conditions, the driver's own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.

WARNING

■ Cautions regarding the use of the RCTA function

The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.

The RCTA function is only a supplementary function which alerts the driver that a vehicle is approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle. As the RCTA function may not function correctly under certain conditions, the driver's own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.

Over reliance on this function may lead to an accident resulting death or serious injury.

System components

Turning the BSM function/RCTA function on/off.

B Outside rear view mirror indi-

cators

BSM function:

When a vehicle is detected in a blind spot of the outside rear view mirrors or approaching rapidly from behind into a blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator on the detected side will illuminate. If the turn signal lever is operated toward the detected side, the outside rear view mirror indicator will flash.

RCTA function:

When a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, both outside rear view mirror indicators will flash.

C BSM indicator/RCTA OFF indicator

When the Blind Spot Monitor is enabled, the BSM indicator illuminates.

When the RCTA function is disabled, the RCTA OFF indicator illuminates.

D Monitor screen display (RCTA function only)

If a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, the RCTA icon (→P.289) for the detected side will be displayed.

E RCTA buzzer (RCTA function only)

If a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, a buzzer will sound from behind the rear seat.

Turning the BSM function/RCTA function on/off

The BSM function and the RCTA function can be

enabled/disabled on the screen of the multi-information display. (→P.109)

■ Outside rear view mirror indicators visibility

In strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to see.

■Hearing the RCTA buzzer

The RCTA buzzer may be difficult to hear over loud noises such as high audio volume.

When “Blind Spot Monitor Unavailable” or “Rear Cross Traffic Alert Unavailable” is shown on the multi-information display

The sensor voltage has become

■Certification for the Blind Spot Monitor

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, American Samoa, Guam, Saipan and Puerto Rico

FCC ID: HYQDNSRR004

NOTE:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

abnormal, or water, snow, mud, etc., may be built up in the vicinity of the sensor area of the rear bumper. (→P.285)

Removing the water, snow, mud, etc., from the vicinity of the sensor area should return it to normal.

Also, the sensor may not function normally when used in extremely hot or cold weather.

When “Blind Spot Monitor System Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” or “Rear Cross Traffic Alert Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” is shown on the multi-information display

There may be a sensor malfunction or misaligned. Have the vehicle inspected at a Toyota dealer.

Customization

Some functions can be customized. (→P.109)

For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE:

This device complies with Industry Canada's RSS-310. Operation is subject to the condition that this device must not cause harmful interference and must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

24.05 to 24.25 GHz

250 mV/m or less @ 3m

NOTE:

250 mV/m or less @ 3m

WARNING

■Handling the radar sensor

Blind Spot Monitor sensors are installed inside the left and right sides of the rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the Blind Spot Monitor can function correctly.

Line drawing of a car's front bumper and side bumper with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

- Keep the sensors and the surrounding areas on the rear bumper clean at all times. If a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear bumper is dirty or covered with snow, the Blind Spot Monitor may not operate and a warning message (→P.284) will be displayed. In this situation, clear off the dirt or snow and drive the vehicle with the operation conditions of the BSM function (→P.287) satisfied for approximately 10 minutes. If the warning message does not disappear, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

- Do not subject a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear bumper to a strong impact. If a sensor is moved even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and vehicles may not be detected correctly. In the following situations, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

• A sensor or its surrounding area is subject to a strong impact.

WARNING

• If the surrounding area of a sensor is scratched or dented, or part of them has become disconnected.
• Do not disassemble the sensor.
• Do not attach accessories, stickers (including transparent stickers), aluminum tape, etc. to a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear bumper.
• Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the rear bumper.
• If a sensor or the rear bumper needs to be removed/installed or replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.
• Do not paint the rear bumper any color other than an official Toyota color.

The Blind Spot Monitor function

■ Vehicles that can be detected by the Blind Spot Monitor

The BSM function uses radar sensors to detect the following vehicles traveling in adjacent lanes and advises the driver of the presence of such vehicles via the indicators on the outside rear view mirrors.

A B

A Vehicles that are traveling in areas that are not visible using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)

B Vehicles that are approaching rapidly from behind in areas that are not visible using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)

■The BSM function detection areas

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

A B C D

The range of each detection area is:

A Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from either side of the vehicle

The area between the side of the vehicle and 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of the vehicle cannot be detected.

B Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper
C Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper
D Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) to 197 ft. (60 m) from the rear bumper

The greater the difference in speed between your vehicle and the detected vehicle is, the farther away the vehicle will be detected, causing the outside rear view mirror indicator to illuminate or flash.

■The BSM function is operational when

The BSM function is operational when all of the following conditions are met:

●The BSM function is on.
●The shift lever is in a position other than R.
●The vehicle speed is greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).

■The BSM function will detect a vehicle when

The BSM function will detect a vehicle present in the detection area in the following situations:

●A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle.

- You overtake a vehicle in an adjacent lane slowly.

●Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes.

■Conditions under which the BSM function will not detect a vehicle

The BSM function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects:

● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.*
● Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction
●Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
- Following vehicles that are in the same lane*
● Vehicles traveling 2 lanes away from your vehicle *
● Vehicles which are being over-taken rapidly by your vehicle

*: Depending on the conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

■ Conditions under which the BSM function may not function correctly

●The BSM function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following situations:
- When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surrounding area
- When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is covering the sensor or surrounding area on the rear bumper
- When driving on a road surface that is wet with standing water during bad weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog
- When multiple vehicles are approaching with only a small gap between each vehicle
- When the distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle is short
- When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area
- When the difference in speed between your vehicle and another vehicle is changing
- When a vehicle enters a detection area traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle
- As your vehicle starts from a stop, a vehicle remains in the detection area
- When driving up and down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the road, etc.
- When driving on roads with sharp bends, consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces
- When vehicle lanes are wide, or when driving on the edge of a lane, and the vehicle in an adjacent lane is far away from your vehicle
- When an accessory (such as a bicycle carrier) is installed to the rear of the vehicle
- When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area
- Immediately after the BSM func-

tion/RCTA function are turned on

• When towing a trailer
  ●Instances of the BSM function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object may increase in the following situations:
• When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surrounding area
• When the distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc. that enters the detection area is short
• When driving up and down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the road, etc.
• When vehicle lanes are narrow, or when driving on the edge of a lane, and a vehicle traveling in a lane other than the adjacent lanes enters the detection area
• When driving on roads with sharp bends, consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces
• When the tires are slipping or spinning
• When the distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle is short
• When an accessory (such as a bicycle carrier) is installed to the rear of the vehicle
• When the vehicle throws up water or snow behind.

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function (if equipped)

■Operation of the RCTA function

The RCTA function uses radar sensors to detect vehicles approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle and alerts the driver of the presence of such vehicles by flashing the outside rear view mirror indica-

tors and sounding a buzzer.

graph TD
    A1["Car A"] --> B1["B"]
    B1 --> C1["Car B"]
    C1 --> D1["Car A"]
    D1 --> E1["Car B"]
    E1 --> F1["Car A"]
    style A1 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B1 fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C1 fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D1 fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E1 fill:#cff,stroke:#333

A Approaching vehicles

B Detection areas

■RCTA icon display (if equipped)

When a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, the following will be displayed on the navigation system (if equipped) or multimedia system (if equipped) screen.

- When the Toyota parking assist monitor (if equipped) is displayed

Diagram of a car with motion arrows indicating speed or flow (no text or symbols)

- When the panoramic view monitor (if equipped) is displayed

Diagram showing a structural frame being lifted by an arrow, and a car on a ramp with motion arrows (no text or symbols)

The RCTA function is malfunctioning ( P.284)

■The RCTA function detection areas

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

A

The buzzer can alert the driver of faster vehicles approaching from farther away.

Example:

Approaching vehicle	Speed	Approximate alert distance
Fast	18 mph (28 km/h)	65 ft. (20 m)
Slow	5 mph (8 km/h)	18 ft. (5.5 m)

■The RCTA function is operational when

The RCTA function operates when all of the following conditions are met:

●The RCTA function is on.

●The shift lever is in R.

●The vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).

●The approaching vehicle speed is between approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and 17 mph (28 km/h).

■Setting the buzzer volume

The buzzer volume can be adjusted on the multi-information display. (→P.109)

■Conditions under which the RCTA function will not detect a vehicle

The RCTA function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects.

● Vehicles approaching from directly behind

● Vehicles backing up in a parking space next to your vehicle

● Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect due to obstructions

Diagram showing parking garage with cars and directional arrows indicating movement or clearance

●Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*

● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc. *

● Vehicles moving away from your vehicle

● Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehi-

cle*

*: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

■ Conditions under which the RCTA function may not function correctly

●The RCTA function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following situations:

- When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surrounding area

- When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is covering the sensor or surrounding area on the rear bumper

- When driving on a road surface that is wet with standing water during bad weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog

- When multiple vehicles are approaching with only a small gap between each vehicle

- When a vehicle is approaching at high speed

- When parking on a steep incline, such as hills, a dip in the road, etc.

- When an accessory (such as a bicycle carrier) is installed to the rear of the vehicle

- When backing up on a slope with a sharp change in grade

Diagram showing two lanes with cars moving on a road, indicated by arrows (no text or symbols)

- When backing out of a shallow angle parking spot

Top-down diagram of two cars on a road with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

• Immediately after the RCTA function is turned on
• Immediately after the hybrid system is started with the RCTA function on
• When towing a trailer
• When the sensors cannot detect a vehicle due to obstructions

Diagram showing parking lane with cars and directional arrows indicating movement or flow

●Instances of the RCTA function unnecessary detecting a vehicle and/or object may increase in the following situations:
- When a vehicle passes by the side of your vehicle
- When the parking space faces a street and vehicles are being driven on the street

Diagram showing car parking and road collision with directional arrows indicating movement

• When the distance between your vehicle and metal objects, such as a guardrail, wall, sign, or parked vehicle, which may reflect electrical waves toward the rear of the vehicle, is short
• When an accessory (such as a bicycle carrier) is installed to the rear of the vehicle

Intuitive parking assist\*

*: If equipped

The distance from your vehicle to objects, such as a wall, when parallel parking or maneuvering into a garage is measured by the sensors and communicated via the multi-information display, navigation system or multimedia system screen and a buzzer. Always check the surrounding area when using this system.

System components

■ Location and types of sensors

A B A C D C

A Front corner sensors
B Front center sensors
C Rear corner sensors
D Rear center sensors

■Display (Multi-information display)

When the sensors detect an object, such as a wall, a graphic

is shown on the multi-information display depending on the position and distance to the object.

A B B A C C D D

A Front corner sensor detection
B Front center sensor detection ^1
C Rear corner sensor detection ^2
D Rear center sensor detection ^4

*1: Displayed when the shift lever is in a driving position
*2: Displayed when the shift lever is in R

■Display (Audio system screen)

When the sensors detect an object, such as a wall, a graphic is shown on the navigation system (if equipped) or multimedia system (if equipped) screen depending on the position and distance to the object.

- When the Toyota parking assist monitor (if equipped) is displayed

Diagram showing a vehicle on a road with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

A simplified image is displayed on the upper corner of the screen when an obstacle is detected.

• When the panoramic view monitor (if equipped) is displayed
  Panoramic view*

Diagram showing a car with a curved ramp and directional arrow, no text or symbols present

A graphic is shown when the panoramic view monitor is displayed.

*: A simplified image is displayed on the upper corner of the screen when an obstacle is detected while magnified display is shown.

▶ Except panoramic view

Illustration of a mechanical structure with an arrow pointing to a cylindrical device (no text or symbols present)

A simplified image is displayed on the upper corner of the screen when an obstacle is detected.

Turning intuitive parking assist on/off

The Intuitive parking assist can be enabled/disabled on the screen of the multi-information display. (→P.109)

When the intuitive parking assist function is disabled, the intuitive parking assist OFF indicator ( P.91) illuminates on the multi-information display.

To re-enable the system, select on the multi-information display, select P and turn it on.

If the system is disabled, it will remain off even if the power switch is turned to ON after the power switch has been turned off.

WARNING

■Intuitive parking assist precautions

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident.

- Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).

The sensors' detection areas and reaction times are limited. When moving forward or reversing, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially the sides of the vehicle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to control the vehicle's speed.

- Do not install accessories near the bumpers as those areas are within the sensors' detection areas.

●The area directly under the bumpers is not detected. Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected when approached, even if they have been detected once.

■When to disable the function

In the following situations, disable the function as it may operate even though there is no possibility of a collision.

●The vehicle is equipped with a commercial fender pole, wireless antenna or fog lights.

●The front or rear bumper or a sensor receives a strong impact.

● A non-genuine Toyota suspension (lowered suspension, etc.) is installed.

WARNING

● Towing eyelets (if equipped) are installed.
●A backlit license plate is installed.
■When using the intuitive parking assist

In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a sensor malfunction, etc. Have the vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.

●The intuitive parking assist operation display flashes or shows continuously, and a buzzer sounds when no objects are detected.
- If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to strong impact.
- If the bumper or grille collides with something.
- If the display flashes or is displayed continuously and a buzzer does not sound, except when the mute function has been turned on.

■Notes when washing the vehicle

Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.

Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.

• When using a high pressure washer to wash the vehicle, do not spray the sensors directly, as doing so may cause a sensor to malfunction.
• When using steam to clean the vehicle, do not direct steam too close to the sensors as doing so may cause a sensor to malfunction.

■The system can be operated when

●The power switch is in ON.
- Intuitive parking assist function is on.
●The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).
●The shift lever is in a position other than P.

If "Parking Assist Unavailable Clean Parking Assist Sensor" is displayed on the multi-information display

A sensor may be covered with ice, snow, dirt, etc. Remove the ice, snow, dirt, etc., from the sensor to return the system to normal.

Also, due to ice forming on a sensor at low temperatures, a warning message may be displayed or the sensor may not be able to detect an object. Once the ice melts, the system will return to normal.

If a warning message is displayed even if the sensor is clean, there may be a sensor malfunction. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

If "Parking Assist Unavailable" is displayed on the multi-information display

●Water may be continuously flowing over the sensor surface, such as in a heavy rain. When the system determines that it is normal, the system will return to normal.
● Initialization may not have been performed after a 12-volt battery terminal was disconnected and reconnected. Initialize the system. (→P.294) If this message continues to be displayed even after initialization, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

If a 12-volt battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected

The system needs to be initialized.

To initialize the system, drive the vehicle straight ahead for 5 seconds or more at a speed of approximately 22 mph (35 km/h) or more.

■ Sensor detection information

- The sensor's detection areas are limited to the areas around the vehicle's front and rear bumpers.

●The following situations may occur during use.

- Depending on the shape of the object and other factors, the detection distance may shorten, or detection may be impossible.

- Detection may be impossible if static objects draw too close to the sensor.

- There will be a short delay between static object detection and display (warning buzzer sounds). Even at low speeds, there is a possibility that the object will come within 11.9 in. (30 cm) before the display is shown and the warning buzzer sounds.

- It might be difficult to hear the buzzer due to the volume of the audio system or air flow noise of the air conditioning system.

- It may be difficult to hear the sound of this system due to the buzzers of other systems.

■ Conditions under which the function may not function correctly

Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of a sensor to correctly detect objects. Particular instances where this may occur are listed below.

●There is dirt, snow or ice on a sensor. (Cleaning the sensors will resolve this problem.)

●A sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.) In especially cold weather, if a sensor is frozen the sensor display may be displayed abnormally, or objects, such as a wall, may not be detected.

●A sensor is covered in any way.

- When a sensor or the area around a sensor is extremely hot or cold.

●On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.

●The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.

● There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.

●A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.

- If a sensor is hit by a large amount of water, such as when driving on a flooded road.

●If the vehicle is significantly tilted.

●The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.

- If objects draw too close to the sensor.

■ Objects which may not be properly detected

The shape of the object may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay particular attention to the following objects:

●Wires, fences, ropes, etc.

●Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves

● Sharply-angled objects

●Low objects

●Tall objects with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle

People may not be detected if they are wearing certain types of clothing.

■Certification (Canada only)

This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.

Sensor detection display, object distance

■ Detection range of the sensors

A B C C

A Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm)
B Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)
C Approximately 2.1 ft. (63 cm)

The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot detect objects that are extremely close to the vehicle.

The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object, etc.

■Distance display

When an object is detected by a sensor, the approximate distance to the object will be displayed on the multi-information display, navigation system (if equipped) or multimedia system (if equipped) screen. (As the distance to the object becomes short, the distance segments may blink.)

The images may differ from that shown in the illustrations.

● Approximate distance to object
- Front center sensor: 3.3 ft. (100 cm) to 2.1 ft. (63 cm)
- Rear center sensor: 4.9 ft. (150 cm) to 2.1 ft. (63 cm)

Multi-information display Navigation or multimedia system screen

● Approximate distance to object: 2.1 ft. (63 cm) to 1.6 ft. (48 cm)

Multi-information display Navigation or multimedia system screen

● Approximate distance to object: 1.6 ft. (48 cm) to 1.1 ft. (34 cm)

Multi-information display Navigation or multimedia system screen

● Approximate distance to object: 1.1 ft. (34 cm) to 0.5 ft. (15 cm)

Multi-information display*	Navigation or multimedia system screen

*: The distance segments will blink slowly.

● Approximate distance to object: Less than 0.5 ft. (15 cm)

Multi-information display*	Navigation or multimedia system screen

*: The distance segments will blink rapidly.

■Buzzer operation and distance to an object

A buzzer sounds when the sensors are operating.

● The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle approaches an object.

When the vehicle comes

within approximately 1.1 ft. (34 cm) of the object, the buzzer sounds continuously.

- When 2 or more sensors simultaneously detect a static object, the buzzer sounds for the nearest object.

- Even when the sensors are

operating, the buzzer will be muted in some situations. (automatic buzzer mute function)

■Muting the buzzer sound

●Automatic buzzer mute function

Even when the sensors are operating, the buzzer will be muted in the following situations:

• The distance between the vehicle and the detected object does not become shorter (except when the distance between the vehicle and object is 1.1 ft. [34 cm] or less).
• Your vehicle is moving away from the object.
  • There are no detectable objects entering the path of your vehicle.

However, if another object is detected or the situation changes while the buzzer is muted, the buzzer begins sounding again.

●To mute the buzzer sound

The buzzer can be temporarily

muted by pressing of the meter control switches while a suggestion that says mute is available is shown on the multi-information display.

●When the mute is canceled

Mute will be automatically canceled in the following situations.

• When the shift position is changed
• When the vehicle speed has reached or exceeded a certain speed
• When the Intuitive parking assist is turned off once and turned on again
• When the power switch is turned off once and turned to ON again

Customization

The buzzer volume can be adjusted on the multi-information display. ( P.109)

PKSB (Parking Support Brake)\*

*: If equipped

The Parking Support Brake system consists of the following functions that operate when driving at a low speed or backing up, such as when parking. When the system determines that the possibility of a collision with a detected object is high, a warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action. If the system determines that the possibility of a collision with a detected object is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or help reduce the impact of the collision.

PKSB (Parking Support Brake) system

■Parking Support Brake function (static objects)

→P.303

■Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) (if equipped)

→P.309

WARNING

■Limitations of the Parking Support Brake system

Do not overly rely on the system, as doing so may lead to an accident.

Always drive while checking the safety of the surroundings of the vehicle.

Depending on the vehicle and road conditions, weather, etc., the system may not operate.

The detection capabilities of sensors and radars are limited.

Always drive while checking the safety of the surroundings of the vehicle.

●The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive carefully, taking care to observe your surroundings. The Parking Support Brake system is designed to provide support to lessen the severity of collisions. However, it may not operate in some situations.
●The Parking Support Brake system is not designed to stop the vehicle completely. Additionally, even if the system has stopped the vehicle, it is necessary to depress the brake pedal immediately as brake control will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds.

NOTICE

If “Parking Support Brake Unavailable” is displayed on the multi-information display and the PKSB OFF indicator is flashing

If this message is displayed immediately after the power switch is changed to ON, operate the vehicle carefully, paying attention to your surroundings. It may be necessary to drive the vehicle for a certain amount of time before the system returns to normal. (If the system does not return to normal after driving for a while, clean the sensors and their surrounding area on the bumpers.)

Enabling/Disabling the Parking Support Brake

The Parking Support Brake can

be enabled/disabled on the screen of the multi-information display. All of the Parking Support Brake functions (static objects and rear-crossing vehicles) are enabled/disabled simultaneously. (→P.109)

When the Parking Support Brake is disabled, the PKSB OFF indicator ( P.91) illuminates on the multi-information display.

To re-enable the system, select on the multi-information display, select and turn it on.

If the system is disabled, it will remain off even if the power switch is turned to ON after the power switch has been turned off.

Display and buzzer for hybrid system output restriction control and brake control

If the hybrid system output restriction control or brake control operates, a buzzer will sound and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display, navigation system (if equipped) or multimedia system (if equipped) screen, to alert the driver.

Depending on the situation, hybrid system output restriction control will operate to either limit acceleration or restrict output as much as possible.

● Hybrid system output restriction control is operating (acceleration restriction)

Acceleration greater than a certain amount is restricted by the system.

Navigation system (if equipped) or multimedia system (if equipped) screen: No warning displayed

Multi-information display: "Object Detected Acceleration Reduced"

PKSB OFF indicator: Not illuminated

Buzzer: Does not sound

- Hybrid system output restriction control is operating (output restricted as much as possible)

The system has determined that stronger-than-normal brake operation is necessary.

Navigation system (if equipped) or multimedia system (if equipped) screen: "BRAKE!"

Multi-information display: "BRAKE!"

PKSB OFF indicator: Not illuminated

Buzzer: Short beep

● Brake control is operating

The system determined that emergency braking is necessary.

Navigation system (if equipped) or multimedia system (if equipped) screen: "BRAKE!"

Multi-information display: "BRAKE!"

PKSB OFF indicator: Not illuminated

Buzzer: Short beep

● Vehicle stopped by system operation

The vehicle has been stopped by brake control operation.

Navigation system (if equipped) or multimedia system (if equipped) screen: "Press Brake Pedal"

Multi-information display: "Switch to Brake" (If the accelerator pedal is not depressed, "Brake" will be displayed.)

PKSB OFF indicator: Illuminated

Buzzer: Short beep

System overview

If the Parking Support Brake determines that a collision with a detected object is possible, the hybrid system output will be restricted to restrain any increase in the vehicle speed.

(Hybrid system output restriction control: See figure 2.)

Additionally, if the accelerator pedal continues to be depressed, the brakes will be applied automatically to reduce the vehicle speed. (Brake control: See figure 3.)

● Figure 1: When the PKSB (Parking Support Brake) is not operating

A B C

A Hybrid system output

B Braking force

c Time

● Figure 2: When hybrid system output restriction control operates

A B C D

A Hybrid system output

B Braking force

c Time

D Hybrid system output restriction control begins operating (System determines that possibility of collision with detected object is high)

● Figure 3: When hybrid system output restriction control and brake control operates

A B C D E

A Hybrid system output
B Braking force
c Time
D Hybrid system output restriction control begins operating (System determines that possibility of collision with detected object is high)
E Brake control begins operating (System determines that possibility of collision with detected object is extremely high)

■If the Parking Support Brake has operated

If the vehicle is stopped due to operation of the Parking Support Brake, the Parking Support Brake will be disabled and the PKSB OFF indicator will illuminate. If the Parking Support Brake operates unnecessarily, brake control can be canceled by

depressing the brake pedal or waiting for approximately 2 seconds for it to automatically be canceled. Then, the vehicle can be operated by depressing the accelerator pedal.

■Re-enabling the Parking Support Brake

To re-enable the Parking Support Brake when it is disabled due to operation of the Parking Support Brake, either enable the system again ( P.299), or turn the power switch to OFF and then back to ON. Additionally, if the object becomes no longer in the traveling direction of the vehicle or if the traveling direction of the vehicle changes (such as changing from moving forward to backing up, or from backing up to moving forward), the system will be re-enabled automatically.

If “Parking Support Brake Unavailable” is displayed on the multi-information display and the PKSB OFF indicator is flashing

• If this message is displayed, a sensor on the front or rear bumper may be dirty. Clean the sensors and their surrounding area on the bumpers.
  ● Initialization may not have been performed after a 12-volt battery terminal was disconnected and reconnected. Initialize the system. (→P.302) If this message continues to be displayed even after initialization, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

If “Parking Support Brake Unavailable” and “Parking Assist Unavailable Clean Parking Assist Sensor” are displayed on the multi-information display and the PKSB OFF indicator is flashing

●A sensor may be covered with ice, snow, dirt, etc. In this case, remove the ice, snow, dirt, etc., from the sensor to return the sys-

tem to normal. If this message is shown even after removing dirt from the sensor, or shown when the sensor was not dirty to begin with, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer.

●A sensor may be frozen. Once the ice melts, the system will return to normal.
●Water may be continuously flowing over the sensor surface, such as in a heavy rain. When the system determines that it is normal, the system will return to normal.

If a 12-volt battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected

The system needs to be initialized. To initialize the system, drive the vehicle straight ahead for 5 seconds or more at a speed of approximately 22 mph (35 km/h) or more.

Parking Support Brake function (static objects) ^*

*: If equipped

If the sensors detect a static object, such as a wall, in the traveling direction of the vehicle and the system determines that a collision may occur due to the vehicle suddenly moving forward due to an accidental accelerator pedal operation, the vehicle moving the unintended direction due to the wrong shift position being selected, or while parking or traveling at low speeds, the system will operate to lessen the impact with the detected static object and reduce the resulting damage.

Examples of function operation

This function will operate in situations such as the following if an object is detected in the traveling direction of the vehicle.

■When traveling at a low speed and the brake pedal is not depressed, or is depressed late

Diagram showing a car parking structure before and after change, with no text or symbols present.

■When the accelerator pedal is depressed excessively

Diagram illustrating parking fee adjustment on an electric car, showing foot movement and parking fees with a magnified inset of the foot.

■When the vehicle moves in the unintended direction due to the wrong shift position being selected

Diagram illustrating car parking and seatbelt usage, showing two cars with a belt switch and a close-up of the belt switch labeled 'D'.

Types of sensors

→P.291

WARNING

■To ensure the Parking Support Brake can operate properly

Observe the following precautions regarding the sensors ( P.291). Failure to do so may cause a sensor to not operate properly, and may cause an accident.

- Do not modify, disassemble or paint the sensors.

WARNING

• Do not replace a sensor with a part other than a genuine part.
• Do not subject a sensor or its surrounding area to a strong impact.
• Do not damage the sensors, and always keep them clean.
• If the area around a radar sensor is subjected to an impact, the system may not operate properly due to a sensor malfunction. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

■Handling the suspension

Do not modify the suspension, as changes to the height or inclination of the vehicle may prevent the sensors from detecting objects correctly or cause the system to not operate or operate unnecessarily.

■If the Parking Support Brake function (static objects) operates unnecessarily, such as at a railroad crossing

In the event that the Parking Support Brake function (static objects) operates unnecessarily, such as at a railroad crossing, brake control will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds, allowing you to proceed forward and leave the area, brake control can also be canceled by depressing the brake pedal. Depressing the accelerator pedal after brake control is canceled will allow you to proceed forward and leave the area.

■Notes when washing the vehicle

Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.

Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.

- When using a high pressure washer to wash the vehicle, do not spray the sensors directly, as doing so may cause a sensor to malfunction.

- When using steam to clean the vehicle, do not direct steam too close to the sensors as doing so may cause a sensor to malfunction.

■When to disable the Parking Support Brake

In the following situations, disable the Parking Support Brake as the system may operate even though there is no possibility of a collision.

• When inspecting the vehicle using a chassis roller, chassis dynamo or free roller
• When loading the vehicle onto a boat, truck or other transport vessel
• If the suspension has been modified or tires of a size other than specified are installed
  ● If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load
• When equipment that may obstruct a sensor is installed, such as a towing eyelet, bumper protector (an additional trim strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow
• When using an automatic car wash

■ The Parking Support Brake function (static object) will operate when

The function will operate when the PKSB OFF indicator is not illuminated or flashing ( P.89, 91) and all of the following conditions are met:

• Hybrid system output restriction control
• The Parking Support Brake is enabled.
• The vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or less.
• There is a static object in the traveling direction of the vehicle and 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m) away.

• The Parking Support Brake determines that a stronger-than-normal brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision.

• Brake control

• Hybrid system output restriction control is operating
• The Parking Support Brake determines that an immediate brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision.

■ The Parking Support Brake function (static objects) will stop operating when

The function will stop operating if any of the following conditions are met:

• Hybrid system output restriction control
• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
• The system determines that the collision has become avoidable with normal brake operation.

• The static object is no longer 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m) away from the vehicle or in the traveling direction of the vehicle.

• Brake control

• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
• Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed since the vehicle was

stopped by brake control.

• The brake pedal is depressed after the vehicle is stopped by brake control.
• The static object is no longer 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m) away from the vehicle or in the traveling direction of the vehicle.

■ Detection range of the Parking Support Brake function (static objects)

The detection range of the Parking Support Brake function (static objects) differs from the detection range of the intuitive parking assist. ( P.296) Therefore, even if the intuitive parking assist detects an object and provides a warning, the Parking Support Brake function (static objects) may not start operating.

■ Objects that the Parking Support Brake function (static objects) may not detect

The sensors may not be able to detect certain objects, such as the following:

• Pedestrian
• Cotton, snow, and other materials that are poor reflectors of sonic waves

• Objects which are not perpendicular to the ground, are not perpendicular to the traveling direction of the vehicle, are uneven or are waving

• Low objects

• Thin objects such as wires, fences, ropes and signposts
• Objects that are extremely close to the bumper
• Sharply-angled objects
• Tall objects with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle

■ Situations in which the Parking Support Brake function (static objects) may not operate

When the shift lever is in N

■Intuitive parking assist buzzer

Regardless of whether the intuitive parking assist system is enabled or not ( P.293), if the Parking Support Brake function (static objects) is enabled ( P.299), the front or rear sensors detect an object and brake control and hybrid system output restriction control are performed, the intuitive parking assist buzzer will sound to notify the driver of the approximate distance to the object.

■ Situations in which the Parking Support Brake function (static objects) may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision

In some situations, such as the following, the Parking Support Brake function (static objects) may operate even though there is no possibility of a collision.

●Vehicle surroundings

- When driving on a narrow road

Top-down view of a car parked near a road corner with a curved ramp and a vehicle (no text or symbols visible)

- When driving on a gravel road or in an area with tall grass

Line drawing of a car driving through shallow water with grass and waves (no text or symbols)

- When driving toward a banner, flag, low-hanging branch or boom

barrier (such as those used at rail-road crossings, toll gates and parking lots)

- When there is a structure on the roadside (such as when driving in a narrow tunnel, on a narrow bridge or on a narrow road)

- When parallel parking

- When there is a rut or hole in the surface of the road

- When driving on a metal cover (grating), such as those used for drainage ditches

- When driving up or down a steep slope

- If a sensor is hit by a large amount of water, such as when driving on a flooded road

- When loaded on ships or trucks

- Moving type automatic car wash

- Lift type parking area or multi-story parking lot

• Underground parking area

- Structures on the ground (speed bumps, cat's eyes, etc.)

• Differences in height

- When moving straight ahead or turning right

- Snow-melting pipes

• Devices for detecting vehicles, such as traffic lights, devices for detecting traffic congestion, or devices for detecting empty spaces in parking areas

- Railroad tracks

- H-shaped steel

- When there are vehicles on both sides, or there is a vehicle that resembles this vehicle

●Weather

- If a sensor is covered with ice, snow, dirt, etc. (when cleared, the system will return to normal)

- If heavy rain or water strikes a sensor

- When driving in inclement weather such as fog, snow or a sandstorm

• Strong wind is blowing

●Other sonic wave sources

- When vehicle horns, vehicle detectors, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, the clearance sonar of other vehicles or

other devices which produce ultrasonic waves are near the vehicle

- If a sticker or an electronic component, such as a backlit license plate (especially fluorescent type), fog lights, fender pole or wireless antenna is installed near a sensor

●Changes in the vehicle posture
- If the vehicle is significantly tilted
- If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load
- If the orientation of a sensor has been changed due to a collision or other impact

■ Situations in which the Parking Support Brake function (static objects) may not operate properly

In some situations, such as the following, this function may not operate properly.

●Weather

- When a sensor or the area around a sensor is extremely hot or cold

Two cartoon illustrations showing a car emitting exhaust smoke from the windshield, with a person cleaning the surface (no text or symbols)

- When strong winds are blowing

Illustration of a car speeding with falling leaves and smoke, no text or symbols present

• If a sensor is covered with ice, snow, dirt, etc. (when cleared, the system will return to normal)
• If heavy rain or water strikes a sensor
• When driving in inclement weather such as fog, snow or a sandstorm
  • A sensor is frozen. (Thawing the

area will resolve this problem.)

●Vehicle surroundings

• When an object that cannot be detected is between the vehicle and a detected object
• If an object such as a vehicle, motorcycle, bicycle or pedestrian cuts in front of the vehicle or runs out from the side of the vehicle
• The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.
• On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
• The objects draw too close to the sensor.

●Other sonic waves sources

- When vehicle horns, vehicle detectors, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, the clearance sonar of other vehicles or other devices which produce ultrasonic waves are near the vehicle - If a sticker or an electronic component, such as a backlit license plate (especially fluorescent type), fog lights, fender pole or wireless antenna is installed near a sensor

●Changes in the vehicle

• If the vehicle is significantly tilted
• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load
• If the orientation of a sensor has been changed due to a collision or other impact
• When equipment that may obstruct a sensor is installed, such as a towing eyelet, bumper protector (an additional trim strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow
• If the suspension has been modified or tires of a size other than specified are installed
• If paint or a sticker is applied to the sensor

Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles)\*

*: If equipped

If a rear radar sensor detects a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle and the system determines that the possibility of a collision is high, this function will perform brake control to reduce the likelihood of an impact with the approaching vehicle.

Examples of function operation

This function will operate in situations such as the following if a vehicle is detected in the traveling direction of the vehicle.

■When reversing, a vehicle is approaching and the brake pedal is not depressed, or is depressed late

Illustration of a row of cars with sound waves, no text or symbols present

Types of sensors

→P.285

WARNING

■To ensure the Parking Support Brake (rear-crossing vehicles) can operate properly

Observe the following precautions regarding the rear radar sensors ( P.285). Failure to do so may cause a sensor to not operate properly, and may cause an accident.

WARNING

• Do not modify, disassemble or paint the sensors.
• Do not replace a rear radar sensor with a part other than a genuine part.
• Do not damage the rear radar sensors, and always keep the radar sensors and their surrounding area on the bumper clean.
• If the area around a rear radar sensor is subjected to an impact, the system may not operate properly due to a sensor malfunction. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
• Observe the rear radar sensor handling precautions. (→P.285)

■The Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) will operate when

The function will operate when the PKSB OFF indicator is not illuminated or flashing ( P.89, 91) and all of the following conditions are met:

● Hybrid system output restriction control
- The Parking Support Brake is enabled.
- The vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or less.
- Vehicles are approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a traveling speed of more than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)
• The shift lever is in R.
- The Parking Support Brake determines that a stronger than normal brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision with an approaching vehicle.
●Brake control

• Hybrid system output restriction control is operating
• The Parking Support Brake determines that an emergency brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision with an approaching vehicle.

■The Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) will stop operating when

The function will stop operating if any of the following conditions are met:

● Hybrid system output restriction control
- The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
- The collision becomes avoidable with normal brake operation.
- A vehicle is no longer approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle.

●Brake control
- The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
- Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed since the vehicle was stopped by brake control.
- The brake pedal is depressed after the vehicle is stopped by brake control.
- A vehicle is no longer approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle.

■ Detection area of the Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles)

The detection area of the Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) differs from the detection area of the RCTA function ( P.289). Therefore, even if the RCTA function detects a vehicle and provides an alert, the Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) may not start operating.

■ Conditions under which the Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) will not detect a vehicle

The Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects:

● Vehicles approaching from directly behind
● Vehicles backing up in a parking space next to your vehicle
● Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect due to obstructions

Diagram showing car parking lane with three cars and directional arrows indicating movement or flow

● Vehicles which suddenly accelerate or decelerate near your vehicle
●Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.*
● Vehicles moving away from your vehicle
● Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehicle*
- Objects which are extremely close to a radar sensor ^*
● Vehicles which are approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a traveling speed of less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)
● Vehicles which are approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a traveling speed of more than approximately 15 mph (24 km/h)

*: Depending on the conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

■Situations in which the system may operate even though there is no possibility of a collision

In some situations such as the following, the Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) may operate even though there is no possibility of a collision.

- When the parking space faces a street and vehicles are being driven on the street

Diagram showing car parking and road collision with directional arrows indicating movement

- When a detected vehicle turns while approaching the vehicle

graph TD
    A["Top Bus"] --> B["Left Path"]
    B --> C["Right Path"]
    C --> D["Downward Arrow"]
    D --> E["Bottom Route"]
    E --> F["Left Path"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#cff,stroke:#333

- When a vehicle passes by the side of your vehicle

Two cars with opposing directional arrows indicating movement or change (no text or symbols)

- When the distance between your vehicle and metal objects, such as a guardrail, wall, sign, or parked vehicle, which may reflect electrical waves toward the rear of the

vehicle, is short

graph TD
    A["Top Car"] --> B["Bottom Path"]
    C["Top Car"] --> D["Bottom Path"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

• When there are spinning objects near your vehicle such as the fan of an air conditioning unit
• When water is splashed or sprayed toward the rear bumper, such as from a sprinkler
  ■ Situations in which the Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) may not operate properly

In some situations, such as the following, the radar sensors may not detect an object and this function may not operate properly

●Stationary objects
- When a sensor or the area around a sensor is extremely hot or cold
- If the rear bumper is covered with ice, snow, dirt, etc.
- When it is raining heavily or water strikes the vehicle
- When the detection area of a radar sensor is obstructed by an adjacent vehicle
●If the vehicle is significantly tilted
- When equipment that may obstruct a sensor is installed, such as a towing eyelet, bumper protector (an additional trim strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow
- If the suspension has been modified or tires of a size other than specified are installed
- If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load
- If a sticker or an electronic component, such as a backlit license plate (especially fluorescent type),

fog lights, fender pole or wireless antenna is installed near a radar sensor

• If the orientation of a radar sensor has been changed
• When multiple vehicles are approaching with only a small gap between each vehicle
• If a vehicle is approaching the rear of your vehicle rapidly
  ● Situations in which the radar sensor may not detect a vehicle
• When a vehicle approaches from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle while you are turning while backing up
• When turning while backing up

Top-down diagram of a parking lot with cars and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

- When backing out of a shallow angle parking spot

graph TD
    A["Top Left Car"] --> B["Right Arrow"]
    C["Top Right Car"] --> D["Down Arrow"]
    E["Bottom Right Car"] --> F["Left Arrow"]

- When backing up on a slope with a sharp change in grade

Diagram showing two scenarios of cars moving on a road, with arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

• When a vehicle turns into the detection area

graph TD
    A["Top view: four cars in vertical position"] --> B["Downward arrow"]
    B --> C["Left side: two cars in vertical position"]
    D["Right side: one car moving right"]
    E["Bottom view: three cars in vertical position"] --> F["Downward arrow"]

Rear view monitor sys-tem\*

*: If equipped

The rear view monitor sys-tem assists the driver by displaying an image of the view behind the vehicle with fixed guide lines on the screen while backing up, for example while parking.

●The screen illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the screen.

Driving precautions

The rear view monitor system is a supplemental device intended to assist the driver when backing up. When backing up, be sure to visually check all around the vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding. If you do not, you may hit another vehicle, and could possibly cause an accident.

Pay attention to the following precautions when using the rear view monitor system.

WARNING

● Never depend on the rear view monitor system entirely when backing up. The image and the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may differ from the actual state. Use caution, just as you would when backing up any vehicle.
●Be sure to back up slowly, depressing the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.
●The instructions given are only guide lines. When and how much to turn the steering wheel will vary according to traffic conditions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc. when parking. It is necessary to be fully aware of this before using the rear view monitor system.
- When parking, be sure to check that the parking space will accommodate your vehicle before maneuvering into it.
- Do not use the rear view monitor system in the following cases:
- On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow
- When using tire chains or emergency tires
- When the back door is not closed completely
- On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes

In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the image may become faint. The image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become unable to see the image on the screen. Be sure to visually check all around the vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding.
- If the tire sizes are changed, the position of the fixed guide lines displayed on the screen may change.
The camera uses a special lens. The distances between objects and pedestrians that appear in the image displayed on the screen will differ from the actual distances. (→P.316)

Screen description

The rear view monitor system screen will be displayed if the shift lever is shifted to the "R" position while the power switch is in ON.

A A B D C

A Vehicle width guide line

Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.

• The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.
  B Vehicle center guide line

This line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.

C Distance guide line

Shows distance behind the vehicle.

• Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of the bumper.

D Distance guide line

Shows distance behind the vehicle.

• Displays a point approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (blue) from the edge of the bumper.

Canceling rear view monitor system

The rear view monitor system is canceled when the shift lever is shifted into any position other than the "R" position.

Rear view monitor system precautions

Area displayed on screen

The rear view monitor system displays an image of the view from the bumper of the rear area of the vehicle.

Diagram illustrating vehicle detection and parking area layout with labeled components A and a car image showing traffic flow.

A Corners of bumper

● The area around both corners of the bumper will not be displayed.

●The image adjustment procedure for the rear view monitor system screen is the same as the procedure for adjusting the screen. (→P.400)
●The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation conditions.
- Objects which are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be displayed.
●The camera uses a special lens. The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance.
●Items which are located higher than the camera may not be displayed on the monitor.

The camera

The camera for the rear view

monitor system is located as shown in the illustration.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with an inset close-up showing a detail (no text or symbols)

■Using the camera

If dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud, etc.) is adhering to the camera, it cannot transmit a clear image. In this case, flush it with a large quantity of water and wipe the camera lens clean with a soft and wet cloth.

NOTICE

●The rear view monitor system may not operate properly in the following cases.
- If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the camera may change.
- As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.
- When cleaning the camera lens, flush the camera with a large quantity of water and wipe it with a soft and wet cloth. Strongly rubbing the camera lens may cause the camera lens to be scratched and unable to transmit a clear image.
- Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or a glass coating to adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.
- If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.
- When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.
- Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunction. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Differences between the screen and the actual road

● The distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines

may not actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking space, even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.

- The distances between the vehicle width guide lines and the left and right dividing lines of the parking space may not be equal, even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.

- The distance guide lines give a distance guide for flat road surfaces. In any of the following situations, there is a margin of error between the guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road.

■When the ground behind the vehicle slopes up sharply

The distance guide lines will appear to be closer to the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will appear to be farther away than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the fixed guide lines and the actual distance/course on the road.

Two technical diagrams showing a car on a surface and a vehicle on a road with two boxes, no text or symbols present.

■When the ground behind the vehicle slopes down sharply

The distance guide lines will appear to be farther from the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will appear to be closer than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the guide lines and the actual distance/course on the road.

Diagram showing a car on a road with a sensor and a vehicle detection area below (no text or symbols)

■When any part of the vehicle sags

When any part of the vehicle sags due to the number of passengers or the distribution of the load, there is a margin of error between the fixed guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road.

Diagram showing a car approaching a road with a sensor or detection system labeled 'A' connected to a ground reference point.

A margin of error

When approaching three-dimensional objects

The distance guide lines are displayed according to flat surfaced objects (such as the road). It is not possible to determine the position of three-dimensional objects (such as vehicles) using the vehicle width guide lines and distance guide lines. When approaching a three-dimensional object that extends outward (such as the flatbed of a truck), be careful of the following.

■Vehicle width guide lines

Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle. In the case shown below, the truck appears to be outside of the vehicle width guide lines and the vehicle does not look as if it hits the truck. However, the rear body of the truck may actually cross over the vehicle width guide lines. In reality if you back up as guided by the vehicle width guide lines, the vehicle may hit the truck.

Diagram showing a car climbing stairs with a star and a parking lot marked 'A', alongside a vehicle diagram.

A Vehicle width guide lines

■Distance guide lines

Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle. On the screen, it appears that a truck is parking at point B However, in reality if you back

up to point A you will hit the truck. On the screen, it appears that A is closest and is farthest away. However, in reality, the distance to A and is the same, and B is farther than A and C

A B C

Things you should know

If you notice any symptoms

If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the solution, and re-check.

If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Symptom Likely cause Solution
The image is difficult to see	The vehicle is in a dark areaThe temperature around the lens is either high or lowThe outside temperature is lowThere are water droplets on the cameraIt is raining or humidForeign matter (mud etc.) is adhering to the cameraSunlight or headlights are shining directly into the cameraThe vehicle is under fluorescent lights, sodium lights, mercury lights etc.	Back up while visually checking the vehicle's surroundings. (Use the monitor again once conditions have been improved.)The procedure for adjusting the picture quality of the rear view monitor system is the same as the procedure for adjusting the screen. (→P.400)
The image is blurry	Dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud etc.) is adhering to the camera.	Flush the camera with a large quantity of water and wipe the camera lens clean with a soft and wet cloth.
The image is out of alignment	The camera or surrounding area has received a strong impact.	Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
The fixed guide lines are very far out of alignment	The camera position is out of alignment.	Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
	The vehicle is tilted (there is a heavy load on the vehicle, tire pressure is low due to a tire puncture, etc.)The vehicle is used on an incline.	If this happens due to these causes, it does not indicate a malfunction.Back up while visually checking the vehicle's surroundings.

Toyota parking assist monitor\*

*: If equipped

The parking assist monitor assists the driver by displaying an image of the view behind the vehicle while backing up, for example while parking.

When the display is changed to the wide rear view mode, a wider lateral view behind the vehicle will be displayed.

●The screen illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the screen.

Driving precautions

The parking assist monitor is a supplemental device intended to assist the driver when backing up. When backing up, be sure to visually check all around the vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding. If you do not, you may hit another vehicle, and could possibly cause an accident.

Pay attention to the following precautions when using the parking assist monitor.

WARNING

●Never depend on the parking assist monitor entirely when backing up. The image and the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may differ from the actual state. Use caution, just as you would when backing up any vehicle.
● Be sure to back up slowly, depressing the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.
- If you seem likely to hit nearby vehicles, obstacles, people or mount the shoulder, depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.
●The instructions given are only guidelines. When and how much to turn the steering wheel will vary according to traffic conditions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc. when parking. It is necessary to be fully aware of this before using the parking assist system.
- When parking, be sure to check that the parking space will accommodate your vehicle before maneuvering into it.
- Do not use the parking assist monitor in the following cases:
- On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow
- When using tire chains or emergency tires
- When the back door is not closed completely
- On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes
- If the suspension has been modified or tires of a size other than specified are installed

WARNING

In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the image may become faint. The image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become unable to see the image on the screen. Be sure to visually check all around the vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding.
- If the tire sizes are changed, the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may change.
The camera uses a special lens. The distances between objects and pedestrians that appear in the image displayed on the screen will differ from the actual distances. (→P.328)

Screen display

The parking assist monitor screen will be displayed if the shift lever is shifted to the "R" while the power switch is in ON.

Each time the display mode switching button is selected, the mode will change as follows:

▶ Rear view

Displays the rear view of the vehicle.

C D A B

A Display mode switching button
Each time the button is selected, the rear view mode and the wide rear view mode are switched.
B Guide line switching button

Select to switch the guide line mode. (→P.323)

• Each time the button is selected, the display mode changes in the following order:

Estimated course line display mode → Parking assist guide line display mode → Distance guide line display mode.

C Rear Cross Traffic Alert*

When a sensor detects a vehicle approaching from the rear, the direction of the vehicle approaching from the rear is displayed and the buzzer sounds.

D Intuitive parking assist*

When a sensor detects a stationary object, the direction of and the approximate distance to the a stationary object are displayed and the buzzer sounds.

*: If equipped

▶ Wide rear view

Displays a near 180^ image from the rear view camera.

C D A B

A Display mode switching button

Each time the button is selected, the rear view mode and the wide rear view mode are switched.

B Guide line switching button

Select to switch the guide line mode. (→P.323)

• Each time the button is selected, the display mode changes in the following order:

Estimated course line display mode → Parking assist guide line display mode → Distance guide line display mode.

C Rear Cross Traffic Alert*

When a sensor detects a stationary object, the direction of stationary object is displayed and the buzzer sounds.

D Intuitive parking assist*

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.

*: If equipped

For details about the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function ( P.288) and intuitive parking assist. ( P.291)

WARNING

As the Rear Cross Traffic Alert display is displayed over the camera view, it may be difficult to see the Rear Cross Traffic Alert display depending on the color and brightness of the surrounding area.

Canceling Toyota parking assist monitor

The parking assist monitor is canceled when the shift lever is shifted into any position other than the "R".

Using the system

Use any of the following modes.

Diagram showing a car dropping from top to bottom with a pink arrow indicating direction, alongside three cars below each.

▶ Estimated course line display mode ( P.324)

Estimated course lines are displayed which move in accordance with the operation of the steering wheel.

Simple line drawing of a car wheel with no text or symbols

Parking assist guide line display mode ( P.325)

The steering wheel return points (parking assist guide lines) are displayed.

This mode is recommended for

those who are comfortable with parking the vehicle without the aid of the estimated course lines.

Simple line drawing of a dome-shaped structure with curved lines and a small icon below (no text or symbols)

▶ Distance guide line display mode ( P.326)

Distance guide lines only are displayed.

This mode is recommended for those who are comfortable with parking the vehicle without the aid of the guide lines.

Simple line drawing of a curved shape with two curved ends, no text or symbols present

Estimated course line display mode

Screen description

▶ Rear view

graph TD
    A["A"] --> C["C"]
    B["B"] --> C["C"]
    C["C"] --> D["D"]
    E["E"] --> C["C"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

A Vehicle width guide line Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.
B Estimated course lines Show an estimated course when the steering wheel is turned.
C Distance guide lines Show distance behind the vehicle when the steering wheel is turned.

• The guide lines move in conjunction with the estimated course lines.
• The guide lines display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) and approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (yellow) from the center of the edge of the bumper.
  D Distance guide line Shows distance behind the vehicle.

• Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (blue) from the edge of the bumper.

E Vehicle center guide line Indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.

▶ Wide rear view

A B C E D

A Vehicle width guide line

Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.

B Estimated course lines

Show an estimated course when the steering wheel is turned.

C Distance guide lines

Show distance behind the vehicle when the steering wheel is turned.

• The guide lines move in conjunction with the estimated course lines.
• The guide lines display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) and approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (yellow) from the center of the edge of the bumper.

D Distance guide line

Shows distance behind the vehicle.

• Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (blue) from the edge of the bumper.

E Vehicle center guide line

Indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.

WARNING

- If the steering wheel is straight and the vehicle width guide lines and the estimated course lines are not in alignment, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Parking assist guide line display mode

Screen description

▶ Rear view

A B C D

A Vehicle width guide line

Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.

• The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.
  B Parking assist guide lines

Show the path of the smallest turn possible behind the vehicle.

C Distance guide line

Shows distance behind the vehicle.

• Displays points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of the bumper.
  D Vehicle center guide line

Indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.

▶ Wide rear view

A B D C

A Vehicle width guide line

Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.

- The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.

B Parking assist guide lines

Show the path of the smallest turn possible behind the vehicle.

C Distance guide line

Shows distance behind the vehicle.

• Displays points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of the bumper.

D Vehicle center guide line

Indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.

Distance guide line dis- play mode

Screen description

▶ Rear view

Simple diagram showing a curved line with a labeled point 'A' and two small icons below (no text or symbols on the main diagram)

A Distance guide lines

Shows distance behind the vehicle.

• Displays points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of the bumper.

Wide rear view

Simple diagram showing a curved line inside a rectangular frame with labeled point A and icons at bottom (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

A Distance guide lines

Shows distance behind the vehicle.

• Displays points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of the bumper.

Toyota parking assist monitor precautions

Area displayed on screen

The parking assist monitor displays an image of the view from the bumper of the rear area of the vehicle.

▶ Rear view

Diagram illustrating car safety scenarios with labeled components and safety symbols

A Corners of bumper

• The area around both corners of the bumper will not be displayed.
▶ Wide rear view

Diagram illustrating vehicle parking and parking layout with labeled components and directional arrows

A Corners of bumper

• The area around both corners of the bumper will not be displayed.

●The image adjustment procedure for the parking assist monitor screen is the same as the procedure for adjusting the screen display. (→P.400)
●The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation conditions.
- Objects which are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be displayed.
●The camera uses a special lens. The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance.
●Items which are located higher than the camera may not be displayed on the monitor.

The camera

The camera for the parking assist monitor is located as shown in the illustration.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with an inset close-up showing a detail (no text or symbols)

■Using the camera

If dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud, etc.) is adhering to the camera, it cannot transmit a clear image. In this case, flush it with a large quantity of water and wipe the camera lens clean with a soft and wet cloth.

NOTICE

●The parking assist monitor may not operate properly in the following cases.
- If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the camera may change.
- As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.
- When cleaning the camera lens, flush the camera with a large quantity of water and wipe it with a soft and wet cloth. Strongly rubbing the camera lens may cause the camera lens to be scratched and unable to transmit a clear image.
- Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or a glass coating to adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.
- If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.
- When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.
- Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunction. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Differences between the screen and the actual road

● The distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines

may not actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking space, even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.

- The distances between the vehicle width guide lines and the left and right dividing lines of the parking space may not be equal, even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.

- The distance guide lines give a distance guide for flat road surfaces. In any of the following situations, there is a margin of error between the guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road.

■When the ground behind the vehicle slopes up sharply

The distance guide lines will appear to be closer to the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will appear to be farther away than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the guidelines and the actual distance/course on the road.

Two technical diagrams showing a car on a slope and its corresponding parking lot view with two boxes, no text or symbols present.

■When the ground behind the vehicle slopes down sharply

The distance guide lines will appear to be farther from the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will appear to be closer than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the guidelines and the actual distance/course on the road.

Diagram showing a car on a road with a sensor and a vehicle detection scenario below (no text or symbols)

■When any part of the vehicle sags

When any part of the vehicle sags due to the number of passengers or the distribution of the load, there is a margin of error between the guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road.

Diagram showing a car approaching a road with a sensor and labeled point A, likely illustrating a surveillance or tracking system.

A margin of error

When approaching three-dimensional objects

The estimated course lines target flat surfaced objects (such as the road). It is not possible to determine the position of three-dimensional objects (such as vehicles) using the estimated course lines and distance guide lines. When approaching a three-dimensional object that extends outward (such as the flatbed of a truck), be careful of the following.

■Estimated course lines

Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle. In the case shown below, the truck appears to be outside of the estimated course lines and the vehicle does not look as if it hits the truck. However, the rear body of the truck may actually cross over the estimated course lines. In reality if you back up as guided by the estimated course lines, the vehicle may hit the truck.

Diagram showing a car collision scenario with a star symbol and a vehicle detection area labeled 'A'

A Estimated course lines

■Distance guide lines

Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle. On the screen, it appears that a truck is parking at point B However, in reality if you back

up to point A you will hit the truck. On the screen, it appears that A is closest and is farthest away. However, in reality, the distance to A and is the same, and B is farther than A and C

A B C C A B

Things you should know

If you notice any symptoms

If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the solution, and re-check.

If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Symptom Likely cause Solution
The image is difficult to see	The vehicle is in a dark areaThe temperature around the lens is either high or lowThe outside temperature is lowThere are water droplets on the cameraIt is raining or humidForeign matter (mud etc.) is adhering to the cameraSunlight or headlights are shining directly into the cameraThe vehicle is under fluorescent lights, sodium lights, mercury lights etc.	Back up while visually checking the vehicle's surroundings. (Use the monitor again once conditions have been improved.)The procedure for adjusting the picture quality of the parking assist monitor is the same as the procedure for adjusting the screen display. ( P.400)
The image is blurry	Dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud etc.) is adhering to the camera.	Flush the camera with a large quantity of water and wipe the camera lens clean with a soft and wet cloth.
The image is out of alignment	The camera or surrounding area has received a strong impact.	Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
The guide lines are very far out of alignment	The camera position is out of alignment.	Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
	The vehicle is tilted (there is a heavy load on the vehicle, tire pressure is low due to a tire puncture, etc.)The vehicle is used on an incline.	If this happens due to these causes, it does not indicate a malfunction.Back up while visually checking the vehicle's surroundings.
The estimated course lines move even though the steering wheel is straight	There is a malfunction in the signals being output by the steering sensor.	Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Guide lines are not displayed	The back door is open.	Close the back door.If this does not resolve the symptom, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
The estimated course lines are not displayed	12-volt battery has been reinstalled.The steering wheel has been moved while the 12-volt battery was being reinstalled.12-volt battery power is low.The steering sensor has been reinstalled.There is a malfunction in the signals being output by the steering sensor.	Stop the vehicle, and turn the steering wheel as far as it will go to the left and right.If this does not resolve the symptom, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Panoramic view monitor\*

*: If equipped

Panoramic view monitor assists the driver in viewing the surroundings, when operating at low speeds, by combining the front, side and rear cameras and displaying a complete vehicle overhead image on the screen.

When you press the camera switch or shift the shift lever to the "R" position while the power switch is in ON, the panoramic view monitor operates.

The monitor displays various views of the position and surroundings of the vehicle.

●The screen illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the screen.

Driving precautions

The panoramic view monitor is a supplemental device intended to assist the driver when checking around the vehicle. When using, be sure to visually check all around the vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding. If you do not, you

may hit another vehicle or possibly cause an accident.

Pay attention to the following precautions when using the panoramic view monitor.

WARNING

●Never depend on the panoramic view monitor entirely. The image and the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may differ from the actual state. Use caution just as you would when driving any other vehicle.
●Always make sure to check all around the vehicle with your own eyes when driving.
- Never drive while looking only at the screen as the image on the screen is different from actual conditions. If you are driving while looking only at the screen, you may hit a person or an object, resulting in an accident. When driving, be sure to check the vehicle's surroundings with your own eyes and the vehicle's mirrors.
● Depending on the circumstances of the vehicle (number of passengers, amount of luggage, etc.), the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may change. Be sure to check visually around the vehicle before proceeding.

WARNING

• Do not use the panoramic view monitor system in the following cases:
• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow
• When using tire chains or emergency tires
• When the front door or the back door is not closed completely
• On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes
• If the suspension has been modified or tires of a size other than specified are installed
  In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the image may become faint. The image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become unable to see the image on the screen. Be sure to visually check all around the vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding.
• If the tire sizes are changed, the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may change.
  The camera uses a special lens. The distances between objects and pedestrians that appear in the image displayed on the screen will differ from the actual distances. (→P.358)
• When an aftermarket part is installed in the display area of the screen.

NOTICE

In panoramic view/moving view/see-through view, the system combines images taken from the front, back, left and right side cameras into a single image. There are limits to the range and content that can be displayed. Familiarize yourself with the characteristics of the panoramic view monitor system before using it.

● Image clarity may decline at the four corners of the panoramic view/moving view/see-through view. However, this is not a malfunction, as these are the regions along the border of each camera image where the images are combined.

● Depending on lighting conditions near each of the cameras, bright and dark patches may appear on the panoramic view/moving view/see-through view.

●The panoramic view/moving view/see-through view display does not extend higher than the installation position and image capture range of each camera.

There are blind spots around the vehicle. Accordingly, there are regions not displayed in panoramic view.

● Three-dimensional objects displayed in wide front view, rear view, wide rear view or side view may not be displayed in panoramic view/moving view/see-through view.

NOTICE

●People and other three-dimensional obstacles may appear differently when displayed on the panoramic view monitor. (These differences include, among others, cases in which displayed objects appear to have fallen over, disappear near image processing areas, appear from image processing areas, or when the actual distance to an object differs from the displayed position.)
- When the back door, which is equipped with the back camera, or front doors, which are equipped with door mirrors that have built-in side cameras, are open, images will not be displayed properly on the panoramic view monitor.
The vehicle icon displayed in panoramic view/moving view/see-through view is a computer generated image. Accordingly, properties such as the color, shape and size will differ from the actual vehicle. For this reason, nearby three-dimensional objects may appear to be touching the vehicle, and actual distances to three-dimensional objects may differ from those displayed.

Camera switch

The camera switch is located as shown in the illustration.

VIEW

Display

Checking around the vehicle

▶ Moving view

Top-down view of a car on a roof with an oval background (no text or symbols visible)

▶ See-through view

Top-down view of a car interior with visible steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols)

Checking the front and around the vehicle

▶ Wide front view & panoramic view

Top-down view of a car with a roof-mounted sensor array and a car silhouette (no text or symbols visible)

When folding the outside rear view mirrors

▶ Wide front view & side views

Diagram of a mechanical assembly or assembly with no visible text, numbers, or symbols.

Side views

Checking the rear and around the vehicle

▶ Rear view & panoramic view

Diagram showing a structural frame and a car with exhaust hood, alongside a toolbar with icons (no text or symbols on main elements)

3D rendering of a mechanical component with symmetric triangular shapes and a central shaft (no text or symbols)

▶ Rear view & side views

Architectural diagram of a triangular roof structure with support symbols (no text or labels)

How to switch the display

When you press the camera switch or shift the shift lever to the "R" position while the power switch is in ON, the panoramic view monitor operates.

The monitor displays various views of the position of the vehicle. (The following is an example)

When the shift lever is in the "P" position

A

USB 8:41 ↑ ↓ ↑ ↓ ← 0:12 -4.54

B

3D rendering of a car on a flat surface with an oval frame, no visible text or symbols

C

Interior view of a car with visible steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols)

A Audio screen, etc.
B Moving view
C See-through view

When the shift lever is in the "D" or "N" position

USB 8:41 VIEW VIEW

C

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with symmetrical sections and a central vertical axis (no text or symbols)

B

Top-down view of a car undercarriage with a car silhouette and license plate (no text or symbols)

A Audio screen, etc.
B Wide front view & panoramic view
c Side views

When the shift lever is in the "R" position

graph TD
    A["Step A: Car Icon with directional arrows"] --> B["Step B: Bridge Diagram with icons"]
    B --> C["Step C: Bridge Diagram with icons"]
    C --> A

A Rear view & panoramic view
B Wide rear view
C Rear view

Checking around the vehicle

The moving view screen and the see-through view screen provide support when checking the areas of around the vehicle while parking. These screens display an image of the vicinity of the vehicle combined from the 4 cameras. The screen will display a 360° view around the vehicle from either inside the vehicle or from a birds-eye view at an angle.

To display the moving view/see-through view screen, press the camera switch when the shift lever is in the "P" position and the intuitive parking assist is enabled.

Screen display

▶ Moving view

3D rendering of a car on a roof with three labeled icons (A, B, C) in the corner, no text or symbols on the car itself.

A Display mode switching button

Select to change the display mode between the moving view and the see-through view.

B Rotation pause switch

Select to pause the rotation of the

screen.

To resume rotation, select

C Body color setting switch

Select to display the body color setting screen and change the color of the vehicle displayed on the panoramic view monitor. (→P.353)

▶ See-through view

C A B II

A Display mode switching but-

ton

Select to change the display mode between the moving view and the see-through view.

B Rotation pause switch

Select to pause the rotation of the screen.

To resume rotation, select

C Body color setting switch

Select to display the body color setting screen and change the color of the vehicle displayed on the panoramic view monitor. (→P.353)

- Pressing the camera switch again changes the screen back to the previously displayed screen, such as the audio screen.

Checking the front and around the vehicle

The wide front view & panoramic view screen provides support when checking the areas in front of the vehicle and around the vehicle when taking-off at T-intersections or other intersections during poor visibility.

To display the screen, press the camera switch when the shift lever is in the “N” or “D” position with the vehicle moving approximately 7 mph (12 km/h) or less.

This screen will be displayed if the intuitive parking assist detects an object in front of your vehicle (intuitive parking assist linked display).

Screen display

▶ Wide front view & panoramic view

A B C E AUTO F BRAKE! D F BRAKE!

A Distance guide lines

Shows distance in front of the vehicle.

• Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper.

B Intuitive parking assist

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.

C Estimated course lines

Shows an estimated course when the steering wheel is turned.

- This line will be displayed when the steering wheel is turned by 90^ or more from the center (straight-line) position.

D Guide line switching button

Select to change the guide line mode between the distance guide line mode and the estimated course line mode. ( P.342)

E Automatic display button

Select to turn automatic display mode on/off. The indicator on the button illuminates during automatic display mode. (→P.342)

F Parking Support Brake*

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a detected object is high, a warning message is displayed.

*: If equipped

- Pressing the camera switch changes the screen to the side views screen or previously displayed screen, such as the audio screen.

- For details about the intuitive parking assist (→P.291) and Parking Support Brake* function. (→P.298)

● The display position of the intuitive parking assist and the position of obstacles displayed in the camera image do not match.

*: If equipped

WARNING

• When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illuminates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until safety has been ensured, otherwise an unexpected accident may occur.
  As the intuitive parking assist display is displayed over the camera view, it may be difficult to see the intuitive parking assist display depending on the color and brightness of the surrounding area.

Switching the guide line mode

Each time the guide line switching button is selected, the mode will change as follows:

▶ Distance guide line

Top-down diagram of a car interior with a car silhouette and directional indicators (no text or symbols)

• Only the distance guide lines are displayed.
  ▶ Estimated course line

Top-down view of a car with a parking sign and a side-view diagram showing the front and rear views (no text or symbols)

● Estimated course lines will be added to the distance guide lines.

Automatic display mode

In addition to screen switching by operating the camera switch, automatic display mode is available. In this mode, the screen is switched automatically in response to vehicle speed.

In automatic display mode, the monitor will automatically display images in the following situations:

• When the shift lever is shifted to "N" or "D" position.
• When vehicle speed is reduced to approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or less.

Checking the sides of the vehicle

The side view screen displays images from the cameras installed on

each outside rear view mirror. This screen is designed to support the driver in safe driving in situations such as when driving on a narrow road, by allowing them to check the areas around the sides of the vehicle.

To display the screen, press the camera switch when the shift lever is in the “D”, or “N” position with the vehicle moving approximately 7 mph (12 km/h) or less.

Screen display

▶ Side view

A B C D AUTO E

A Distance guide lines

Show distance in front of the vehicle.

- Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper.

B Vehicle width guide lines

Shows guide lines of the vehicle's width including the outside rear view mirrors.

C Front tire guide lines

Shows guide lines of where the front tire touches the ground.

D Automatic display button

Select to turn automatic display mode on/off. The indicator on the button illuminates during automatic display mode. ( P.344)

E Intuitive parking assist

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.

• Pressing the camera switch changes the screen to the wide front view & panoramic view screen or previously displayed screen, such as the audio screen.
  ● For details about the intuitive parking assist. (→P.291)

● The side views can be displayed even when the outside rear view mirrors are retracted.

WARNING

• When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illuminates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until safety has been ensured, otherwise an unexpected accident may occur.
• As the intuitive parking assist display is displayed over the camera view, it may be difficult to see the intuitive parking assist display depending on the color and brightness of the surrounding area.

Automatic display mode Using the vehicle width

In addition to screen switching by operating the camera switch, automatic display mode is available. In this mode, the screen is switched automatically in response to vehicle speed.

In automatic display mode, the monitor will automatically display images in the following situations:

• When the shift lever is shifted to "N" or "D" position.
• When vehicle speed is reduced to approximately 6 mph (12 km/h) or less.

▶ Side View

Top-down line drawing of two cars viewed from the side of a vertical wall (no text or symbols)

Diagram of a vehicle interior showing a car, air ducts, and a ladder (no text or symbols)

- Check the positions and distance between the vehicle width guide line and a target object such as the obstacle or curb of the road.

AUTO

• Pull over to the curb as shown in the illustration above, taking care not to let the vehicle width guide line overlap the

target object.

- Ensure that the vehicle width guide line is parallel to the target object.

Checking the rear and around the vehicle

The rear view & panoramic view screen, the wide rear view screen and the rear view screen provide support when checking the areas of behind the vehicle and around the vehicle while backing up, for example while parking.

The screens will be displayed when the shift lever is in the "R" position.

Screen display

Each time the display mode switching button is selected, the mode will change as follows:

▶ Rear view & panoramic view

graph TD
    A["Vehicle"] --> B["Top View"]
    B --> C["Drive"]
    C --> D["Drive"]
    D --> E["Brake!"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#bbf,stroke:#333

A Intuitive parking assist

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.

B Rear Cross Traffic Alert

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of obstacle is displayed and the buzzer sounds.

C Guide line switching button

Select to switch the guide line mode. (→P.348)

D Display mode switching button

Each time the display mode switching button is selected, the mode will change between the rear view & panoramic view mode, the wide rear view mode and rear view mode.

E Parking Support Brake*

When the system determines that the possibility of a collision with a detected object is high, a warning message is displayed.

*: If equipped

▶ Wide rear view

A B D E BRAKE! C

A Intuitive parking assist

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate

distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.

B Rear Cross Traffic Alert

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of obstacle is displayed and the buzzer sounds.

C Guide line switching button

Select to switch the guide line mode. (→P.348)

D Display mode switching button

Each time the display mode switching button is selected, the mode will change between the rear view & panoramic view mode, the wide rear view mode and rear view mode.

E Parking Support Brake*

When the system determines that the possibility of a collision with a detected object is high, a warning message is displayed.

*: If equipped

▶ Rear view

A B D E BRAKE! C

A Intuitive parking assist

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.

B Rear Cross Traffic Alert

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of obstacle is displayed and the buzzer sounds.

C Guide line switching button

Select to switch the guide line mode. (→P.348)

D Display mode switching button

Each time the display mode switching button is selected, the mode will change between the rear view & panoramic view mode, the wide rear view mode and rear view mode.

E Parking Support Brake*

When the system determines that the possibility of a collision with a detected object is high, a warning message is displayed.

*: If equipped

• The monitor is canceled when the shift lever is shifted into any position other than the "R" position.
  For details about the intuitive parking assist ( P.291), Rear Cross Traffic Alert function ( P.288) and Parking Support Brake ^* function. ( P.298)
  ● The display position of the intuitive parking assist and the position of obstacles displayed in the camera image do not match.
  *: If equipped

WARNING

• When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illuminates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until safety has been ensured, otherwise an unexpected accident may occur.
  As the intuitive parking assist display and Rear Cross Traffic Alert display are displayed over the camera view, it may be difficult to see the intuitive parking assist display and Rear Cross Traffic Alert display depending on the color and brightness of the surrounding area.

Guide lines displayed on the screen

Each time the guide line switching button is selected, the mode will change as follows:

▶ Estimated course line

Estimated course lines are displayed which move in accordance with the operation of the steering wheel.

Shows distance in front of the vehicle.

- Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper.

B Estimated course lines

Shows an estimated course when the steering wheel is turned.

C Distance guide lines

Shows the distance behind the vehicle when the steering wheel is turned.

• The guide lines move in conjunction with the estimated course lines.

- The guide lines display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) and approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (yellow) from the center of the edge of the bumper.

D Distance guide line

Shows the distance behind the vehicle.

- Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (blue) from the edge of the bumper.

E Vehicle width guide lines

Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.

F Vehicle center guide line

Indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.

Parking assist guide line

The steering wheel return points (parking assist guide lines) are displayed.

This mode is recommended for those who are comfortable with parking the vehicle without the aid of the estimated course lines.

E A D B C B

A Distance guide lines

Shows distance in front of the vehicle.

- Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper.

B Distance guide line

Shows the distance behind the vehicle.

- Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of the bumper.

C Vehicle center guide line

Indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.

D Vehicle width guide lines

Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.

E Parking assist guide lines

Shows the path of the smallest turn possible behind the vehicle.

▶ Distance guide line

Only distance guide line is displayed.

This mode is recommended for those who are comfortable with parking the vehicle without the aid of the guide lines.

A B B

A Distance guide lines

Shows distance in front of the vehicle.

- Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper.

B Distance guide line

Shows the distance behind the vehicle.

- Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of the bumper.

● The display position of the intuitive parking assist and the position of obstacles displayed in the camera image do not match.

WARNING

• Depending on the circumstances of the vehicle (number of passengers, amount of luggage, etc.), the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may change. Be sure to check visually around the vehicle before proceeding.
• If the steering wheel is straight and the vehicle width guide lines and the estimated course lines are not in alignment, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

- Do not use the system if the display is incorrect due to an uneven (hilly) road or a non-straight (curvy) road.

Parking

Using the estimated course line

When parking in a space which is in the reverse direction to the space described in the procedure below, the steering directions will be reversed.

1 Shift the shift lever to the "R" position.
2 Turn the steering wheel so that the estimated course lines are within the parking space, and back up slowly.

Diagram illustrating vehicle collision and parking motion with labeled points A and B, showing top-down and side-view views.

A Parking space

B Estimated course lines

3 When the rear position of the vehicle has entered the parking space, turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle width guide lines are within the left and right dividing lines of the parking space.

Top-down diagram showing three cars with parking structures and a close-up of a car's roof structure (no text or symbols)

A Vehicle width guide line

4 Once the vehicle width guide lines and the parking space lines are parallel, straighten the steering wheel and back up slowly until the vehicle has completely entered the parking space.

5 Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place, and finish parking.

Using parking assist guide line

When parking in a space which is in the reverse direction to the space described in the procedure below, the steering directions will be reversed.

1 Shift the shift lever to the "R" position.
2 Back up until the parking assist guide line meets the edge of the dividing line of the parking space.

Top-down diagram of a car collision with two cars parked in the ground (no text or symbols)

B A

A Parking assist guide line
B Parking space dividing line

3 Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and back up slowly.
4 Once the vehicle is parallel with the parking space, straighten the steering wheel and back up slowly until the vehicle has completely entered the parking space.
5 Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place, and finish parking.

When folding the outside rear view mirrors

Even when outside rear view mirrors are stored, the monitor can display various images of the vicinity of the vehicle and assist the operation in the confirming safe conditions in a narrow places, parking, etc.

Screen display

▶ Wide front view & side views

Diagram of a car interior with labeled components and no readable text or symbols

▶ Rear view & side views

Diagram of a triangular structure with supports and a labeled section A, alongside icons for lighting, equipment, and support symbols (no readable text or labels)

A Intuitive parking assist

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.

●For details about the front view and the rear view: →P.340, 345

WARNING

- When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illuminates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until safety has been ensured, otherwise an unexpected accident may occur.

Magnifying function

If displayed objects are too small to see clearly when the panoramic view is displayed, the area around any of the 4 corners of the vehicle can be magnified.

Magnifying the display

1 Turn the intuitive parking assist on.

2 Select the area on the panoramic view display you wish to magnify.

Top-down diagram of a car's front view and side profile, showing dashboard, steering wheel, and dashboard (no text or symbols)

- Touching one of the 4 areas within the dotted lines will magnify that area. (Dotted lines are not displayed on the actual display.)

● To return to the normal view, touch the panoramic view display again.

●The magnifying function is enabled when all of the following conditions are met:
- The wide front view & panoramic view or the rear view & panoramic view is displayed.
• The vehicle speed is below approximately 7 mph (12 km/h).
- The intuitive parking assist is available.
●In the following situations, the magnified display will be canceled automatically:
• The vehicle speed is approximately 7 mph (12 km/h) or higher.
- The intuitive parking assist is unavailable.
- When the display is magnified, the guide lines will not be displayed.

Customizing the pan- oramic view monitor

The color of the vehicle dis-

played on the panoramic view monitor can be changed.

Changing the body color displayed in the pan-oramic view monitor

1 Display the moving view/see-through view screen. (→P.339)

2 Select

3 Select the desired color.

Four grayscale car images arranged in a 2x2 grid, with a labeled point A pointing to the bottom-right corner (no text or symbols on cars)

A Displays the next page

Panoramic view monitor precautions

Area displayed on screen

Area of image of panoramic view

The panoramic view monitor displays an image of the surrounding view of the vehicle.

Since the panoramic view processes and displays images based on flat road surfaces, it cannot depict the position of three-dimension objects (such as vehicle bumpers, etc.) that are in positions higher than the surface of the road. Even if there is room between the bumpers of the vehicles and it seems not likely to collide in the image, in reality, the both vehicles are on a collision course.

Check the safety of the surroundings directly.

Diagram illustrating car safety inspection with labeled components A and a 3D vehicle model on a road surface

A Objects located in the shaded areas will not be displayed on the screen.

Diagram illustrating car parking and parking system with labeled components A and a 3D car model on a platform.

A Parts of objects which extend above a certain height cannot be displayed on the screen.

As the images obtained from four cameras are processed and displayed on the standard of a flat road surface; the panoramic view/moving view/see through view may be displayed as follows.
- Objects may look collapsed; thinner or bigger than usual.
- An object with a higher position than the road surface may look farther away than it actually is or may not appear at all.
- Tall objects may appear protruding from the non-displayed areas of the image.
● Variations in the brightness of the image may appear for every camera.
● The displayed image may be shifted by inclination of the vehicle body, change in vehicle height, etc., depending on the number of passengers, amount of luggage, fuel quantity, etc.
- If the front doors or back door are not completely closed; neither the image nor the guide lines are displayed.
● The position relations of the vehicle icon and the road surface or obstacle may differ from the actual positions.
● The black areas of the vicinity of the vehicle icon are areas that are not captured by the camera.
● Images like the following are combined, thus some areas may be difficult to view.

Top-down diagram of a car parked on a road with four surrounding areas (no text or symbols)

WARNING

- When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illuminates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until safety has been ensured, otherwise an unexpected accident may occur.

Area of the image captured by the camera

▶ Wide front view

Diagram illustrating car safety surveillance with top-down view, front view of a vehicle, and bottom-right view showing detection of a car.

▶ Side view

Diagram showing a car on the left and its side view of a vehicle interior with a cylindrical component, no text or symbols present.

▶ Rear view

Diagram illustrating vehicle safety and parking system with labeled components and safety symbols

A The area around both corners of the bumper will not be displayed.
▶ Wide rear view

Diagram illustrating vehicle parking and parking layout with labeled components and directional arrows

A The area around both cor-

ners of the bumper will not be displayed.

●Black masking is done for distance detection differences to the front of the vehicle.
●The area covered by the camera is limited. Objects which are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be seen on the screen.
●The area displayed on the screen may vary depending on vehicle orientation or road conditions.
●The camera uses a special lens. The distance in the image displayed on the screen will differ from the actual distance.

The camera

The cameras for the panoramic view monitor are located as shown in the illustrations.

Front camera

Line drawing of a car interior showing a button and a close-up of the door (no text or symbols)

▶ Side cameras

Line drawing of a car interior showing the door and side mirror (no text or symbols)

▶ Rear camera

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with an inset close-up showing a detail (no text or symbols)

Using the camera

If dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud, etc.) is adhering to the camera, it cannot transmit a clear image. In this case, flush it with a large quantity of water and wipe the camera lens clean with a soft and wet cloth.

NOTICE

●The panoramic view monitor may not operate properly in the following cases.
- If the camera is hit, the position and mounting angle of the camera may change.
- As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.
- When cleaning the camera lens, flush the camera with a large quantity of water and wipe it with a soft and wet cloth. Strongly rubbing the camera lens may cause the camera lens to be scratched and unable to transmit a clear image.
- Do not allow an organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or a glass coating to adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.
- If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.
- When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.
- Do not expose the camera to strong impacts as this could cause a malfunction. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Difference between the screen and the actual road

● The distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines

may not actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking space, even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.

• The distances between the vehicle width guide lines and the left and right dividing lines of the parking space may not be equal, even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.
• The distance guide lines give a distance guide for flat road surfaces. In any of the following situations, there is a margin of error between the guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road.

When the ground behind the vehicle slopes up sharply

The distance guide lines will appear to be closer to the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will appear to be farther away than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the guidelines and the actual distance/course on the road.

Diagram showing a car on a ramp and its exterior view of a car with visible exhaust pipes (no text or symbols)

When the ground behind the vehicle slopes down sharply

The distance guide lines will appear to be farther from the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will appear to be closer than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the guidelines and the actual distance/course on the road.

Diagram showing a car on a road with a sensor and its 3D view, including a close-up of the sensor and ground reference (no text or symbols)

When any part of the vehicle sags

When any part of the vehicle sags due to the number of passengers or the distribution of the load, there is a margin of error between the guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road.

Diagram showing a car approaching a road with a sensor or detection system labeled 'A' connected to a ground reference.

A margin of error

Distortion of three-dimensional objects on the screen

When there are three-dimensional objects (such as vehicle bumpers, etc.) nearby in positions higher than the surface of the road, take extra care when using the following.

Panoramic view display (including magnified display)

Since the panoramic view processes and displays images based on flat road surfaces, it cannot depict the position of three-dimension objects (such as vehicle bumpers, etc.) that are in positions higher than the surface of the road. For example, even though it appears that there is space between the bumpers of the two vehicles in the illustration below and they are not likely to collide, in reality, a collision is about to occur.

Diagram showing a car detection setup with a targeting device and a vehicle, no text or symbols present.

Illustration of a robotic arm interacting with a device, showing motion lines and control panel (no text or symbols)

Top-down diagram of two cars with an arrow indicating direction, no text or symbols present

WARNING

- When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illuminates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until safety has been ensured, otherwise an unexpected accident may occur.

When approaching three-dimensional objects

The estimated course lines target flat surfaced objects (such as the road). It is not possible to determine the position of three-dimensional objects (such as vehicles) using the estimated course lines and distance guide lines. When approaching a three-dimensional object that extends outward (such as the flatbed of a truck), be careful of the following.

WARNING

- When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illuminates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until safety has been ensured, otherwise an unexpected accident may occur.

Estimated course lines

Since the estimated course line is displayed for a flat road surface, it cannot depict the position of three-dimensional objects (such as vehicle bumpers, etc.) that are in positions higher than

the surface of the road. Even if the bumpers of the vehicle is on the outside of the estimated course line in the image, in reality, the vehicles are on a collision course.

Diagram illustrating car collision and navigation, showing a moving car with directional arrow and vehicle detection screen labeled 'AUTO' and 'A'.

A Estimated course line

Three-dimensional objects (such as the overhang of a wall or loading platform of a truck) in high positions may not be projected on the screen. Check the safety of the surroundings directly.

Diagram illustrating car parking and parking collision scenarios with labeled vehicle positions and safety indicators

Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle. In the case shown below, the truck appears to be outside of the estimated course lines and the vehicle does not look as if it hits the truck. However, the rear body of the truck may actually cross over the estimated course lines. In reality if you back up as guided by the estimated course lines, the vehicle may hit the truck.

Top-down diagram of a car being tested with a ramp, showing structural components and safety symbols (no text or labels)

A Estimated course lines

Distance guide lines

Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle. On the screen, it appears that a truck is parking at point B However, in reality if you back

up to point A you will hit the truck. On the screen, it appears that A is closest and is farthest away. However, in reality, the distance to A and is the same, and B is farther than A and C

Diagram illustrating vehicle collision and parking system with labeled components A, B, C and a 3D indoor enclosure view

Things you should know

If you notice any symptoms

If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the solution, and re-check.

If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Symptom Likely cause Solution
The image is difficult to see	The vehicle is in a dark areaThe temperature around the lens is either high or lowThe outside temperature is lowThere are water droplets on the cameraIt is raining or humidForeign matter (mud, etc.) is adhering to the cameraSunlight or headlights are shining directly into the cameraThe vehicle is under fluorescent lights, sodium lights, mercury lights, etc.	Back up while visually checking the vehicle's surroundings. (Use the monitor again once conditions have been improved.)The procedure for adjusting the picture quality of the panoramic view monitor system is the same as the procedure for adjusting the screen display. (→P.400)
The image is blurry	Dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud, etc.) is adhering to the camera.	Flush the camera with a large quantity of water and wipe the camera lens clean with a soft and wet cloth.
The image is out of alignment	The camera or surrounding area has received a strong impact.	Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
The guide lines are very far out of alignment	The camera position is out of alignment.	Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
	The vehicle is tilted.(There is a heavy load on the vehicle, tire pressure is low due to a tire puncture, etc.)The vehicle is used on an incline.	If this happens due to these causes, it does not indicate a malfunction.Back up while visually checking the vehicle's surroundings.
The estimated course lines move even though the steering wheel is straight	There is a malfunction in the signals being output by the steering sensor.	Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Guide lines are not displayed	The back door is open.	Close the back door. If this does not resolve the symptom, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
The estimated course lines are not displayed	12-volt battery has been reinstalled.The steering wheel has been moved while the 12-volt battery was being reinstalled.12-volt battery power is low.The steering sensor has been reinstalled.There is a malfunction in the signals being output by the steering sensor.	Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
The panoramic view display cannot be magnified	The intuitive parking assist may be malfunctioning or dirty.	Follow the correction procedures for malfunctions of the intuitive parking assist.(→P.291)
The see-through view/moving view cannot be displayed

Product license

This product contains eT-Kernel Multi-Core Edition ^TM real-time OS of eSOL Co., Ltd. Copyright (c) 2020 eSOL Co., Ltd.

eT-Kernel Multi-Core Edition ^TM is a trademark of eSOL Co., Ltd in Japan.

T-Kernel This Product uses the Source Code of T-Kernel under T-License granted by the Tron Forum (www.tron.org).

Driving mode select switch

The driving modes can be selected to suit the driving and usage conditions.

Selecting a driving mode

1 ECO SPORT 2 3 PUSH NORMAL ECO SPORT

1 Eco drive mode

Suitable for driving to improve fuel economy by more smoothly generating torque in response to accelerator pedal operations compared to normal mode and restraining air conditioning system operations (heating/cooling).

When the switch is turned to the left while not in Eco drive mode, the system switches to Eco drive mode and the Eco drive mode indicator illuminates on the multi-information display.

2 Normal mode

Suitable for normal driving.

The driving mode returns to normal mode if the switch is pressed while in Eco drive mode or sport mode.

3 Sport mode

Controls the steering feeling and hybrid system to create an acceleration response that is suitable for sporty driving. Suitable for when crisp handling is desired, such as when driving on mountainous roads.

When the switch is turned to the right while not in sport mode, the system switches to sport mode and the sport mode indicator illuminates on the multi-information display.

■When changing to a driving mode other than normal mode

●The background color of the multi-information display changes according to the selected driving mode.

- When the speedometer is set to analog display, the speedometer display color also changes. (For vehicles with the 7-inch multi-information display only)

●The color of the switch changes according to the selected driving mode. (For vehicles with the 7-inch multi-information display only)

■Air conditioning system operation in Eco drive mode

In Eco drive mode, heating/cooling operations and the fan speed is controlled to improve fuel efficiency. Perform the following procedures to increase the air conditioning performance.

●Turn eco air conditioning mode off (→P.525)
- Adjust the fan speed (→P.525)
- Cancel Eco drive mode

■ Canceling a driving mode

• Sport mode is automatically canceled and the driving mode returns to normal mode when the power switch is turned off.
  ● Normal mode and Eco drive mode are not canceled until another driving mode is selected. (Even if the power switch is turned off, normal mode and Eco drive mode will not be automatically canceled).

Trail Mode

Trail Mode is a system that performs integrated control for the AWD, brake and drive force control systems to assist the drive power on bumpy roads, etc.

WARNING

■Before using Trail Mode

Make sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to observe these precautions may result in an unexpected accident.

• Check that the Trail Mode indicator is illuminated before driving. Trail Mode will not operate when the indicator is off.
  ● Trail Mode is not intended to expand the limits of the vehicle. Thoroughly check the road conditions and drive with caution.
  ● Thoroughly check the road conditions before driving. As Trail Mode is suitable for driving on bumpy roads, such as those where the tire on one side spins, there is a chance that Trail Mode may not be the most appropriate for other road conditions.

Turning Trail Mode on

Press the Trail Mode switch

When the switch is pressed, Trail Mode turns on and the Trail Mode indicator illuminates on the multi-information display.

When the switch is pressed again, the Trail Mode indicator turns off.

TRAIL EEO -SPORT TRAIL

Trail Mode

● Trail Mode is intended for use when driving on bumpy rough roads. Do not turn the switch on in other situations.
● Trail Mode controls the vehicle so that it can use the maximum amount of drive force when driving on bumpy roads.
- If Trail Mode is continuously used for a long period of time, the load on related parts increases and the system may be unable to operate effectively.

■When Trail Mode is canceled

In the following situations, Trail Mode is automatically canceled even if it is turned on.

• When the driving mode is changed (→P.366)
  ●When the power switch is turned off

■During Trail Mode operation

The following types of situations may occur, but they are not malfunctions.

● Vibrations may be felt throughout the vehicle or steering wheel
● Operating noise may be heard from the engine compartment

■When an inspection at your Toyota dealer is necessary

In the following situations, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

• When the slip indicator light illuminates while Trail Mode is on
• When the Trail Mode indicator does not illuminate even though the Trail Mode switch is pressed

Driving assist systems

To keep driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

Summary of the driving assist systems

■ ECB (Electronically Controlled Brake System)

The electronically controlled system generates braking force corresponding to the brake operation

■ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface

Brake assist

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation

■VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces.

■Enhanced VSC (Enhanced Vehicle Stability Control)

Provides cooperative control of the ABS, TRAC, VSC and EPS.

Helps to maintain directional stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling steering performance.

■Trailer Sway Control

Helps the driver to control trailer sway by selectively applying brake pressure for individual wheels and reducing driving torque when trailer sway is detected.

■TRAC (Traction Control)

Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads

■Active Cornering Assist (ACA)

Helps to prevent the vehicle from drifting to the outer side by performing inner wheel brake control when attempting to accelerate while turning

■Hill-start assist control

Helps to reduce the backward

movement of the vehicle when starting on an uphill

■EPS (Electric Power Steering)

Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel

■E-Four (Electronic On-Demand AWD system)

Automatically switches from front wheel drive to all-wheel drive (AWD) according to the driving conditions, helping to ensure reliable handling and stability. Examples of conditions where the system will switch to AWD are when cornering, going uphill, starting off or accelerating, and when the road surface is slippery due to snow, rain, etc.

■The Secondary Collision Brake

When the SRS airbag sensor detects a collision and the system operates, the brakes and brake lights are automatically controlled to reduce the vehicle speed and help reduce the possibility of further damage due to a secondary collision.

■When the TRAC/VSC/ABS/Trailer Sway Control systems are operating

The slip indicator light will flash while the TRAC/VSC/ABS/Trailer Sway Control systems are operating.

Diagram showing car interior with steering wheel and traffic sign icon, likely indicating speed or flow direction

■Disabling the TRAC system

If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRAC system may reduce power from the hybrid system to the wheels.

Pressing to turn the system off may make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.

To turn the TRAC system off, quickly press and release OFF

Traction Control Turned OFF

"Traction Control Turned OFF" will be shown on the multi-information display.

Press again to turn the system back on.

■Turning off the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Control systems

To turn the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Control systems off, press and hold

OFF for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped.

The VSC OFF indicator light will come on and the "Traction Control Turned OFF" will be shown on the multi-information display.*

Press again to turn the systems back on.

*: PCS will also be disabled (only Pre-Collision warning is available). The PCS warning light will come on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. (→P.257)

When the message is displayed on the multi-information display showing that TRAC has been disabled even if has not been pressed

TRAC is temporary deactivated. If the information continues to show, contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Operating conditions of hill-start assist control

When the following four conditions are met, the hill-start assist control will operate:

●The shift lever is in a position other than P or N (when starting off forward/backward on an upward incline).
●The vehicle is stopped.
●The accelerator pedal is not depressed.
●The parking brake is not engaged.

■Automatic system cancelation of hill-start assist control

The hill-start assist control will turn off in any of the following situations:

●The shift lever is shifted to P or N.
●The accelerator pedal is depressed.
●The parking brake is engaged.
● No more than 2 seconds have elapsed after the brake pedal is released.

■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC, Trailer Sway Control, TRAC and hill-start assist control systems

●A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is depressed repeat-

edly, when the hybrid system is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.

● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
- Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
- A motor sound may be heard also after the vehicle comes to a stop.

■ ECB operating sound

ECB operating sound may be heard in the following cases, but it does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred.

●Operating sound heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is operated.
- Motor sound of the brake system heard from the front part of the vehicle when the driver' door is opened.
●Operating sound heard from the engine compartment when one or two minutes passed after the stop of the hybrid system.

■Active Cornering Assist operation sounds and vibrations

When the Active Cornering Assist is operated, operation sounds and vibrations may be generated from the brake system, but this is not a malfunction.

■EPS operation sound

When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■Automatic reactivation of TRAC, Trailer Sway Control and VSC systems

After turning the TRAC, Trailer Sway Control and VSC systems off, the systems will be automatically re-enabled in the following situations:

• When the power switch is turned off.
• If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC will turn on when vehicle speed increases. If both the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, automatic re-enabling will not occur when vehicle speed increases.

■Operating conditions of Active Cornering Assist

The system operates when the following occurs.

●TRAC/VSC can operate
●The driver is attempting to accelerate while turning
●The system detects that the vehicle is drifting to the outer side
●The brake pedal is released

■Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system

The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the hybrid system off. The EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes.

■Secondary Collision Brake operating conditions

The system operates when the SRS airbag sensor detects a collision while the vehicle is in motion. However, the system does not operate in any of the following situations.

●The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h)
Components are damaged

■ Secondary Collision Brake automatic cancellation

The system is automatically canceled in any of the following situations.

●The vehicle speed drops below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
● A certain amount of time elapses during operation
●The accelerator pedal is depressed a large amount

If a message about AWD is shown on the multi-information display

Perform the following actions.

Message Details/Actions
“AWD System Overheated Switching to 2WD Mode”	AWD system is overheating.→ Stop the vehicle in a safe place and let the engine idle.Once the display message on the multi-information display turns off, there is no problem continuing to drive.If the message does not disappear, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer immediately.
“AWD System Overheated 2WD Mode Engaged”	The vehicle switched from all-wheel drive (AWD) to front wheel drive due to overheating.→ Stop the vehicle in a safe place and let the engine idle.Once the display message on the multi-information display turns off, the AWD system returns to normal.If the message does not disappear, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer immediately.
“AWD System Malfunction 2WD Mode Engaged Visit Your Dealer”	A malfunction occurred in the AWD system.→ Have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer immediately.

WARNING

■The ABS does not operate effectively when
●The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).
●The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.

■Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle's stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the following situations:

• When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
  ●When driving with tire chains
• When driving over bumps in the road

WARNING

• When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces
  ■TRAC/VSC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC/VSC system is operating. Drive the vehicle carefully in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

■Active Cornering Assist does not operate effectively when
- Do not overly rely on Active Cornering Assist. Active Cornering Assist may not operate effectively when accelerating down slopes or driving on slippery road surfaces.
- When Active Cornering Assist frequently operates, Active Cornering Assist may temporarily stop operating to ensure proper operation of the brakes, TRAC and VSC.
■ Hill-start assist control does not operate effectively when
- Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice.
●Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the vehicle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may lead to an accident.

■When the TRAC/ABS/VSC/Trailer Sway Control is activated

The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.

■When the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Control systems are turned off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Control systems off unless necessary.

Trailer Sway Control is part of the VSC system and will not operate if VSC is turned off or experiences a malfunction.

■Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level. The ABS, TRAC and VSC/Trailer Sway Control systems will not function correctly if different tires are installed on the vehicle. Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.

■Handling of tires and the sus-pension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.

WARNING

■Trailer Sway Control precaution

The Trailer Sway Control system is not able to reduce trailer sway in all situations. Depending on many factors such as the conditions of the vehicle, trailer, road surface and driving environment, the Trailer Sway Control system may not be effective. Refer to your trailer owner's manual for information on how to tow your trailer properly.

■If trailer sway occurs

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.

• Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead. Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.

●Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to reduce speed. Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.

If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer should stabilize. (→P.200)

■Secondary Collision Brake

Do not rely solely upon the Secondary Collision Brake. This system is designed to help reduce the possibility of further damage due to a secondary collision, however, that effect changes according to various conditions. Overly relying on the system may result in death or serious injury.

Hybrid vehicle driving tips

For economical and ecological driving, pay attention to the following points:

Using Eco drive mode

When using Eco drive mode, the torque corresponding to the accelerator pedal depression amount can be generated more smoothly than it is in normal conditions. In addition, the operation of the air conditioning system (heating/cooling) will be minimized, improving the fuel economy. (→P.366)

Use of Hybrid System Indicator

The Eco-friendly driving is possible by keeping the indicator of Hybrid System Indicator within Eco area. ( P.95, 100)

Shift lever operation

Shift the shift lever to D when stopped at a traffic light, or driving in heavy traffic etc. Shift the shift lever to P when parking. When using the N position, there is no positive effect on fuel consumption. In the N position, the gasoline engine operates but electricity cannot be generated. Also, when using the air conditioning system, etc., the hybrid battery (traction battery) power is consumed.

Accelerator pedal/brake pedal operation

• Drive your vehicle smoothly. Avoid abrupt acceleration and deceleration. Gradual acceleration and deceleration will make more effective use of the electric motor (traction motor) without having to use gasoline engine power.
• Avoid repeated acceleration. Repeated acceleration consumes hybrid battery (traction battery) power, resulting in poor fuel consumption. Battery power can be restored by driving with the accelerator pedal slightly released.

When braking

Make sure to operate the brakes gently and in a timely manner. A greater amount of electrical energy can be regenerated when slowing down.

Delays

Repeated acceleration and deceleration, as well as long waits at traffic lights, will lead to bad fuel economy. Check traffic reports before leaving and avoid delays as much as possible.

When driving in a traffic jam, gently release the brake pedal to allow the vehicle to move forward slightly while avoiding overuse of the accelerator pedal. Doing so can help control excessive gasoline consumption.

Highway driving

Control and maintain the vehicle at a constant speed. Before stopping at a toll booth or similar, allow plenty of time to release the accelerator and gently apply the brakes. A greater amount of electrical energy can be regenerated when slowing down.

Air conditioning

Use the air conditioning only when necessary. Doing so can help reduce excessive gasoline consumption.

In summer: When the ambient temperature is high, use the recirculated air mode. Doing so will help to reduce the burden on the air conditioning system and reduce fuel consumption as well.

In winter: Because the gasoline engine will not automatically cut out until it and the interior of the vehicle are warm, it will consume fuel. Also, fuel consumption can be improved by avoiding overuse of the heater.

Checking tire inflation pressure

Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure frequently. Improper tire inflation pressure can cause poor fuel economy. Also, as snow tires can cause large amounts of friction, their use on dry roads can lead to poor fuel economy. Use tires that are appropriate for the season.

Luggage

Carrying heavy luggage will lead to poor fuel economy. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage. Installing a large roof rack will also cause poor fuel economy.

Warming up before driving

Since the gasoline engine starts up and cuts out automatically when cold, warming up the engine is unnecessary. Moreover, frequently driving short distances will cause the engine to repeatedly warm up, which can lead to excess fuel consumption.

Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.

Pre-winter preparations

• Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
  • Power control unit coolant
• Washer fluid
  ● Have a service technician inspect the condition of the 12-volt battery.
  ● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the front tires.

Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires.

WARNING

■Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.

● Use tires of the specified size.

●Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
- Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used.
- Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.

■Driving with tire chains

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury.

• Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
  ● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.

● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.

● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.

- Do not use LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) system.

NOTICE

■Repairing or replacing snow tires (vehicles with tire pressure warning system)

Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from your Toyota dealer or legitimate tire retailers. This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.

Before driving the vehicle

Perform the following according to the driving conditions:

• Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
• To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.
• Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle's roof, chassis, around the tires or on the brakes.
• Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the vehicle.

When driving the vehicle

Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.

When parking the vehicle

- Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without set-

ting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, make sure to block the wheels.

Failure to do so may be dangerous because it may cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly, possibly leading to an accident.

When the parking brake is in automatic mode, release the parking brake after shifting the shift lever to P. ( P.224)

• If the vehicle is left parked with the brakes damp in cold temperatures, there is a possibility of the brakes freezing.
• If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, confirm that the shift lever cannot be moved out of P*.

*: The shift lever will be locked if it is attempted to be shifted from P to any other position without depressing the brake pedal. If the shift lever can be shifted from P, there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

WARNING

■When parking the vehicle

When parking the vehicle without applying the parking brake, make sure to chock the wheels. If you do not chock the wheels, the vehicle may move unexpectedly, possibly resulting in an accident.

Selecting tire chains

Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains. Chain size is regulated for each tire size.

A B C E F D

Side chain:

A 0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter
B 0.39 in. (10 mm) in width
C 1.18 in. (30 mm) in length Cross chain:
D 0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter
E 0.55 in. (14 mm) in width
F 0.98 in. (25 mm) in length

Regulations on the use of tire chains

Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and type of road.

Always check local regulations before installing chains.

■Tire chain installation

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:

● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the front tires only. Do not install tire chains on the rear tires.
● Install tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.

NOTICE

■ Fitting tire chains (vehicles with tire pressure warning system)

The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.

Utility vehicle precautions

This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has higher ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its center of gravity to make it capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications.

Utility vehicle feature

• Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
• An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems.
• It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at excessive speeds may cause the vehicle to roll-over.

WARNING

■ Utility vehicle precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death, serious injury or damage to your vehicle:

In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should always fasten their seat belts.
● Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury.
- Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier (if equipped) will make the center of the vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly.
● Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control.
- Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle) can tip over sideways much more easily than forward or backward.

Off-road driving

When driving your vehicle off-

road, please observe the following precautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the closure of areas to off-road vehicles:

● Drive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permitted to travel.
- Respect private property. Get owner's permission before entering private property.
- Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs that restrict travel.
- Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving techniques should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to roads.

■ Additional information for off-road driving

For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:

To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road, consult the following organizations:

• State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments
• State Motor Vehicle Bureau
• Recreational Vehicle Clubs
• U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management

WARNING

■Off-road driving precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death, serious injury or damage to your vehicle:

●Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous places.
- Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and especially your thumbs on the outside of the rim.
●Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand, mud, water or snow.
● After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown or fire could occur.

WARNING

- When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle's suspension and chassis.

NOTICE

■To prevent the water damage

Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the hybrid battery (traction battery), hybrid system or other components does not occur.

●Water entering the engine compartment may cause severe damage to the hybrid system. Water entering the interior may cause the hybrid battery (traction battery) stowed under the rear seats to short circuit.

●Water entering the hybrid transmission will cause deterioration in transmission quality. The malfunction indicator may come on, and the vehicle may not be drivable.

Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure, and may also enter the hybrid transaxle case, reducing the gear oil's lubricating qualities.

■When you drive through water

If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and the bottom of the riverbed for firmness. Drive slowly and avoid deep water.

■Inspection after off-road driving

● Sand and mud that has accumulated around brake discs may affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system components.
● Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

5-1. Basic function

Buttons overview...... 387

Menu screen 389

Status icon 390

"Setup" screen ...... 392

5-2. Basic information before operation

Initial screen.... 393

Touch screen 394

Home screen...... 396

Entering letters and numbers/list screen operation 397

Screen adjustment ..... 400

Linking multi-information display and the system 401

5-3. Connectivity settings

Registering/Connecting a Bluetooth® device ..... 402

Setting Bluetooth ^® details 406

Wi-Fi ^® Hotspot 414

5-4. Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

Apple CarPlay ^® /Android Auto ^TM 419

5-5. Other settings

General settings...... 426

Voice settings...... 430

Vehicle settings ...... 431

5-6. Using the audio/visual system

Quick reference...... 432

Some basics...... 433

5-7. Radio operation

AM/FM/SiriusXM (SXM) radio 437

5-8. Media operation

USB memory...... 444

iPod/iPhone (Apple Car-Play) 446

Android Auto 449

Bluetooth ^® audio ..... 450

5-9. Audio/visual remote controls

Steering switches ..... 454

5-10.Audio settings

Setup...... 456

5-11. Tips for operating the audio/visual system

Operating information.. 458

5-12. Voice command system operation

Voice command system 470

Command list 473

5-13.Mobile Assistant operation

Mobile Assistant...... 477

5-14. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)

Quick reference...... 479

Some basics .... 480

Placing a call using the Bluetooth® hands-free system 484

Receiving a call using the Bluetooth®hands-free system 487

Talking on the Bluetooth ^® hands-free system..... 488

Bluetooth ^® phone message function.... 490

5-15.Phone settings

Setup...... 495

5-16.What to do if... (Bluetooth®)

Troubleshooting ..... 505

5-17. Connected Services overview

Connected Services.... 509

Type A: Function achieved by using a smartphone or DCM.... 510

Type B: Function achieved by using DCM and the system 512

Type C: Function achieved by using DCM.... 513

Type D: Function achieved by using DCM and a smartphone .... 516

5-18. Connected Services operation

Toyota Apps 518

5-19.Setup

Toyota Apps settings... 522

Buttons overview

*: Vehicles with Audio only

For details about Audio Plus or Premium Audio, refer to "Navigation and Multimedia System Owner's Manual".

Operations of each part

graph TD
    A["Power VOLUME"] --> J["H"]
    A --> I["I"]
    A --> G["G"]
    A --> F["F"]
    A --> E["E"]
    A --> B["B"]
    A --> C["C"]
    A --> D["D"]
    A --> SEEK["SEEK"]
    A --> <TRACK["<TRACK"]
    A --> PHONE["PHONE"]
    A --> APPS["APPS"]
    A --> TUNE_SCROLL["TUNE SCROLL"]

A By touching the screen with your finger, you can control the selected functions. (→P.394, 395)
B Press to seek up or down for a radio station or to access a desired track/file. (→P.437, 444, 446, 450)
C Press to access the Bluetooth® hands-free system. (→P.479)

- When an Apple CarPlay connection is established, press to display the Phone application screen. ^1

D Press to display the Toyota Apps screen. ^*1,2 (→P.518)
E Turn to change the radio station or skip to the next or previous track/file. (→P.437, 444, 446, 450)
F Press to turn the audio/visual system on and off, and turn it to adjust the volume. Press and hold to restart the system. (→P.393, 433)

G When an Apple CarPlay/Android Auto connection is established, press to display the Maps application screen. ^*1
H Press to display the audio/visual system screen. ( 432, 433)
I Press to display the "Menu" screen. (→P.389)
J Press to display the home screen. (→P.396)
*1: This function is not made available in some countries or areas. *2: When an Apple CarPlay/Android Auto connection is established, this function will be unavailable.

WARNING

- For safety, the driver should not operate the system while he/she is driving. Insufficient attention to the road and traffic may cause an accident.

●The screen shots in this document and the actual screens of the system differ depending on whether the functions and/or a contract existed.

Menu screen

Menu screen operation

Press the "MENU" button to display the "Menu" screen.

Menu A 4:34 B Audio C Phone D Apps E Projection Info Setup F G H Display Apple CarPlay Android Auto

A Displays the clock. Select to display the clock settings screen. (→P.427)
B Select to display the audio control screen. (→P.432)
C Select to display the hands-free operation screen. (→P.479)

- When an Apple CarPlay connection is established, select to display the Phone application screen. ^1

D Select to display the Toyota Apps screen. ^*1,2 ( P.518)
When an Apple CarPlay/Android Auto connection is established and this button displays “Apple CarPlay”/“Android Auto”, select to display the home screen of Apple CarPlay/Android Auto. *1 (→P.419)
F Select to display the energy monitor/consumption screen. (→P.113)
G Select to display the "Setup" screen. (→P.392)
H Select to adjust the contrast, brightness, etc. of the display. ( P.400)

*1: This function is not made available in some countries or areas.

*2: When an Apple CarPlay/Android Auto connection is established, this function will be unavailable.

Status icon

Status icons are displayed at the top of the screen.

Status icon explanation

A B C D E F DCM DCM 8:18 History Favorites Contacts Keypad Select Device Message

A Indicate during data communication performed via Data Communication Module (DCM) ^1
B The reception level of Data Communication Module (DCM) display ^1 ( P.390)
C The reception level of the connected phone display ( P.390)
D Remaining battery charge display ( P.391)
E Bluetooth® phone connection condition display (→P.391)
F Wi-Fi ^® connection condition display ^*1,2 (→P.414)
*1: Vehicles equipped with DCM

*2: This function is not made available in some countries or areas.

●The number of status icons that can be displayed differs depending on the displayed screen.

Reception level display

The level of reception does not always correspond with the level displayed on the cellular phone. The level of reception may not be displayed depending on the phone you have.

When the cellular phone is out of the service area or in a place inaccessible by radio waves,

/ is displayed.

“Rm” is displayed when receiving in a roaming area. While roaming, display “Rm” top-left on the icon.

The receiving area may not be displayed depending on the type of Bluetooth ^® phone you have.

▶ While connected with cellular phone

Reception Level	Indicators
Poor
Excellent

▶ While using Data Communication Module (DCM)

Reception Level	Indicators
Poor
Excellent

▶ While using Wi-F ^ Hotspot

Reception Level	Indicators
No connection
Connected

- When Wi-Fi® Hotspot is off, no item is displayed.

Remaining battery charge display

The amount displayed does not always correspond with the amount displayed on the Bluetooth ^® device.

The amount of battery charge left may not be displayed depending on the type of the Bluetooth ^® device connected.

This system does not have a charging function.

Remaining charge	Indicators
Empty
Full

Bluetooth ^® connection condition display

An antenna for the Bluetooth ^® connection is built into the instrument panel.

The condition of the Bluetooth ^® connection may deteriorate and the system may not function when a Bluetooth ^® phone is used in the following conditions and/or places:

The cellular phone is obstructed by certain objects (such as when it is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box).

The cellular phone is touching or is covered with metal materials.

Leave the Bluetooth ^® phone in a place where the condition of the Bluetooth ^® connection is good.

Indicators Conditions
(Blue)	Indicates that the condition of the Bluetooth® connection is good.
(Gray)	While in this condition, sound quality during phone calls may deteriorate.
	Indicates that the cellular phone is not connected via Bluetooth®.

"Setup" screen

"Setup" screen

Press the "MENU" button, then select "Setup" to display the "Setup" screen. The items shown on the "Setup" screen can be set.

Setup 9:25 General A Voice Volume 4 Bluetooth B Voice Recognition Prompts High Audio C Train Voice Recognition Phone D Voice Recognition Tutorial Voice E Voice Prompt Interrupt Off Default

Setup 9:25 Voice Volume 4 Phone Voice Recognition Prompts High Voice Train Voice Recognition Vehicle F Voice Recognition Tutorial Wi-Fi G Voice Prompt Interrupt Off Apps H Default

A Select to change the selected language, operation sound settings, etc. (→P.426)
B Select to set Bluetooth ^® device and Bluetooth ^® system settings. (→P.406)
C Select to set audio settings. (→P.456)
D Select to set the phone sound, contacts, message settings, etc. (→P.495)
E Select to set the voice settings. (→P.430)

F Select to set vehicle information. (→P.431)
G Select to set Wi-Fi® connection settings. ^1,2 ( P.415)
H Select to set Toyota Apps settings. ^2 ( P.522)

*1: Vehicles equipped with DCM

*2: This function is not made available in some countries or areas.

Initial screen

When the power switch is turned to ACC or ON, the initial screen will be displayed and the system will begin operating.

Caution screen

After a few seconds, the caution screen will be displayed.

After about 5 seconds or selecting "Continue", the caution screen automatically switches to the next screen.

WARNING

- When the vehicle is stopped with the hybrid system operating, always apply the parking brake for safety.

Restarting the system

When system response is extremely slow, the system can be restarted.

1 Press and hold the "POWER VOLUME" knob for 3 seconds or more.

POWER VOLUME

Touch screen

Touch screen gestures

Operations are performed by touching the touch screen directly with your finger.

Operation method Outline	Main use
	• Touch Quickly touch and release once.	• Selecting an item on the screen
	• Drag*1 Touch the screen with your finger, and move the screen to the desired position.	• Scrolling the lists
	• Flick*1 Quickly move the screen by flicking with your finger.	• Scrolling the main screen page
	• Pinch in/Pinch out Slide fingers toward each other or apart on the screen.	• Changing the scale of the map *2

*1: The above operations may not be performed on all screens.

*2: The Apple CarPlay Maps application is not compatible with pinch multi-touch gestures.

● Flick operations may not be performed smoothly at high altitudes.

Touch screen operation

This system is operated mainly by the buttons on the screen. (Referred to as screen buttons in this manual.)

When a screen button is touched, a beep sounds. (To set the beep sound: →P.426)

• If the system does not respond to touching a screen button, move your finger away from the screen and then touch it again.
  ●Dimmed screen buttons cannot be operated.
  ●The displayed image may become darker and moving images may be slightly distorted when the screen is cold.
  In extremely cold conditions, the screen may not be displayed and the data input by a user may be deleted. Also, the screen buttons may be harder than usual to depress.
• When you look at the screen through polarized material such as polarized sunglasses, the screen may be dark and hard to see. If so, look at the screen from different angles, adjust the screen settings on the display settings screen or take off your sunglasses.
• When is displayed on the screen, select to return to the previous screen.

NOTICE

● To prevent damaging the screen, lightly touch the screen buttons with your finger.
- Do not use objects other than your finger to touch the screen.
● Wipe off fingerprints using a glass cleaning cloth. Do not use chemical cleaners to clean the screen, as they may damage the touch screen.

Capacitive touch screen buttons

The operable areas of the capacitive touch screen buttons use capacitive touch sensors and may not operate properly in the following situations:

• If the screen is dirty or wet
• If a source of strong electromagnetic waves is brought near the screen
• If a glove is worn during operation
• If the screen is touched by a fingernail
• If a stylus is used to operate the buttons
• If your palm touches the operable area of another button during operation
• If a button is touched quickly
• If the operable part of a capacitive touch screen button is touched by or covered

with a metal object, such as the following, it may not operate properly:

• Magnetic isolation cards
• Metallic foil, such as the inner packaging of a cigarette box
• Metallic wallets or bags
- Coins
• Discs, such as a CD or DVD

- If the operable part of a capacitive touch screen button is wiped, it may operate unintentionally.

- If the capacitive touch screen button is being touched when the power switch is changed to ACC or ON, the button may not operate properly. In this case, remove anything touching the button, turn the power switch to OFF and then turn it to ACC or ON, or restart the system by press and hold the "POWER VOLUME" knob for 3 seconds or more.

●Capacitive touch screen button sensor sensitivity can be adjusted. (→P.426)

Home screen

On the home screen, multiple screens, such as the audio/visual system screen, hands-free screen and clock screen, can be displayed simultaneously.

Home screen operation

1 Press the "HOME" button.

HOME

2 Check that the home screen is displayed.

Home 10:57 FM 87.9 I-4 II Latest 20.0MPG Range 200miles 10:57 AM

- Selecting a screen will display it full screen.

●The display information and area on the home screen can be customized.
●The home screen can be set to several types of split layouts

Customizing the home screen

The display information/area on the home screen and the home screen layout can be changed.

1 Press the "MENU" button.
2 Select "Setup".
- If the general settings screen is not displayed, select "General".
3 Select "Customize Home Screen".
4 Select the items to be set.

Customize Home Screen 5:18 What information would you like to display? Audio ECO Phone Clock > Audio ECO Phone Change Layout B

A Select to change the display information and area on the home screen.
B Select to change the home screen layout.

Entering letters and numbers/list screen operation

Entering letters and numbers

When searching by a name or entering data, letters and numbers can be entered via the screen.

Edit Device Name 21:22 A B C D A And As Are ... 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 F W E R T Y U I O P G A S D F G H J K L Z X C V B N M - Change Type H BC Space I OK

A Text field. Entered character(s) will be displayed.
B Select to erase one character. Select and hold to continue erasing characters.
C Select to move the cursor.
D Select to choose predictive text candidate for entered text. (→P.398)
E Select to display a list of predictive text candidates when there is more than one. (→P.398)
F Select to enter desired characters.
G Select to enter characters in lower case or in upper case.

H Select to change character types. (→P.398)
I Select to make a space on cursor.
● Keyboard layout can be changed. (→P.426)

Changing character type

1 Select "Change Type".

Edit Device Name 21:22 A And As Are ... 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Q W E R T Y U I O P A S D F G H J K L ◇ Z X C V B N M - Change Type ABC Space OK

2 Select the desired character.

Edit Device Name 4:38 A ← *** Select keyboard type ABC 123 Other AÃÃ Change Type ABC Space Search

● Depending on the screen being displayed, it may not be possible to change keyboard characters.

Displaying predictive text candidates

When text is input, the system predicts the text that may complete the currently unconfirmed text and displays predictive replacement candidates that match the beginning of the text.

1 Input text.
2 Select the desired candidate.

Edit Device Name 21:22 A And As Are ... 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Q W E R T Y U I O P A S D F G H J K L Z X C V B N M - Change Type ABC Space OK

- To select a candidate that is not displayed, select •,• and then select the desired predictive replacement candidate.

Edit Device Name 21:26 A And As Are At An All About Also Any After Am Around Another Ago Against Change Type ABC Space OK

List screen

The list screen may be dis- played after entering characters. When a list is displayed, use the appropriate screen button to scroll through the list.

Scrolling list screen

iPod 12:52 Source Now Playing Song List Browse Sound Songs A B Despertar Din Din Wo (Little Child)sswwwww Distance DJDJ (for RADIO) E.LE.M.E.N.T.S C B

A To scroll up/down the list, flick the list up/down.
B Select to skip to the next or previous page. Select and hold or to scroll through the displayed list.
C Indicates the position of the displayed entries in the entire list.

To scroll up/down pages, drag the bar.

- If appears to the right of an item name, the complete name is too long to display.

• Select to scroll to the end of the name.
• Select to move to the beginning of the name.

Searching a list

Items are displayed in the list with the most similar results of the search at the top.

1 Select

8:18 History Favorites Contacts Keypad Select Device Message

2 Input text.

Search 11:04 AAA AAA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Q W E R T Y U I O P A S D F G H J K L Z X C V B N M - Change Type ABC Space Search

3 Select "Search".
4 The list is displayed.

Screen adjustment

The contrast and brightness of the screen display and the image of the camera display can be adjusted. The screen can also be turned off, and/or changed to either day or night mode.

(For information regarding audio/visual screen adjustment: →P.435)

Displaying the screen adjustment screen

1 Press the "MENU" button.

MENU

2 Select "Display".
3 Select the desired items to be set.

Display 11:02 Screen Off A Day Mode B On C Adjust Contrast/Brightness D General Camera

A Select to turn the screen off. To turn it on, press any but-

ton.

B Select to turn day mode on/off. (→P.400)
C Select to adjust the screen display. (→P.400)
D Select to adjust the camera display.

- When the screen is viewed through polarized sunglasses, a rainbow pattern may appear on the screen due to optical characteristics of the screen. If this is disturbing, please operate the screen without polarized sunglasses.

Changing between day and night mode

Depending on the position of the headlight switch, the screen changes to day or night mode. This feature is available when the headlight is switched on.

1 Select "Day Mode".

- If the screen is set to day mode with the headlight switch turned on, this condition is memorized even with the hybrid system turned off.

Adjusting the contrast/brightness

The contrast and brightness of the screen can be adjusted according to the brightness of your surroundings.

1 Select "General" or "Camera".
2 Select the desired item.

• “Display (General)” screen only: Select “<” or “>” to select the desired display.
• "Contrast"
  “+”: Select to strengthen the contrast of the screen.
  “-”: Select to weaken the contrast of the screen.
• "Brightness"
  “+”: Select to brighten the screen.
  “-”: Select to darken the screen.

Linking multi-information display and the system

The following functions of the system are linked with the multi-information display in the instrument cluster:

• Audio
• Phone*

etc.

These functions can be operated using meter control switches on the steering wheel. (→P.103)

*: When an Apple CarPlay connection is established, this function will be unavailable.

Registering/Connecting a Bluetooth® device

To use the hands-free system, it is necessary to register a Bluetooth ^® phone with the system.

Once the phone has been registered, it is possible to use the hands-free system.

This operation cannot be performed while driving.

When an Apple CarPlay connection is established, Bluetooth® functions of the system will become unavailable and any connected Bluetooth® devices will be disconnected.

When connecting to Android Auto, a Bluetooth® connection will be made automatically.

When an Android Auto connection is established, some Bluetooth® functions other than hands-free system cannot be used.

Registering a Bluetooth® phone for the first time

■Registering from the sys-tem

1 Turn the Bluetooth ^® connection setting of your cellular phone on.
- This function is not available when Bluetooth® connection setting of your cellular phone is set to off.

2 Press the "MENU" button.

MENU

3 Select "Phone".

● Operations up to this point can also be performed by pressing the "PHONE" button on the instrument panel.

4 Select "Yes" to register a phone.

Setup 7:43 There are no Bluetooth devices registered. Would you like to add one now? Yes No

5 Select the desired Bluetooth® device.

Add Device 7:47 Please select your smart phone below. Step 1: ********** Step 2: ********** Step 3: ********** If you cannot find...

• If the desired Bluetooth® phone is not on the list, select "If you cannot find..." and follow the guidance on the screen. (→P.404)
  6 Register the Bluetooth ^® device using your Bluetooth ^® device.

Add Device 7:48 Please check the display on your smart phone. Step 1: Does the PIN "0000" match the PIN displayed on "**********" Step 2: Step 3: - For details about operating the Bluetooth® device, see the manual that comes with it. - A PIN code is not required for SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth® devices. Depending on the type of Bluetooth® device being connected, a message confirming registration may be displayed on the Bluetooth® device's screen. Respond and operate the Bluetooth ^® device according to the confirmation message. 7 Check that the following screen is displayed, indicating pairing was successful (a Bluetooth® link has been established but registration is not yet complete). 

Add Device 7:48 Connecting... Step 1: Step 2: Step 3.

● The system is connecting to the registered device. - At this stage, the Bluetooth functions are not yet available. 8 Check that "Connected" is displayed and registration is complete. 

Add Device 7:49 Connected Step 1: Step 2: Step 3:

- If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again. - If a cellular phone does not operate properly after being con- nected, turn the cellular phone off and on and then connect it again.

■Registering from phone

1 Select "If you cannot find...". 

Add Device 7:47 Please select your smart phone below. Step 1: ********** Step 2: ********** Step 3: ********** If you cannot find...

2 Select "Register from Phone". 

Add Device 7:47 Please perform the following procedure or complete registration from the phone: 1. Check the Bluetooth setting on your phone. 2. Check that your phone is visible to other Bluetooth devices. 3. Charge your phone's battery if it is low. Retry Register from Phone If you cannot find...

3 Check that the following screen is displayed, and register the Bluetooth® device using your Bluetooth® device. 

Add Device 7:47 Please stay on this screen during registration... Step 1: Make sure that Bluetooth on your device is turned ON. Step 2: Search for and select "***************" on your device. Step 3: Confirm the Bluetooth PIN "****" on your device. Cancel

- For details about operating the Bluetooth® device, see the manual that comes with it. ● A PIN code is not required for SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth® devices. Depending on the type of Bluetooth® device being connected, a message confirming registration may be displayed on the Bluetooth® device's screen. Respond and operate the Bluetooth® device according to the confirmation message. 4 Follow the steps in "Registering a Bluetooth® phone for the first time" from step 7. (→P.402)

Registering a Bluetooth® audio player for the first time

To use the Bluetooth ^® audio, it is necessary to register an audio player with the system. Once the player has been registered, it is possible to use the Bluetooth ^® audio. This operation cannot be performed while driving. For details about registering a Bluetooth® device: →P.409 1 Turn the Bluetooth ^® connection setting of your audio player on. - This function is not available when the Bluetooth® connection setting of your audio player is set to off. 2 Press the "AUDIO" button. 

AUDIO

3 Select "Source" on the audio screen or press "AUDIO" button again. 4 Select "Bluetooth". 5 Select "Yes" to register an audio player. 6 Follow the steps in "Registering a Bluetooth® phone for the first time" from step 5. (→P.402)

Profiles

This system supports the following services.

Bluetooth® Core Specification

● Ver. 2.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 4.2 or higher)

Profiles

● HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 (Recommended: Ver. 1.7) - This is a profile to allow hands-free phone calls using a cellular phone. It has outgoing and incoming call functions. - OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1 (Recommended: Ver. 1.2) • This is a profile to transfer contacts data. ● PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 (Recommended: Ver. 1.2) • This is a profile to transfer phone-book data. ● MAP (Message Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 (Recommended: Ver. 1.2) • This is a profile to use phone message functions. ● SPP (Serial Port Profile) Recommended: Ver. 1.2 • This is a profile to use the Toyota audio multimedia function. ● A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0 (Recommended: Ver. 1.3) - This is a profile to transmit stereo audio or high quality sound to the audio/visual system. ● AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 (Recommended: Ver. 1.6) • This is a profile to allow remote control the A/V equipment. - This system is not guaranteed to operate with all Bluetooth ^ devices. - If your cellular phone does not support HFP, registering the Bluetooth® phone or using OPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP profiles individually will not be possible. - If the connected Bluetooth ^ device version is older than recommended or incompatible, the Bluetooth ^ device function may not work properly. - Refer to http://www.toyota.com/audio-multimedia in the United States, http://www.toyota.ca/connected in Canada, and http://www.toyotapr.com/audio-multimedia in Puerto Rico, to find approved Bluetooth® phones for this system. ●Certification 

Bluetooth®

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Setting Bluetooth® details

When an Apple CarPlay connection is established, this function will be unavailable.\* When an Android Auto connection is established, some functions will be unavailable.\* \*: This function is not made available in some countries or areas.

Displaying the Bluetooth® setup screen

1 Press the "MENU" button. 

MENU

2 Select "Setup". 3 Select "Bluetooth". 4 Select the desired item to be set. 

Setup 7:53 General Registered Device Bluetooth Add New Device Audio Remove Device Phone Detailed Settings Voice

Bluetooth® setup screen


Setup 7:53 General Registered Device A Bluetooth Add New Device B Audio Remove Device C Phone Detailed Settings D Voice

A Connecting a Bluetooth® device and editing the Bluetooth® device information (→P.407, 410) B Registering a Bluetooth® device (→P.409) C Deleting a Bluetooth ^® device (→P.409) D Setting the Bluetooth® system (→P.411) - When an Apple CarPlay connection is established, this function will be unavailable. - When an Android Auto connection is established, some functions will be unavailable.

Connecting a Bluetooth ^® device

Up to 5 Bluetooth ^® devices (Phones (HFP) and audio players (AVP)) can be registered. If more than 1 Bluetooth ^® device has been registered, select which device to connect to. 1 Display the Bluetooth ^® settings screen. (→P.406) 2 Select "Registered Device". 3 Select the device to be connected. 

Registered Device 15:59 iPhone Android phone Add Preferred Device Settings Remove

"Add": Registering a Bluetooth ^® device. (→P.409) "Preferred Device Settings": Select to change the automatic connection priority of the registered Bluetooth® devices. (→P.412) "Remove": Deleting a Bluetooth ^® device. (→P.409) : Phone Audio player : Phone/Toyota Apps Services ● The profile icon for a currently connected device will be displayed in color. - Selecting a profile icon which is not currently connected will switch the connection to the function. - If the desired Bluetooth device is not on the list, select "Add New Device" to register the device. (→P.409) 4 Select the desired connection. 

8:05 Connect ********* Disconnect ********* Disconnect as a Phone Connect as an Audio Player Device Info

\- “Device Info”: Select to confirm and change the Bluetooth® device information. (→P.410) When another Bluetooth® device is connected - To disconnect the Bluetooth device, select "Yes". 5 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the connection is complete. - If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again. device. \- When disconnecting a Bluetooth ^® device, it is recommended to disconnect using the system. ■Connecting a Bluetooth ^® device in a different way (from phone top screen) →P.481 ■Connecting a Bluetooth ^® device in a different way (from phone setup screen) →P.495 ■Connecting a Bluetooth ^® device in a different way (from Bluetooth ^® audio screen) →P.452

■Auto connection mode

To turn auto connection mode on, set "Bluetooth Power" to on. (→P.411) Leave the Bluetooth® device in a location where the connection can be established. - When the power switch is in ACC or ON, the system searches for a nearby registered device. - The system will connect with the registered device that was last connected, if it is nearby. When automatic connection priority is set to on and there is more than one registered Bluetooth® phone available, the system will automatically connect to the Bluetooth® phone with the highest priority. ( P.411)

■Connecting manually

When the auto connection has failed or "Bluetooth Power" is turned off, it is necessary to connect the Bluetooth® device manually. 1 Display the Bluetooth ^® settings screen. (→P.406) 2 Follow the steps in "Connecting a Bluetooth® device" from step 2. (→P.407)

■Reconnecting the Bluetooth® phone

If a Bluetooth ^® phone is disconnected due to poor reception from the Bluetooth ^® network when the power switch is in ACC or ON, the system automatically reconnects the Bluetooth ^® phone.

Registering a Bluetooth ^® device

Up to 5 Bluetooth ^® devices can be registered. Bluetooth ^® compatible phones (HFP) and audio players (AVP) can be registered simultaneously. This operation cannot be performed while driving. 1 Display the Bluetooth ^® settings screen. (→P.406) 2 Select "Add New Device". When another Bluetooth® device is connected \- To disconnect the Bluetooth® device, select "Yes". When 5 Bluetooth ^® devices have already been registered \- A registered device needs to be replaced. Select "Yes", and select the device to be replaced. 3 Follow the steps in "Registering a Bluetooth® phone for the first time" from step 5. (→P.402)

Deleting a Bluetooth ^® device

This operation cannot be performed while driving. 1 Display the Bluetooth ^® settings screen. (→P.406) 2 Select "Remove Device". 3 Select the desired device. 

Remove Device 8:03 Select a device to remove: ****** ***************

4 Select "Yes" when the confirmation screen appears. 5 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete. \- When deleting a Bluetooth ^ phone, the contact data will be deleted at the same time.

Editing the Bluetooth® device information

The Bluetooth® device's information can be displayed on the screen. The displayed information can be edited. This operation cannot be performed while driving. 1 Display the Bluetooth ^® settings screen. (→P.406) 2 Select "Registered Device". 3 Select the desired device to be edited. 4 Select "Device Info". 

8:05 Connect ***** Disconnect ***** Disconnect as a Phone Connect as an Audio Player Device Info

5 Confirm and change the Bluetooth® device information. 

Device Information 8:05 Device Name ********* > A Connect Audio Player From Vehicle √ B Bluetooth Address ********** Phone Number ********** Supported Profiles: Default F


Device Information 8:06 Connect Audio Player From Vehicle Bluetooth Address ****** Phone Number ****** Supported Profiles: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP, MAP Default F

A The name of the Bluetooth® device is displayed. It can be changed to a desired name. (→P.411) B Select to set the Bluetooth® audio player connection method. (→P.411) C Device address is unique to the device and cannot be changed. D Phone number is unique to the Bluetooth® phone and cannot be changed. E Compatibility profile is unique to the Bluetooth® device and cannot be changed. F Select to reset all setup items. - If 2 Bluetooth ^ devices have been registered with the same device name, the devices can be distinguished referring to the device's address. - Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone, some information may not be displayed.

Changing a device name

1 Select "Device Name". 2 Enter the name and select "OK". - Even if the device name is changed, the name registered in your Bluetooth® device does not change.

Setting audio player connection method

1 Select "Connect Audio Player From". 2 Select the desired connection method. 

Device Information 8:06 Device Name ******** > Connect Audio Player From ● Vehicle ● Device Bluetooth Address ********** Default

"Vehicle": Select to connect the audio player from the vehicle's audio/visual system. "Device": Select to connect the vehicle's audio/visual system from the audio player. ● Depending on the audio player, the "Vehicle" or "Device" connection method may be best. As such, refer to the manual that comes with the audio player.

"Detailed Settings" screen

The Bluetooth ^® settings can be confirmed and changed. 1 Display the Bluetooth ^® settings screen. (→P.406) 2 Select "Detailed Settings". 3 Select the desired item to be set. 

Detailed Settings 8:07 Bluetooth Power On A Preferred Device Settings B System Information C Default D

A Select to set Bluetooth® connection on/off. (→P.412) B Select to change the automatic connection priority of the registered Bluetooth® devices. (→P.412) C Select to edit the system information. (→P.412) D Select to reset all setup items.

Changing "Bluetooth Power"

1 Select "Bluetooth Power". When "Bluetooth Power" is on: The Bluetooth® device is automatically connected when the power switch is in ACC or ON. When "Bluetooth Power" is off: The Bluetooth® device is disconnected, and the system will not connect to it next time. ●While driving, the auto connection state can be changed from off to on, but cannot be changed from on to off.

Setting automatic connection priority

The automatic connection priority of the registered Bluetooth ^® devices can be changed. 1 Select "Preferred Device Settings". 2 Select the desired item to be set. 

Preferred Device Settings 8:07 Preferred Device Settings On A > Preferred Phones > B Preferred Audio Players > C Default D

A Select to set automatic connection priority on/off. B Select to change the auto- matic connection priority of the registered Bluetooth® phones. (→P.412) C Select to change the automatic connection priority of the registered Bluetooth® audio players. (→P.412) D Select to reset all setup items.

■Changing Bluetooth ^® device automatic connection priority

1 Select "Preferred Phones" or "Preferred Audio Players". 2 Select the desired Bluetooth® device and select "Move Up" or "Move Down" to change the preferred order. 

Preferred Phones 8:08 Change the order of automatic connection. 1 ********** 2 ********** Move Up Move Down

\- A newly registered Bluetooth® device will automatically be given the highest automatic connection priority.

Editing the system information

1 Select "System Information". 2 Select the desired item to be set. 

System Information 8:12 System Name ******** > A System PIN Code 0000 > B Bluetooth Address ******** C Display Phone Status Off D Display Audio Player Status Off E Default G


System Information 8:12 Bluetooth Address Display Phone Status Off Display Audio Player Status Off Supported Profiles: HFP, SPP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP, MAP Default G

A Displays system name. Can be changed to a desired name. (→P.413) B PIN code used when the Bluetooth® device was registered. Can be changed to a desired code. (→P.413) C Device address is unique to the device and cannot be changed. D Select to set the connection status display of the phone on/off. E Select to set the connection status display of the audio player on/off. F Compatibility profile of the system G Select to reset all setup items.

■Editing the system name

1 Select "System Name". 2 Enter a name and select "OK".

■ Editing the PIN code

1 Select "System PIN Code". 2 Enter a PIN code and select "OK".

Wi-Fi® Hotspot\*

\*: Vehicles equipped with DCM only. This function is not made available in some countries or areas.

By connecting a device to the vehicle via Wi-Fi ^® , it can access the internet through the DCM.

\- To use this function, a Wi-Fi® Hotspot service subscription from AT&T is required. Connect your device to the in-vehicle access point (see instructions below), or contact your Toyota dealer for details.

Connecting a device to the in-vehicle access point

Searching for and connecting a device to the vehicle access point

1 Enable the Wi-Fi ^® Hotspot function. (→P.415) 2 Disable the "Hide Access Point" function. (→P.415) 3 Search for the vehicle access point using the device you wish to connect. - For details about operating the device, refer to the documentation which came with it. 4 Operate the device to connect it to the vehicle access point. \- To check the vehicle access point password, check "Password". (→P.415) \- Hints for connecting to the vehicle via Wi-Fi® can be displayed. (→P.415)

Connecting a device to the in-vehicle access point using the access point name (SSID)

1 Enable the Wi-Fi ^® Hotspot function. (→P.415) 2 Enable the "Hide Access Point" function. (→P.415) 3 Enter the access point name (SSID) into the device you wish to connect and connect it. - To check the vehicle access point password, check "Password". (→P.415) - The security settings on the device must be the same as that displayed for “Security”. (→P.415) - For details about operating the device, refer to the documentation which came with it.

Changing the Wi-Fi® settings

1 Press the "MENU" button. 

MENU

2 Select "Setup". 3 Select "Wi-Fi \*". \*: Wi - P is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®. 4 Select the desired item to be set. 

Setup 1:13 Wi-Fi Hotspot On A Now discoverable. You can look for the wireless access point" ********** from your mobile devices. Password > How to Connect C


Setup 1:13 Password How to Connect Hi- Fi Hide Access Point Off D Security WPA2 (AES) E Access Point Name F Channel G

A Select to enable/disable the Wi-Fi® Hotspot function. (→P.415) B Select to check/change the access point password. (→P.416) C Select to display hints for connecting to the vehicle via Wi-Fi®. D Select to make the access point searchable/unsearchable. E Select to check/change the security protocol of the access point (for authentication and encryption). (→P.416) F Select to change the access point name (SSID). (→P.416) G Select to change the Wi-Fi® connection channel (within the 2.4GHz frequency band). (→P.416) \- If any settings have been changed, it will be necessary to reset the Wi-Fi® system to complete the changes. To reset the Wi-Fi® system, select "Yes" on the pop-up displayed after changing the settings.

Enabling/disabling the Wi-Fi® Hotspot function

When the Wi-Fi ^® Hotspot function is enabled, the system checks for a valid Hotspot service subscription. If a Hotspot service subscription has not been started, connect your device to the in-vehicle access point to start your subscription. A trial subscription may be available. Contact your Toyota dealer for details about the Toyota Apps.

Checking/changing the password

1 Select "Password". 2 Check that the following screen is displayed. 

Password 1:13 Current password: ************ Show Characters Off B Change Password > C

A Displays the password B Select to display/hide the entered password. C Select to change the password.

Changing the password

1 Select "Change Password". 2 Enter the desired password and select "OK". \- When setting/changing a password, observe the following guidelines to help prevent the password from being cracked by a third party: \- Use an 8-character or longer password consisting of letters and numbers. (Non-ASCII characters will not be recognized by the system.) - Change the password regularly. - If you write the password down, do not leave it somewhere where it would be visible. - Do not use the same password for vehicle Wi-Fi® Hotspot as other accounts already protected by a password. - Avoid using easy to identify words, such as your vehicle's model name or license plate number, simple dictionary words, or words with simple obfuscation, such as c@t (for cat), as your password.

Changing the security protocol

1 Select "Security". 2 Select the desired security protocol.

Changing the access point name (SSID)

1 Select "Access Point Name". 2 Enter the desired access point name (SSID) and select "OK".

Selecting a Wi-Fi ^® connection channel

1 Select "Channel". 2 Check that the following screen is displayed. 

Channel 1:13 Select Channel Auto A Channel Number > B

A Select to change the channel selection to automatic/manual. B When "Manual" is selected, select to change the channel.

Changing the channel

1 Set "Select Channel" to "Manual". 2 Select "Channel Number". 3 Enter the desired channel number and select "OK". ● Channels 1 through 11 can be selected.

Wi-Fi ^® function operating hints

- If a connected device is taken out of the Wi-Fi ^ connection area, the connection will be severed. - If the vehicle is driven out of the cellular communication coverage area, connecting to the internet via the Wi-Fi® Hotspot will not be possible. - If a Bluetooth ^ device is used while a device is connected using the Wi-Fi ^® Hotspot function, the communication speed may decrease. \- If the vehicle is near a radio antenna, radio station or other source of strong radio waves and electrical noise, communication may be slow or impossible. 

WARNING

- Use Wi-Fi ^ devices only when safe and legal to do so. - Your audio unit is fitted with Wi-Fi® antennas. People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the Wi-Fi® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. Before using Wi-Fi ^® devices, users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

Conditions displayed with Wi-Fi® icon

The condition of Wi-Fi ^® connection appears on the right upper side of the screen. (→P.390)

Specifications

● Communication standards IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11n (2.4GHz) ● Security WPA™ WPA2™ \- WPA ^TM and WPA2 ^TM are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance ^ .

Apple Car-Play®/Android Auto™\*

\*: This function is not made available in some countries or areas.

Apple CarPlay/Android Auto allows some applications, such as Map, Phone, and Music, to be used on the system.

When an Apple Car-Play/Android Auto connection is established, Apple CarPlay/Android Auto compatible applications will be displayed on the system display. \- Compatible device Apple iPhone (iOS Ver. 9.3 or later) that supports Apple Car-Play.\* For details, refer to https://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/. Android™ devices with Android OS ver 5.0 or higher which support Android Auto and have the Android Auto application installed.\* For details, refer to https://www.android.com/auto/ \*: Some devices may not operate with this system.

Establishing an Apple CarPlay connection

1 Enable Siri on the device to be connected. 2 Connect the device to the USB port. ( P.434) 3 Select "Always Enable" or "Enable Once". - If “Do not enable” is selected, an Apple CarPlay connection will not be established. In this case, the device can be operated as a normal Apple device, such as an iPod. Apple CarPlay will remain off until “Apple CarPlay” of “Projection Settings” on the general settings screen is turned on. (→P.426) - Depending on the device connected, it may take approximately 3 to 6 seconds before the system returns to previous screen. - The screen may change to step 6 depending on the system. 4 Press the "MENU" button. 

MENU

5 Select "Apple CarPlay". 

Menu 10:26 Audio Phone Apps Apple CarPlay Info Setup Display

6 Check that home screen of Apple CarPlay is displayed. 

11:26 0000 4G A Now Playing TOYOTA B C

A Select to display the home screen of Apple CarPlay. Select and hold to activate Siri. B Select to start the application. User can use any iPhone application supported by Apple CarPlay. C Select to display the system screen.

Establishing an Android Auto connection

1 Check that the Android Auto application is installed to the device to be connected. 2 Connect the device to the USB port. (→P.434) 3 Select "On" to enable the function. - “Off”: Select to not enable Android Auto. Android Auto will remain off until “Android Auto” of “Projection Settings” on the general settings screen is turned on. (→P.426) - Depending on the device connected, it may take approximately 3 to 6 seconds before the system returns to previous screen. ● The screen may change to step 6 depending on the system. 4 Press the "MENU" button. 

MENU

5 Select "Android Auto". 

Menu 10:27 Audio Phone Apps Android Auto Info Setup Display

6 Check that home screen of Android Auto is displayed. ●When an Apple CarPlay/Android Auto connection is established, the function of some system buttons will change. \- When an Apple CarPlay/Android Auto connection is established, some system functions, such as the following, will be replaced by similar Apple CarPlay/Android Auto functions or will become unavailable: \- iPod (Audio Playback) • USB audio/USB video \- Bluetooth® audio \- Bluetooth® phone (Apple CarPlay only) • Toyota Apps ^* \* : This function is not made available in some countries or areas. \- When an Apple CarPlay/Android Auto connection is established, voice command system (Siri/Google Assistant) and map application voice guidance volume can be changed by selecting "Voice Volume" on the voice settings screen. It cannot be changed by "POWER VOLUME" knob on Audio control panel. ( P.430) \- Apple CarPlay/Android Auto is an application developed by Apple Inc/Google LLC. Its functions and services may be terminated or changed without notice depending on the connected device's operation system, hardware and software, or due to changes in Apple CarPlay/Android Auto specifications. ●For a list of the apps supported by Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, refer to their respective website. ●While using these functions, vehicle and user information, such as location and vehicle speed, will be shared with the respective application publisher and the cellular service provider. \- By downloading and using each application, you agree to their terms of use. ●Data for these functions is transmitted using the internet and may incur charges. For information about data transmission fees, contact your cellular service provider. ●Depending on the application, certain functions, such as music playback, may be restricted. ● As the applications for each function are provided by a third-party, they may be subject to change or discontinuation without notice. For details, refer to the website of the function. \- If the USB cable is disconnected, operation of Apple Car-Play/Android Auto will end. At this time, sound output will stop and change to the system screen.

Certification


Works with Apple CarPlay

\- Use of the Apple CarPlay logo means that a vehicle user interface meets Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this vehicle or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this product with iPhone or iPod may affect wireless performance. ●Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc. androidauto ●Android and Android Auto are trademarks of Google LLC. 

WARNING

\- Do not connect iPhone or operate the controls while driving. 

NOTICE

\- Do not leave your smartphone in the vehicle. In particular, high temperatures inside the vehicle may damage the smartphone. \- Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the smartphone while it is connected as this may damage the smartphone or its terminal. \- Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the smartphone or its terminal.

Troubleshooting

If you are experiencing difficulties with Apple CarPlay/Android Auto, check the following table.

Symptom Solution
An Apple Car-Play/Android Auto connection cannot be established.	Check if the device supports Apple Car-Play/Android Auto.Check if Apple CarPlay/Android Auto is enabled on the connected device.Check that the Android Auto application is installed to the device to be connected.For details, refer tohttps://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/,https://www.android.com/auto/.For available countries or areas for Apple Car-Play, refer tohttps://www.apple.com/ios/feature-availability/# apple carplay.
	Check if “Apple CarPlay”/“Android Auto” of “Projection Settings” on the general settings screen is set to on. (→P.426)
	Check if the USB cable being used is securely connected to the device and USB port.Try connecting the smartphone directly to the USB port in the vehicle, without using the hub.For Apple CarPlay: Check if the Lightning cable being used is certified by Apple and check if Siri is enabled.
	After checking all of the above, try to establish an Apple CarPlay/Android Auto connection.(→P.419)
When an Apple Car-Play/Android Auto connection is established and a video is being played, the video is not displayed, but audio is output through the system.	As the system is not designed to play video through Apple CarPlay/Android Auto, this is not a malfunction.
Although an Apple Car-Play/Android Auto connection is established, audio is not output through the system.	The system may muted or the volume may be low. Increase the system volume.
The Apple Car-Play/Android Auto screen has flickers and/or audio from Apple Car-Play/Android Auto has noise.	Check if the USB cable being used to connect the device to the system is damaged.To check if the USB cable is damaged internally, connect the device to another system, such as a PC, and check if the device is recognized by the connected system. (The device should begin charging when connected.)
	After checking all of the above, try to establish an Apple CarPlay/Android Auto connection.(→P.419)
The map display of the Apple CarPlay Maps app cannot be enlarged or contracted with pinch multi-touch gestures.	As the Apple CarPlay Maps app is not compatible with pinch multi-touch gestures, this is not a malfunction.
During Apple CarPlay music application (Apple Music, Spotify, etc.) play-back, if the iPhone is operated to start and play audio from an application that is not compatible with Apple CarPlay* and the onboard device volume is changed, the audio of the incompatible application stops and the system resumes playback of the original music application.	This operation is performed according to the specification of the onboard device, this is not a malfunction.
After interrupt audio (such as navigation route guidance) is played from an application that is not compatible with Apple CarPlay while the onboard device is playing audio (FM/AM, etc.), the system does not resume playback of the original audio (FM/AM, etc.).	This operation is performed according to the specification of the onboard device, this is not a malfunction. Manually change the audio source by yourself. Or, do not use applications that are not compatible with Apple CarPlay.* Due to some navigation applications are compatible from iOS 12, update to the latest iOS and application versions.
When using Apple Car-Play, route guidance arrows and turn by turn navigation are not displayed on the multi-information display and system display. When using Android Auto, turn by turn navigation is not displayed on the multi-information display and system display.	This is not a malfunction as display of these items is not possible with this function.
When using Android Auto, hands-free call audio cannot be heard from the vehicle's speakers.	Disconnect the phone from the USB cable and check if hands-free call audio can be heard using the hands-free system.
	Connect the phone to the system using Android Auto, turn up the volume on the system and check if hands-free call audio can be heard. Check if other sounds can be heard from the vehicle's speakers.

\*: Applications not compatible with Apple CarPlay are applications installed on the iPhone that are not displayed on the Apple CarPlay screen application list. (such as visual voicemail)

General settings

Settings are available for clock, operation sounds, etc.

Displaying the general settings screen

1 Press the "MENU" button. 

MENU

2 Select "Setup". - If the general settings screen is not displayed, select "General". 3 Select the desired items to be set. 

Setup 14:17 General Clock Bluetooth Language English Audio Customize Home Screen Phone Projection Settings Voice Beep On Theme Setting

General settings screen

\- "Clock" Select to change the time zone and select "On" or "Off" for daylight saving time, automatic adjustment of the clock, etc. ( P.427) \- "Language" Select to change the language. The language setting of Apple Car-Play/Android Auto can only be changed on the connected device. \- “Customize Home Screen” Select to change the display information/area on the home screen and the home screen layout. (→P.396) \- “Projection Settings ^*1 ” Select to set automatic Apple Car-Play/Android Auto connection establishment on/off. (→P.428) \- “Beep” Select to turn the beep sound on/off. \- “Theme Setting” Select to change the screen theme setting. ● “Units of Measurement” Select to change the unit of measure for distance/fuel consumption. ● "Keyboard Layout" Select to change the keyboard layout. \- “Delete Keyboard History” Select to delete the keyboard history. ● “Memorize Keyboard History” Select to set the memorize keyboard history on/off. \- "Animation" Select to turn the animations on/off. \- "Driver Setting" Select to change the driver settings. (→P.428) \- “Delete Personal Data” Select to delete personal data. (→P.429) \- "Software Update" Select to update software versions. For details, contact your Toyota dealer. \- “Software Update Setting ^2 ” Select to set software update setting. (→P.429) \- “Gracenote Database Update” Select to update Gracenote ^® database versions. For details, contact your Toyota dealer. ● "Software Information" Select to display the software information. Notices related to third party software used in this product are enlisted. (This includes instructions for obtaining such software, where applicable.) \- “SW Sensitivity Level” Select to change the capacitive touch screen button sensitivity to 1 (low), 2 (medium), or 3 (high). \*1: This function is not made available in some countries or areas. \*2: Vehicles equipped with DCM

Clock settings

1 Display the general settings screen. (→P.426) 2 Select "Clock". 3 Select the desired items to be set. 

Clock 4:45 Time Zone Auto Daylight Saving Time Off B Auto Adjust by GPS Off C 24-Hour Time Format On D Hours Minutes 4:45

A Select to change the time zone. (→P.427) B Select to set daylight saving time on/off. C Select to set automatic adjustment of the clock by GPS on/off. When set to off, the clock can be manually adjusted. (→P.427) D Select to set the 24 hour time format on/off. When set to off, the clock is displayed in 12 hour time format.

Setting the time zone

1 Select "Time Zone". 2 Select the desired time zone.

Manual clock setting

When "Auto Adjust by GPS" is turned off, the clock can be manually adjusted. 1 Select "Auto Adjust by GPS" to set to off. 2 Adjust the clock manually. 

Clock 4:45 Time Zone Auto Daylight Saving Time Off Auto Adjust by GPS Off 24-H A Time Format B C On Hours Minutes 00 - + - + 4:45

A Select "+" to set the time forward one hour and "-" to set the time back one hour. B Select "+" to set the time forward one minute and "-" to set the time back one minute. C Select to round to the nearest hour. e.g. 1:00 to 1:29 → 1:00 1:30 to 1:59 → 2:00

Projection settings\*

\*: This function is not made available in some countries or areas. 1 Display the general settings screen. (→P.426) 2 Select "Projection Settings". 3 Select the desired items to be set. 

Projection Settings 14:20 Apple CarPlay A On Android Auto B On

A Select to turn Apple CarPlay connection establishment on/off. B Select to turn Android Auto connection establishment on/off. - When the settings are changed with a device connected to the system via USB, disconnect the device and connect it again to enable the settings.

Driver settings

The driver settings feature will allow the system to link some preferences (such as audio presets, screen theme, language, etc.) to a paired Bluetooth® phone. 1 Display the general settings screen. (→P.426) 2 Select "Driver Setting". 3 Select "Enable This Feature". 

Driver Setting 4:46 The Driver Setting feature will allow the system to link some preferences (such as audio presets, button colors, language, etc.) to a paired Bluetooth phone. Please note that by enabling this feature, you will need to make sure to connect to the correct phone in order to get your settings. Enable This Feature Manually Select Linked Settings

Manually select linked set- tings

1 Select "Manually Select Linked Settings". 1 Select the desired phone. 

Manually Select Linked Settings 4:46 Select which phone's linked settings to load. Please note that only the settings linked to that phone will be loaded. The phone will not be connected. 1 ********** 2 ********** 3 **********

● After a few seconds, loaded screen automatically switches to the home screen.

Deleting personal data

Registered or changed personal settings will be deleted or returned to their default conditions. 1 Display the general settings screen. (→P.426) 2 Select "Delete Personal Data". 3 Select "Delete". 4 Select "Yes" when the confirmation screen appears. Examples of settings that can be returned to their default conditions: - Audio settings - Phone settings etc.

Software update settings\*

\*: Vehicles equipped with DCM only. This function is not made available in some countries or areas. When the automatic update check function is enabled, if a software update is available from the Cloud, a message will be displayed. 1 Display the general settings screen. ( P.426) 2 Select "Software Update Setting". 3 Select "Automatic Update Check" to enable/disable the automatic update check function. 

Software Update Settings 4:46 Automatic Update Check Off Default

\- When software update information is displayed, contact your Toyota dealer.

Voice settings

Voice volume, etc. can be set.

Displaying the voice set- tings screen

1 Press the "MENU" button. 

MENU

2 Select "Setup". 3 Select "Voice". 4 Select the desired items to be set.

Voice settings screen


Setup 1:09 General Voice Volume 4 A Bluetooth Voice Recognition Prompts High B Audio Train Voice Recognition C Phone Voice Recognition Tutorial D Voice Voice Prompt Interrupt Off E Default F

A Select to adjust the volume of voice guidance.\* B Select to set the voice recognition prompts. C Select to train voice recogni- tion. The voice command system adapts the user accent. D Select to start the voice recognition tutorial. E Select to set the voice prompt interrupt on/off. F Select to reset all setup items. \*: When an Apple CarPlay/Android Auto connection is established, voice command system (Siri/Google Assistant) and map application voice guidance volume can be changed.

Vehicle settings

Settings are available for vehicle customization, etc.

Displaying the vehicle settings screen

1 Press the "MENU" button. 

MENU

2 Select "Setup". 3 Select "Vehicle". 4 Select the desired items to be set.

Vehicle settings screen


Setup 1:12 Vehicle Customization Audio Valet Mode Phone Voice Vehicle Apps A B

A Select to set vehicle customization. ( P.706) B Select to set valet mode. (→P.431)

Setting the valet mode

The security system can be set to on by entering a security code (4-digit number). When set to on, the system will become inoperative once the electrical power source is disconnected until the security code is entered. 1 Display the vehicle settings screen. (→P.431) 2 Select "Valet Mode". 3 Enter the 4-digit personal code and select "OK". 4 Enter the same 4-digit personal code again and select "OK". - The system will request that you input the security code again to confirm that you remember it correctly. - When valet mode activates, the system stops and a security code (4-digit number) standby screen is displayed. - If the 4-digit personal code is forgotten, please contact your Toyota dealer.

If the valet mode has been activated

1 Enter the 4-digit personal code and select "OK". - If an incorrect security code (4-digit number) is entered 6 times, the system will not accept another security code (4-digit number) for 10 minutes.

Quick reference

Functional overview

The audio control screen can be reached by the following methods: From the "AUDIO" button 1 Press the "AUDIO" button. From the "MENU" button 1 Press the "MENU" button, then select "Audio". 

HOME MENU AUDIO MAP POWER VOLUME SEEK> • Using the radio (→P.437) - Playing a USB memory (→P.444) - Playing an iPod/iPhone (Apple CarPlay ^* ) ( P.446) • Using the Android Auto ^* (→P.449) - Playing a Bluetooth ^ device (→P.450) - Using the steering wheel audio switches (→P.454) • Audio system settings ( P.456) \* : This function is not made available in some countries or areas.

Some basics

This section describes some of the basic features of the audio/visual system. Some information may not pertain to your system. Your audio/visual system works when the power switch is in ACC or ON. 

NOTICE

● To prevent the 12-volt battery from being discharged, do not leave the audio/visual system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is not running.

Turning the system on and off


POWER VOLUME

"POWER VOLUME" knob: Press to turn the audio/visual system on and off. The system turns on in the last mode used. Turn this knob to adjust the volume.

Selecting an audio source

1 Press the "AUDIO" button. 

AUDIO

2 Select "Source" or press "AUDIO" button again. 3 Select the desired source. 

Select Audio Source 10:27 Audio Off AM FM SXM Android Auto Bluetooth Reorder

● Dimmed screen buttons cannot be operated. - When there are two pages, select < or > to change the page. - When an Apple CarPlay/Android Auto connection is established, some system functions, such as the following, will be replaced by similar Apple CarPlay/Android Auto function or will become unavailable: - iPod (Audio Playback) • USB audio/USB video - Bluetooth ^® audio - Toyota Apps \* : This function is not made available in some countries or areas.

Reordering the audio source

1 Display the audio source selection screen. (→P.433) 2 Select "Reorder". 3 Select the desired audio source then reorder. 4 Select "OK".

USB port

1 Connect a device. 

Diagram showing car interior with dashboard, control panel, and USB flash drive icon with directional arrow

\- Turn on the power of the device if it is not turned on. - If a USB hub is plugged-in, two devices can be connected at a time. ● Even if a USB hub is used to connect more than two USB devices, only the first two connected devices will be recognized. - If a USB hub that has more than two ports is connected to the USB port, devices connected to the USB hub may not charge or be inoperable, as the supply of current may be insufficient. - When an Apple CarPlay/Android Auto connection is established, the other USB port can be used only for device battery charger.

Sound settings

1 Display the audio control screen. (→P.433) 2 Select "Sound". 3 Select the desired item to be set. 

Radio Source Treble/Mid/Bass A Presets Fader/Balance B SXM Replay Automatic Sound Levelizer C Station List Options Sound

A Select to set the tre-ble/mid/bass. (→P.434) B Select to set the fader/balance. ( P.435) C Select to set the automatic sound leveliser. (→P.435)

Treble/Mid/Bass

How good an audio program sounds is largely determined by the mix of the treble, mid and bass levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs usually sound better with different mixes of treble, mid and bass. 1 Select "Treble/Mid/Bass". 2 Select the desired screen button. 

Radio 8:11 Source Treble/Mid/Bass Presets Treble + A SXM Replay Mid + B Station List Bass + C Options Fader/Balance Sound Automatic Sound Levelizer

A Select "+" or "-" to adjust high-pitched tones. B Select "+" or "-" to adjust mid-pitched tones. C Select "+" or "-" to adjust low-pitched tones.

Fader/Balance

A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the front and rear sound levels is also important. Keep in mind that when listening to a stereo recording or broadcast, changing the right/left balance will increase the volume of 1 group of sounds while decreasing the volume of another. 1 Select "Fader/Balance". 2 Select the desired screen button. 

Radio 8:12 Source Presets SXM Replay Station List Options Sound Front A B L R A Rear

A Select to adjust the sound balance between the front and rear speakers. B Select to adjust the sound balance between the left and right speakers.

■Automatic sound levelizer (ASL)

The system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone quality according to vehicle speed to compensate for increased road noise, wind noise, or other noises while driving. 1 Select "Automatic Sound Levelizer". 2 Select "High", "Mid", "Low" or "Off".

Audio screen adjustment

■Screen format settings

The screen format can be selected for USB video. 1 Press the "MENU" button. 2 Select "Setup". 3 Select "Audio". 4 Select "Common". 5 Select "Screen Format". 6 Select the desired item to be adjusted. 

Screen Format 8:15 USB Normal Stretched Zoomed A B C

A Select to display a 4 : 3 screen, with either side in black. B Select to enlarge the image horizontally and vertically to full screen. C Select to enlarge the image by the same ratio horizontally and vertically.

■ Contrast and brightness adjustment

The contrast and brightness of the screen can be adjusted. 1 Press the "MENU" button. 2 Select "Setup". 3 Select "Audio". 4 Select "Common". 5 Select "Display". 6 Select the desired item to be adjusted. \- “Contrast” “+”: Select to strengthen the contrast of the screen. “-”: Select to weaken the contrast of the screen. \- "Brightness" “+”: Select to brighten the screen. “-”: Select to darken the screen. ● Depending on the audio source, some functions may not be available.

Voice command system

1 Press this switch to operate the voice command system. 

Diagram of car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and control panel with directional arrow indicator

\- The voice command system and its list of commands can be operated. (→P.470)

AM/FM/SiriusXM (SXM) radio\*

\*: This function is not made available in some countries or areas.

Overview

The radio operation screen can be reached by the following methods: →P.433

Control screen


Radio 8:19 Source A FM 87.9 Presets B SXM Replay C I Station List D G Options E 1 87.9 2 98.1 3 002 Sound. F 4 1000 5 001 6 (Hold E)

A Select to display the audio source selection screen. B Select to display the preset stations screen. (→P.438) C Select to display the cache radio operation screen. (→P.438) D Select to display a list of receivable stations. (→P.439) E Select to display the radio options screen. (→P.439) F Select to display the sound setting screen. (→P.434) G Select to tune to preset sta- tions/channels. ( P.438) H Displays items on the channels registered to smart favorites\* (→P.442, 457) ☐ Displays the artist info and song title or album Select to change the displayed information. Displays messages when available\* J Displays cover art, station logo, etc.\* K Displays information about the song/track currently being played\* \*: This function is not made available in some countries or areas.

Control panel


HOME MENU ALIBS SAP HOME VOLUME SIP3.2 ATRACE PHOEN APPL USB AVERAGE A B

A Press to seek for stations in the relevant program type/channel category. Press and hold for continuous seek. B Turn to step up/down frequencies/channels. Turn to move up/down the station list. Also, the knob can be used to enter selections on the list screens by pressing it. ●The radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broadcast is received.

Presetting a station

Radio mode has a mix preset function, which can store up to 36 stations (6 stations per page x 6 pages) from any of the AM, FM or SXM ^* bands. 1 Tune in the desired station. 2 Select and hold “(Hold Edit)”. 

Radio Source FM 87.9 Presets SXM Replay Station List Options 1 87.9 2 98.1 3 002 Sound 4 1000 5 001 6 (Hold Edit)

\- When “(Hold Edit)” is selected, a confirmation message appears. Select “Yes” and select “OK”. ● To change the preset station to a different one, select and hold the preset station. \*: This function is not made available in some countries or areas. ●The number of preset radio stations displayed on the screen can be changed. (→P.456)

Caching a radio program\*

\*: This function is not made available in some countries or areas. AM/FM and SXM radio program can be cached and played back in a time-shifted manner.

■Automatic playback of the cache

If the radio broadcast is interrupted by another audio output, such as an incoming phone call, the system will automatically cache the interrupted portion and perform time-shift playback when the interruption ends. This function is available when “Auto Pause” is set to on. (→P.439)

■Playing back the cache manually

The broadcast cached in the program cache can be played back manually. 1 Select "SXM Replay". 2 Select the desired cache radio operation button. 

Radio 8:27 Source SXM 001 Presets SXM Replay Station List Live B Options -0:02 C D E F G Sound 0:00 11

A Returns to the live radio broadcast B Displays the replay offset from the current time C Skips backward 2 minutes (AM/FM) Select to select current/previous track (SXM) D Fast rewinds continuously E Pauses the playback (To restart, select) F Fast forwards continuously G Skips forward 2 minutes (AM/FM) Select to change the track (SXM) \- The system can store up to 20 minutes of AM/FM and less than 60 minutes of SXM. Cached data will be erased when the radio mode or station is changed or when the audio system is turned off. - AM/FM: If noise or silence occurs during the caching process, cached writing will continue, with the noise or silence recorded as is. In this case, the cached broadcast will contain the noise or silence when played back.

Selecting a station from the list

1 Select "Station List". 2 Select "AM", "FM" or "SXM \*". - Select the desired program genre when the genre selection screen is displayed. 3 Select the desired station. \*: This function is not made available in some countries or areas.

■Refreshing the station list (AM/FM)

1 Select "Station List". "Cancel Refresh": Select to cancel the refresh. "Source": Select to change to another audio source while refreshing. ●The audio/visual system sound is muted during refresh operation. ● In some situations, it may take some time to update the station list.

Radio options

1 Select "Options". 2 Select the desired item to be set. 

Radio 8:33 Source Auto Pause A Off Presents SXM Tune Start B On SXM Replay FM Info C On Play Station List Scan D Off Options Sound

A Select to turn automatic play-back of the cache on/off.\* B When "SXM Tune Start" is turned on, the current song is played from the beginning when you select the channel.\* C Analog FM only: Select to display RBDS text messages. D Select to scan for receivable stations. (Type scan in case SXM\* is current program type/channel category.) \*: This function is not made available in some countries or areas.

Radio broadcast data sys- tem

This audio/visual system is equipped with Radio Broadcast Data Systems (RBDS). RBDS mode allows text messages to be received from radio stations that utilize RBDS transmitters. When RBDS is on, the radio can do the following functions. - Only selecting stations of a particular program type - Displaying messages from radio stations - Searching for a stronger signal station RBDS features are available only when listening to an FM station that broadcasts RBDS information and the “FM Info” function is on. (→P.439)

How to subscribe to SiriusXM Radio Services\*

\*: This function is not made available in some countries or areas. All SiriusXM services, including satellite radio and data services, plus streaming services, require a subscription, sold separately or as a package by Sirius XM Radio Inc. (or, in Canada, Sirius XM Canada Inc.), after any trial subscription which may be included with your vehicle purchase or lease. To subscribe after your trial subscription, call 1-877-447-0011 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-438-9677 (Canada).

■ Important information about your subscription

Your SiriusXM services will automatically stop at the end of your trial unless you decide to subscribe. If you decide to continue service, the paid subscription plan you choose will automatically renew and you will be charged the rate in effect at that time and according to your chosen payment method. Fees and taxes apply. You may cancel at any time by calling 1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). All fees and programming subject to change. Traffic information not available in all markets. 

NOTICE

It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate, or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SiriusXM Satellite Radio System or that support the SiriusXM website, the streaming service or any of its content. Furthermore, the AMBE® voice compression software included in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. Note: this applies to SiriusXM Satellite Radio receivers only and not SiriusXM Ready devices. ●ABOUT SiriusXM Services \- Most in-car trials today include SiriusXM's best package — All Access. It includes every channel available on your radio, plus streaming. ●SiriusXM All Access Subscription \- Listen everywhere with All Access. You get every channel available in your ride, plus you can listen on the app and online — so you can enjoy the best SiriusXM has to offer, anywhere life takes you. It’s the only package that gives you all of our premium programming, including Howard Stern, every NFL, MLB® and NBA game, every NASCAR® race, NHL® games, 24/7 talk channels dedicated to the biggest leagues, and more. You get all kinds of commercial-free music, including artist-dedicated channels and more, plus sports, news, talk and entertainment. Did you know? SiriusXM also delivers a wide variety of services to certain vehicles' entertainment and navigation systems such as Traffic, Weather, Sports Scores, Movie Listings, Fuel Prices, Stock Prices and more. For a list of available features in your vehicle, visit siriusxm.com/infotainment and get the most out of your driving experience.

●RADIO OPERATION

- Look for the Sirius, XM, SiriusXM, Band, SAT, AUX, Radio or Source button and you're in. If you can't hear us, it's easy to get started: Locate your Radio ID by turning to Channel 0. If you don't see your number there, go to siri-usxm.com/activationhelp to find it. Visit siriusxm.com/refresh or call 1-855-MYREFRESH (697-3373) to send a refresh signal to your radio. Canadian Customers: Locate your Radio ID by turning to Channel 0. Visit siriusxm.ca/refresh to send a refresh signal to your radio or call 1-888-539-7474 for service.

Displaying the radio ID\*

\*: This function is not made available in some countries or areas. Each SiriusXM tuner is identified with a unique radio ID. The radio ID is required when activating an SiriusXM Satellite service or when reporting a problem. \- If “Ch 000” is selected using the “TUNE SCROLL” knob, the ID code, which is 8 alphanumeric characters, will be displayed. If another channel is selected, the ID code will no longer be displayed.

Smart favorites\*

\*: This function is not made available in some countries or areas. Up to 20 channels can be registered as presets in the cache. For channel registration, refer to (→P.456). 1 Select channels registered to smart favorites. 2 Select "SXM Replay". ●Caches up to 30 minutes for each Smart Favorite preset. ●The radio plays the track from start when that track has not previously been heard by the user and the station is registered as a smart favorite. - When "SXM Tune Start" is turned on ( P.439), the current song is played from the beginning when you select the channel. ●Displays icons on the channels registered to smart favorites. (→P.437)

Refer to the table below to identify the problem and take the suggested corrective action

When problems occur with the SiriusXM tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested corrective action ^* . \* : This function is not made available in some countries or areas.

Message Explanation
“Check Antenna”	The SiriusXM antenna is not connected. Check whether the SiriusXM antenna cable is attached securely. Contact your Toyota dealer for assistance.
	A short circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. Contact your Toyota dealer for assistance.
“No Signal”	The SiriusXM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.
“Chan Unavailable”	The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.
“Ch Unsubscribed”	The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “Ch 001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel.
“Subscription Updated”	Subscription is updated. Select “OK” to clear this message.

\- Contact the SiriusXM Listener Care Center at 1-877-447-0011 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-438-9677 (Canada).

USB memory

Overview

The USB memory operation screen can be reached by the following methods: →P.433 - Connecting a USB memory (→P.434) - When an Apple Car-Play/Android Auto connection is established, this function will be unavailable.

Control screen

USB audio 

USB 8:41 Source A Now Playing B Song List C Browse D Sound E F G H I J L M Track K of 11

A Select to display the audio source selection screen. B Select to return to the top screen. C Select to display a song list screen. D Select to display the play mode selection screen. E Select to display the sound setting screen. (→P.434) F Select to set repeat playback. (→P.445) G Select to change the file/track. Select and hold to fast rewind. H Select to play/pause. I Select to change the file/track. Select and hold to fast forward. J Select to set random play-back. (→P.445) K Select to change the folder/album. L Displays cover art M Select to change the artist. USB video 1 Select "Browse". 2 Select "Videos". 3 Select the desired folder and file. 

USB 8:46 Source A Now Playing B Song List C Browse D Sound E File 1 I Full Screen 0:00:18 F G H -0:00:12

A Select to display the audio source selection screen. B Select to return to the top screen. C Select to display a song list screen. D Select to display the play mode selection screen. E Select to display the sound setting screen. ( P.434) F Select to change the file. Select and hold to fast rewind. G Select to play/pause. H Select to change the file. Select and hold to fast forward. I Select to display a full screen image. J Select to change the folder. Control panel 

HOME MENU AUDIO MAP TOMO I/O I/O A B ISSN CTACK PHONE APPS TUM RASS 70

A Press to change the file/track. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind. B Turn to change the file/track. Turn to move up/down the list. Also, the knob can be used to enter selections on the list screens by pressing it. ●While the vehicle is being driven, this function can only output sound. \- If tag information exists, the file/folder names will be changed to track/album names.

Repeating

The file/track or folder/album currently being listened to can be repeated.

1 Select

 ● Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: When random playback is off - file/track repeat → folder/album repeat → off ▶ When random playback is on - file/track repeat → off

Random order

Files/tracks or folders/albums can be automatically and randomly selected.

1 Select

 ● Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: - random (1 folder/album random) folder/album random (all folder/album random) off 

WARNING

\- Do not operate the player's controls or connect the USB memory while driving. 

NOTICE

\- Do not leave your portable player in the car. In particular, high temperatures inside the vehicle may damage the portable player. 

NOTICE

- Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable player while it is connected as this may damage the portable player or its terminal. - Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable player or its terminal.

iPod/iPhone (Apple CarPlay\*)

\*: This function is not made available in some countries or areas.

Overview

The iPod/iPhone operation screen can be reached by the following methods: →P.433 - Connecting an iPod/iPhone (→P.434) - When an Android Auto connection is established, this function will be unavailable.

Control screen

An Apple CarPlay connection is not established 

iPod 8:51 Source A < Genre: ****** Now Playing B M Song List C < ****** Browse D < ****** Sound E Song L of 2 F G H I J 02

A Select to display the audio source selection screen. B Select to return to the top screen. C Select to display a song list screen. D Select to display the play mode selection screen. E Select to display the sound setting screen. (→P.434) F Select to set repeat playback. (→P.448) G Select to change the track. Select and hold to fast rewind. H Select to play/pause. I Select to change the track. Select and hold to fast forward. J Select to set random play-back. (→P.448) K Displays cover art L Select to change the album. M Select to change the artist. N Select to change the playlist. An Apple CarPlay connection is established 

iPhone 2:48 Source A Genre: ********** Now Playing B ********** Sound C ********** Apple CarPlay D Song 1 of 5 E F G H I 0 11

A Select to display the audio source selection screen. B Select to return to the top screen. C Select to display the sound setting screen. (→P.434) D Select to display the Apple CarPlay screen. E Select to set repeat playback. (→P.448) F Select to change the track. Select and hold to fast rewind. G Select to play/pause. H Select to change the track. Select and hold to fast forward. I Select to set random play-back. (→P.448) J Displays cover art. Control panel 

HOME MEDIA ALIME MINT COMB VOLUME STOCKS EXTERIOR PHONE APPS TURER ALUMBER A B

A Press to change the track. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind. B Turn to move up/down the list. Also, the knob can be used to enter selections on the list screens by pressing it. ● Some functions may not be available depending on the type of model. - When an iPod/iPhone is connected using a genuine iPod/iPhone cable, the iPod/iPhone starts charging its battery. ●Depending on the iPod/iPhone, the video sound may not be able to be heard. ●Depending on the iPod/iPhone and the songs in the iPod/iPhone, a cover art may be displayed. This function can be changed to “On” or “Off”. (→P.456) It may take time to display the cover art, and the iPod/iPhone may not be operated while the cover art display is in process. - When an iPod/iPhone is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod/iPhone mode, the iPod/iPhone will resume playing from the same point it was last used. ● Depending on the iPod/iPhone that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. - If an iPhone is connected via Bluetooth® and USB at the same time, system operation may become unstable. For known phone compatibility information, refer to http://www.toyota.com/audio-multimedia. ●Tracks selected by operating a connected iPod/iPhone may not be recognized or displayed properly. ●The system may not function properly if a conversion adapter is used to connect a device.

Repeating

The track currently being listened to can be repeated.

1 Select

 ● Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: ▶ When shuffle is off (iPhone 5 or later) - track repeat → album repeat → off ▶ When shuffle is off (iPhone 4s or earlier) - track repeat → off When shuffle is on - track repeat → off

Random order

Tracks or albums can be automatically and randomly selected.

1 Select

 ● Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: - shuffle (1 album shuffle) → album shuffle (all album shuffle) → off 

WARNING

\- Do not operate the player's controls or connect the iPod/iPhone while driving. 

NOTICE

\- Do not leave your portable player in the car. In particular, high temperatures inside the vehicle may damage the portable player. \- Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable player while it is connected as this may damage the portable player or its terminal. \- Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable player or its terminal.

Android Auto\*

\*: This function is not made available in some countries or areas.

Overview

The Android Auto operation screen can be reached by the following methods: →P.433 - Connecting an Android device (→P.434) - When an Apple CarPlay connection is established, this function will be unavailable. Control screen 

Android Auto 10:27 Source A Now Playing B Sound C Android Auto D E F G

A Select to display the audio source selection screen. B Select to return to the top screen. C Select to display the sound setting screen. (→P.434) D Select to display the audio control screen of Android Auto. E Select to change the track. F Select to play/pause. G Select to change the track. H Displays cover art Control panel 

A B

A Press to change the track. B Turn to change the track. 

WARNING

\- Do not connect smartphone or operate the controls while driving. 

NOTICE

- Do not leave your smartphone in the vehicle. In particular, high temperatures inside the vehicle may damage the smartphone. - Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the smartphone while it is connected as this may damage the smartphone or its terminal. - Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the smartphone or its terminal.

Bluetooth® audio

The Bluetooth® audio system enables users to enjoy listening to music that is played on a portable player on the vehicle speakers via wireless communication. This audio/visual system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your device does not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will not function.

Overview

The Bluetooth ^® audio operation screen can be reached by the following methods: →P.433 - Connecting a Bluetooth audio device (→P.452) - Depending on the type of portable player connected, some functions may not be available and/or the screen may look differently than shown in this manual. - When an Apple Car-Play/Android Auto connection is established, Bluetooth® audio will be suspended and become unavailable.\* \*: This function is not made available in some countries or areas.

Control screen


Bluetooth Audio 8:58 Source A Now Playing B Song List C Browse D Connect E Sound F Track L G H I J K 19

A Select to display the audio source selection screen. B Select to return to the top screen. C Select to display a song list screen. D Select to display the play mode selection screen. E Select to display the portable device connection screen. (→P.452) F Select to display the sound setting screen. (→P.434) G Select to set repeat playback. (→P.451) H Select to change the track. Select and hold to fast rewind. I Select to play/pause. J Select to change the track. Select and hold to fast forward. K Select to set random play-back. (→P.451) L Select to change the album. M Displays cover art

Control panel


HOME MENU ALMED MAP POWER ACI UAC SENCK CTRADE PHONE APPS TUBE MNDL A B

A Press to change the track. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind. B Turn to move up/down the list. Also, the knob can be used to enter selections on the list screens by pressing it.

Repeating

The track or album currently being listened to can be repeated.

1 Select

 ● Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: ▶ When random playback is off - all repeat → track repeat → album repeat → off ▶ When random playback is on - all repeat → track repeat → off

Random order

Tracks or albums can be automatically and randomly selected.

1 Select

 ● Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: - random (1 album random) → - album random (all album random) → off \- Depending on the Bluetooth ^® device that is connected to the system, the music may start playing when selecting while it is paused. Conversely, the music may pause when selecting while it is playing. ●In the following conditions, the system may not function: - The Bluetooth ^® device is turned off. - The Bluetooth ^ device is not connected. - The Bluetooth ^® device has a low battery. - When using the Bluetooth ^ audio and Wi-Fi ^ Hotspot functions at the same time, the following problems may occur: - It may take longer than normal to connect to the Bluetooth® device. • The sound may cut out. - It may take time to connect the phone when Bluetooth® audio is being played. - For operating the portable player, see the instruction manual that comes with it. - If the Bluetooth ^® device is disconnected due to poor reception from the Bluetooth ^® network when the power switch is in ACC or ON, the system automatically reconnects the portable player. - If the Bluetooth ^® device is disconnected on purpose, such as it was turned off, this does not happen. Reconnect the portable player manually. - Bluetooth® device information is registered when the Bluetooth® device is connected to the Bluetooth® audio system. When selling or disposing of the vehicle, remove the Bluetooth® audio information from the system. (→P.429) - In some situations, sound output via the Bluetooth® audio system may be out of sync with the connected device or output intermittently. 

WARNING

- Do not operate the player's controls or connect to the Bluetooth® audio system while driving. - Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. Before using Bluetooth ^® devices, users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices. 

NOTICE

\- Do not leave your portable player in the vehicle. In particular, high temperatures inside the vehicle may damage the portable player.

Registering/Connecting a Bluetooth® device

To use the Bluetooth ^® audio system, it is necessary to register a Bluetooth ^® device with the system. ▶ Registering an additional device 1 Display the Bluetooth ^® audio control screen. (→P.450) 2 Select "Connect". 3 Select "Add Device". \- When another Bluetooth® device is connected, a confirmation screen will be displayed. To disconnect the Bluetooth® device, select "Yes". 4 Follow the steps in "Registering a Bluetooth® phone for the first time" from step 5. (→P.402) ▶ Selecting a registered device 1 Display the Bluetooth ^® audio control screen. (→P.450) 2 Select "Connect". 3 Select the desired device to be connected. 4 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the connection is complete. - If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again.

Steering switches

Steering switch operation

Some parts of the audio/visual system can be adjusted using the switches on the steering wheel. 

A B C MODE SET

A Volume control switch B "MODE" switch C switch

Volume control switch

- Press: Volume up/down - Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more): Volume up/down continuously

■“MODE” switch

▶ AM/FM/SXM ^1 - Press: Change audio modes - Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more): Mute/pause ^*2 (Press and hold again to resume.) ▶ USB ^*3, 4 , iPod/iPhone (Apple CarPlay) ^*4 , Bluetooth ^® audio ^*3, 4 , Android Auto ^*3 , Toyota Apps ^*3, 4 - Press: Change audio modes \- Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more): Pause (Press and hold again to resume the play mode.) \*1: This function is not made available in some countries or areas. \*2: If cached radio is enabled, pressing and holding the "MODE" switch pauses the broadcast. (Press and hold again to play back the cached radio program.) \*3: When an Apple CarPlay connection is established, this function will be unavailable. \*4: When an Android Auto connection is established, this function will be unavailable.

switch

▶ AM/FM - Press: Preset channel up/down - Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more): Seek up/down - Press and hold (1.5 sec. or more): Seek up/down continuously while the switch is being pressed - Press and hold (1.5 sec. or more): Fast channel up/down SXM ^1 - Press: Preset channel up/down - Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more): Seek for stations in the relevant program type/channel category - Press and hold (1.5 sec. or more): Fast channel up/down ▶ USB ^2,3 , iPod/iPhone (Apple CarPlay) ^*3 , Bluetooth ^® audio ^*2,3 - Press: Track/file up/down - Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more): Fast forward/rewind ▶ Android Auto ^2 - Press: Track up/down \*1: This function is not made available in some countries or areas. \*2: When an Apple CarPlay connection is established, this function will be unavailable. \*3: When an Android Auto connection is established, this function will be unavailable.

Setup

Detailed audio settings can be programmed.

Displaying the audio set- tings screen

1 Press the "MENU" button. 

MENU

2 Select "Setup". 3 Select "Audio". 4 Select the desired items to be set.

Audio settings screen


Setup 9:03 General Bluetooth Audio Phone Voice Common Radio A B

A Select to set the common settings. (→P.456) B Select to set the radio settings. (→P.456)

Common settings

1 Display the audio settings screen. $$ \rightarrow \mathrm{P}. 4 5 6 $$ 2 Select "Common". 3 Select the desired items to be set. 

Setup 9:05 General Bluetooth Audio Phone Voice Common Display Cover Art On Priority Display of Gracenote Off Screen Format Normal Display A B C D

A Select to set the cover art display on/off. B Select to prioritize the display of information from the Gracenote database. C Select to change the screen size.\* (→P.435) D Select to display the image quality adjustment screen.\* (→P.436) \*: Only in USB video mode

Radio settings

1 Display the audio settings screen $$ \rightarrow \mathrm{P}. 4 5 6 $$ 2 Select "Radio". 3 Select the desired number of preset radio stations displayed on the screen.

Manage smart favorites

1 Select "Manage Smart Favorites". 2 Select the desired channel to be set. ●Displays the registered preset channels. ●Up to 20 channels can be registered.

Setting the number of radio presets

1 Select "Number of Radio Presets". 2 Select the button with the desired number to be displayed.

Operating information

●The use of a cellular phone inside or near the vehicle may cause a noise from the speakers of the audio/visual system which you are listening to. However, this does not indicate a malfunction. 

NOTICE

●To avoid damage to the audio/visual system, be careful not to spill beverages over the audio/visual system.

Radio

Usually, a problem with radio reception does not mean there is a problem with the radio — it is just the normal result of conditions outside the vehicle. For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere with FM reception. Power lines or phone wires can interfere with AM signals. And of course, radio signals have a limited range. The farther the vehicle is from a station, the weaker its signal will be. In addition, reception conditions change constantly as the vehicle moves. Here are some common reception problems that may not indicate a problem with the radio as described.

FM

Fading and drifting stations: Generally, the effective range of FM is about 25 miles (40 km). Once outside this range, you may notice fading and drifting, which increase with the distance from the radio transmitter. They are often accompanied by distortion. Multi-path: FM signals are reflective, making it possible for 2 signals to reach the vehicle's antenna at the same time. If this happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a momentary flutter or loss of reception. Static and fluttering: These occur when signals are blocked by buildings, trees or other large objects. Increasing the bass level may reduce static and fluttering. Station swapping: If the FM signal being listened to is interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station nearby on the FM band, the radio may tune in the second station until the original signal can be picked up again.

AM

Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected by the upper atmosphere — especially at night. These reflected signals can interfere with those received directly from the radio station, causing the radio station to sound alternately strong and weak. Station interference: When a reflected signal and a signal received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same frequency, they can interfere with each other, making it difficult to hear the broadcast. Static: AM is easily affected by external sources of electrical noise, such as high tension power lines, lightening or electrical motors. This results in static.

SiriusXM \*

- Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier, especially metal objects, may adversely affect the reception of SiriusXM Satellite Radio. - Alternation or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user's right to operate the equipment. \*: This function is not made available in some countries or areas.

iPod/iPhone

■Certification

Made for  iPhone | iPod Conçu pour  iPhone | iPod \- Use of the Made for Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to connect specifically to the Apple product(s) identified in the badge, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with an Apple product may affect wireless performance. \- iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

■Compatible models

The following iPod touch ^® and iPhone ^® devices can be used with this system.

Made for

- iPhone X - iPhone 8 - iPhone 8 Plus - iPhone 7 - iPhone 7 Plus - iPhone SE - iPhone 6s - iPhone 6s Plus - iPhone 6 - iPhone 6 Plus - iPhone 5s - iPhone 5c - iPhone 5 - iPod touch (6th generation) - iPod touch (5th generation) ● This system only supports audio playback. ● Depending on difference between models or software versions etc., some models might be incompatible with this system.

High-resolution sound source

This device supports high-resolution sound sources. The definition of high-resolution is based on the standards of groups such as the CTA (Consumer Technology Association). Supported formats and playable media are as follows.

■Supported formats

WAV, FLAC, ALAC, OGG Vor-bis

■Playable media

USB

File information

Compatible USB devices

USB communication formats	USB 2.0 HS (480 Mbps)
File formats FAT	16/32
Correspondence class	Mass storage class

Compatible audio format

Compatible compressed files

Item USB
Compatible file format	MP3/WMA/AAC
	WAV(LPCM)/FL AC/ALAC/OGG Vorbis
Compatible file format (video)*	MP4/AVI/WMV
Folders in the device	Maximum 3000
Files in the device	Maximum 9999
Files per folder	Maximum 255

\*: USB video only Corresponding sampling frequency

File type Frequency (kHz)
MP3 files: MPEG 1 LAYER 3	32/44.1/48
MP3 files: MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3	16/22.05/24
WMA files: Ver. 7, 8, 9^*1 (9.1/9.2)	32/44.1/48
AAC files: MPEG4/AAC-LC	11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48
WAV (LPCM) files ^*2	8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48/88.2/96/176.4/192
FLAC ^*2	8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48/88.2/96/176.4/192
ALAC ^*2	8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48/64/88.2/96
OGG Vorbis ^*2	8/11.025/16/22.05/32/44.1/48

\*1: Only compatible with Windows Media Audio Standard \*2:Sound source of 48kHz or more is down-converted to 48kHz/24bit. Corresponding bit rates ^*1

File type Bit rate (kbps)
MP3 files: MPEG 1 LAYER 3	32 - 320
MP3 files: MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3	8 - 160
WMA files: Ver. 7, 8	CBR 48 - 192
WMA files: Ver. 9^*2 (9.1/9.2)	CBR 48 - 320
AAC files: MPEG4/AAC-LC	8 - 320
OGG Vorbis 32-500

\*1:Variable Bit Rate (VBR) compatible \*2: Only compatible with Windows Media Audio Standard

File type	Quantization bit rate (bit)
WAV (LPCM) files	16/24
FLAC
ALAC

Compatible channel modes

File type Channel mode
MP3 files	Stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
WMA files 2ch
AAC files	1ch, 2ch (Dual channel is not supported)
WAV (LPCM)/FLAC/ALAC/OGG Vorbis	2ch

● MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3), WMA (Windows Media Audio) and AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) are audio compression standards. - This system can play MP3/WMA/AAC files on USB memory. ● MP4, WMV and AVI files can use the following resolutions: 128x96, 160x120, 176x144 (QCIF), 320x240 (QVGA), 352x240 (SIF), 352x288 (CIF), 640x480 (VGA), 720x480 (NTSC), 720x576 (PAL) - When naming an MP3/WMA/AAC file, add an appropriate file extension (.mp3/.wma/.m4a). - This system plays back files with .mp3/.wma/.m4a file extensions as MP3/WMA/AAC files respectively. To prevent noise and playback errors, use the appropriate file extension. ● MP3 files are compatible with the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and Ver. 2.3 formats. This system cannot display album title, track title and artist name in other formats. - WMA/AAC files can contain a WMA/AAC tag that is used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA/AAC tags carry information such as track title and artist name. - The emphasis function is available only when playing MP3 files. ● This system can play back AAC files encoded by iTunes. ● The sound quality of MP3/WMA files generally improves with higher bit rates. - m3u playlists are not compatible with the audio player. ● MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO formats are not compatible with the audio player. ● The player is compatible with VBR (Variable Bit Rate). - When playing back files recorded as VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time will not be correctly displayed if the fast forward or reverse operations are used. - It is not possible to check folders that do not include MP3/WMA/AAC files. - MP3/WMA/AAC files in folders up to 8 levels deep can be played. However, the start of playback may be delayed when using USB memory containing numerous levels of folders. For this reason, we recommend creating USB memory with no more than 2 levels of folders. 

graph TD
    A[" "] --> B["001.mp3"]
    A --> C["002.wma"]
    A --> D["1"]
    D --> E["003.mp3"]
    D --> F["2"]
    F --> G["004.mp3"]
    F --> H["005.wma"]
    F --> I["3"]
    I --> J["006.m4a"]

● The play order of the USB memory with the structure shown above is as follows: 

graph TD
    A["001.mp3"] --> B["002.wma ..."]
    B --> C["006.m4a"]

\- The order changes depending on the personal computer and MP3/WMA/AAC encoding software you use. Compatible video format

Format Codec
MPEG-4	Video codec:H.264/MPEG-4 AVCMPEG4Audio codec:AACMP3Correspondingscreen size:MAX 1920 × 1080Correspondingframe rate:MAX 60i/30p
AVI Container	Video codec:H.264/MPEG-4 AVCMPEG4WMV9WMV9 Advanced profileAudio codec:AACMP3WMA9.2 (7, 8, 9.1, 9.2)Corresponding screen size:MAX 1920 × 1080Corresponding frame rate:MAX 60i/30p
Windows Media Video	Video codec:WMV9WMV9 Advanced profileAudio codec:WMA9.2 (7, 8, 9.1, 9.2)Corresponding screen size:MAX 1920 × 1080Corresponding frame rate:MAX 60i/30p

Terms

ID3 tag

● This is a method of embed- ding track-related information in an MP3 file. This embedded information can include the track number, track title, the artist's name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments, cover art and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 tag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted to a number of characters, the information can be viewed when the track is played back.

WMA tag

\- WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA tags carry information such as track title and artist name.

MP3

\- MP3 is an audio compression standard determined by a working group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Standard Organization). MP3 compresses audio data to about 1/10 the size of that on conventional discs.

WMA

\- WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audio compression format developed by Microsoft®. It compresses files into a size smaller than that of MP3 files. The decoding formats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8 and 9. \- Windows Media is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing, Inc.

AAC

\- AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG2 and MPEG4.

Error messages

USB

Message Explanation
“USB Error”	This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection.
“No music files found.”	This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are included in the USB memory.
“No video files found.”	This indicates that no video files are included in the USB memory.

iPod

Message Explanation
“iPod Error”	This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.
“No music files found.”	This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.
“Please check the iPod firmware version.”	This indicates that the software version is not compatible. Perform the iPod firmware updates and try again.
“Unable to authorize the iPod.”	This indicates that it failed to authorize the iPod.Please check your iPod.

Bluetooth ^® audio

Message Explanation
“Music tracks not supported.Please check your portable player.”	This indicates a problem in the Bluetooth® device.

\- If the malfunction is not rectified, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Certification

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam, Saipan, American Samoa and Puerto Rico FCC ID: AJDK101, AJDK102 [For 2.4 GHz Radio Transmitters] This equipment complies with FCC/ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more away from person's body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Innovation, Science, and Economic Development Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. Information to User - Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user's right to operate the equipment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

IC: 775E-K101, 775E-K102

[For 2.4 GHz Radio Transmitters]

This equipment complies with FCC/ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines and RSS-102 of the ISED radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more away from person's body.

[Pour 2,4 GHz émetteurs radio]

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d'exposition et d'exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l'ISDE. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le radiateur et le corps humain. This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Innovation, Science, and Economic Development Canada licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR d'Innovation, Sciences et Développement économique Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage; (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Gracenote

Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype, "Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote MusicID are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.  gracenote.

Gracenote® End User License Agreement

This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California ("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote (the "Gracenote Software") enables this application to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information ("Gracenote Data") from online servers or embedded databases (collectively, "Gracenote Servers") and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions of this application or device. You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN. You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name. The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service. The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you "AS IS." Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time. GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES. copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote

For U.S. owners

Total Traffic and Weather Network, a division of TTWN Media Networks, LLC ("TTWN"), owns or holds the rights to the traffic, news, sports, weather, stocks and other data (the "TTWN Data") and network through which it is delivered, together the "TTN Service". Use of the TTN Service is subject to the terms of these Device End User Terms. THE TTWN SERVICE IS INFORMATIONAL ONLY. YOUR USE OF TTWN SERVICE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK. TTWN DATA IS PROVIDED "AS IS", "WHERE IS", AND "WHERE AVAILABLE". TTWN AND ITS SUPPLIERS AND LICENSORS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE TTWN SERVICE (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THAT THE TTWN DATA WILL BE ERROR-FREE, THAT THE TTWN SERVICE WILL OPERATE WITHOUT INTERRUPTION OR THAT THE TTWN DATA WILL BE ACCURATE), EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR THOSE ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE. TTWN AND ITS SUPPLIERS AND LICENSORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU UNDER ANY LEGAL THEORY, INCLUDING CONTRACT, TORT, NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY, FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, CONSEQUENTIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, GOODWILL, USE, DATA OR OTHER INTANGIBLE LOSSES (EVEN IF TTWN, ITS SUPPLIERS OR LICENSORS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES), RESULTING FROM OR ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF, OR YOUR INABILITY TO USE, THE TTWN SERVICE, THIS AGREEMENT, OR ANY OTHER MATTER RELATING TO THE TTWN SERVICE. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF CERTAIN WARRANTIES OR THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. ACOORDINGLY, SOME OF THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

Voice command sys- tem

The voice command sys- tem enables the radio, phone dialing, etc. to be operated using voice com- mands. Refer to the com- mand list for samples of voice commands. (→P.473)

Using the voice command system

Steering switch


Diagram of car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and control panel with labeled component A

A Talk switch

▶ Voice command system - Press the talk switch to start the voice command system. To cancel voice command, press and hold the talk switch. When an Apple Car-Play/Android Auto connection is established - Press and hold the talk switch to start Siri/Google Assistant. To cancel Siri/Google Assistant, press the talk switch. - Press the talk switch to start the voice command system.

■Microphone


Diagram showing airflow or ventilation system inside a vehicle, with labeled components and directional arrows

\- It is unnecessary to speak directly into the microphone when giving a command. ● Voice commands may not be recognized if: - Spoken too quickly. - Spoken at a low or high volume. • The roof or windows are open. • Passengers are talking while voice commands are spoken. - The fan speed of the air conditioning system is set at high. • The air conditioning vents are turned towards the microphone. ● In the following conditions, the system may not recognize the command properly and using voice commands may not be possible: \- The command is incorrect or unclear. Note that certain words, accents or speech patterns may be difficult for the system to recognize. \- There is excessive background noise, such as wind noise. \- Normally, it is necessary to wait for a beep before saying a command. To enable the ability to talk over prompts and say commands before the beep, enable the voice prompt interrupt function. (→P.430) ● This system may not operate immediately after the power switch is in ACC or ON. 

NOTICE

\- Do not touch and put a sharp object to the microphone. It may cause failure.

Voice command system operation

The voice command system is operated by saying commands which correspond to a supported function. To display examples of commands for supported functions, select a function button on the screen after starting the voice command system.

Operation from the main menu

1 Press the talk switch. 

Diagram showing car interior control panel with directional indicator and highlighted section, including a pink arrow pointing to the left side.

● Voice guidance for the voice command system can be skipped by pressing the talk switch. 2 If "Getting Started with Voice" screen is displayed, select "OK" or press the talk switch. (→P.472) 3 After hearing a beep, say a supported command. - To display sample commands of the desired function, say the desired function or select the desired function button. To display more commands, select "More Commands". - Selecting "Help" or saying "Help" prompts the voice command system to offer examples of commands and operation methods. - Registered POIs, registered names in the contacts list etc., can be said in the place of the “<>" next to the commands. (→P.473) For example: Say "Find a restaurant", "Call John Smith" etc. \- If a desired outcome is not shown, or if no selections are available, perform one of the following to return to the previous screen: - Say "Go back". - Select - To cancel voice recognition, select × say "Cancel", or press and hold the talk switch. - To perform the voice command operation again, select "Start Over" or say "Start over". - To suspend voice command operation, select "Pause" or say "Pause". To resume the voice command operation, select "Resume" or press the talk switch. - If the system does not respond or the confirmation screen does not disappear, press the talk switch and try again. - If a voice command cannot be recognized 3 consecutive times, voice recognition will be canceled. ● Voice recognition prompts can be changed on the voice settings screen. (→P.430) This function can be used to cancel voice guidance by turning the voice prompts off. When you press the talk switch while using this setting, a beep sounds, and then you can immediately say a command. Some voice guidance can be canceled by setting voice prompts to off. Use this setting when it is desirable to say a command immediately after pressing the talk switch and hearing a beep.

Increasing the voice recognition performance

To increase voice recognition performance, use the “Tutorials” and “Voice Training” functions on the “Getting Started with Voice” screen. These functions are only available when the vehicle is not moving. The “Tutorials” and “Voice Training” functions can also be started on the voice settings screen. (→P.430) 1 Press the talk switch. 2 Select the desired item to be set. 

Getting Started with Voice Tutorials A You can train the system to better recognize your voice by completing the voice training. You can learn more about what the system can do by watching the tutorial videos. To continue to voice recognition press "OK" or the talk switch on your steering wheel. Voice Training B C D Do Not Tell Me Again OK

A Select to display the voice command tutorials. B Select to train the voice command system. The user will be asked to say 10 sample phrases. This will help the voice command system adapt to the user's accent. C Select to prevent the screen from being displayed again. D Select to proceed to the voice command screen.

Command list

Command list overview

Recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown below. - Frequently used commands are listed in the following tables. - For devices that are not installed to the vehicle, commands relating to that device may not be displayed on the screen. Also, depending on other conditions, such as compatibility, some commands may not be displayed on the screen. \- The functions available may vary according to the system installed. ● Voice recognition language can be changed. (→P.426) \- When an Apple Car-Play/Android Auto connection is established, some commands will become unavailable.

Command list

Common

Command Action
“Help”	Displays examples of some of the available commands
“Go back”	Returns to the previous screen
“Cancel”	Cancels the voice command system
“Start over”	Returns to top menu screen
“Pause”	Temporarily pauses a voice session until it is resumed by pressing the talk switch again.

Top menu

Command Action
“Show command examples for”	Displays the command list of the selected menu
“More commands”	Displays more commonly used commands
“Voice settings”	Displays Voice Setting screen
“Train my voice”	Displays Train Voice Recognition screen*

\*: Vehicle must be parked Phone

Command Action
“Call”*	Places a call to the specified contact from the phone book
“Call”*	Places a call to the specified phone type of the contact from the phone book
“Dial”	Places a call to the specified phone number
“Redial”	Places a call to the phone number of the latest outgoing call
“Call back”	Places a call to the phone number of latest incoming call
“Show recent calls”	Displays the call history screen
“Send a message to”	Sends a text message to specified contact from the phone book

\*: If the system does not recognize the name of a contact, create a voice tag. (→P.497) The name of a contact can also be recognized by adding a voice tag. ■While in a phone call

Command Action
“Send”	Sends DTMF tones has speci-fied
“Mute”	Mutes the micro-phone (far side cannot hear the conversation)
“Unmute”	Unmutes the microphone

■While incoming message notification is displayed\*

Command Action
“Read message”	Reads the incoming mes-sage over the vehicle speakers
“Ignore”	Ignores the incoming mes-sage notification
“Reply”	Initiates sending a reply to the incoming mes-sage
“Call”	Places a call to the phone num-ber of incoming message

\*: Full screen message notification must be turned on within the phone settings (→P.495) Radio

Command Action
“Tune toAM”	Changes the radio to the specified AM frequency
“Tune toFM”	Changes the radio to the specified FM frequency
“Play astation”	Changes the radio to an FM station of the specified genre*1
“Tune to preset<1-36>”	Changes the radio to the specified preset radio station
“Tune to asatellite station”	Changes the radio to a satellite radio channel of the specified genre*2
“Tune tosatal-lite channel name>”	Changes the radio to the satellite radio channel with the specified name*2
“Tune to chan-nelon XM”	Changes the radio to a satellite radio channel of the specified number*2

^*1 : A station list must be built first using the radio screen ( P.437) \*2: Requires a satellite radio subscription Audio \*

Command Action
“Play Playlist”	Plays tracks from the selected playlist
“Play Artist”	Plays tracks from the selected artist
“Play Song”	Plays the selected track
“Play Album”	Plays tracks from the selected album
“Play Genre”	Plays tracks from the selected genre
“Play Composer”	Plays tracks from the selected composer
“Play Podcast”	Plays tracks from the selected podcast
“Play Audiobook”	Plays tracks from the selected audio-book
“Audio On”	Turns the audio/visual system on
“Audio Off”	Turns the audio/visual system off
“Change the audio source to”	Sets the source to the specified audio mode

\* : The audio device must be connected via a USB cable to use the functionality in this section

Toyota Apps \*1

Command Action
“Launch”*2	Activates the Toyota Apps

\*1: This function is not made available in some countries or areas. \*2: When an application is opened and is in full screen mode, pressing the talk switch will start the voice command system and commands for the currently displayed application will be available ● Commands relating to operation of the audio/visual system can only be performed when the audio/visual system is turned on.

Mobile Assistant

\*: This function is not made available in some countries or areas. The Mobile Assistant function is a voice input assist function. Mobile Assist supports the Siri Eyes Free Mode and Google App. (Google App can be used only with the corresponding device.) Instructions can be spoken into the vehicle microphone as if speaking a command to the phone. The content of the request is then interpreted by the phone and the result is output from the vehicle speakers. To operate the Mobile Assistant, a compatible device must be registered and connected to this system via Bluetooth®. (→P.452) When an Apple CarPlay connection is established, this function will be unavailable.

Connectable devices and available functions

Mobile Assist supports the Siri Eyes Free Mode and Google App. The available features and functions may vary based on the iOS/Android version installed on the connected device.

Mobile Assistant operation

1 Press and hold the phone switch on the steering wheel until Mobile Assistant screen is displayed. 

Diagram of car interior showing steering wheel and dashboard with directional control knob, highlighting a pink arrow pointing to the steering wheel.

2 The Mobile Assistant can be used only when the following screen is displayed. 

Mobile Assistant 4:50 Cancel

\- To cancel the Mobile Assistant, select "Cancel" or press and hold the talk switch on the steering wheel. \- To restart the Mobile Assistant for additional commands, press the talk switch on the steering wheel. \- Mobile Assistant can only be restarted after the system responds to a voice command. • After some phone and music commands, the Mobile Assistant feature will automatically end to complete the requested action. \- The volume of the Mobile Assistant can be adjusted using the "POWER VOLUME" knob or steering wheel volume control switches. The Mobile Assistant and phone call volumes are synchronized. ●While a phone call is active, the Mobile Assistant cannot be used. - If using the navigation feature of the cellular phone, ensure the active audio source is Bluetooth® audio or iPod in order to hear turn by turn direction prompts. ●Wait for the listening beeps before using the Mobile Assistant. ●The Mobile Assistant may not recognize commands in the following situations: - Spoken too quickly. - Spoken at a low or high volume. - The roof or windows are open. • Passengers are talking while the Mobile Assistant is being used. - The fan speed of the air conditioning system is set at high. - The air conditioning vents are turned toward the microphone.

Quick reference

Phone screen operation

The phone screen can be reached by the following methods: From the "PHONE" button 1 Press the "PHONE" button. From the "MENU" button 1 Press the "MENU" button, then select "Phone". 

8:14 History Favorites Contacts Keypad Select Device Message October 2014 October 2014:00 PM October 2014:00 PM October 2014:00 PM October 2014:00 AM October 2014:00 AM

Bluetooth® hands-free system operation

The following functions can be used on phone operation: - Registering/connecting a Bluetooth® device (→P.402) - Placing a call using the Bluetooth® hands-free system (→P.484) - Receiving a call using the Bluetooth® hands-free system (→P.487) - Talking on the Bluetooth® hands-free system (→P.488)

Message function

The following function can be used on message function: \- Using the Bluetooth® phone message function (→P.490)

Setting up a phone

The following functions can be made in the system: - Phone settings (→P.495) - Bluetooth® settings (→P.406)

Some basics

The hands-free system enables calls to be made and received without having to take your hands off the steering wheel. This system supports Bluetooth ^® . Bluetooth ^® is a wireless data system that enables cellular phones to be used without being connected by a cable or placed in a cradle. The operating procedure of the phone is explained here. When an Apple CarPlay connection is established, phone functions will be performed by Apple CarPlay instead of the hands-free system. - This system is not guaranteed to operate with all Bluetooth ^ devices. - If your cellular phone does not support Bluetooth ^ , this system cannot function. ● In the following conditions, the system may not function: • The cellular phone is turned off. - The current position is outside the communication area. - The cellular phone is not connected. - The cellular phone has a low battery. - Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone, some function is not available. \- When using the hands-free system or Bluetooth® audio and Wi-Fi® Hotspot functions at the same time, the following problems may occur: - The Bluetooth ^® connection may be cut. - Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth® audio playback. - A noise may be heard during phone calls. \- Bluetooth ^ uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band. If both a Wi-Fi ^ connection and Bluetooth ^ connection are being used simultaneously, each connection may be affected. \- If a Bluetooth ^® device is attempting to connect to the vehicle while another device is connected as a Bluetooth ^® audio device or connected using the hands-free system or Wi-Fi ^® Hotspot function, the communication speed may decrease or malfunctions may occur, such as image distortion or audio skipping. If a Bluetooth ^® device is connected to the system, the interference it may cause will be reduced. When carrying a device with its Bluetooth ^® connection enabled, make sure to register it to the system and connect it or disable its Bluetooth ^® function. \- When a device is connected via Bluetooth ^ , the Bluetooth ^ icon on the status bar will be displayed in blue. (→P.390) 

WARNING

●While driving, do not operate a cellular phone. 

WARNING

- Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices. 

NOTICE

\- Do not leave your cellular phone in the vehicle. The temperature inside may rise to a level that could damage the phone.

Registering/Connecting a Bluetooth® phone

To use the hands-free system for cellular phones, it is necessary to register a cellular phone with the system. ( P.402)

■Connecting a Bluetooth ^® device

▶ Registering an additional device 1 Display the phone top screen. (→P.479) 2 Select "Select Device". 3 Select "Add Device". \- When another Bluetooth® device is connected, a confirmation screen will be displayed. To disconnect the Bluetooth® device, select "Yes". 4 Follow the steps in "Registering a Bluetooth® phone for the first time" from step 5. (→P.402) ▶ Selecting a registered device 1 Display the phone top screen. (→P.479) 2 Select "Select Device". 3 Select the desired device to be connected. 4 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the connection is complete. - If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again.

Bluetooth ^® phone condition display

The condition of the Bluetooth ^® phone appears on the upper right side of the screen. (→P.390)

Using the phone switch/microphone

■Steering switch

By pressing the phone switch, a call can be received or ended without taking your hands off the steering wheel. 

Diagram of car dashboard control panel with labeled buttons A and B, showing steering wheel and dashboard controls

A Phone switch

- If the switch is pressed during a call, the call will end. - If the switch is pressed when an incoming call is received, the call will be answered. - If the switch is pressed during a call when a separate incoming call is waiting, the waiting call will be answered. - If the switch is pressed when an Apple CarPlay/Android Auto connection is established, the Apple CarPlay/Android Auto phone application will be displayed on the system screen.

B Volume control switch

- Press the “+” side to increase the volume. - Press the “-” side to decrease the volume.

■Microphone

The microphone is used when talking on the phone. 

Diagram showing a car interior with a device and airflow direction, no text or symbols present

\- The other party's voice will be heard from the front speakers. The audio/visual system will be muted during phone calls or when hands-free voice commands are used. ●Talk alternately with the other party on the phone. If both parties speak at the same time, the other party may not hear what has been said. (This is not a malfunction.) \- Keep call volume down. Otherwise, the other party's voice may be audible outside the vehicle and voice echo may increase. When talking on the phone, speak clearly towards the microphone. ●The other party may not hear you clearly when: - Driving on an unpaved road. (Making excessive traffic noise.) - Driving at high speeds. • The roof or windows are open. • The air conditioning vents are pointed towards the microphone. • The sound of the air conditioning fan is loud. • There is a negative effect on sound quality due to the phone and/or network being used. 

NOTICE

\- Do not touch and put a sharp object to the microphone. It may cause failure.

Voice command system

Press this switch to operate the voice command system. 

Diagram of car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and control panel with directional arrow indicator

\- The voice command system and its list of commands can be operated. (→P.470)

About the contacts in the contact list

\- The following data is stored for every registered phone. When another phone is connected, the following registered data cannot be read: - Contact data - Call history data - Favorites data - Image data - All phone settings - Message settings \- When a phone's registration is deleted, the above-mentioned data is also deleted.

When selling or disposing of the vehicle

A lot of personal data is registered when the hands-free system is used. When selling or disposing of the vehicle, initialize the data. ( P.429) ● The following data in the system can be initialized: - Contact data - Call history data - Favorites data - Image data - All phone settings - Message settings \- Once initialized, the data and settings will be erased. Pay additional attention when initializing the data.

Placing a call using the Bluetooth® hands-free system

After a Bluetooth ^® phone has been registered, a call can be made using the hands-free system. There are several methods by which a call can be made, as described below.

Calling methods on the Bluetooth® phone

1 Display the phone top screen. (→P.479) 2 Select the desired method to call from. 

8:14 History Favorites Contacts Keypad Select Device Message October 2023 October 2023 October 2023 October 2023 October 2023 October 2023 October 2023 October 2023 October 2023 October 2023 October 2023 October 2023 October 2023 October 2023 October 2023 September 2023 September 2023 September 2023 September 2023 September 2023 September 2023 September 2023 September 2023 September 2023 September 2023 September 2023 September 2023 September 2023 September 2023 September 1999 September 1999 September 1999 September 1999 September 1999 September 1999 September 1999 September 1999 September 1999 September 1999 September 1999 September 1999 September 1999 September 1999 September 1999 October 1999 October 1999 October 1999 October 1999 October 1999 October 1999 October 1999 October 1999 October 1999 October 1999 October 1999 October 1999 October 1999 October 1999 October 2000 October 2000 October 2000 October 2000 October 2000 October 2000 October 2000 October 2000 October 2000 October 2000 October 2000 October 2000 October 2000 October 2000 October 2000 November 1999 November 1999 November 1999 November 1999 November 1999 November 1999 November 1999 November 1999 November 1999 November 1999 November 1999 November 1999 November 1999 November 1999 November 1999 December 1998 December 1998 December 1998 December 1998 December 1998 December 1998 December 1998 December 1998 December 1998 December 1998 December 1998 December 1998 December 1998 December 1998 December 1998 November 1988 November 1988 November 1988 November 1988 November 1988 November 1988 November 1988 November 1988 November 1988

■Calling methods from phone screen

- By call history (→P.484) ● By favorites ( P.485) - By contacts (→P.485) - By keypad (→P.486) - By message (→P.493)

Also the following lists are available from each function's screen

- By voice command system (→P.471) ● By home screen ( P.487)

By call history

Up to 30 of the latest call history items (missed, incoming and outgoing) can be selected. 1 Display the phone top screen. (→P.479) 2 Select "History" and select the desired contact. - If the contact which is not registered on the contact list is selected, the name is displayed as “Unknown Contact”. In this case, select the number to make a call. 3 Check that the dialing screen is displayed. ●The icons of call type are displayed.  : Missed call  : Incoming call  : Outgoing call - When making a call to the same number continuously, only the most recent call is listed in call history. - When a phone number registered in the contact list is received, the name is displayed. ●Number-withheld calls are also memorized in the system. - International phone calls may not be made depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone you have. - The list should group together consecutive entries with the same phone number and same call type. For example, two calls from John's mobile would be displayed as follows: John (2)

By favorites list

Calls can be made using registered contacts which can be selected from a contact list. (→P.485) 1 Display the phone top screen. (→P.479) 2 Select "Favorites" and select the desired contact. 3 Select the desired number. 4 Check that the dialing screen is displayed.

By contacts list

Calls can be made by using contact data which is transferred from a registered cellular phone. (→P.497) Up to 5000 contacts (maximum of 4 phone numbers, e-mail addresses and addresses per contact) can be registered in the contact list. 1 Display the phone top screen. (→P.479) 2 Select "Contacts" and select the desired contact. 3 Select the desired number. 

Contact Details 9:10 ********** Mobile ********** Mobile2 ********** Add Favorite E-mail Addresses Addresses

"Add Favorite"/"Remove Favorite": Select to register/remove the contact in the favorites list. (→P.502) "E-mail Addresses": Select to display all registered e-mail addresses for the contact. "Addresses": Select to display all registered addresses for the contact. 4 Check that the dialing screen is displayed.

When the contact list is empty

■For PBAP compatible

Bluetooth ^® phones when "Automatic Transfer" is set to on (→P.497) \- Contacts are transferred automatically. ■For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones when "Automatic Transfer" is set to off (→P.497) 1 Select the desired item. 

The device ********* supports automatic contact transfer, but this feature is not enabled. Would you like to transfer your contacts? Always Once No A B C

A Select to always transfer all the contacts from a connected cellular phone automatically. B Select to transfer all the contacts from a connected cellular phone only once. C Select to cancel transferring. 2 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete. ■For PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth® phones 1 Select the desired item. 

Would you like to transfer contacts or manually add contacts? Transfer Add Cancel A B C

A Select to transfer the con- tacts from the connected cellular phone. Transfer the contact data to the system using a Bluetooth® phone. B Select to add a new contact manually. Follow the steps in "Register- ing a new contact to the con- tacts list" from step 2. (→P.500) C Select to cancel transferring. \- If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor OPP compatible, the contacts cannot be transferred using Bluetooth®. But the contacts can be transferred from USB device. (→P.500) \- Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone: - It may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone when transferring contact data. - The registered image in the contact list may not transfer depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone connected.

By keypad

1 Display the phone top screen. (→P.479) 2 Select "Keypad" and enter the phone number. 3 Select or press the switch on the steering wheel. 4 Check that the dialing screen is displayed. ●Depending on the type of Bluetooth ^® phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone.

By home screen

1 Display the home screen. (→P.396) 2 Select the desired contact. 3 Check that the dialing screen is displayed.

■Registering a new contact

1 Select and hold the screen button to add a contact. 2 Select the desired contact. 3 Select the desired number. - If there is no contact in the contacts list, the contacts cannot be registered at the home screen. ●The contact cannot be registered at the home screen while driving.

Receiving a call using the Bluetooth® hands-free system

When a call is received, the following screen is displayed with a sound.

Incoming calls

1 Select "Answer" or press the switch on the steering wheel to talk on the phone. 

8:28 Incoming call from: ********** □ Mobile ********** Answer Decline

"Decline": Select to refuse to receive the call. To adjust the volume of a received call: Turn the "POWER VOLUME" knob, or use the volume control switch on the steering wheel. ●The contact image picture can be displayed only when the vehicle is not moving. - During international phone calls, the other party's name or number may not be displayed correctly depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone you have. ●The incoming call display mode can be set. (→P.496) ●The ringtone that has been set in the sound settings screen can be heard when there is an incoming call. Depending on the type of Bluetooth ^® phone, both the system and Bluetooth ^® phone may ring simultaneously when there is an incoming call. (→P.495)

Talking on the Bluetooth® hands-free system

While talking on the phone, the following screen is displayed. The operations outlined below can be performed on this screen.

Call screen operation


0 - 9 A lking... 00:00:03 Release Tones B Transmit Volume C Mobile w0123p#1* Mute D Handset Mode E F Hold G End

A Select to display the keypad to send tones. (→P.489) B Select to send tones. This button only appears when a number that contains a (w) is dialed in hands-free mode. (→P.489) C Select to adjust your voice volume that the other party hears from their speaker. (→P.489) D Select to mute your voice to the other party. E Select to change handset modes between hands-free and cellular phone. F Select to put a call on hold. To cancel this function, select "Activate". G Select to hang up the phone. ●Changing from hands-free call to cellular phone call is not possible while driving. - Only when the vehicle is not moving, the contact image can be displayed. - When cellular phone call is changed to hands-free call, the hands-free screen will be displayed and its functions can be operated on the screen. ●Changing between cellular phone call and hands-free call can be performed by operating the cellular phone directly. ●Transferring methods and operations will be different depending on the type of cellular phone you have. - For the operation of the cellular phone, see the manual that comes with it.

Sending tones

By keypad

This operation cannot be performed while driving. 1 Select "0-9". 2 Enter the desired number.

■By selecting "Release Tones"

"Release Tones" appear when a continuous tone signal(s) containing a (w) is registered in the contact list. This operation can be performed while driving. 1 Select "Release Tones". ● A continuous tone signal is a character string that consists of numbers and the characters "p" or "w". (e.g. 056133w0123p#1) - When the “p” pause tone is used, the tone data up until the next pause tone will be automatically sent after 2 seconds have elapsed. When the “w” pause tone is used, the tone data up until the next pause tone will be automatically sent after a user operation is performed. ● Release tones can be used when automated operation of a phone based service such as an answering machine or bank phone service is desired. A phone number with continuous tone signals can be registered in the contact list. ● Tone data after a “w” pause tone can be operated by voice command during a call.

Transmit volume setting

1 Select "Transmit Volume". 2 Select the desired level for the transmit volume. 3 Select to display previous screen. \- The sound quality of the voice heard from the other party's speaker may be negatively impacted. ●“Transmit Volume” is dimmed when mute is on.

Switching calls while a call is in progress

\- When there are no calls on hold during a call: "Hold" is displayed. When selected, the current call is placed on hold. - When there is no current call, but there is a call on hold: "Activate" is displayed. When selected, the system switches to the call that was on hold. - When there is another call on hold during a call: "Swap Calls" is displayed. When selected, the current call is placed on hold, and the system switches to the call that was on hold. ●This function may not be available depending on the type of cellular phone.

Incoming call waiting

When a call is interrupted by a third party while talking, the incoming screen is displayed. 1 Select "Answer" or press the switch on the steering wheel to start talking with the other party. \- To refuse to receive the call: Select "Decline". \- Each time “Swap Calls” is selected, the party who is on hold will be switched. \- This function may not be available depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone.

Bluetooth® phone message function

Received messages can be forwarded from the connected Bluetooth® phone, enabling checking and replying using the system. Depending on the type of Bluetooth ^® phone connected, received messages may not be transferred to the system. If the phone does not support the message function, this function cannot be used. Even when the supported phone is used, reply function may not be used.

Displaying the message screen

1 Display the phone top screen. (→P.479) 2 Select "Message". \- A confirmation message appears when the “Automatic Message Transfer” function is set to off (→P.503), select “Yes”. 3 Check that the message screen is displayed. "Phone": Select to change to phone mode. ● The account name is displayed on the left side of screen. - Account names are the names of the accounts that exist on the currently connected phone. ● The following functions can be used on message function: - Receiving a message (→P.491) - Checking messages (→P.491) - Replying to a message (dictation reply) ( P.492) - Replying to a message (quick reply) ( P.493) - Calling the message sender (→P.493) - Message settings (→P.503)

Receiving a message

When an e-mail/SMS/MMS is received, the incoming message screen pops up with sound and is ready to be operated on the screen. 

8:39 Incoming text message from: Mobile Read Ignore A B C

A Select to check the message. B Select to not open the message. C Select to call the message sender. \- Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone used for receiving messages, or its registration status with the system, some information may not be displayed. ●The pop-up screen is separately available for incoming e-mail and SMS/MMS messages under the following conditions:

E-mail:

- "Incoming E-mail Display" is set to "Full Screen". (→P.496) - "E-mail Notification Pop-up" is set to on. (→P.496)

SMS/MMS:

- "Incoming SMS/MMS Display" is set to "Full Screen". (→P.496) - "SMS/MMS Notification Pop-up" is set to on. (→P.496) - Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone being connected, E-Mail function cannot be used via Bluetooth®.

Checking received messages

1 Display the message screen. (→P.490) 2 Select a desired account name. 3 Select the desired message from the list. 4 Check that the message is displayed. 

SMS/MMS 8:41 From:** Oct=****:**PM **/* * * :** * * A B C D Play << 3 of 45 >> Reply

A Select to call the message sender. B Select to have messages read out. To cancel this function, select "Stop". When "Automatic Message Readout" is set to on, messages will be automatically read out. (→P.503) C Select to display the previous or next message. D This function can be chosen the method to reply message with “Dictation” or “Quick Message”. - Reading a text message is not available while driving. - Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone being connected, this function cannot be used. - Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone. - Messages are displayed in the appropriate connected Bluetooth® phone's registered mail address folder. Select the desired folder to be displayed. - Only received messages on the connected Bluetooth ^ phone can be displayed. ●The text of the message is not displayed while driving. ●Turn the "POWER VOLUME" knob, or use the volume control switch on the steering wheel to adjust the message read out volume. - "Subject:" field is not shown on SMS case. E-mail only: Select "Mark Unread" or "Mark Read" to mark mail unread or read on the message screen. This function is available when "Update Message Read Status on Phone" is set to on. (→P.503)

Replying to a message (dictation reply) ^*

\*: If equipped 1 Display the message screen. (→P.490) 2 Select the desired message from the list. 3 Select "Reply". 4 Select "Dictation". 5 When the “Say Your Message” screen is displayed, speak message that you want to send. 6 Select "Send" to send message. "Cancel": Select to cancel sending the message. "Retry": Select to retry speaking message that you want to send. ● While the message is being sent, a sending message screen is displayed. 7 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete. \- If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again.

Replying to a message (quick reply)

15 messages have already been stored. 1 Display the message screen. (→P.490) 2 Select the desired message from the list. 3 Select "Reply". 4 Select "Quick Message". 5 Select the desired message. : Select to edit the message. (→P.493) 6 Select "Send". "Cancel": Select to cancel sending the message. ● While the message is being sent, a sending message screen is displayed. 7 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete. - If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again. \- Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone, reply function is not available.

■Editing quick reply messages

This operation cannot be performed while driving. 1 Select corresponding to the desired message to edit. 2 Select "OK" when editing is completed. ● To reset the edited quick reply messages, select "Default".

Calling the message sender

Calls can be made to an e-mail/SMS/MMS message sender's phone number. This operation can be performed while driving.

■Calling from e-mail/SMS/MMS message display

1 Display the message screen. (→P.490) 2 Select the desired message. 3 Select, or press the switch on the steering wheel. - If there are 2 or more phone numbers, select the desired number. 4 Check that the dialing screen is displayed.

■ Calling from a number within a message

Calls can be made to a number identified in a message's text area. This operation cannot be performed while driving. 1 Display the message screen. (→P.490) 2 Select the desired message. 3 Select the text area. 

SMS/MMS 8:41 From:** Oct*****:** * */** * * * :** * * * * * * * * * Play << 3 of 45 >> Reply

- Identified phone numbers contained in the message are displayed in blue text. 4 Select the desired number. 5 Check that the dialing screen is displayed. ●A series of numbers may be recognized as a phone number. Additionally, some phone numbers may not be recognized, such as those for other countries.

■Calling from the incoming message screen

For detail, refer to "Receiving a message". (→P.491)

Setup

Displaying the phone set- tings screen

1 Press the "MENU" button. 

MENU

2 Select "Setup". 3 Select "Phone". 4 Select the desired item to be set.

Phone settings screen


Setup 16:06 General Connect Phone A Bluetooth Sounds B Audio Notifications/Display C Phone Contacts/Call History D Voice Messaging E

A Connecting a Bluetooth ^® device and editing the Bluetooth ^® device information ( P.407, 410) B Sound settings ^* ( P.495) C Notifications/display settings\* (→P.496) D Contact/call history settings\* $$ (\rightarrow \mathrm{P}. 4 9 7) $$ E Message settings ^* (→P.503) \*: This operation cannot be performed while driving.

Sounds settings screen

The call and ringtone volume can be adjusted. A ringtone can be selected. 1 Display the phone settings screen. (→P.495) 2 Select "Sounds". 3 Select the desired item to be set. 

Sounds 8:57 Ringtone Tone 1 A Ringtone Volume 8 B In-call Volume 8 C Incoming E-mail Tone Tone 1 D Incoming SMS/MMS Tone Tone 1 E Default I


Sounds 8:57 Incoming E-mail Tone Tone 1 Incoming SMS/MMS Tone Tone 1 Incoming SMS/MMS Volume 8 Incoming E-mail Volume 8 Message Readout Volume 6 Default I

A Select to set the desired ring-tone. B Select “-” or “+” to adjust the ringtone volume. C Select “-” or “+” to adjust the default volume of the other party’s voice. D Select to set the desired incoming e-mail tone. E Select to set the desired incoming SMS/MMS tone. F Select “-” or “+” to adjust the incoming SMS/MMS tone volume. G Select “-” or “+” to adjust the incoming e-mail tone volume. H Select "-" or "+" to adjust the message readout volume. I Select to reset all setup items. \- Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone, certain functions may not be available.

Notifications/display set- tings screen

1 Display the phone settings screen. (→P.495) 2 Select "Notifications/Display".

3 Select the desired item to be set.


Notifications/Display 8:58 Incoming Call Display Full Screen A SMS/MMS Notification Pop-up On B Incoming SMS/MMS Display Drop-down C E-mail Notification Pop-up On D Incoming E-mail Display Drop-down E Default H


Notifications/Display 8:59 Incoming SMS/MMS Display Drop-down E-mail Notification Pop-up On Incoming E-mail Display Drop-down Display Contacts/Call History Transfer Status Off F Phone Operation Using Str-SW Display G Default H

A Select to change the incoming call display. "Full Screen": When a call is received, the incoming call screen is displayed and can be operated on the screen. "Drop-down": A message is displayed at the top of the screen. B Select to set the SMS/MMS notification pop-up on/off. C Select to change the incoming SMS/MMS display. "Full Screen": When an SMS/MMS message is received, the incoming SMS/MMS display screen is displayed and can be operated on the screen. "Drop-down": When an SMS/MMS message is received, a message is displayed at the top of the screen. D Select to set the e-mail notification pop-up on/off. E Select to change the incoming e-mail display. "Full Screen": When an e-mail is received, the incoming e-mail display screen is displayed and can be operated on the screen. "Drop-down": When an e-mail is received, a message is displayed at the top of the screen. F Select to set display of the contact/history transfer completion message on/off. G The phone top screen can be set to be displayed on the multi-information display or system screen.\* H Select to reset all setup items. \*: If equipped \- Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone, these functions may not be available.

Contacts/Call history settings screen

Contacts can be transferred from a Bluetooth® phone to this system. Contacts and favorites can be added, edited and deleted. Also, the call history can be deleted. 1 Display the phone settings screen. (→P.495) 2 Select "Contacts/Call History". 3 Select the desired item to be set. 

Contacts/Call History 9:00 Automatic Transfer Transfer Contacts from Device Sort Contacts By First Name C Add Favorite > D Remove Favorite > E Default K


Contacts/Call History 9:00 Clear Call History > F > New Contact > G : Edit Contact > H : Delete Contacts > I : Manage Voice Tags > J : Default K

A For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones: Select to change the contact/history transfer settings. (→P.498) B Select to update contacts from the connected device. (→P.499) C Select to sort contacts by the first name or last name field. D Select to add contacts to the favorites list. (→P.501) E Select to delete favorites from the favorites list. (→P.502) F Select to clear the call his- tory.\* G Select to add new contacts to the contact list.\* (→P.500) H Select to edit contacts in the contact list. ^* ( P.501) I Select to delete contacts from the contact list. ^* (→P.501) J Select to set the voice tags. (→P.502) K Select to reset all setup items. \*: For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones, this function is available when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (→P.498) - Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone, certain functions may not be available. - Contact data is managed independently for every registered phone. When one phone is connected, another phone's registered data cannot be read.

Setting automatic contact/history transfer

The automatic contact/history function is available for PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones only. 1 Select "Automatic Transfer". 2 Select the desired item to be set. 

Automatic Transfer 9:02 Automatic Transfer On A Update Now B Display Contact Images On C Default D

A Select to set automatic contact/history transfer on/off. When set to on, the phone's contact data and history are automatically transferred. B Select to update contacts from the connected phone. (→P.498) C Select to set the transferred contact image display on/off. Only when the vehicle is not moving, the contact image can be displayed. D Select to reset all setup items.

■ Updating contacts from phone

1 Select "Update Now". - Contacts are transferred automatically. 2 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete. - This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone. - If another Bluetooth® device is connected when transferring contact data, depending on the phone, the connected Bluetooth ^® device may need to be disconnected. - Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone. ■Updating the contacts in a different way (from the call history screen)\* 1 Display the phone top screen. ( P.479) 2 Select "History" and select a contact not yet registered in the contact list. 3 Select "Update Contact". 4 Select the desired contact. 5 Select a phone type for the phone number. \*: For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones, this function is available when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (→P.498)

Transfer contacts from device

- When an Android Auto connection is established, this function will be unavailable.\* \*: This function is not made available in some countries or areas.

From phone (OPP compatible Bluetooth® phones only)

▶ When the contact is not registered 1 Select "Transfer Contacts from Device". 2 Select "From Phone (Bluetooth)". 3 Transfer the contact data to the system using a Bluetooth ^® phone. - This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone. - To cancel this function, select "Cancel". 4 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete. ▶ When the contact is registered 1 Select "Transfer Contacts from Device". 2 Select "From Phone (Bluetooth)". 3 Select "Replace Contacts" or "Add Contact". "Replace Contacts": Select to transfer the contact from the connected cellular phone and replace the current one. "Add Contact": Select to transfer the desired contact data from the connected cellular phone to add to the current one. 4 Transfer the contact data to the system using a Bluetooth ^® phone. - This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone. - To cancel this function, select "Cancel". 5 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

From USB device

Backed-up contact data ("vCard" formatted) can be transferred from USB device or Bluetooth® phone to this system. 1 Connect a USB device. (→P.434) 2 Select "Transfer Contacts from Device". 3 Select "From USB". 4 Select "USB 1" or "USB 2" when the multiple USB devices are connected. If a USB device is connected, skip this procedure. 5 Select "Replace Contacts" or "Add Contact". If the contact is already registered, skip this procedure. "Replace Contacts": Select to transfer the contact from the connected USB device or Bluetooth® phone and replace the current one. "Add Contact": Select to transfer the desired contact data from the connected USB device or Bluetooth ^® phone to add to the current one. 6 Select a desired file from vCard file list. 7 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete. \- Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone used and number of files, it may take time to display vCard file lists and download contacts. ●Downloading may not complete correctly in the following cases: - If the power switch is turned off during downloading. - If the USB device or Bluetooth® phone is removed before downloading is complete.

Registering a new contact to the contacts list

New contact data can be registered. Up to 4 numbers per person can be registered. For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones, this function is available when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (→P.497) 1 Select "New Contact". 2 Enter the name and select "OK". 3 Enter the phone number and select "OK". 4 Select the phone type for the phone number. 5 To add another number to this contact, select "Yes". ■Registering a new contact in a different way (from the call history screen) 1 Display the phone top screen. (→P.479) 2 Select "History" and select a contact not yet registered in the contact list. 3 Select "Add to Contacts". 4 Follow the steps in “Registering a new contact to the contacts list” from step 2. (→P.500)

Editing the contact data

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth ^® phones, this function is available when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (→P.497) 1 Select "Edit Contact". 2 Select the desired contact. 3 Select next to the name or desired number. 4 Enter the name or the phone number and select "OK".

Deleting the contact data

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth ^® phones, this function is available when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (→P.497) 1 Select "Delete Contacts". 2 Select the desired contact and select "Delete". 3 Select "Yes" when the confirmation screen appears. ●Multiple data can be selected and deleted at the same time. - When a Bluetooth ^ phone is deleted, the contact data will be deleted at the same time.

Favorites list setting

Up to 15 contacts (maximum of 4 numbers per contact) can be registered in the favorites list. ■Registering the contacts in the favorites list 1 Select "Add Favorite". 2 Select the desired contact to add to the favorites list. - Dimmed contacts are already stored as a favorite. 3 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete. When 15 contacts have already been registered to the favorites list 1 When 15 contacts have already been registered to the favorites list, a registered contact needs to be replaced. Select "Yes" when the confirmation screen appears to replace a contact. 2 Select the contact to be replaced. 3 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete. ■Registering contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the contact details screen) 1 Display the phone top screen. (→P.479) 2 Select "Contacts" and select the desired contact. 3 Select "Add Favorite". 4 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete. ■Deleting favorites from the favorites list 1 Select "Remove Favorite". 2 Select the desired contacts and select "Remove". 3 Select "Yes" when the confirmation screen appears. 4 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete. ■Deleting favorites from the favorites list in a different way (from the contact details screen) 1 Display the phone top screen. (→P.479) 2 Select "Favorites" or "Contacts" and then select the favorite you wish to delete. 3 Select "Remove Favorite". 4 Select "Yes" when the confirmation screen appears. 5 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

Setting voice tags

Calls can be made by saying the voice tag of a registered contact in the contact list. (→P.470) 1 Select "Manage Voice Tags". 2 Select the desired item to be set. 

Voice Tags 9:13 1/50 free New Edit Delete A B C

A Select to register a new voice tag. (→P.502) B Select to edit a voice tag. (→P.503) C Select to delete a voice tag. (→P.503) ■Registering a voice tag Up to 50 voice tags can be registered. 1 Select "New". 2 Select the desired contact to register a voice tag for. 3 Select "REC" and record a voice tag. - When recording a voice tag, do so in a quiet area. "Play": Select to play the voice tag. 4 Select "OK" when voice tag registration is complete.

■Editing a voice tag

1 Select "Edit". 2 Select the desired contact to edit. 3 Follow the steps in "Registering a voice tag" from step 3. (→P.502)

■Deleting the voice tag

1 Select "Delete". 2 Select the desired contact and select "Delete". 3 Select "Yes" when the confirmation screen appears. ●Multiple data can be selected and deleted at the same time. ● Voice tags are deleted when the set language of the system is changed. (→P.426)

Message settings screen

1 Display the phone settings screen. (→P.495) 2 Select "Messaging". 3 Select the desired item to be set. 

Messaging 9:14 Automatic Message Transfer On A Automatic Message Readout On B Update Message Read Status on Phone On C Use Messaging Account Names from Phone Off D Vehicle Signature Off E Default F

A Select to set automatic message transfer on/off. B Select to set automatic message readout on/off. C Select to set updating message read status on phone on/off. D Select to set display of messaging account names on the message screen on/off. When set to on, messaging account names used on the cellular phone will be displayed. E Select to set adding the vehicle signature to outgoing messages on/off. The vehicle signature can be edited. (→P.503) F Select to reset all setup items. ● Depending on the phone, these functions may not be available.

Vehicle signature settings

1 Select "Vehicle Signature". 2 Select the desired item to be set. 

Vehicle Signature 14:58 Add Vehicle Signature On A Edit Vehicle Signature Sent from my ******** B Default C

A Select to set adding the vehicle signature to outgoing messages on/off. B Select to edit the vehicle signature. ( P.504) C Select to reset all setup items.

■Editing vehicle signature

1 Select "Edit Vehicle Signature". 2 Enter desired signature with using keyboard. 3 Select "OK". 4 Select "OK" on the confirmation screen, or select "Edit Again" when it needs to amend.

Troubleshooting

If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth® device, first check the table below.

Troubleshooting

■When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth® device The hands-free system or Bluetooth ^® device does not work.

Likely cause Solution
The connected device may not be a compatible Bluetooth® cellular phone.	For a list of specific devices which operation has been confirmed on this system, check with your Toyota dealer or the following website: http://www.toyota.com/audio-multimedia in the United States, http://www.toyota.ca/connected in Canada, and http://www.toyotapr.com/audio-multimedia in Puerto Rico
The Bluetooth® version of the connected cellular phone may be older than the specified version.	Use a cellular phone with Bluetooth® version 2.0 or higher (recommended: Ver. 4.2 or higher). (→P.405)

■When registering/connecting a cellular phone A cellular phone cannot be registered.

Likely cause Solution
An incorrect passcode was entered on the cellular phone.	Enter the correct passcode on the cellular phone.
The registration operation has not been completed on the cellular phone side.	Complete the registration operation on the cellular phone (approve registration on the phone).
Old registration information remains on either this system or the cellular phone.	Delete the existing registration information from both this system and the cellular phone, then register the cellular phone you wish to connect to this system.(→P.409)

A Bluetooth ^® connection cannot be made.

Likely cause Solution
Another Bluetooth® device is already connected.	Manually connect the cellular phone you wish to use to this system.(→P.407)
Bluetooth® function is not enabled on the cellular phone.	Enable the Bluetooth® function on the cellular phone.

Likely cause Solution
Automatic Bluetooth® connection on this system is set to off.	Set automatic Bluetooth® connection on this system to on when the power switch is in ACC or ON. (→P.412)
Preferred device settings function on this system is set to on.	Set preferred device settings function on this system to off. (→P.412)
	Set the desired cellular phone to the highest automatic connection priority. (→P.412)

■When making/receiving a call

A call cannot be made/received.

Likely cause Solution
Your vehicle is in a area.	Move to where no longer appears on the display.

■When using the phonebook

Phonebook data cannot be transferred manually/automatically.

Likely cause Solution
The profile version of the connected cellular phone may not be compatible with transferring phonebook data.	For a list of specific devices which operation has been confirmed on this system, check with your Toyota dealer or the following website: http://www.toyota.com/audio-multimedia in the United States, http://www.toyota.ca/connected in Canada, and http://www.toyotapr.com/audio-multimedia in Puerto Rico
Automatic contact transfer function on this system is set to off.	Set automatic contact transfer function on this system to on. (→P.498)
Passcode has not been entered on the cellular phone.	Enter the pass-code on the cellular phone if requested (default pass-code: 1234).
Transfer operation on the cellular phone has not completed.	Complete transfer operation on the cellular phone (approve transfer operation on the phone).

Phonebook data cannot be edited.

Likely cause Solution
Automatic contact transfer function on this system is set to on.	Set automatic contact transfer function on this system to off. (→P.498)

■When using the Bluetooth ^® message function

Messages cannot be viewed.

Likely cause Solution
Message transfer is not enabled on the cellular phone.	Enable message transfer on the cellular phone (approve message transfer on the phone).
Automatic transfer function on this system is set to off.	Set automatic transfer function on this system to on. (→P.498)

New message notifications are not displayed.

Likely cause Solution
Notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system is set to off.	Set notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system to on. (→P.496)
Automatic message transfer function is not enabled on the cellular phone.	Enable automatic transfer function on the cellular phone.

In other situations

The Bluetooth ^® connection status is displayed at the top of the screen each time the power switch is in ACC or ON.

Likely cause Solution
Connection confirmation display on this system is set to on.	To turn off the display, set connection confirmation display on this system to off. (→P.412)

Even though all conceivable measures have been taken, the symptom status does not change.

Likely cause Solution
The cellular phone is not close enough to this system.	Bring the cellular phone closer to this system.
Radio interference has occurred.	Turn off Wi-Fi® devices or other devices that may emit radio waves.

Likely cause Solution
The cellular phone is the most likely cause of the symptom.	Turn the cellular phone off, remove and reinstall the battery pack, and then restart the cellular phone.
	Enable the cellular phone's Bluetooth® connection.
	Disable the Wi-Fi® connection of the cellular phone.
	Stop the cellular phone's security software and close all applications.
	Before using an application installed on the cellular phone, carefully check its source and how its operation might affect this system.

- For details, refer to the owner's manual that came with the cellular phone.

Connected Services

\*: This function is not made available in some countries or areas. Connected Services includes Toyota Apps, Service Connect, Wi-Fi® Hotspot, Safety Connect and Remote Connect.

Functional overview

● The functions included are classified into the following four types. - Type A: Function achieved by using a smartphone or an embedded cellular device in the vehicle (DCM: Data Communication Module) and the system - Type B: Function achieved by using DCM and the system - Type C: Function achieved by using DCM - Type D: Function achieved by using DCM and a smartphone

Function Type
Toyota Apps Type A
Wi-Fi® Hotspot	Type B
Safety Connect Type C
Remote Connect, Service Connect	Type D

●Connected Services functionality is dependent upon network reception level and signal strength. ● Each function is available in the following areas: • Toyota Apps is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and Alaska. - W i -® Hotspot is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and Alaska. - Safety Connect is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and Alaska. - Remote Connect is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and Alaska. • Service Connect is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and Alaska.

Type A: Function achieved by using a smart-phone or DCM

Of the functions included with Connected Services, the Toyota Apps rely on the use of a smartphone or DCM.

- Using a smartphone - Toyota audio multimedia system enables applicable apps installed on a smartphone to be displayed on and operated from the screen via a Bluetooth®. - Via DCM • Toyota audio multimedia system enables applicable apps installed on the system to be displayed on and operated from the screen.

A few settings must be performed before Toyota Apps can be used. (→P.512)

By using a smartphone or DCM


A B C E D USB Bluetooth®

A Content provider Provides contents to the application server. B Application server Provides applications to the system or a smartphone. C Smartphone\* Using the Toyota mobile application, communication is relayed between the system, application server and content provider. D Applications Display usable content from the content providers on the screen using the data connection of the connected smartphone or DCM. E System Content received, via a smartphone or DCM, from content provider servers is displayed on the screen. The system is equipped with an application player to run applications. F Via DCM \*: For known compatible phones, refer to http://www.toyota.com/ connected-services in the United States.

Before using the function

The required operations to activate applications and connect a smartphone to the system, and the registration steps for the Connected Services are explained in this section.

Subscription

● Services requiring a separate contract can also be used.\* \*: For details, refer to http://www.toyota.com/ connected-services or call 1-800-331-4331 in the United States.

■Availability of function

● Toyota Apps is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and Alaska. ●Data usage fees may apply while using Toyota Apps. Confirm data usage fees before using this function. - For details regarding operation of the Toyota Apps, refer to http://www.toyota.com/ connected-services in the United States. ●These functions are not made available in some countries or areas. Availability of functions of the Toyota Apps is dependent on network reception level.

■Initializing personal data

The personal data used in applications can be reset. ( P.429) ● The following personal data can be deleted and returned to their default settings: - Downloaded contents • Radio stations that were listened to - Once initialized, the data and settings will be erased. Pay much attention when initializing the data.

Preparation before using Toyota mobile application

■Settings required to use Toyota mobile application

Perform the settings in the following order. 1 Download the Toyota mobile application to your smartphone. 2 Open the Toyota mobile application on your smart phone and follow instructions. Bluetooth® Pairing is required. In order to use Toyota mobile application, the following must first be performed: \- Register a Bluetooth® phone with the hands-free system. (→P.402) ●Applications can only be used when the Toyota mobile application has been downloaded to your smartphone, and the application is running. ●Toyota mobile application operational procedures can also be confirmed by visiting http://www.toyota.com/ connected-services in the United States. - If a Toyota mobile application is used while iPod audio/video is being played back, system operation may become unstable.

Type B: Function achieved by using DCM and the system\*

\*: Vehicles equipped with DCM The functionality of Wi-Fi® Hotspot is made possible through the shared work of the DCM and the system. These are subscription-based telematics services that use Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security as well as convenience features. These services are available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equipped vehicles and supported by the Toyota response center, which operates 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. For details about Wi-Fi® Hotspot:→P.414

Before using the function

Subscription

● After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services. A variety of subscription terms are available. Contact your Toyota dealer, or call 1-800-331-4331 in the United States, for further subscription details. (→P.511)

■Availability of functions

\- Wi-Fi Hotspot is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and Alaska.

Type C: Function achieved by using DCM\*

\*: Vehicles equipped with DCM

The functionality of Safety Connect is made possible by the use of a DCM.

For details, (→P.67) ●Free/Open Source Software Information This product contains Free/Open Source Software (FOSS). The license information and/or the source code of such FOSS can be found at the following URL. http://opensource.lge.com ●Exposure to radio frequency signals: The Toyota audio multimedia system installed in your vehicle includes a low power radio transmitter and receiver. The system receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals. In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies. • ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992] • NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement) Report 86 [1986] - ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) [1996] ●These standards are based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, government health agencies, and industry reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard (C95.1). ●The design of Toyota audio multi-media system complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to those standards. - Contact with the Toyota response center is dependent upon the telematics device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the Toyota response center or receive support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms are available; charges vary by subscription term selected. ●The Toyota response center offers support in multiple languages. - Select Safety Connect-subscribed vehicles are capable of communicating vehicle information. Please see the terms and conditions for additional details. Owners who do not wish to have their vehicle transmit this information can opt out at the time of enrollment or by calling 1-800-331-4331 in the United States, and following the prompts for Safety Connect. - For further details about the service, contact your Toyota dealer. ●Toyota audio multimedia are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications Act and the system is not TTY compatible. ●Certification For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: BEJTL19BNN IC: 2703H-TL19BNN

FCC/IC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacture could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. This equipment complies with IC RSS-102 radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled environment. The antennas used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of least 20cm from all persons.

FCC/IC AVERTISSEMENT:

L'utilisateur est averti que les changements ou modifications non express ément approuvés par le fabricant pourraient annuler l'autorité de l'utilisateur à utiliser l'équipement. Ce appareil est compatible avec la Partie 15 du règlement FCC et de la Licence de l'industrie canadienne et des normes exemptes de RSS. Opération soumise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) ce appareil ne doit pas causer des interférences nuisibles, et (2) cet appareil doit accepté toutes les interférences, y compris les interférences qui peuvent entraîner un fonctionnement indésirable de l'appareil. Cet appareil est compatible aux limites d'exposition aux radiation IC RSS-102 définies pour un environnement non contrôlé. Les antennes utilisées pour cet émetteur doivent être installées à une distance d'au moins 20 cm de toutes les personnes.

Type D: Function achieved by using DCM and a smartphone

The functionality of Remote Connect and Service Connect are made possible by the use of a DCM and a smartphone. For details about these services, refer to http://www.toyota.com/ connected-services.

Remote Connect\*

\*: Vehicles equipped with remote connect only Remote Connect is a service that lets you view and remotely control certain aspects of your vehicle.

Subscription

\- After you sign the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement (see the Safety Connect section →P.67), download the Toyota App from your smartphone app store, and register within the app (or enroll and complete registration at the dealer), you can begin using these services. \- A variety of subscription terms are available. Contact your Toyota dealer, or call 1-800-331-4331 for further subscrip- tion details.

■Availability of function

\- Remote Connect is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and Alaska. ● Availability of functions of the Remote Connect is dependent on network reception level. ● Remote Connect should only be used by authorized users. ●Laws in some communities may require that the vehicle be within view of the user when operating Remote Connect. In some states, use of Remote Connect may violate state or local laws. Before using Remote Connect, check your state and local laws. ● Any malfunction of the vehicle should be repaired by your Toyota dealer. - Remote Connect is designed to work at temperatures above approximately -22 °F (-30 °C). This specification is related to the Remote Connect operation, but is dependent on the vehicle's operating temperature range which may be different. ●Content is subject to change without notice. ● Additional information can be found at http://www.toyota.com/ connected-services in the United States. 

WARNING

\- Operating Remote Connect incorrectly may lead to unforeseen accidents or malfunctions. Check the vehicle condition and assume full responsibility before using.

Service Connect

Service Connect uses DCM to collect and transmit vehicle data that allows Toyota to provide: ● Vehicle Health Report (VHR) (Safety Recalls, Service Campaigns, Current Vehicle Alerts, Required Maintenance, and Vehicle Condition Status) ● Maintenance Notifications ● Vehicle Alert Notifications

■Availability of function

● Service Connect is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and Alaska. ● Availability of functions of the Service Connect is dependent on network reception level.

Toyota Apps

Toyota Apps is a function that enables certain apps installed on a smartphone or the system to be displayed on and operated from the system screen. Before the Toyota Apps can be used, some setup needs to be performed. (→P.512) For details about the functions and services provided by each application, refer to http://www.toyota.com/ connected-services in the United States.

Using Toyota Apps

From the "MENU" button 1 Press the "MENU" button. 

MENU

2 Select "Apps". 3 Follow the steps in "From the "APPS" button" from step 2. (→P.518) From the "APPS" button 1 Press the "APPS" button. 

APPS

\- If a specific application screen is displayed, press the "APPS" button again. 2 Select the desired application screen button. APP1: Select to activate an application. "Update": Select to update the applications. (→P.518) 2: Displays the number of new notifications for the application

Updating an application

When the Toyota Apps is activated, an application may need to be updated. To update an application, it is necessary to download update data and install it.

■Downloading update

If an update is available, "Update" can be selected. 1 Select "Update" on the application screen. (→P.518) 2 Check that downloading starts. "Download in Background": Select to operate other functions while downloading. "Cancel": Select to cancel updating. 3 Check that downloading is complete. "Later": Select to install later. When this screen button is selected, the screen will return to the last displayed screen. To install the update data: (→P.519) "See Detail": Select to display detailed information on the update data. "Install": Select to install the update data. Follow the steps in "Installing the update data" from step 2. (→P.519) ■Installing the update data After the downloading is complete, "Update" will be changed to "Install". 1 Select "Install" on the application screen. (→P.518) 2 Select "Continue". "Later": Select to postpone the installation of the update data and go back to the previous screen. 3 Check that installing is started. "Install in Background": Select to operate other functions while installing. 4 Select "OK" after the installing is complete. ●The Toyota Apps cannot be operated while installing.

If a message appears on the screen

When problems occur with starting the application player, a message will appear on the screen. Referring to the table below, identify the problem and take the suggested corrective action. \- “When it is safe and legal to do so, please ensure your Toyota mobile application is running and logged in on your phone.” The Toyota mobile application cannot be connected to Bluetooth® SPP. Refer to http://www.toyota.com/ connected-services in the United States, to confirm if the phone is Bluetooth® SPP compatible or not, and then activate the Toyota mobile application. \- “Installation failed, please try again” Installation can be attempted again by changing to the application screen and pressing the "Install" switch. \- “Application download error. Please try again later.” Downloading can be attempted again by checking the communication status, changing to the application screen and pressing the "Download" switch again. \- “Download error, some Toyota mobile application functions may not work as expected. Please reinitiate the download process.” The Toyota mobile application can- not be connected to Bluetooth ^® SPP. Refer to http://www.toyota.com/ connected-services in the United States, to confirm if the phone is Bluetooth® SPP compatible or not, and then activate the Toyota mobile application. Please ensure your Toyota mobile application is running and logged in on your phone while vehicle is not moving. \- “To use the services, Toyota mobile application needs to be running on your phone. For more information, please visit toyota.com or call 1-800-331-4331 in the United States.” The Toyota mobile application cannot be connected to Bluetooth® SPP. Refer to http://www.toyota.com/ connected-services in the United States, to confirm if the phone is Bluetooth® SPP compatible or not, and then activate the Toyota mobile application. \- “Communication unsuccessful. Please try again.” Communication was disconnected. After a few moments, retry the operation.

Entering keyword operation

A keyword can be entered to an application by the software keyboard or voice recognition function. For details about the functions and services provided by each application, refer to http://www.toyota.com/ connected-services in the United States. ● The keyboard layout can be changed. (→P.426)

Entering a keyword using the software keyboard

1 Display the application screen. ( P.518) 2 Select the desired application screen button. 3 Select the character entering space. 4 Enter a search term, and then select "OK". 5 Entering characters will be reflected on the character entering space. - For details on operating the keyboard: →P.397

Entering a keyword using the voice recognition function

1 Display the application screen. (→P.518) 2 Select the desired application screen button. 3 Press the talk switch. (→P.470) 4 Say the desired keyword. ● Completion of the keyword will be detected automatically. 5 Search results will be displayed on the screen.

Toyota Apps settings

Toyota Apps settings can be changed.

Displaying the Toyota Apps settings screen

1 Press the "MENU" button. 

MENU

2 Select "Setup". 3 Select "Apps". 4 Select the desired items to be set.

Toyota Apps settings screen


Setup 9:02 Data Usage Message Voice Auto Detect iPhone App Vehicle Connect USB in enhanced mode. Apps A B C D Default

A Select to set the pop up reminder for smartphone data usage. (→P.522) B Select to detect iPhone app automatically on/off. C Select to turn on/off the enhanced USB connection mode. - When an iPhone is connected while this setting is "On", communication with any devices connected to the other USB port is not possible. Also, depending on the device, charging may not be possible. D Select to reset all setup items to default setting

Data usage notification pop-up settings

The data usage notification pop-up, which indicates that the system will use an internet connection, can be enabled/disabled. 1 Display the Toyota Apps settings screen. (→P.522) 2 Select "Data Usage Message". 3 Change the setting as desired.

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning system.... 524 Heated steering wheel/seat heaters/seat ventilators 531

6-2. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list ..... 534

6-3. Using the storage features

List of storage features 537 Luggage compartment features 541

6-4. Using the other interior features

Other interior features . 546 Garage door opener.... 557

Automatic air conditioning system

Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.

Air conditioning controls


A B AUTO *OFF 75 FRONT E F G H I J K L M 75 SYNC A/C C D

A Automatic mode switch B Left-hand side temperature control knob C Right-hand side temperature control knob D "SYNC" switch E "OFF" switch F Windshield defogger switch G Rear window defogger and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch H Eco air conditioning mode switch I Fan speed decrease switch J Fan speed increase switch K Airflow mode control switch L Outside/recirculated air mode switch M S-FLOW mode switch N "A/C" switch ■Adjusting the temperature setting Turn driver's side temperature control dial clockwise to increases the temperature and turn the dial counterclockwise to decreases the temperature. The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous modes each time the "SYNC" switch is pressed. Simultaneous mode (the indicator on the "SYNC" switch is on): The driver's side temperature control dial can be used to adjust the temperature for the driver's and passenger's side. At this time, operate the passenger's side temperature control dial to enter individual mode. Individual mode (the indicator on the "SYNC" switch is off): The temperature for the driver's and passenger's side can be adjusted separately.

■Setting the fan speed

Press the fan speed increase switch to increase the fan speed and the fan speed decrease switch to decrease the fan speed. Pressing the "OFF" switch turns off the fan.

■Change the airflow mode

Press the airflow mode control switch. The airflow mode changes as follows each time the switch is pressed. 

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    B --> C["3"]
    C --> D["4"]
    D --> E["75"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

1 Upper body 2 Upper body and feet 3 Feet 4 Feet and the windshield defogger operates

■Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press the outside/recirculated air mode switch. The mode switches between outside air mode and recirculated air mode each time the switch is operated. When recirculated air mode is selected, the indicator illuminates on the outside/recirculated air mode switch.

■Set cooling and dehumidification function

Press the "A/C" switch. When the function is on, the indicator illuminates on the "A/C" switch.

■ Eco air conditioning mode

The air conditioning is controlled with low fuel consumption priori- tized such as reducing fan speed, etc. Press the eco air conditioning mode switch. When the eco air conditioning mode is on, the indicator illuminates on the eco air conditioning mode switch.

■Defogging the windshield

Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side windows. Press the windshield defogger switch. Set the outside/recirculated air mode switch to outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.) To defog the windshield and the side windows quickly, turn the air flow and temperature up. To return to the previous mode, press the windshield defogger switch again when the windshield is defogged. When the windshield defogger switch is on, the indicator illuminates on the windshield defogger switch.

■Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors (if equipped)

Defoggers are used to defog the rear window and to remove rain-drops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors (if equipped). Press the rear window defogger and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch. The defoggers will automatically turn off after 15 minutes. When the rear window defogger and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch is on, the indicator illuminates on the rear window defogger and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch.

■Fogging up of the windows

●The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high. Turning “A/C” switch on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively. - If you turn "A/C" switch off, the windows may fog up more easily. ●The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.

■When driving on dusty roads

Close all windows. If dust thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after closing the windows, it is recommended that the air intake mode be set to outside air mode and the fan speed to any setting except off.

■Outside/recirculated air mode

- Setting to the recirculated air mode temporarily is recommended in preventing dirty air from entering the vehicle interior and helping to cool the vehicle when the outside air temperature is high. ● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the temperature setting or the inside temperature.

■When the outside temperature exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning system is on

● In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce fuel consumption. ● Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the power switch is turned to ON. - It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing the outside/recirculated air mode switch.

Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

- In Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel efficiency: • Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/cooling capacity - Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected ●To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations: - Adjust the fan speed - Turn off Eco drive mode (→P.366) - Turn off Eco air conditioning mode \- When the driving mode is set to Eco driving mode, the Eco air conditioning mode will be turned on automatically. Even in this case, the Eco air conditioning mode can be turned off by pressing the Eco air conditioning mode switch.

■When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32^ F ( 0^ C)

The dehumidification function may not operate even when “A/C” switch is pressed.

■Ventilation and air conditioning odors

● To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode. ●During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents. ● To reduce potential odors from occurring: \- It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off. \- The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode. \- When parking, the system automatically switches to outside air mode to encourage better air circulation throughout the vehicle, helping to reduce odors that occur when starting the vehicle.

Air conditioning filter

→P.609

■ Air conditioning system refrigerant

●A label regarding the refrigerant of the air conditioning system is attached to the hood at the location shown in the following illustration. 

Line drawing of a car engine bay with an open lid and a black arrow pointing to the top part (no text or symbols)

●The meaning of each symbol on the label are as follows:

	Caution
	Air conditioning system
	Air conditioning system lubricant type

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Requires registered technician to service air conditioning system Flammable refrigerant

- Customization

Some functions can be customized. (Customizable features: →P.716)

WARNING

■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not use the windshield defogger switch during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are operating (if equipped)

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces when the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on.

NOTICE

■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

■ When repairing/replacing parts of the air conditioning system

Have repair/replacement performed by your Toyota dealer. When a part of the air conditioning system, such as the evaporator, is to be replaced, it must be replaced with a new one.

Using automatic mode

1 Press the "AUTO" switch.

The dehumidification function begins to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting and humidity. 2 Adjust the temperature setting. 3 To stop the operation, press the "OFF" switch. If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that operated is maintained.

■ Using automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions. Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately after the automatic mode switch is pressed.

Front seat concentrated airflow mode (S-FLOW)

This function automatically controls the air conditioning airflow so that priority is given to the front seats. When the front passenger seat is not occupied, airflow may switch to only the driver's seat. Unnecessary air conditioning is suppressed, contributing to increased fuel efficiency. Front seat concentrated airflow mode operates in the following situations. ● No passengers are detected in the rear seats ● The windshield defogger is not operating While operating, Illuminates.

■Manually turning front seat concentrated airflow mode on/off

In front seat concentrated air-flow mode, directing airflow to the front seats only and to all seats can be switched via switch operation. When the mode has been switched manually, automatic airflow control stops operating. Press on the air condition- ing operation panel and switch the airflow. ● Indicator illuminated: Airflow to the front seats only ● Indicator off: Airflow to all the seats

■ Operation of automatic airflow control

- In order to maintain a comfortable interior, airflow may be directed to seats without passengers immediately after the hybrid system is started and at other times depending on the outside temperature. ●After the hybrid system is started, if passengers move around inside or enter/exit the vehicle, the system cannot accurately detect the presence of passengers and automatic airflow control will not operate.

■Operation of manual airflow control

Even if the function is manually switched to directing airflow to only the front seats, when a rear seat is occupied, it may automatically direct airflow to all seats.

■To return to automatic airflow control

1 With the indicator off, turn the power switch to OFF. 2 After 60 minutes or more elapse, turn the power switch to ON.

Windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped)

This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the wind-shield and wiper blades. Press the switch to turn the system on/off. The indicator comes on when the system is on. The windshield wiper de-icer will automatically turn off after a period of time. 

Diagram showing car interior with steering wheel, dashboard, and instrument panel labeled in Chinese


WARNING

■To prevent burns

Do not touch the glass at lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front pillars when the windshield wiper deicer is on.

Air outlet layout and operations

■ Location of air outlets

The air outlets and air volume change according to the selected air flow mode. 

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

A If equipped

■Adjusting the air flow direction and opening/closing the air outlets

Front 

Diagram of car interior air intake system with numbered components and directional arrows indicating flow or movement

1 Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down 2 Open the vent\* 3 Close the vent \* \*: If equipped (center air outlets only) ▶ Rear (if equipped) 

1 2 3 1

1 Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down 2 Open the vent 3 Close the vent 

WARNING

■To not interrupt the wind-shield defogger from operating

Do not place anything on the instrument panel which may cover the air outlets. Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed, preventing the windshield defoggers from defogging. 

Diagram showing a car with traffic arrows and a no-smoking symbol, indicating restricted driving conditions.

Heated steering wheel ^* /seat heat-ers ^* /seat ventilators ^*

\*: If equipped

● Heated steering wheel Warm up the grip of the steering wheel \- Seat heaters Warm up the seat upholstery \- Seat ventilators Maintain good ventilation by pulling air through the seat upholstery 

WARNING

■To prevent minor burn injuries Care should be taken if anyone in the following categories comes in contact with the steering wheel or seats when the heater is on: ●Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged ●Persons with sensitive skin ●Persons who are fatigued ●Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.) 

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the seat heaters and seat ventilators Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat. ■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not use the functions when the hybrid system is off.

Heated steering wheel

Turns the heated steering wheel on/off The indicator light comes on when the heated steering wheel is operating. 

Diagram showing car interior with steering wheel and directional arrow, likely indicating vehicle speed or direction

Operation condition The power switch is in ON.

Operating the seat heat-ers

Front Turns the seat heaters on/off 

1 2

1 High temperature 2 Low temperature When the seat heater is on, the indicator illuminates on the seat heater switch. When not in use, put the switch in the neutral position. The indicator will turn off. Rear Turns the seat heaters on/off The indicator light comes on when the seat heater is operating. 

Diagram showing car seatbelt switch with directional arrow and safety symbol in Chinese

Operation condition The power switch is in ON. 

WARNING

■To prevent causes of over-heating and minor burn injuries Observe the following precautions when using a seat heater: - Do not cover the seat with a blanket or cushion when using the seat heater. - Do not use seat heater more than necessary.

Operating the seat heat- ers and ventilators

Turns the seat heaters and ventilators on/off Each time the switch is pressed, the operation condition changes as follows. Hi (3 segments lit) → Mid (2 segments lit) → Lo (1 segment lit) → Off 

1 2 A 1 2

1 Turns the seat heater on The level indicators (yellow) A light up during operation. 2 Turns the seat ventilator on The level indicators (green) A light up during operation.

Operation condition

The power switch is in ON.

■ Air conditioning system-linked control mode

When a seat ventilator is set to Hi, the fan speed of the seat ventilator may increase according to the fan speed of the air conditioning system. 

WARNING

■To prevent causes of overheating and minor burn injuries

Observe the following precautions when using a seat heater: \- Do not cover the seat with a blanket or cushion when using the seat heater. \- Do not use seat heater more than necessary.

Interior lights list

Location of the interior lights


A B C D E D

A Rear interior light ( P.535) B Front interior lights/personal lights ( P.534, 535) C Open tray lights (if equipped) ^* D Footwell lights (if equipped) ^* E Front cup holder lights (if equipped)\* \*: These lights turn on when a door is unlocked. When the shift lever is in a position other than P, the brightness of these lights will reduce intensity.

Operating the interior lights

■Front interior lights

Turns the lights on/off 

Diagram showing car interior and dashboard with a magnified view of the dashboard's internal components, including a pink arrow indicating direction.

Turns the switch to the door position (door linked) When a door is opened while the door position is on, the lights turn on. 

DOOR 1 2

1 Turns the door position on 2 Turns the lights off ■Rear interior light 

1 2 3

1 Turns the light off 2 Turns the door position on When a door is opened while the door position is on, the light turns on. 3 Turns the light on

Operating the personal lights

Turns the lights on/off 

Diagram showing a connector with two connectors and directional arrows indicating flow or movement, likely illustrating a system or signal flow.

■Illuminated entry system (vehicles with smart key system) The lights automatically turn on/off according to the power switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are opened/closed. ■To prevent the 12-volt battery from being discharged If the interior lights remain on when the power switch is turned to OFF, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes. ■The interior lights will turn on automatically when If any of the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) or in the event of a strong rear impact, the interior lights will turn on automatically. The interior lights will turn off automatically after approximately 20 minutes. The interior lights can be turned off manually. However, in order to help prevent further collisions, it is recommended that they be left on until safety can be ensured. (The interior lights may not turn on automatically depending on the force of the impact and conditions of the collision.) Customization Setting (e.g. the time elapsed before the lights turn off) can be changed. (Customizable features: →P.716) 

NOTICE

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

List of storage features

Location of the storage features


C D C A B A E B E A F

A Open tray ( P.540) B Auxiliary boxes ( P.539) C Bottle holders ( P.539) D Console box ( P.538) E Cup holders ( P.538) F Glove box ( P.537) 

WARNING

■Items that should not be left in the vehicle Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high: ● Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other stored items. ●Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard.

Glove box

Pull up the lever to open the glove box. 

Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)


WARNING

■Caution while driving

Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open glove box or the items stored inside.

Console box

Lift the lid while pushing the button to release the lock. 

Diagram illustrating seatbelt usage with labeled arrows and a magnified inset showing the seatbelt component.

Console box tray (if equipped)

The tray can be removed and stored in the bottom of the console box. 

Two-panel illustration showing a car seatbelt buckle being lifted, with no text or symbols present.


WARNING

■Caution while driving

Keep the console box closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Cup holders

Front


Line drawing of a car seatbelt mechanism (no text or symbols)

▶ Rear

Pull the armrest down. 

Diagram showing car seatbelt insertion mechanism, with one side view showing a highlighted section (no text or symbols)


WARNING

■Items unsuitable for the cup holders

Do not place anything other than cups or beverage cans in the cup holders. Inappropriate items must not be stored in the cup holders even if the lid is closed. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.

Bottle holders

Front


Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and seat area (no text or symbols visible)

Rear


Line drawing of a car interior showing the seat and dashboard area (no text or symbols)

Bottle holders

- When storing a bottle, close the cap. ●The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape. 

WARNING

■Items unsuitable for the bottle holders

Do not place anything other than a bottle in the bottle holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury. 

NOTICE

■Items that should be not stowed in the bottle holders

Do not place open bottles or glass and paper cups containing liquid in the bottle holders. The contents may spill and glasses may break.

Auxiliary boxes

Push the lid.


Diagram showing a vehicle interior with a highlighted rectangular area and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)


WARNING

■Caution while driving

Do not leave the auxiliary box open while driving. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. 

WARNING

■Items unsuitable for storing

Do not store items heavier than 0.4 lb. (0.2 kg). Doing so may cause the auxiliary box to open and the items inside may fall out, resulting in an accident. 

Line drawing of a car interior showing dashboard, seatbelt, and dashboard frame (no text or symbols)

Open tray

Driver's side 

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols)

Front passenger's side 

Line drawing of a car door handle and seat, showing internal components without any text or symbols

Front of console Vehicles with wireless charger: →P.549 

WARNING

■Items unsuitable for the open tray

Observe the following precautions when putting items in the open tray. Failure to do so may cause items to be thrown out of the tray in the event of sudden braking or steering. In these cases, the items may interfere with pedal operation or cause driver distraction, resulting in an accident. - Do not store items in the tray that can easily shift or roll out. - Do not stack items in the tray higher than the tray's edge. - Do not put items in the tray that may protrude over the tray's edge.

Luggage compartment features

Cargo hooks

Raise the hook to use. The cargo hooks are provided for securing loose items. 

Diagram showing car interior components with directional arrows indicating movement or force, likely illustrating vehicle dynamics or engine dynamics.


WARNING

■When cargo hooks are not in use To avoid injury, always return the hooks to their stowed positions when not in use.

Deck board

■Flipping the deck board upside down The deck board can be flipped upside down (resin side up) depending on the situation. 

Technical line drawings of a car back panel and its internal mesh structure (no text or symbols)

A Original position B Underside (resin side) ■Changing the deck board positions Height of the deck board can be changed by setting the deck board under the floor. 

Technical line drawings of a car interior showing two views (A and B) with no visible text or symbols

A Upper B Lower 1 Pull up the tab to raise the deck board and move it toward you to remove. 

Diagram showing a car interior with a highlighted component and an inset highlighting a device with upward arrows.

2 Place the deck board through the groove and move forward. 

Diagram of a car interior showing a ramp and lever mechanism, with an inset detail highlighting the component (no text or symbols present)

■Setting the deck board upright

When taking out the tools, the deck board can be set upright. When the back surface (resin surface) of the deck board is facing up, flip it back to the original position. 1 Pull up the tab to raise the deck board and fold it forward. 

Diagram showing car interior with a highlighted cable or cable segment and an arrow indicating direction of movement.

2 Place the edge into the groove, and with the deck board in a standing state, put the edge into the holes. 

A B


WARNING

■When operating the deck board

Do not place anything on the deck board when operating the board. Otherwise, your fingers may be caught or an accident may result causing injuries. 

WARNING

■Caution while driving

Keep the deck board closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the deck board or the items stored under the deck board.

Side auxiliary box

▶ Type A 

Line drawing of a car interior showing the door and seat area (no text or symbols)

▶ Type B 

Line drawing of a car interior showing the door frame and seat area (no text or symbols)

■Removing the partition plate 

Diagram showing car seatbelt buckle adjustment with two zoomed-in insets highlighting seatbelt movement.

Disengage the claws

Luggage cover (if equipped)

■Installing the luggage cover

1 Compress the both ends of the luggage cover and insert into the recess to install. 

Diagram illustrating vehicle collision with a magnified view showing a hand pulling a car, labeled in Chinese.

2 Pull out the luggage cover and hook it onto the anchors. 

Mechanical diagram showing a lever mechanism with highlighted parts and an inset view of the lever (no text or symbols present)

■Removing the luggage cover

1 Release the cover from the left and right anchors and allow it to retract. 

Diagram illustrating car seatbelt adjustment with magnified view and directional arrows indicating rotation or movement.

2 Compress the end of the luggage cover and lift the luggage cover up. 

Diagram illustrating a mechanical assembly with labeled components and directional arrows indicating motion or force.

■ Stowing the luggage cover

1 Open the rear deck board and remove the side deck covers. When the back surface (resin surface) of the deck board is facing up, remove the deck board. 

Top-down technical illustration of a car's rear intake structure showing airflow path and structural components (no text or labels)

2 Place the both ends of the luggage cover into the holder. 

Diagram showing car interior components with directional arrows and labeled parts, likely illustrating vehicle or mechanical assembly.


WARNING

Luggage cover

- When installing/stowing the luggage cover, make sure that the luggage cover is securely installed/stowed. Failure to do so may result in serious injury in the event of sudden braking or a collision. - Do not place anything on the luggage cover. In the event of sudden braking or turning, the item may go flying and strike an occupant. This could lead to an unexpected accident, resulting in death or serious injury. - Do not allow children to climb on the luggage cover. Climbing on the luggage cover could result in damage to the luggage cover, possibly causing death or serious injury to the child. 

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the luggage cover

Do not place anything on top of the luggage cover. When rolling up the luggage cover, objects may be caught in the cover, damaging the cover and generating noise.

Other interior features

Sun visors


Diagram showing car seatbelt adjustment with numbered arrows indicating movement and insertion steps

1 To set the visor in the forward position, flip it down. 2 To set the visor in the side position, flip down, unhook, and swing it to the side. 3 To use the side extender (if equipped), place the visor in the side position, then slide it backward.

Vanity mirrors

Slide the cover to open. The light turns on when the cover is opened. 

Diagram of a car interior showing a door, seatbelt, and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

■Automatic light off to prevent 12-volt battery discharge

If the vanity lights remain on when the power switch is turned to OFF, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes. 

NOTICE

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the hybrid system is off.

Power outlet

Please use a power supply for electronic goods that use less than 12 VDC /10 A (power consumption of 120 W). When using electronic goods, make sure that the power consumption of all the connected power outlets is less than 120 W.

Front

Open the lid. 

Diagram showing car air intake and fuel compartment with directional arrow and valve labels

■ Console box (if equipped)

Open the console box and open the lid. 

M021A21 12V/122

■Rear (if equipped) Open the lid. 

Diagram showing a device with a magnified view of a device labeled 'MOZ1' with an arrow indicating rotation.

■Luggage compartment (if equipped) Open the lid. 

Diagram showing a car interior with a stopwatch icon and directional arrow, likely indicating speed or motion.

■The power outlet can be used when The power switch is in ACC or ON. ■When stopping the hybrid system Disconnect electrical devices with charging functions, such as mobile battery packs. If such devices are left connected, the hybrid system may not stop nor- mally. 

NOTICE

■When power outlet is not in use

To avoid damaging the power outlet, close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.

■To prevent blown fuse

Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

USB charging ports (if equipped)

The USB charging ports are used to supply 2.1 A of electricity at 5 V to external devices. The USB charging ports are for charging only. They are not designed for data transfer or other purposes. Depending on the external device, it may not charge properly. Refer to the manual included with the device before using a USB charging port. ■ Using the USB charging ports Console box 

21A

▶ Rear Open the lid. 

2.1A 2.1A

■ The USB charging ports can be used when The power switch is in ACC or ON. ■ Situations in which the USB charging ports may not operate correctly - If a device which consumes more than 2.1 A at 5 V is connected - If a device designed to communicate with a personal computer, such as a USB memory device, is connected - If the connected external device is turned off (depending on device) - If the temperature inside the vehicle is high, such as after the vehicle has been parked in the sun ■ About connected external devices Depending on the connected external device, charging may occasionally be suspended and then start again. This is not a malfunction. 

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the USB charging ports - Do not insert foreign objects into the ports. - Do not spill water or other liquids into the ports. - When the USB charging ports are not in use, close the lids. If a foreign object or liquid enters a port may cause a short circuit. - Do not apply excessive force to or impact the USB charging ports. - Do not disassemble or modify the USB charging ports. ■ To prevent damage to external devices - Do not leave external devices in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to an external device. - Do not push down on or apply unnecessary force to an external device or the cable of an external device while it is connected. ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not use the USB charging ports for a long period of time when the hybrid system is off.

Wireless charger (if equipped)

A portable device can be charged by just placing Qi standard wireless charge compatible portable devices according to the Wireless Power Consortium, such as smartphones and mobile batteries, etc., on the charge area. This function cannot be used with portable devices that are larger than the charging area. Also, depending on the portable device, it may not operate as normal. Please read the operation manual for portable devices to be used.

■The "Qi" symbol

The "Qi" symbol is a trademark of the Wireless Power Consortium. 

Abstract black logo design resembling a stylized lowercase 'q' with a dot above, on white background (no text or symbols)

■Name for all parts


C A B

A Power supply switch B Operation indicator light c Charge area

■Using the wireless charger

1 Press the power supply switch of the wireless charger. Switches on and off with each press of the power supply switch. When turned on, the operation indicator light (green) comes on. Even with the hybrid system off, the on/off state of the power supply switch is memorized. 

q

2 Place the charging side of the portable device down. When charging, the operation indi- cator light (orange) comes on. If charging is not occurring, try placing the portable device as close to the center of the charging area as possible. When charging is complete, the operation indicator light (green) comes on. 

qi

■Recharging function

\- When charging is complete and after a fixed time in the charge suspension state, charging restarts. \- When the portable device is moved, charging is stopped for a moment and then it restarts.

■Lighting conditions of operation indicator light

Operation indicator light	Conditions
Turning off	When the Wireless charger power supply is off
Green (comes on)	On Standby (charging possible state)
	When charging is complete*

Operation indicator light	Conditions
Orange (comes on)	When placing the portable device on the charging area (detecting the portable device)
	Charging

\*: Depending on the portable device, there are cases where the operation indicator light will continue being lit up orange even after the charging is complete. \- When the operation indicator light flashes When an error occurs, the operation indicator light flashes an orange color. Handle the error based on the following tables. \- Flashing repeatedly once every second (Orange)

Suspected causes	Handling method
Vehicle to charger communication failure.	If the power switch is in ACC: Turn the power switch to ON.If the power switch is in ON: Turn the power switch to OFF and then back to ON.If the operation indicator light still blinks after performing the above procedure, contact your Toyota dealer.

• Repeatedly flashes 3 times continuously (Orange)

Suspected causes	Handling method
A foreign substance is between the portable device and charge area.	Remove the foreign substance from between portable device and the charge area.
The portable device is out of sync due to the device being shifted from the center of the charge area.	Place the portable device near the center of the charge area.

• Repeatedly flashes 4 times continuously (Orange)

Suspected causes	Handling method
Temperature rising within the wireless charger.	Stop charging at once and start charging again after for a while.

■The wireless charger can be operated when

The power switch is in ACC or ON.

■ Usable portable devices

Qi standard wireless charge standard can be used on compatible devices. However, not all Qi standard devices and compatibility are guaranteed. Starting with mobile phones and smartphones, it is aimed for low power electrically supplied portable devices of no more than 5W.

■When covers and accessories are attached to portable devices

Do not charge in situations where cover and accessories not able to handle Qi are attached to the portable device. Depending on the type of cover and accessory, it may not be possible to charge. When charging is not performed even with the portable device placed on the charge area, remove the cover and accessories.

■While charging, noise enters the AM radio

Turn off the wireless charger and confirm that the noise has decreased. If the noise decreases, continuously pushing the power supply switch of the wireless charger for 2 seconds, the frequency of the charger can be changed and the noise can be reduced. Also, on that occasion, the operation indicator light will flash orange 2 times. ■ Important points of the wireless charger - If the electronic key cannot be detected within the vehicle interior, charging cannot be done. When the door is opened and closed, charging may be temporarily suspended. - When charging, the wireless charging device and portable device will get warmer, however this is not a malfunction. When a portable device gets warm while charging, charging may stop due to the protection function on the portable device side. In this case, when the temperature of the portable device drops significantly, charge again. ●Depending on usage of the portable device, it may not be fully charged. This is not a malfunction. - When using a mobile phone near a wireless charger, the call sensi- tivity and communication speed may be reduced. Operation sounds When the power supply is turned on, while searching for the portable device a sound will be produced, however this is not a malfunction. ■Cleaning the wireless charger →P.569 ■Label indicating precautions for using the wireless charger There is a label on the wireless charger. Follow the instructions on the label. 

q

■Certification for the wireless charger FCC Provided Information: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with Part 18 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. This device complies with Part 18 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Declaration of Conformity Trade Name: Model Numbers: Responsible Party: Support Contact: Panasonic AT1701 contains CA-QS03J1AJ Panasonic Corporation of North America Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102-5490 http://shop.panasonic.com/support/

Panasonic

PRODUCT SAFETY AND COMPLIANCE DEPARTMENT. PANASONIC CORPORATION OF NORTH AMERICA. TWO RIVERFRONT PLAZA, 8TH FLOOR, NEARK, NJ 07102-5400 FCC Declaration of Conformity Summary

Product Name	In-Vehicle Wireless Charger
Model Number	AT1701
Brand Name	Panasonic
Size and Mass	245mm (w), 136mm (l) and 48mm (h) and mass is 515grams
Purpose Updated DoC	Added similarity variant model / AT1701 contains CA-QS03J1AJ
Compliance Information	47 CFR, FCC Part 18, Subpart C for ISM EquipmentFCC's KDB 680106 D01 RF Exposure Wireless Charging Apps v02Industry Canada RSS-216, Issue 1, dated August 2014For Wireless Power Transfer Devices (Wireless Chargers)
Responsible Applicant	Panasonic CorporationAutomotive & Industrial Systems CompanyAutomotive Infotainment Systems Business Division4261, Ikonobe-cho, Tsuzuki-ku, Yokohama-shi, 224-8520, Japan
Responsible Factories	Panasonic Corporation, Automotive & Industrial Systems CompanyAutomotive Infotainment / Systems Business DivisionGlobal Manufacturing Innovation Center, Matsumoto Factory5652 Sasaga, Matsumoto city, Nagano 399-8730, JapanPanasonic Automotive Systems Czech, s.r.o.U Panasonicu 266, 530 06 Pardubice-Stare Civice, Czech RepublicPanasonic Automotive Systems Asia Pacific (Thailand) Co.,Ltd101 Moo 2 Teparak Road, T.Bangsaothong Ging A.BangsaothongSamutprakarn 10540 ThailandPanasonic Automotive Systems Dalian Co., Ltd.No.300, HongGang Road, GanJingZi District, Dalian,Liaoning Province, 116033 China
Responsible Sales Company	Panasonic Consumer Electronics CompanyDivision of Panasonic Corporation of North AmericaTwo Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102-5490General Contact: http://shop.panasonic.com/support
Special Conditions For Compliance	In-Vehicle Wireless Charger will be installed and used exclusively within transportation vehicle and as such, it is exempt from the following requirements: (1) Part 15 digital device technical rules in accordance with §15.103(a); and (2) §15.105(b) full text information to user to appear in User Manual in accordance with §18.213.
EMI Test Report	TCB	UL Japan
	Test Report	10120384-R2
PSCD	Model Tested	AT1701 contains CA-QS03J1AJ
	Date Issued	12/14/2015
	Methodology	FCC-OET MP-4

Panasonic

PRODUCT SAFETY AND COMPLIANCE DEPARTMENT. PANASONIC CORPORATION OF NORTH AMERICA. TWO RIVERFRONT PLAZA, 9 ^TH FLOOR, NEWARK, NJ 07102-5480

Panasonic

PRODUCT SAFETY AND COMPLIANCE DEPARTMENT. PANASONIC CORPORATION OF NORTH AMERICA. TWO RIVERFRONT PLAZA, 9TH FLOOR, NEARKY, NJ 07102-5480

FCC Declaration of Conformity

Summary

RF Exposure Evaluation	TCB	UL Japan
	MPE Test Report	10197157S-E-R1
	Model Tested	AT1701 contains CA-QS03J1AJ
	Date Issued	12/14/2015
	Methodology	KDB 680106 D01 RF Exposure Wireless Charging Apps v02
Importation	The subject In-Vehicle Wireless Charger can be imported on behalf of Panasonic affiliated sales companies by PNA's Logistics Import Customs, or their authored brokers, by electrically filing FCC Form 740 while declaring Box 2 with no reference to any FCC ID.

This DoC is granted for the subject In-Vehicle Wireless Charger on the basis of the manufacturer's attested compliance with the above described conditions and in accordance with FCC Part 18 and FCC's KDB 0680106 D01 RF Exposure Wireless Charging Apps v02. Certificate Number: DoC 2014-008C Applicant Ref No.: PAS-16-F001 Richard Mullin Issued by: Richard Mullen Issue Date: January 14, 2016 PRODUCT SAFETY AND COMPLIANCE DEPARTMENT. PANASONIC CORPORATION OF NORTH AMERICA. TWO RIVERFRONT PLAZA, 9 ^TH FLOOR, NEWARK, NJ 07102-5480 

WARNING

■Caution while driving

When charging a portable device, for safety reasons, the driver should not operate the main part of the portable device while driving.

■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators, as well as any other electrical medical device, should consult their physician about the usage of the wireless charger. The operations of the wireless charger may have an affect on medical devices.

■To prevent damage or burns

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in a possibility of equipment failure and damage, catch fire, burns due to overheat. \- Do not insert any metallic objects between the charging area and the portable device while charging \- Do not attach stickers, metallic objects, etc., to the charger area or portable device \- Do not cover with cloth, etc., and charge \- Do not charge portable devices other than designated \- Do not attempt to dismantle for disassembly or modifications ● Do not hit or apply a strong force 

NOTICE

■ Conditions in which the function may not operate correctly In the following conditions, it may not operate correctly ●The portable device is fully charged ●There is foreign matter between the charge area and portable device ●The temperature of the portable device gets higher from charging ●The charging surface of the portable device is facing up ●The placement of the portable device is out of alignment with the charge area ●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise - When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic objects - Cards to which aluminum foil is attached - Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside • Metallic wallets or bags - Coins - Hand warmers made of metal • Media such as CDs and DVDs 

NOTICE

\- When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby In addition, excluding the above-mentioned, when the charger does not perform normally or the operation display lamp is flashing continuously, it is considered that the wireless charger is malfunctioning. Contact authorized Toyota dealer. ■To prevent failure or damage to data - Do not bring magnetic cards, such as credit cards, a contactless IC card, or magnetic recording media, etc., close to the charger while charging, otherwise, data may disappear under the influence of magnetism. Also, do not bring precision instruments such as wrist watches, etc., close to the charger, as such objects may break. - Do not leave portable devices in the cabin. The temperature inside the cabin may become high, when under the sun, and cause damage to the device. ■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge When the hybrid system is stopped, do not use the wireless charger for a long time.

Armrest

Fold down the armrest for use. 

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with a pink arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)


NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the armrest Do not apply too much load on the armrest.

Assist grips

An assist grip installed on the ceiling can be used to support your body while sitting on the seat. 

Line drawing of a car interior showing seatbelt and door panel (no text or symbols)


WARNING

■Assist grips Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your seat. 

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the assist grip

Do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip.

Coat hooks

The coat hooks are provided with the rear assist grips. 

Line drawing of a car interior showing a close-up of a dog's torso and dashboard (no text or symbols)


WARNING

■Items that must not be hanged on the hook

Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles, causing death or serious injury.

Garage door opener\*

\*: If equipped The garage door opener can be programmed using the HomeLink® to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other devices.

System components

The HomeLink® wireless control system in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming methods on the following pages to determine the method which is appropriate for the device. ▶ Vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror 

A B C B D

A HomeLink® indicator light B Garage door operation indicators C HomeLink® icon Illuminates while HomeLink ^® is operating. D Buttons ▶ Vehicles with Digital Rear-view Mirror 

B C A G HomeLink D E F

A HomeLink® indicator light illuminates above each button selected. B HomeLink® icon C Garage door operation indi-

■Certification for the garage door opener

For vehicles sold in the U.S. mainland, Hawaii, Guam, Saipan, American Samoa and Puerto Rico This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Innovation, Science, and Economic Development Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and ISED rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device. This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End Users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This transmitter must be at least 20 cm from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. cators D HomeLink® logo Appears while HomeLink ^® is operating. When the HomeLink ^® button is pressed, the logo disappears even while the HomeLink ^® is operating. E Setting icon Press the menu button to change the setting. F Menu buttons G HomeLink® buttons ■Codes stored in the HomeLink® memory ●The registered codes are not erased even if the 12-volt battery cable is disconnected. - If learning failed when registering a different code to a HomeLink® button that already has a code registered to it, the already registered code will not be erased.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Innovation, Science, and Economic Development Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and ISED rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device. This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End Users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This transmitter must be at least 20 cm from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Cet appareil est conforme aux règlements de la FCC, section 15, et au CNR-210 d'innovation, Sciences et Développement économique Canada. Le fonctionnement est assujetti aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas causer d'interférences nuisibles et (2) cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celle qui pourrait entraîner un dysfonctionnement. MISE EN GARDE : L'émetteur a subi des tests et est conforme aux règlements de la FCC et d'ISDE. Les changements ou modifications non approuvés explicitement par la partie responsable de la conformité pourraient rendre caduque l'autorisation de l'utilisateur de se servir du dispositif. Cet appareil est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux radiations de la FCC et d'ISDE établies pour un environnement non contrôlé. Les utilisateurs finaux doivent respecter les instructions d'utilisation spécifiques pour satisfaire aux exigences de conformité aux expositions de RF. L'émetteur doit se trouver à 20 cm au minimum de l'utilisateur et ne doit pas être situé au même endroit que tout autre émetteur ou antenne ni fonctionner avec un autre émetteur ou antenne.

■When support is necessary

Visit on the web at www.homelink.com/toyota or call 1-800-355-3515. 

WARNING

■When programming a garage door or other remote control device

The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.

■ Conforming to federal safety standards

Do not use the HomeLink® compatible transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.

■When operating or programming HomeLink®

Never allow a child to operate or play with the HomeLink® buttons.

Programming HomeLink®

■Before programming HomeLink®

\- During programming, it is possible that garage doors, gates, or other devices may operate. For this reason, make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or other devices to prevent injury or other potential harm. \- It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the remote control transmitter for successful programming. \- Garage door opener motors manufactured after 1995 may be equipped with rolling code protection. If this is the case, you may need a stepladder or other sturdy, safe device to reach the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener motor.

■Programming HomeLink®

Steps 2 through 4 must be performed within 60 seconds, otherwise the HomeLink® indicator light will stop flashing and programming will not be successfully completed. 1 Vehicles with Digital Rear-view Mirror: Press the HomeLink® button or menu button When the HomeLink ^® button is pressed: Homelink ^® Training Tutorial will be displayed to assist you programming the HomeLink ^® . When Homelink ^® Training Tutorial is displayed, follow the instructions displayed. When the menu button is pressed: Press the menu button and select the "Set Up >". Homelink® Training Tutorial will be displayed to assist you programming the HomeLink®. When Homelink ^® Training Tutorial is displayed, follow the instructions displayed. 2 Press and release the HomeLink® button you want to program and check that the HomeLink ^® indicator light flashes (orange). 3 Point the remote control transmitter for the device at the rear view mirror, 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the HomeLink® buttons. Keep the HomeLink ^® indicator light in view while programming. 

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with a separate inset view (no text or symbols)

4 Program a device. 

Diagram showing a device with a mouse cursor pointing to a labeled 'HomeLink' component, next to a mirror face.

▶ Programming a device other than an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners) Press and hold the remote control transmitter button until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing green (rolling code) or continuously lit green (fixed code), then release the button. ▶ Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming a device in the Canadian market Press and release the remote control transmitter button at 2 second intervals, repeatedly, until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing (green) (rolling code) or continuously lit (green) (fixed code). 5 Test the HomeLink ^® operation by pressing the newly programmed button and observing the HomeLink ^® indicator light: - HomeLink® indicator light illuminates: Programming of a fixed code device has completed. The garage door or other device should operate when a HomeLink® button is pressed and released. - HomeLink® indicator light flashes rapidly: The garage door opener or other device is equipped with a rolling code. To complete programming, firmly press and hold the HomeLink® button for 2 seconds then release it. - If the garage door or other device does not operate, proceed to “Programming a rolling code system”. 6 Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the remaining HomeLink® buttons.

■Programming a rolling code system

Two or more people may be needed to complete rolling code programming. 1 Locate the "Learn" or "Smart" button on the garage door opener motor in the garage. This button can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. Refer to the owner's manual supplied with the garage door opener motor for details. 

Diagram showing a person using a ladder to install a wall-mounted device, with an inset diagram illustrating the process.

2 Press and release the "Learn" or "Smart" button. Perform 3 within 30 seconds after performing 2. 

Diagram showing a device with a pink arrow pointing to a control panel, connected to an air conditioner unit.

3 Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button (inside the vehicle) for 2 seconds and release it. Repeat this sequence (press/hold/release) up to 3 times to complete programming. If the garage door opener motor operates when the HomeLink® button is pressed, the garage door opener motor recognizes the HomeLink® signal. 

HomeLink

■Enabling 2-way communication with a garage door (only available for compatible devices) When enabled, 2-way communication allows you to check the status of the opening and closing of a garage door through indicators in your vehicle. 2-way communication is only available if the garage door opener motor used is a compatible device. (To check device compatibility, refer to www.homelink.com.) 1 Within 5 seconds after programming the garage door opener has been completed, if the garage door opener motor is trained to HomeLink®, both garage door operation indicators will flash rapidly (green) and the light on the garage door opener motor will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled. If the indicators do not flash, perform 2 and 3 within the first 10 presses of the HomeLink® button after programming has been completed. 2 Press a programmed HomeLink® button to operate a garage door. 3 Within 1 minute of pressing the HomeLink® button, after the garage door operation has stopped, press the "Learn" or "Smart" button on the garage door opener motor. Within 5 seconds of the establishment of 2-way communication with the garage door opener, both garage door operation indicators in the vehicle will flash rapidly (green) and the light on the garage door opener motor will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled.

■Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button

When the following procedure is performed, buttons which already have devices registered to them can be overwritten: 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. 2 When the HomeLink ^® indicator starts flashing orange, release the HomeLink ^® button and perform “Programming HomeLink ^® ” 1 (it takes 20 seconds for the HomeLink ^® indicator to start flashing).

■Before programming

● Install a new battery in the transmitter. ●The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink® buttons.

Operating HomeLink®

Press the appropriate HomeLink® button. The HomeLink® indicator light should turn on. The status of the opening and closing of a garage door is shown by the garage door operation indicators. ▶ Vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror 

Diagram showing a device with labeled components A and B, including icons for signal, house, and control points.

A Opening B Closing ▶ Vehicles with Digital Rearview Mirror 

A B

A Opening B Closing This function is only available if the garage door opener motor used is a compatible device. (To check device compatibility, refer to www.homelink.com.)

Color Status
Orange (flash-ing)	Currently open-ing/closing
Color Status
Green	Opening/closing has completed
Red (flashing)	Feedback signals cannot be received

The indicators can operate within approximately 820 ft. (250 m) of the garage door. However, if there are obstructions between the garage door and the vehicle, such as houses and trees, feedback signals from the garage door may not be received. To recall the previous door operation status, press and release either HomeLink® buttons and or and (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror), and or and (vehicles with Digital Rear-view Mirror) simultaneously. The last recorded status will be displayed for 3 seconds.

Erasing the entire HomeLink® memory (all three codes)

Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the HomeLink ^® indicator light changes from continuously lit (orange) to rapidly flashing (green). If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the HomeLink ^® memory. 

HomeLink

7

7-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior...... 566 Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior...... 569

7-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements 572 General maintenance.. 573 Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs 576

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions.... 577 Hood 579 Positioning a floor jack 580 Engine compartment... 582 12-volt battery 588 Tires 590 Tire inflation pressure . 605 Wheels 607 Air conditioning filter.... 609 Cleaning the hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vent and filter...... 611 Wiper insert replacement 615 Wireless remote control/electronic key battery 618 Checking and replacing fuses.... 621 Light bulbs.... 624

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior

Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition:

Cleaning instructions

- Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust. - Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois. - For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water. - Wipe away any water. - Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates. If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.

Automatic car washes

●Before washing the vehicle: - Fold the mirrors - Turn off the power back door (if equipped) Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving. ●Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface, parts (wheel, etc.) and harm your vehicle's paint. ●Rear spoiler may not be washable in some automatic car washes. There may also be an increased risk of damage to vehicle.

■High pressure car washes

As water may enter the cabin, do not bring the nozzle tip near the gaps around the doors or perimeter of the windows, or spray these areas continuously.

■Note for a smart key system (if equipped)

If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle: \- Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.) \- Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key system. (→P.148)

■Wheels and wheel ornaments

- Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. ●Wash detergent off with water immediately after use. ● To protect the paint from damage, make sure to observe the following precautions. - Do not use acidic, alkaline or abrasive detergent - Do not use hard brushes - Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, such as after driving or parking in hot weather

Bumpers

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

Plated portions

If dirt cannot be removed, clean the parts as follows: - Use a soft cloth dampened with an approximately 5% solution of neutral detergent and water to clean the dirt off. ● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. ●To remove oily deposits, use alcohol wet wipes or a similar product. 

WARNING

■When washing the vehicle

Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause the electrical components, etc. to catch fire.

■When cleaning the windshield (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

Set the wiper switch to off. If the wiper switch is in "AUTO", the wipers may operate unexpectedly in the following situations, and may result in hands being caught or other serious injuries and cause damage to the wiper blades. 

A B

 Off  AUTO \- When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is touched by hand - When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor - If something bumps against the windshield - If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into the raindrop sensor

■Precautions regarding the exhaust pipes

Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipes to become quite hot. When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipes until they have cooled sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes can cause burns.

■Precaution regarding the rear bumper with Blind Spot Monitor (if equipped)

If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped or scratched, the system may malfunction. If this occurs, consult your Toyota dealer. 

NOTICE

■To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum wheels, etc.) ●Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases: • After driving near the sea coast • After driving on salted roads - If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface - If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint surface • After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances - If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud - If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface ● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately. ● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low humidity when storing the wheels. ■Cleaning the exterior lights ●Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights. - Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause damage to the lenses. ■When using an automatic car wash (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers) Set the wiper switch to off position. If the wiper switch is in "AUTO", the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be damaged. ■When using a high pressure car wash - When washing the vehicle, do not let water from the high-pressure washer directly hit the camera or the area around the camera. Due to the shock from the high pressure water, it is possible that the device may not operate normally. - Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manufactured cover), or connectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they come into contact with high-pressure water. - Traction related parts - Steering parts - Suspension parts - Brake parts - Keep the cleaning nozzle at least 11.9 in. (30 cm) away from the vehicle body. Otherwise resin section, such as moldings and bumpers, may be deformed and damaged. Also, do not continuously hold the nozzle in the same place. - Do not spray the lower part of the windshield continuously. If water enters the air conditioning system intake located near the lower part of the windshield, the air conditioning system may not operate correctly. - Do not wash the underside of the vehicle using a high pressure car washer.

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior

Perform cleaning in a man- ner appropriate to each component and its material.

Protecting the vehicle interior

- Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water. - If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%. Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.

■Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.

■Handling the seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts. 

WARNING

Water in the vehicle

\- Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle, such as on the floor, on the rear seats, in the hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vent or in the luggage compartment. ( P.79) Doing so may cause the hybrid battery, electrical components, etc. to malfunction or catch fire. \- Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. (→P.36) An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Vehicles with wireless charger: Do not let the wireless charger ( P.549) get wet. Failure to do so may cause the charger to become hot and cause burns or could cause electric shock resulting in death or serious injury.

■Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)

Do not use a polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. 

NOTICE

■Cleaning detergents

\- Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may dis-color the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces: • Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach \- Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol \- Do not use a polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other interior part's painted surface may be damaged.

■Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces: \- Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately. \- Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer. \- Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.

Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water. Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.

■When cleaning the inside of the windshield

Do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens. ( P.244)

■Cleaning the inside of the rear window

\- Do not use a glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires. \- Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.

Cleaning the leather areas

- Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. - Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent. Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent. \- Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent. \- Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.

Caring for leather areas

Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle's interior.

Cleaning the synthetic leather areas

- Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. - Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%. - Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.

Maintenance requirements

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner's responsibility to perform regular checks. Toyota recommends the following maintenance:

■Repair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repairs to ensure performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.

■Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer

●Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle. - Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly take care of it. 

WARNING

■If your vehicle is not properly maintained

Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible death or serious injury.

■Handling of the 12-volt battery

●Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area. ● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately. ●12-volt battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (→P.588)

General maintenance

General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.

Scheduled maintenance

Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule. For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".

■ Resetting the message indicating maintenance is required

After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance schedule, please reset the reminder light or message. To reset the reminder light or message, follow the procedure described below: 1 Press  of the meter  control switches and select ⚙️ on the multi-information display. 2 Press  of the meter control switches and select "Vehicle Settings". Then press and hold  3 Press  of the meter control switches and select "Scheduled Maintenance". Then press  4 Select "Yes" and press 

Do-it-yourself maintenance

You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself. Please be aware that do-it-your-self maintenance may affect warranty coverage. The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended. For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate "Owner's Warranty Information Booklet" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".

General maintenance

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance Guide”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Toyota dealer or qualified service shop for advice. 

WARNING

■If the hybrid system is running Turn the hybrid system off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks. Engine compartment

Items Check points
Brake fluid	Is the brake fluid at the correct level? (→P.586)
Engine/power control unit coolant	Is the engine/power con-trol unit coolant at the correct level? (→P.584)
Engine oil	Is the engine oil at the correct level? (→P.582)
Exhaust system	There should not be any fumes or strange sounds.
Radiator/condenser	The radiator and condenser should be free from foreign objects.(→P.585)
Washer fluid	Is there sufficient washer fluid?(→P.587)

Luggage compartment

Items Check points
12-volt battery	Check the connec-tions. (→P.588)

Vehicle interior

Items Check points
Accelerator pedal	The accelerator pedal should move smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching).
Hybrid transmission “Park” mechanism	When parked on a slope and the shift position is in P, is the vehicle securely stopped?

Items Check points
Brake pedal	Does the brake pedal move smoothly?Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance from the floor?Does the brake pedal have the correct amount of free play?
Brakes	The vehicle should not pull to one side when the brakes are applied.The brakes should work effectively.The brake pedal should not feel spongy.The brake pedal should not get too close to the floor when the brakes are applied.
Head restraints	Do the head restraints move smoothly and lock securely?
Indicators/buzzers	Do the indicators and buzzers function properly?
Lights	Do all the lights come on?
Parking brake	Does the parking brake operate normally?When parked on a slope and the parking brake is on, is the vehicle securely stopped?
Seat belts	Do the seat belts operate smoothly?The seat belts should not be damaged.
Seats	Do the seat controls operate properly?
Steering wheel	Does the steering wheel rotate smoothly?Does the steering wheel have the correct amount of free play?There should not be any strange sounds coming from the steering wheel.

Vehicle exterior

Items Check points
Doors	· Do the doors operate smoothly?
Engine hood	· Does the engine hood lock system work properly?
Fluid leaks	· There should not be any signs of fluid leakage after the vehicle has been parked.
Tires	· Is the tire inflation pressure correct? · The tires should not be damaged or excessively worn. · Have the tires been rotated according to the maintenance schedule? · The wheel nuts should not be loose.
Windshield wipers/rear window wiper	· The wiper blades should not show any signs of cracking, splitting, wear, contamination or deformation. · The wiper blades should clear the windshield/rear window without streaking or skipping.

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs

Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on

The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the vehicle.

Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:

- When the 12-volt battery is disconnected or discharged Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set. \- When the fuel tank cap is loose The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several driving trips

The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test

Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

Do-it-yourself service precautions

If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure as given in these sections. Maintenance

Items Parts and tools
12-volt battery condition(→P.588)	GreaseConventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)
Brake fluid level(→P.586)	FMVSS No.116DOT 3 or SAEJ1703 brake fluidFMVSS No.116DOT 4 or SAEJ1704 brake fluidRag or papertowelFunnel (used only for adding brake fluid)

Items Parts and tools
Engine/power control unit coolant level (→P.584)	·“Toyota Super Long Life Cool-ant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology For the U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Cool-ant” is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deion-ized water. For Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Cool-ant” is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and 45% deion-ized water.·Funnel (used only for adding coolant)
Engine oil level (→P.582)	·“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent·Rag or paper towel·Funnel (used only for adding engine oil)
Fuses (→P.621)	·Fuse with same amperage rating as original
Items	Parts and tools
Hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vent (→P.611)	Vacuum cleaner, etc,Phillips screw-driver
Light bulbs (→P.624)	Bulb with same number and watt-age rating as originalPhillips-head screwdriverFlathead screw-driverWrench
Radiator and condenser (→P.585)	—
Tire inflation pressure (→P.605)	Tire pressure gaugeCompressed air source
Washer fluid (→P.587)	Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)


WARNING

The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions. ■ When working on the engine compartment Make sure that "IGNITION ON" on the multi-information display and the "READY" indicator are both off. \- Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan. \- Be careful not to touch the engine, power control unit, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot. \- Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine compartment. \- Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable. ■When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille Be sure the power switch is OFF. With the power switch in ON, the electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. ( P.585) Safety glasses Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc., from getting in your eyes. 

NOTICE

■If you remove the air cleaner filter Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air.

Hood

Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.

Opening the hood

1 Pull the hood lock release lever. The hood will pop up slightly. 

Diagram showing car seatbelt switch with directional arrow and magnified view of steering wheel

2 Push the auxiliary catch lever to the left and lift the hood. 

Diagram showing a car interior with a highlighted vehicle and directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

3 Hold the hood open by inserting the supporting rod into the slot. 

Diagram showing car engine compartment with tool insertion and component disassembly, including magnified insets highlighting mechanical components.


WARNING

■Pre-driving check Check that the hood is fully closed and locked. If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury. ■After installing the support rod into the slot Make sure the rod supports the hood securely from falling down on to your head or body. ■When closing the hood When closing the hood, take extra care to prevent your fingers etc. from being caught. 

Diagram showing a car with a 'no' symbol and a warning sign, indicating no hazard or absence of traffic.


NOTICE

■When closing the hood

Be sure to return the support rod to its clip before closing the hood. Closing the hood without returning the support rod properly could cause the hood to bend.

Positioning a floor jack

When using a floor jack, follow the instructions in the manual provided with the jack and perform the operation safely. When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.

Location of the jack point

Front 

Diagram showing a car undercarriage with a lever and a mechanical device, no text or symbols present

Rear 

Technical diagram showing vehicle suspension system with mechanical components and a close-up of the assembly process.

Engine compartment

Components


A B C D A J I H G F E

A Fuse boxes ( P.621) B Engine oil filler cap ( P.583) C Engine oil level dipstick ( P.582) D Brake fluid reservoir ( P.586) E Radiator ( P.585) F Electric cooling fan G Condenser ( P.585) H Power control unit coolant reservoir ( P.585) I Washer fluid tank ( P.587) J Engine coolant reservoir ( P.584) ■12-volt battery →P.588

Checking and adding the engine oil

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.

■ Checking the engine oil

1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and turning off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine. 2 Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out. 

Technical diagram of an engine cylinder head assembly with internal components and a magnified inset showing a component detail (no text or labels)

3 Wipe the dipstick clean. 4 Reinsert the dipstick fully. 5 Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level. 

A B C

A Low B Normal C Excessive The shape of the dipstick may differ depending on the type of vehicle or engine. 6 Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

■ Checking the oil type and preparing the items needed

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil. \- Engine oil selection $$ \rightarrow \mathrm{P.686} $$ \- Oil quantity (Low → Full) 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.) \- Item Clean funnel

■Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as that already in the engine. 

Technical line drawing of a car engine bay with a circular component highlighted (no text or symbols)

1 Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise. 2 Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick. 3 Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.

■Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in between oil maintenance intervals. - When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after replacing the engine - If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used - When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, when towing, or when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently - When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through heavy traffic 

WARNING

■Used engine oil

●Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water. \- Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal. \- Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children. 

NOTICE

■To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on a regular basis.

■When replacing the engine oil

● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components. ●Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged. - Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle. - Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

If oil is spilled on the engine cover

To prevent the engine cover from being damaged, remove any engine oil from the engine cover as soon as possible using a neutral detergent. Do not use an organic solvent such as brake cleaner.

Checking the coolant

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the reservoir when the hybrid system is cold.

■Engine coolant reservoir


Technical diagram of a car engine bay with labeled components A, B, and C

A Reservoir cap B "FULL" line C "LOW" line If the level is on or below the "LOW" line, add coolant up to the "FULL" line. (→P.677)

■Power control unit coolant reservoir


A B C

A Reservoir cap B "FULL" line C "LOW" line If the level is on or below the "LOW" line, add coolant up to the "FULL" line. (→P.678)

Coolant selection

Only use "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" or a similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology. U.S.A.: "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31°F [-35°C]) Canada: "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44°F [-42°C]) For more details about coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.

■If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing

Visually check the radiators, hoses, engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps, drain cock and water pump. If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer, test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system. 

WARNING

■When the hybrid system is hot

Do not remove the engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps. The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns. 

NOTICE

■When adding coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

■If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.

Checking the radiator and condenser

Check the radiator and condenser, and clear away any foreign objects. If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer. 

WARNING

■When the hybrid system is hot

Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.

■When the electric cooling fan is operating

Do not touch the engine compartment. With the power switch in ON mode, the electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. Be sure the power switch is OFF when working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille.

Checking and adding the brake fluid

- Checking fluid level

The brake fluid level should be between the "MAX" and "MIN" lines on the tank. 

Diagram of car interior showing front and rear compartments with labeled parts in Chinese

■Adding fluid

1 Slide and lift up the rubber strip to partly remove it as shown. 

Diagram of a vehicle engine compartment with internal components and airflow direction arrow (no text or labels)

2 Disconnect the claws and remove the service cover. 

Diagram of car engine compartment with highlighted component and directional arrow indicating motion

3 Remove the reservoir cap. 

Mechanical component diagram showing a piston and crankshaft assembly with a pink arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

4 Add brake fluid slowly while checking the fluid level. Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.

Fluid type	FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluidFMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or SAE J1704 brake fluid
Item Clean funnel

■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air

Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid. 

WARNING

■When filling the reservoir

Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor. 

NOTICE

■If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high. If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.

Adding the washer fluid

If any washer does not work or the warning message appears on the multi-information display, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid. 

Diagram showing engine compartment and mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols


WARNING

■When adding washer fluid

Do not add washer fluid when the hybrid system is hot or operating as washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the hybrid system, etc. 

NOTICE

■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid. Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle's painted surfaces, as well as damaging the pump leading to problems of the washer fluid not spraying.

Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary. Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.

12-volt battery

Location

The 12-volt battery is located in the right-hand side of luggage compartment. 

Technical line drawing of a car interior showing engine compartment and rear door assembly (no text or symbols)

■Before recharging

When recharging, the 12-volt battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, observe the following precautions before recharging: - If recharging with the 12-volt battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable. ● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the 12-volt battery.

■ After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery (vehicles with smart key system)

●The hybrid system may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system. 1 Shift the shift lever to P. 2 Open and close any of the doors. 3 Restart the hybrid system. ● Unlocking the doors using the smart key system may not be possible immediately after reconnecting the 12-volt battery. If this happens, use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors. \- Start the hybrid system with the power switch in ACC. The hybrid system may not start with the power switch turned off. However, the hybrid system will operate normally from the second attempt. ●The power switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the 12-volt battery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the power switch mode to the status it was in before the 12-volt battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the power switch before disconnect the 12-volt battery. Take extra care when connecting the 12-volt battery if the power switch mode prior to discharge is unknown. If the hybrid system will not start even after multiple attempts at all methods above, contact your Toyota dealer. 

WARNING

■ Chemicals in the 12-volt battery

The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the 12-volt battery: - Do not cause sparks by touching the 12-volt battery terminals with tools. - Do not smoke or light a match near the 12-volt battery. ● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes. ● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte. 

WARNING

● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the 12-volt battery. - Keep children away from the 12-volt battery. ■Where to safely charge the 12-volt battery Always charge the 12-volt battery in an open area. Do not charge the 12-volt battery in a garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation. Emergency measures regarding electrolyte ●If electrolyte gets in your eyes Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility. - If electrolyte gets on your skin Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately. - If electrolyte gets on your clothes It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary. \- If you accidentally swallow electrolyte Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately. ■When there is insufficient 12-volt battery fluid Do not use if there is insufficient fluid in the 12-volt battery. There is a possible danger that the 12-volt battery may explode. 

NOTICE

■When recharging the 12-volt battery Never recharge the 12-volt battery while the hybrid system is operating. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.

Removing the 12-volt battery cover

1 Open the deck board ( P.541) 2 Disengage the 12 claws and pull the luggage side cover to remove it. When installing the luggage side cover, make sure that the claws are installed securely. 

Diagram showing a car interior with a highlighted seat and directional arrow, no text or symbols present

Exterior

Make sure that the 12-volt battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps. 

A B A

A Terminals B Hold-down clamp

Tires

Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.

Checking tires

Check if the treadwear indicators are showing on the tires. Also check the tires for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one side of the tread. Check the spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated. 

A B C

A New tread B Worn tread C Treadwear indicator The location of treadwear indicators is shown by a "TWI" or "△mark, etc., molded into the sidewall of each tire. Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.

- When to replace your vehicle's tires

Tires should be replaced if: ●The treadwear indicators are showing on a tire. ●You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage. ● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage. If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

■Maximum load of tire

Check that the number given by dividing the maximum load by 1.10 of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater. For the GAWR, see the Certification Regulation Label. For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire. (→P.696) 

Diagram of a car seatbelt switch mechanism with a black arrow indicating the process (no text or symbols present)

Tire types

●Summer tires Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires. ●All season tires All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving. ●Snow tires For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (→P.378) ■If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost. 

WARNING

■When inspecting or replacing tires Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. - Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns. Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear. \- Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota. \- Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires). \- Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires. \- Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle. Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously. \- Do not tow if your vehicle has a compact spare tire installed. 

NOTICE

■Driving on rough roads Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes. These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle's wheels and body. If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

Tire rotation

Rotate the tires in the order shown. To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Toyota recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection. Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure warning system after tire rotation. (if equipped) 

graph TD
    A[" "] <--> B[" "]
    C[" "] <--> D[" "]
    E["A"] --> A

A Front

■When rotating the tires (vehicles with tire pressure warning system)

Make sure that the power switch is OFF. If the tires are rotated while the power switch is in ON, the tire position information will not be updated. If this accidentally occurs, either turn the power switch to OFF and then to ON, or initialize the system after checking that the tire pressure is properly adjusted.

Tire pressure warning system (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. - If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is warned a screen display\* and by a warning light. (→P.649) \*: Vehicles with tire inflation pressure display function only - Vehicles with tire inflation pressure display function only: The tire pressure detected by the tire pressure warning system can be displayed on the multi-information display. (→P.98) The illustration used is intended as an example, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the multi-information display. 

34 34 34 34 [psi]

■Routine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.

■Tire inflation pressure\*

\*: Vehicles with tire inflation pressure display function only \- It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the power switch is turned to ON. It may also take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation pressure has been adjusted. ●Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also be different from the values measured using a tire pressure gauge.

■ Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly (if equipped)

●In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly. - If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used. - A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire. - A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size. - Tire chains, etc. are equipped. - An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is equipped. - If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed. - If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or wheel housings. - If the tire inflation pressure is extremely higher than the specified level. - If wheel without tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used. - If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning computer. ● Performance may be affected in the following situations. - Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise - When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device If tire position information is not correctly displayed due to the radio wave conditions, the display may be corrected by driving and changing the radio wave conditions. - When the vehicle is parked, the time taken for the warning to start or go off could be extended. - When tire inflation pressure declines rapidly for example when a tire has burst, the warning may not function. ■Warning performance of the tire pressure warning system (if equipped) The warning of the tire pressure warning system will change in accordance with the conditions under which it was initialized. For this reason, the system may give a warning even if the tire pressure does not reach a low enough level, or if the pressure is higher than the pressure that was adjusted to when the system was initialized.

■Certification for tire pressure warning system

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, American Samoa, Guam, Saipan and Puerto Rico

FCC ID: PAXPMVC015 NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

FCC ID: PAXPMVE000 NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

FCC ID: PAXPMVE100 NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada

Model:PMV-C015

NOTE

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

NOTE

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioé lectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.

NOTE

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

NOTE

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioé lectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. TRW Automotive Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor FCC ID: GQ4-72T This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by TRW Automotive U.S. LLC could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada TRW Automotive Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor Model: 335098 IC: 1470A-53T MADE IN U.S.A This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS Standards of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicable aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes: 1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage. 2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by TRW Automotive U.S. LLC could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters ^*1

\*1: Vehicles with tire pressure warning system only When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed. ▶ Except for models made in Japan ^*2 without tire inflation pressure display function When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. (→P.602) ^*2 :The country of production is written on the Certification Regulation Label. ( P.684) For models made in Japan ^2 without tire inflation pressure display function When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Toyota dealer. ^*2 :The country of production is written on the Certification Regulation Label. ( P.684) ■When replacing the tires and wheels (vehicles with tire pressure warning system) If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction. 

NOTICE

■Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and tire valve caps (vehicles with tire pressure warning system) - When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly. ● Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not installed, water could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the tire pressure warning valves could be bound. - When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified. The cap may become stuck.

Initializing the tire pressure warning system (if equipped)

■The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circumstances: - When rotating the tires. - When changing the tire. ● After registering the ID codes. (→P.602) When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.

■How to initialize the tire pressure warning system

▶ Vehicles without tire inflation pressure display function 1 Park the vehicle in a safe place and stop the hybrid system. Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving. 2 Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (→P.690) Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level. 3 Turn the power switch to ON. 4 Press or of the meter control switches on the steering wheel and select 

Diagram of car interior showing steering wheel, gear icon, and control panel with Chinese labels

5 Press or of the meter control switches, select "Vehicle Settings" and then press and hold OK 6 Press or of the meter control switches, select "TPWS" and then press OK 7 Press or of the meter control switches, select the "Set Pressure". Then press and hold OK "Setting Tire Pressure Warning System" will be displayed on the multi-information display and the tire pressure warning light will blink 3 times. When the message disappears, initialization is complete. ▶ Vehicles with tire inflation pressure display function 1 Park the vehicle in a safe place and stop the hybrid system for 20 minutes or more. Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving. 2 Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (→P.690) Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level. 3 Start the hybrid system. 4 Press or of the meter control switches on the steering wheel and select 

Diagram of car interior showing steering wheel, gear icon, and control knob with Chinese labels

5 Press or of the meter control switches, select "Vehicle Settings" and then press and hold OK 6 Press or of the meter control switches, select "TPWS" and then press OK 7 Press or of the meter control switches, select the "Set Pressure". Then press and hold OK "Setting Tire Pressure Warning System" will be displayed on the multi-information display and the tire pressure warning light will blink 3 times. When the message disappears, initialization is complete. A message is displayed on the multi-information display. Also, “--” is displayed for inflation pressure of each tire on the multi-information display while the tire pressure warning system determines the position. 8 Drive straight (with occasional left and right turns) at approximately 25mph (40 km/h) or more for approximately 10 to 30 minutes. When initialization is complete, the inflation pressure of each tire will be displayed on the multi-information display. Even if the vehicle is not driven at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, initialization can be completed by driving for a long time. However, if initialization does not complete after driving for 1 hour or more, park the vehicle in a safe place for approximately 20 minutes and then drive the vehicle again.

■When initializing

● Vehicles with tire inflation pressure display function only: Initialization is performed while driving at a vehicle speed of approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. ● Make sure to carry out initialization after adjusting the tire inflation pressure. Also, make sure the tires are cold before carrying out initialization or tire inflation pressure adjustment. ● Vehicles with tire inflation pressure display function only: The tire pressure warning system can be initialized by yourself, but depending on the driving conditions and driving environment, initialization may take some time to complete.

■The initialization operation

- If you have accidentally turned the power switch to OFF during initialization, it is not necessary to restart the initialization again as initialization will restart automatically when the power switch has been turned to ON for the next time. - If you accidentally perform initialization when initialization is not necessary, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the tires are cold, and conduct initialization again. ● Vehicles with tire inflation pressure display function only: While the position of each tire is being determined and the inflation pressures are not being displayed on the multi-information display, if the inflation pressure of a tire drops, the tire pressure warning light will come on. ■When initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed (vehicles without tire inflation pressure display function) Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer. - When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light does not blink 3 times. ● After driving for a certain period of time since the initialization has been completed, the warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute. If the tire pressure warning system is not initialized properly (vehicles with tire inflation pressure display function) ● In the following situations, initialization may take longer than usual to be completed or may not be possible. Normally, initialization completes within approximately 30 minutes. • Vehicle is not driven at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more \- Vehicle is driven on unpaved roads \- Vehicle is driven near other vehicles and system cannot recognize tire pressure warning valve and transmitters of your vehicle over those of other vehicles. \- If the vehicle is driven in heavy traffic or another situation where other vehicles are driven close by, it may take time for the system to recognize the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters of your vehicle over those of other vehicles. If initialization does not complete after driving for 1 hour or more, park the vehicle in a safe place for approximately 20 minutes and then drive the vehicle again. ●If the vehicle is reversed during initialization, the data up to that point is reset, so perform the initialization procedure again from the beginning. - In the following situations, initialization will not be started or was not completed properly and the system will not operate properly. Perform the initialization procedure again. - If, when attempting to start initialization, the tire pressure warning light does not blink 3 times. - If, when the vehicle has been driven for about 20 minutes after performing initialization, the tire pressure warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then illuminates. If the inflation pressure of each tire is still not displayed, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer. 

WARNING

■When initializing the tire pressure warning system

Do not initialize tire inflation pressure without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.

Registering ID codes (vehicles with tire pressure warning system)

For models made in Japan ^*1 without tire inflation pressure display function Every tire pressure warning valve and transmitter has a unique ID code. In addition to the set of tire pressure warning system sensor ID codes initially registered to the vehicle, a second set of ID codes can be registered. A second set of tire pressure warning system sensor ID codes can be registered at your Toyota dealer. When 2 sets of ID codes have been registered, either ID code set can be selected. \*1: The country of production is written on the Certification Regulation Label. (→P.684) ▶ Except for models made in Japan ^*2 without tire inflation pressure display function ^*2 :The country of production is written on the Certification Regulation Label. ( P.684) Every tire pressure warning valve and transmitter has a unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. When registering the ID codes, perform the following procedure. 1 Park the vehicle in a safe place, wait for approximately 20 minutes, and then start the hybrid system. 2 Press or of the meter control switches on the steering wheel and select 3 Press or of the meter control switches and select "Vehicle Settings", and then press and hold OK 4 Press or of the meter control switches and select "TPWS", and then press OK 5 Press or of the meter control switches and select "Change Wheel". Then press and hold until the tire pressure warning light starts slowly blinking 3 times. The change wheel set mode is activated and registration is started. Vehicles with a tire inflation pressure display function only: Then a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. When registration is being performed, the tire pressure warning light will blink for approximately 1 minute then illuminate and “--” will be displayed for the inflation pressure of each tire on the multi-information display. 

Tire Pressure Recalibrating Please Wait until Complete

6 Drive straight (with occasional left and right turns) at approximately 25mph (40 km/h) or more for approximately 10 to 30 minutes. When registration is completed, the tire pressure warning light will go off and the inflation pressure of each tire will be displayed on the multi-information display. Even if the vehicle is not driven at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, registration can be completed by driving for a long time. However, if registration does not complete after driving for 1 hour or more, perform the procedure again from the beginning. 7 Initialize the tire pressure warning system. ( P.599)

■When registering ID codes

● ID code registration is performed while driving at a vehicle speed of approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. ●Before performing ID code registration, make sure that no wheels with tire pressure warning valve and transmitters installed are near the vehicle. ● Make sure to initialize the tire pressure warning system after registering the ID codes. If the system is initialized before registering the ID codes, the initialized values will be invalid. ●ID codes can be registered by yourself, but depending on the driving conditions and driving environment, registration may take some time to complete. ● As the tires will be warm when registration is completed, make sure to allow the tires to cool before performing initialization.

■ Canceling ID code registration

● To cancel ID code registration after it has been started, turn the power switch to OFF before driving the vehicle. If the vehicle is driven after ID code registration is started, to cancel registration, perform the ID code registration start procedure again and turn the power switch to OFF before driving. \- If ID code registration has been canceled, the tire pressure warning light will blink for approximately 1 minute when the power switch is turned to ON and then illuminate. The tire pressure warning system will be operational when the tire pressure warning light turns off. \- If the warning light does not turn off even after several minutes have elapsed, ID code registration may not have been canceled correctly. To cancel registration, perform the ID code registration start procedure again and then turn the power switch to OFF before driving.

■If ID codes are not registered properly

\- In the following situations, ID code registration may take longer than usual to be completed or may not be possible. Normally, registration completes within approximately 30 minutes. If ID code registration is not complete after driving for approximately 30 minutes, continue driving for a while. - Vehicle is not parked for approximately 20 minutes or more before driving • Vehicle is not driven at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more - Vehicle is driven on unpaved roads - Vehicle is driven near other vehicles and system cannot recognize tire pressure warning valve and transmitters of your vehicle over those of other vehicles - Wheel with tire pressure warning valve and transmitter installed is inside or near the vehicle If registration does not complete after driving for 1 hour or more, perform the ID code registration procedure again from the beginning. \- If the vehicle is reversed during registration, the data up to that point is reset, so perform the registration procedure again from the beginning. In the following situations, ID code registration will not be started or was not completed properly and the system will not operate properly. Perform the ID code registration procedure again. - If, when attempting to start ID code registration, the tire pressure warning light does not blink slowly 3 times. - If, when the vehicle has been driven for about 20 minutes after performing ID code registration, the tire pressure warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then illuminates. If the ID codes cannot be registered even when performing the above procedure, contact your Toyota dealer.

Tire inflation pressure

Make sure to maintain the proper tire inflation pressure. Tire inflation pressure should be checked at least once per month. However, Toyota recommends that tire inflation pressure be checked once every two weeks. (→P.690)

Checking the specified tire inflation pressure

The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size are displayed on the tire and loading information label. (→P.690) 

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY: TOTAL 6 FRONT X: REAR 6 The combined weight of accounts and cargo should never exceed 100 kg or 2000 lbs. TIRE SIZE OLD TIRE PRESSURE PNEU DIMENSIONS PRESSION DES FRONT XXXX/XXXXXX XXXKPa, XXPSI AWNT XXXX/XXXXXX XXXKPa, XXPSI REAR XXXX/XXXXXX XXXKPa, XXPSI ARPIÈRE XXXX/XXXXXX XXXKPa, XXPSI SPARE XXXX/XXXXXX XXXKPa, XXPSI BE SECURE XXXX/XXXXXX XXXKPa, XXPSI OFF D setting MANUAL FOR ACID DIAL INFORMATION FOR LEVELS COUNTER FOR PLUS DE RESUBANCE

Inspection and adjustment procedure


A B

A Tire valve B Tire pressure gauge 1 Remove the tire valve cap. 2 Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve. 3 Read the pressure using the gauge gradations. 4 If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the pressure. If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate. 5 After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage. 6 Put the tire valve cap back on. ■Tire inflation pressure check interval You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. Do not forget to check the spare. ■Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following: - Reduced fuel economy - Reduced driving comfort and poor handling ●Reduced tire life due to wear - Reduced safety ●Damage to the drive train If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Toyota dealer. ■Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following: - Check only when the tires are cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading. ●Always use a tire pressure gauge. It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appearance. - It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as heat is generated in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. ●Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced. 

WARNING

■Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated. If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury: Excessive wear Uneven wear Poor handling ● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires ● Air leaking from between tire and wheel ● Wheel deformation and/or tire damage ● Greater possibility of tire damage while driving (due to road hazards, expansion joints, sharp edges in the road, etc.) 

NOTICE

■When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on. If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and cause an air leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.

Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control.

Wheel selection

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and inset ^* . Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer. \*: Conventionally referred to as offset. Toyota does not recommend using the following: ● Wheels of different sizes or types - Used wheels ● Bent wheels that have been straightened

■When replacing wheels (vehicles with tire pressure warning system)

The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (→P.593, 608)

WARNING

■When replacing wheels

\- Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner's Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control. ● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.

■When installing the wheel nuts

Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

■Use of defective wheels prohibited

Do not use cracked or deformed wheels. Doing so could cause the tire to leak air during driving, possibly causing an accident.

NOTICE

■Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (vehicles with tire pressure warning system) ●Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your Toyota dealer. \- Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle. Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels.

Aluminum wheel precautions

- Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels. - When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km). - Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains. - Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

Air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.

Removal method

1 Turn the power switch to OFF. 2 Open the glove box and slide off the damper. 

Diagram showing a car interior with a highlighted seatbelt and a close-up of the seatbelt mechanism (no text or symbols present)

3 Push in each side of the glove box to disconnect the claws, and then slowly and fully open the glove box while supporting it. 

Diagram illustrating car seatbelt adjustment with labeled arrows and directional arrows indicating movement or positioning.

4 With the glove box fully open, slightly lift up the glove box and pull toward the seat to detach the bottom of the glove box. Do not use excessive force if the glove box does not detach when lightly pulled. Instead, pull toward the seat while slightly adjusting the height of the glove box. 

Diagram illustrating vehicle exhaust system with labeled components and directional arrows indicating flow or movement

5 Unlock the filter cover ( )A pull the filter cover out of the claws ( )B and remove the filter cover. 

Diagram showing engine compartment with directional arrows and labeled sections A and B, likely illustrating vehicle or mechanical system changes.

6 Remove the filter case. 

Technical line drawing of an internal mechanical assembly (no text or symbols visible)

7 Remove the air conditioning filter from the filter case and replace it with a new one. The "UP" marks shown on the filter should be pointing up. 

Diagram showing a device with an upward arrow labeled 'UP' pointing to a stack of components, indicating a process or operation.

8 When installing, reverse the steps listed.

- Checking interval

Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the "Owner's Manual Supplement" or "Scheduled Maintenance".)

If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary. 

NOTICE

■When using the air conditioning system

Make sure that a filter is always installed. Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.

■When removing the glove box

Always follow the specified procedure to remove the glove box ( P.609). If the glove box is removed without following the specified procedure, the hinge of the glove box may become damaged.

■To prevent damage to the filter cover

When moving the filter cover in the direction of arrow to release the fitting, pay attention not to apply excessive force to the claws. Otherwise, the claws may be damaged. 

Safety warning illustration showing a device emitting exhaust with a 'no pollution' symbol, accompanied by a magnified view of the device's exhaust.

Cleaning the hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vent and filter To prevent the fuel economy from being affected, visually inspect the hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake vent periodically for dust and clogs. If it is dusty or clogged or if “Maintenance Required for Traction Battery Cooling Parts See Owner’s Manual” is shown on the multi-information display, clean the air intake vent using the following procedures:

Cleaning the air intake vent

Remove the dust from the air intake vent with a vacuum cleaner, etc. Make sure to only use a vacuum to suck out dust and clogs. Attempting to blow out dust and clogs using an airgun, etc. may push it into the air intake vent. (→P.614) 

Line drawing of a car interior showing a hand cleaning the seat with a brush (no text or symbols)

If dust and clogs cannot be completely removed

If dust and clogs cannot be completely removed with the air intake vent cover installed, remove the cover and clean the filter. 1 Turn the power switch to OFF. 2 Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the clip. 

Diagram showing car interior components with directional arrows indicating motion or movement, including a mesh grille and wheel assembly.

3 Remove the air intake vent cover. Pull the cover as shown in the illustration to disengage the 8 claws, starting from the claw in the upper right corner and pull the cover toward the front of the vehicle to remove it. 

Diagram showing car interior compartments with a highlighted vehicle seat and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

4 Remove the air intake vent filter. Disengage the 4 center claws from the filter. 

Cross-sectional diagram of a vehicle chassis showing internal components and structural elements (no text or labels)

Disengage the claws in the order of A and B to remove the filter from the cover. 

Diagram showing car interior components with labeled parts A and B, including a magnified view of the internal structure.

5 Remove the dust and clogs from the filter using a vacuum cleaner, etc. Make sure to also remove the dust and clogs from the inside of the air intake vent cover. 

Line drawing of a hand holding a mechanical component with a shaded internal area (no text or symbols)

6 Reinstall the filter to the cover. Engage the claws in the order of B and A 

Diagram showing car interior components with labeled parts A and B, including a highlighted section with arrows indicating rotation or movement.

Engage the 4 center claws to install the filter. Make sure that the filter is not crooked or deformed when installing it. 

Cross-sectional diagram of a vehicle showing internal components and airflow paths (no text or labels)

7 Install the air intake vent cover. Insert the tab of the cover as shown in the illustration and push the cover to engage the 8 claws. 

Diagram showing car interior compartments with a basket and gear mechanism, no text or symbols present

8 Using a Phillips screwdriver, install the clip. 

Diagram showing car interior components with highlighted parts and directional arrows indicating action or movement.

■Scheduled maintenance of the air intake vent is necessary when

In some situations such as when the vehicle is used frequently or in heavy traffic or dusty areas, the air intake vent may need to be cleaned more regularly. For details, refer to "Owner's Warranty Information Booklet" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".

■Cleaning the air intake vent

●Dust in the air intake vent may interfere with the cooling of the hybrid battery (traction battery). If charging/discharging of the hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes limited, the distance that the vehicle can be driven using the electric motor (traction motor) may be reduced and the fuel economy may be reduced. Inspect and clean the air intake vent periodically. \- Improper handling of the air intake vent cover and filter may result in damage to them. If you have any concerns about cleaning the filter, contact your Toyota dealer.

If "Maintenance Required for Traction Battery Cooling Parts See Owner's Manual" is shown on the multi-information display

\- If this warning message is shown on the multi-information display, remove the air intake vent cover and clean the filter. ( P.611) ●After cleaning the air intake vent, start the hybrid system and check that the warning message is no longer shown. It may take approximately 20 minutes after the hybrid system is started until the warning message disappears. If the warning message does not disappear, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer. 

WARNING

■When cleaning the air intake vent

\- Do not use water or other liquids to clean the air intake vent. If water is applied to the hybrid battery (traction battery) or other components, a malfunction or fire may occur. ● Before cleaning the air intake vent, make sure to turn the power switch to OFF to stop the hybrid system.

■When removing the air intake vent cover

Do not touch the service plug located near the air intake vent. (→P.77) 

NOTICE

■When cleaning the air intake vent

When cleaning the air intake vent, make sure to only use a vacuum to suck out dust and clogs. If a compressed air blow gun, etc. is used to blow out dust and clogs, the dust or clogs may be pushed into the air intake vent, which may affect the performance of the hybrid battery (traction battery) and cause a malfunction. 

Person using a tool to clean the air vent, no text or symbols visible

■To prevent damage to the vehicle

- Do not allow water or foreign matter to enter the air intake vent when the cover is removed. Carefully handle the removed filter so that it will not be damaged. If the filter is damaged, have it replaced with a new filter by your Toyota dealer. ● Make sure to reinstall the filter and cover to their original positions after cleaning. - Do not install anything to the air intake vent other than the exclusive filter for this vehicle or use the vehicle without the filter installed.

If “Maintenance Required for Traction Battery Cooling Parts See Owner’s Manual” is shown on the multi-information display

If the vehicle is continuously driven with the warning message (indicating that charging/discharging of the hybrid battery (traction battery) may become limited) displayed, the hybrid battery (traction battery) may malfunction. If the warning message is displayed, clean the air intake vent immediately.

Wiper insert replacement

When replacing the wiper insert, perform the following procedure to operate each wiper.

Windshield wipers

■Windshield wiper blade removal and installation

1 While holding the hook portion A of the wiper arm, first lift up the driver side, and then lift up the passenger side. When returning the wiper arms to their original positions, first lower the passenger side, and then lower the driver side. 

A

2 Lift the stopper using a flat-head screwdriver as shown in the illustration. To prevent damage to the wiper arm, protect the tip of the screw- driver with a rag. 

Illustration of a medical procedure showing a needle inserted into a tube and a magnified view of the insertion step with an arrow (no text or symbols present)

3 Slide the wiper blade to remove it from the wiper arm. When installing, reverse the steps listed. 

Diagram showing a medical or surgical tool interacting with a device, with an inset close-up of the component detail (no text or symbols present)

■Wiper insert replacement

1 Pull the wiper insert to remove the claw of the wiper blade from the stopper, and pull out the wiper insert. 

A B

A Stopper B Claw 2 Remove the 2 metal plates from the wiper insert pulled out, and install the plates to a new wiper insert. Make sure that the cutout location and warp direction of the metal blades are same as the original. 

Technical diagram showing a mechanical component with two flanged parts and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

3 Install the wiper insert to the wiper blade from the side without the stopper. 4 Secure the stopper of the wiper insert with the claw of the wiper blade.

Rear window wiper

1 Lift up the rear window wiper arm head cap. 

Diagram showing car seatbelting with magnified view of seatbelt and directional arrow indicating rotation

2 Move the wiper blade until a click sound can be heard and the claw detaches, and then remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm. 

Diagram illustrating car door handle and grip mechanism with directional arrows and magnified detail view

3 Pull the wiper insert out past the stopper on the wiper blade, and then continue to pull until it is completely removed. Lightly grasp between the claws of the wiper blade to allow the wiper insert to lift up, making it easier to remove. 

Illustration of a hand holding a cable with two arrows indicating force or movement (no text or symbols present)

4 Remove the 2 metal plates from the old wiper insert and install them to the replacement wiper insert. 

Diagram of a mechanical component with two parallel rods and two highlighted arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

5 Insert the wiper insert starting from the claw at the center of the wiper blade. Pass the wiper insert through the 3 claws so that it sticks out from the stopper, and then pass the wiper insert through the final remaining claw. Applying a small amount of washer fluid to the wiper insert can make it easier to insert the claws into the grooves. 

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

6 Check that the wiper blade claws are fitted in the grooves of the wiper insert. If the wiper blade claws are not fitted in the grooves of the wiper insert, grasp the wiper insert and slide it back and forth multiple times to insert the claws into the grooves. Lightly lift up the center of the wiper insert to make the rubber easier to slide. 

Diagram illustrating a mechanical tool interacting with a device, showing a hand holding a tool and a magnified view of the component.

7 When installing a wiper blade, reverse the procedure in step 1. After installing the wiper blade, check that the connection is locked.

■ Wiper blade and wiper insert handling

Improper handling may result in damage to the wiper blades or wiper insert. If you have any concerns about replacing the wiper blades or wiper insert yourself, contact your Toyota dealer. 

NOTICE

■When lifting the windshield wipers - When raising the wiper arms off the windshield, lift up the driver side first, and then lift up passenger side. When returning the wipers to their original position, return the passenger side first. - Do not lift a windshield wiper by the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade may be deformed. - Do not operate the wiper lever when the windshield wipers are lifted. Otherwise, the windshield wipers may contact the hood, possibly resulting in damage to the windshield wipers and/or hood. 

NOTICE

■To prevent damage

● Be careful not to damage the claws when replacing the wiper insert. ● After the wiper blade is removed from the wiper arm, place a cloth, etc., between the rear window and wiper arm to prevent damage to the rear window. - Be sure not to pull excessively on the wiper insert or deform its metal plates.

Wireless remote control/electronic key battery

Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.

■If the key battery is depleted

The following symptoms may occur: ●The smart key system (if equipped) and wireless remote control will not function properly. ●The operational range will be reduced.

Items to prepare

Prepare the following before replacing the battery: - Flathead screwdriver ● Small flathead screwdriver ● Lithium battery CR2032

■Use a CR2032 lithium battery

●Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, local electrical appliance shops or camera stores. - Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. ● Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.

Replacing the battery

▶ Vehicles without smart key system 1 Remove the cover. Use a screwdriver of an appropriate size. Forcedly prying may cause the cover damaged. To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag. 

Illustration of a car seatbelt being inserted into a seatbelt, with arrows indicating force direction (no text or symbols)

2 Remove the battery cover. If the battery cover is difficult to remove, lift the edge to remove it. 

Diagram of a device with a pink arrow pointing to a circular component, no text or symbols present

3 Remove the depleted battery. When removing the battery, use a screwdriver of an appropriate size. Insert a new battery with the "+" terminal facing up. 

Illustration of a screwdriver inserted into a device casing with a pink arrow indicating the direction (no text or symbols present)

4 Install the battery cover with the tab facing up. Push the entire edge of the battery cover into the key. 

Diagram of a mobile phone casing with internal components and red arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

5 Install the key cover. Align the key cover with the key and then press it straight into the key. Make sure that the key cover is securely installed without any gaps between it and the key. 

Illustration of a gray device with a pink downward arrow pointing to its side (no text or symbols)

▶ Vehicles with smart key system 1 Release the lock and remove the mechanical key. 

Diagram showing a car interior with directional arrows indicating movement or change, alongside a close-up of the interior panel.

2 Remove the key cover. Use a screwdriver of an appropriate size. Forcedly prying may cause the cover damaged. To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the flathead screw-driver with a rag. 

Diagram illustrating a car plug being inserted into a battery, with an inset showing the internal component and a pink upward arrow indicating the direction.

3 Remove the depleted battery using a small flathead screw-driver. When removing the cover, the electronic key module may stick to the cover and the battery may not be visible. In this case, remove the electronic key module in order to remove the battery. When removing the battery, use a screwdriver of an appropriate size. Insert a new battery with the "+" terminal facing up. 

Diagram of a screwdriver inserted into a device casing with a pink downward arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols present)

4 When installing, reverse the steps listed. 

WARNING

Battery precautions

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. \- Do not swallow the battery. Doing so may cause chemical burns. ● A coin battery or button battery is used in the electronic key. If a battery is swallowed, it may cause severe chemical burns in as little as 2 hours and may result in death or serious injury. \- Keep away new and removed batteries from children. \- If the cover cannot be firmly closed, stop using the electronic key and stow the key in the place where children cannot reach, and then contact your Toyota dealer. \- If you accidentally swallow a battery or put a battery into a part of your body, get emergency medical attention immediately. ■To prevent battery explosion or leakage of flammable liquid or gas \- Replace the battery with a new battery of the same type. If a wrong type of battery is used, it may explode. \- Do not expose batteries to extremely low pressure due to high altitude or extremely high temperatures. \- Do not burn, break or cut a battery. 

NOTICE

■For normal operation after replacing the battery Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents: ●Always work with dry hands. Moisture may cause the battery to rust. - Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control. - Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

Checking and replacing fuses

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

Checking and replacing fuses

1 Turn the power switch to OFF. 2 Open the fuse box cover. ▶ Engine compartment: Type A fuse box (if equipped) Push claw A and to completely release the lock, and then lift up the cover. 

Diagram showing car engine compartment with highlighted valve positions and directional arrows, labeled A and B

▶ Engine compartment: Type B fuse box Push claw and to completely release the lock, and then lift up the cover. 

A B

▶ Left side instrument panel Remove the lid. 

Diagram showing car interior and internal components with directional arrows indicating movement or change, including a highlighted component.

▶ Right side luggage compartment Open the deck board. (→P.541) Disengage the 12 claws and pull the luggage side cover to remove it. When installing the luggage side cover, make sure that the claws are installed securely. 

Diagram of a car interior showing a vehicle seat with a highlighted seat and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Remove the cover 

Diagram of a car interior showing internal components with arrows indicating movement or assembly (no text or symbols present)

3 Remove the fuse. Only type A fuse can be removed using the pullout tool. 

Diagram showing a vehicle interior with a door and seat, no text or symbols present

4 Check if the fuse is blown. Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid. ▶ Type A 

Two identical electrical connector components labeled A and B, shown side by side with no visible text or symbols.

A Normal fuse B Blown fuse ▶ Type B 

Two identical line drawings of a battery casing labeled A and B, showing internal compartments (no text or symbols on the casing itself)

A Normal fuse B Blown fuse ▶ Type C 

Two identical line drawings of battery compartments labeled A and B, showing internal compartments without any text or symbols.

A Normal fuse B Blown fuse

■After a fuse is replaced

\- When installing the lid, make sure that the tab is installed securely. \- If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. (→P.624) \- If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

If there is an overload in a circuit

The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage. 

WARNING

■To prevent system break- downs and vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury. ●Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse. ● Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent. Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix. \- Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes. 

NOTICE

■Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

■To prevent damage to the engine compartment fuse box cover

When opening the fuse box, completely release the claw locks before lifting up the cover. Otherwise, the claws may be damaged.

Light bulbs

You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toyota dealer. For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Toyota dealer.

Preparing for light bulb replacement

Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (→P.692)

Bulb location

Front (type A) 

A B C

A Front turn signal/parking lights B Fog lights (if equipped) C Front side marker lights Front (type B) 

A B C

A Front turn signal lights B Fog lights (if equipped) C Front side marker lights Rear 

A B

A Rear turn signal lights B Back-up lights ■Lights that need to be replaced by your Toyota dealer - Headlights ● Daytime running lights - Parking lights (type B) - Side turn signal lights (if equipped) - Tail lights - Stop lights - Rear side marker lights ● High mounted stoplight - License plate lights ● Outer foot lights (if equipped)

LED lights

The lights other than the following lights each consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced. ●Front turn signal lights ●Parking lights (type A) ●Front side marker lights ●Fog lights (if equipped) ●Rear turn signal lights ●Back-up lights

■Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the light lens does not indicate a malfunction. Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations: ● Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens. ●Water has built up inside the light.

Replacing light bulb

■Front turn signal/parking lights (type A)

1 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. 

Diagram showing car gear shift mechanism with labeled parts and directional arrow

2 Remove the light bulb. 

Diagram showing a connector with a pink arrow pointing to its left side, no text or symbols present

3 Install a new light bulb then install the bulb base to the light unit by inserting it and turning the bulb base clockwise. 

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a cable inserted into a component with a pink arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

■Front turn signal lights (type B)

1 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. 

Diagram showing a mechanical component being inserted into a car's seat, with no visible text or symbols.

2 Remove the light bulb. 

Illustration of a plug being replaced by a cable, showing a pink arrow pointing to the plug (no text or symbols present)

3 Install a new light bulb then install the bulb base to the light unit by inserting it and turning the bulb base clockwise. 2 Remove the light bulb. 

Illustration of a hand inserting a plug into a socket, with a pink arrow indicating the insertion direction (no text or symbols present)

3 Install a new light bulb then install the bulb base to the light unit by inserting it and turning the bulb base clockwise. 

Mechanical component diagram showing a lever interacting with a central connector (no text or symbols visible)

■Front side marker lights (type A)

1 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. 

Mechanical component diagram showing a lever and shaft assembly with a pink arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

■Front side marker lights (type B)

1 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. 

Diagram showing a car seatbelt switch mechanism with a magnified inset highlighting the component (no text or symbols present)


Diagram showing a car interior with a plug inserted into the seat, highlighted by an arrow (no text or symbols present)

2 Remove the light bulb. 

Illustration of a hand inserting a plug into a socket with a pink arrow indicating insertion (no text or symbols)

3 Install a new light bulb then install the bulb base to the light unit by inserting it and turning the bulb base clockwise. 

Diagram of a car fuel plug being connected to a valve, showing airflow direction (no text or labels)

■ Fog lights (if equipped) 1 To allow enough working space, turn the steering wheel. 

Illustration of a car wheel being adjusted with a pink arrow indicating the motion (no text or symbols present)

2 Remove the screws. 

Diagram of a vehicle's rear wheel assembly with red arrows indicating force or motion (no text or symbols)

3 Remove the screws and clips, partly remove the fender liner. 

Diagram illustrating car tire adjustment steps with labeled arrows and magnified views of the wheel.

4 Unplug the connector 

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a connector with a pink arrow indicating a downward motion (no text or symbols present)

5 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. 

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a component with a pink arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

6 Set the new light bulb. Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb with the mounting, and insert. Turn it clockwise to set. 

Diagram showing two views of a mechanical component with arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

7 Set the connector. Shake the bulb base gently to check that it is not loose, turn the front fog lights on once and visually confirm that no light is leaking through the mounting. 

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a connector with a pink arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols present)

8 Reinstall the fender liner. 

Diagram illustrating car tire adjustment steps with labeled arrows and mechanical components

9 Reinstall the screws. 

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols present)

■Rear turn signal lights 1 Open the back door and remove the cover. 

Technical diagram showing a car seatbelt buckle assembly with a highlighted component and directional arrow indicating assembly direction.

2 Remove the screws and remove the unit. Remove the lamp assembly by pulling it directly backward from the rear of the vehicle. 

Diagram of a car interior showing directional arrows and component layout (no text or symbols)

3 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. 

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a valve mechanism with a red arrow indicating rotation (no text or labels)

4 Remove the light bulb. 

Diagram showing a plug being inserted into a terminal connector with a pink arrow indicating the insertion direction (no text or symbols present)

5 Install a new light bulb then install the bulb base to the light unit by inserting it and turning the bulb base clockwise. 

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a rotating component with a red arrow indicating rotational direction (no text or labels)

6 Align the grooves on the light unit with the claws, and insert the light unit straight so that the pin on the light unit fit into the hole. Confirm that the light unit is completely secured. 

Diagram showing car door panel with directional arrows indicating movement or movement, labeled with Chinese characters.

7 Reinstall the screws. 

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with two arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

8 Reinstall the cover. 

Diagram of a vehicle's side profile with a highlighted rectangular component and an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

■Back-up lights

1 Open the back door and remove the cover. To prevent damage to the cover, protect the tip of the screwdriver with a rag. 

Diagram showing car interior and seatbelt adjustment with directional arrows indicating movement or force

2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. Remove the cord from the clip before turning the bulb base. 

Diagram showing car engine seatbelt switch mechanism with labeled parts and directional arrow indicating rotation

3 Remove the light bulb. 

Diagram of a plug with a pink arrow indicating insertion or disassembly (no text or symbols present)

4 Install a new light bulb. 

Illustration of a plug connector with a pink arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

5 Install the bulb base to the light unit by inserting it and turning the bulb base clockwise. Secure the cord with the clip back again after installing the bulb base. 

Diagram showing car engine wiring connections with a pink arrow indicating the cable being inserted into the main component.

6 Reinstall the cover. 

Diagram of a car interior showing a gray folder with a pink arrow pointing to it, connected by wires (no text or symbols)


WARNING

■Replacing light bulb

Turn off the light. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the light. The bulb become very hot and may cause burns. - Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth to avoid getting moisture and oils on the bulb. Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack. ● Fully install light bulb and any parts used to secure it. Failure to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the light unit. This may damage the light or cause condensation to build up on the lens. \- Do not attempt to repair or disassemble light bulbs, connectors, electric circuits or component parts. Doing so may result in death or serious injury due to electric shock.

■To prevent damage or fire

● Make sure bulb is fully seated and locked. - Check the wattage of the bulb before installing to prevent heat damage.

8

8-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers .... 634 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency 635 If the vehicle is trapped in rising water.... 636

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed.... 637 If you think something is wrong 641 If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds 642 If a warning message is displayed.... 654 If you have a flat tire.... 658 If the hybrid system will not start 667 If you lose your keys ... 668 If the fuel filler door cannot be opened 669 If the electronic key does not operate properly (vehicles with smart key system).... 670 If the 12-volt battery is discharged .... 672 If your vehicle overheats 677 If the vehicle becomes stuck 680

Emergency flashers

The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.

Operating instructions

Press the switch. All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn them off, press the switch once again. 

Diagram of car interior showing dashboard, seatbelt, and door with warning symbol and directional arrow

Emergency flashers

\- If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the hybrid system is not operating (while the "READY" indicator is not illuminated), the 12-volt battery may discharge. \- If any of the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) or in the event of a strong rear impact, the emergency flashers will turn on automatically. The emergency flashers will turn off automatically after operating for approximately 20 minutes. To manually turn the emergency flashers off, press the switch twice. (The emergency flashers may not turn on automatically depending on the force of the impact and conditions of the colli- sion.)

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency

Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:

Stopping the vehicle

1 Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it. Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to slow the vehicle. 2 Shift the shift lever to N. If the shift lever is shifted to N 3 After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road. 4 Stop the hybrid system. ▶ If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N 3 Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible. 4 Perform the following procedure to stop the hybrid system: ▶ Vehicles without smart key system Turn the power switch to ACC. 

PUSH LOCK ACC ON START

▶ Vehicles with smart key system Press and hold the power switch for 2 consecutive seconds or more, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. 

POWER ↑

5 Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road. 

WARNING

■If the hybrid system has to be turned off while driving ●Power assist for the steering wheel will be lost, making the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the hybrid system. ● Vehicles without smart key system: Never attempt to remove the key, as doing so will lock the steering wheel.

If the vehicle is trapped in rising water

In the event the vehicle is submerged in water, remain calm and perform the following.

- Remove the seat belt first. - If the door can be opened, open the door and exit the vehicle. - If the door can not be opened, open the window using the power window switch and exit the vehicle through the window. - If the window can not be opened using the power window switch, remain calm, wait until the water level inside the vehicle rises to the point that the water pressure inside of the vehicle equals the water pressure outside of the vehicle, and then open the door and exit the vehicle. 

WARNING

■ Using an emergency hammer\* for emergency escape

The front side windows and rear side windows, as well as the rear window can be shattered with an emergency hammer ^* used for emergency escape. However, an emergency hammer can not shatter the windshield as it is laminated glass. \*: Contact your Toyota dealer, or aftermarket accessory manufacturer for further information about an emergency hammer.

■ Escaping the vehicle from the window

There are cases where escaping the vehicle from the window is not possible due to seating position, passenger body type, etc. When using an emergency hammer, consider your seat location and the size of the window opening to ensure that the opening is accessible and large enough to escape.

If your vehicle needs to be towed

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service, using a wheel-lift type truck or flat-bed truck. Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws. If towing your vehicle with a wheel-lift type truck, use a towing dolly. (→P.637, 638) 

WARNING

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■When towing the vehicle

Be sure to transport the vehicle with all four wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is towed with the tires contacting the ground, the drivetrain or related parts may be damaged, the vehicle may fly off the truck, or electricity generated by the operation of the motor may cause a fire to occur depending on the nature of the damage or malfunction. 

Diagram showing three delivery trucks with no stop symbols, indicating parking or non-ridging conditions.

■While towing (vehicles with towing eyelet)

\- When towing using cables or chains, avoid sudden starts, etc. which place excessive stress on the towing eyelets, cables or chains. The towing eyelets, cables or chains may become damaged, broken debris may hit people, and cause serious damage.

- Do not turn the power switch to OFF.

There is a possibility that the steering wheel is locked and cannot be operated. 

WARNING

■Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle (vehicles with towing eyelets) Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely. If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing. 

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck \- Do not tow the vehicle from the rear when the power switch is off. The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight. \- When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed. ■To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing with a sling-type truck Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear. ■To prevent damage to the vehicle during emergency towing (vehicles with towing eyelet) Do not secure cables or chains to the suspension components. ■ Recreational towing (behind motor home, etc.) Never dinghy tow your vehicle to prevent causing serious damage to the AWD system and hybrid transmission. ( P.209) 

Diagram showing two parking lot scenarios with a car and a no-smoking symbol

Situations when it is necessary to contact dealers before towing

The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service before towing. - The hybrid system warning message is shown on the multi-information display and the vehicle does not move. ● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

Towing with a wheel-lift type truck

From the front Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels. 

Silhouette illustration of a truck and a car with fuel pumps (no text or symbols)

From the rear Use a towing dolly under the front wheels. 

Silhouette illustration of a truck and a car on a road, with no text or symbols present.


NOTICE

■Towing with a sling-type truck Do not tow with a sling-type truck to prevent body damage. 

Black-and-white illustration of a truck with a crane and a car, accompanied by a pink prohibition symbol (no text or numbers present)

Using a flatbed truck

When using a flat-bed truck to transport the vehicle, use tire strapping belts. Refer to the owner's manual of the flat-bed truck for the tire strapping method. In order to suppress vehicle movement during transportation, set the parking brake and turn the power switch to OFF.

Emergency towing (vehicles with towing eyelet)

If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using cables or chains secured to the emergency towing eyelets. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for short distances at under 18 mph (30 km/h). A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle's wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.

Emergency towing procedure (vehicles with towing eyelet)

To have your vehicle towed by another vehicle, the towing eyelet must be installed to your vehicle. Install the towing eyelet using the following procedure. 1 Take out the wheel nut wrench and towing eyelet. (→P.659) 2 Using a flathead screw-driver, remove eyelet cover ( Ⓐ and then remove eyelet cover ( Ⓑ. To protect the bodywork, place a rag between the screwdriver and the vehicle body as shown in the illustration. 

A B

3 Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand. 

Diagram showing a mechanical component with a red arrow indicating rotation or movement, labeled with Chinese characters.

4 Tighten down the towing eye-let securely using a wheel nut wrench or hard metal bar. 

Diagram of a car's internal suspension system with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or labels)

5 Securely attach cables or chains to the towing eyelet. Take care not to damage the vehicle body. 6 Enter the vehicle being towed and start the hybrid system. Turn off the Parking Support Brake function (if equipped): →P.299 If the hybrid system does not start, turn the power switch to ON. 7 Shift the shift lever to N and release the parking brake. Turn automatic mode off. (→P.225) When the shift lever cannot be shifted: →P.221

While towing

If the hybrid system is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.

■Wheel nut wrench

Wheel nut wrench is installed in the tool bag. (→P.659)

If you think something is wrong

If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Visible symptoms

- Fluid leaks under the vehicle (Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.) - Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear ● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal.

Audible symptoms

● Changes in exhaust sound ● Excessive tire squeal when cornering ● Strange noises related to the suspension system ● Pinging or other noises related to the hybrid system

Operational symptoms

● Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly ● Appreciable loss of power ● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking ● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road - Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Actions to the warning lights or warning buzzers

■Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions
	Indicates that:● The brake fluid level is low; or● The brake system is malfunctioning→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

■Brake system warning light

Warning light Details/Actions
	Indicates a malfunction in:● The parking brake system;● The regenerative braking system; or● The electronically controlled brake system→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

■Charging system warning light \*

Warning light Details/Actions
	Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

\*: This light illuminates on the multi-information display (with 7-inch display only). ■High coolant temperature warning light \* (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions
	Indicates that the engine is overheating→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place. Handling method (→P.677)

\* : This light illuminates on the multi-information display with a message. ■Hybrid system overheat warning light \* (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions
	Indicates that the hybrid system has overheated → Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Handling method (→P.677)

\* : This light illuminates on the multi-information display with a message. ■Low engine oil pressure warning light \* (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions
	Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low → Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

\* : This light illuminates on the multi-information display with a message. ■Malfunction indicator lamp \*

Warning light Details/Actions
(U.S.A.)	Indicates a malfunction in:● The hybrid system;● The electronic engine control system;● The electronic throttle control system; or● The emission control system (if equipped)→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toy dealer immediately.
(Canada)

\* : This light illuminates on the multi-information display (with 7-inch display only).

■SRS warning light

Warning light Details/Actions
	Indicates a malfunction in:● The SRS airbag system;● The front passenger occupant classification system; or● The seat belt pretensioner system→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

■ABS warning light

Warning light Details/Actions
(U.S.A.)	Indicates a malfunction in:● The ABS; or● The brake assist system→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
(Canada)

■Electric power steering system warning light \* (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions
(Red/yellow)	Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

\*: This light illuminates on the multi-information display (with 7-inch display only). ■PCS warning light (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

(Flashes or illuminates)

When a buzzer sounds simultaneously:Indicates a malfunction has occurred in the PCS (Pre-Collision System).→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.When a buzzer does not sound:The PCS (Pre-Collision System) has become temporarily unavailable, corrective action may be necessary.→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display. (→P.248, 656)If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) system is disabled, the PCS warning light will illuminate.→ P.257

■LTA indicator \* (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions
(Orange)	Indicates a malfunction in the LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display. (→P.267)

\*: This light illuminates on the multi-information display. ■Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator \* (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions
(Flashes)(If equipped)	When a buzzer sounds:Indicates a malfunction in the Intuitive parking assist function→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.When a buzzer does not sound:Indicates that the system is temporarily unavailable, possibly due to a sensor being dirty or covered with ice, etc.→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display. (→P.294, 654)

\*: This light illuminates on the multi-information display (with 7-inch display only).

■PKSB OFF indicator \* (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions
(Flashes)(If equipped)	When a buzzer sounds:Indicates a malfunction in the PKSB (Parking Support Brake) system→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyot dealer immediately.When a buzzer does not sound:Indicates that the system is temporarily unavailable, possibly due to a sensor being dirty or covered with ice, etc.→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display. (→P.302, 654)

\*: This light illuminates on the multi-information display (with 7-inch display only).

■RCTA OFF indicator \* (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions
(Flashes)(If equipped)	When a buzzer sounds:Indicates a malfunction in the RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) function→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.When a buzzer does not sound:Indicates that the rear bumper around the radar sensor is covered with dirt, etc. (→P.285)→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display. (→P.284, 654)

\* : This light illuminates on the multi-information display (with 7-inch display only).

■Slip indicator light

Warning light Details/Actions
	Indicates a malfunction in:● The VSC/Trailer Sway Control system;● The TRAC system;● The Trail Mode function; or● The hill-start assist control system→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

■Brake Override System/Drive-Start Control/PKSB (if equipped) warning light\* (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

When a buzzer sounds:● Brake Override System is malfunctioning;● Drive-Start Control is operating;● Drive-Start Control is malfunctioning; or● Parking Support Brake function (for static objects) (if equipped) is operating→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.When a buzzer does not sound:Brake Override System is operating→ Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake pedal.

\* : This light illuminates on the multi-information display with a message.

■Brake hold operated indicator (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions
HOLD(Flashes)	Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system → Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

■Parking brake indicator

Warning light Details/Actions
(Flashes)	It is possible that the parking brake is not fully engaged or released→Operate the parking brake switch once again.
(Canada)(Flashes)	This light comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released, the system is operating normally.

■Tire pressure warning light \*

Warning light Details/Actions
(If equipped)	When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute:Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system→ Have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.When the light comes on:Low tire inflation pressure such as● Natural causes● Flat tire→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place. Handling method (→P.651)

\*: This light illuminates on the multi-information display (with 7-inch display only).

■Low fuel level warning light

Warning light Details/Actions
	Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 2.2 gal. (8.3 L, 1.8 Imp. gal.) or less → Refuel the vehicle.

Driver's and front passenger's seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer\*)

Warning light Details/Actions
	Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat belts→ Fasten the seat belt.If the front passenger's seat is occupied, the front passenger's seat belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light (warning buzzer) turn off.

\* : Driver's seat belt warning buzzer: The driver's seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not fastened. Once the power switch is turned to ON, the buzzer sounds. If the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time after the vehicle reaches a certain speed. Front passenger's seat belt warning buzzer: The front passenger's seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is unfastened, the buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time after the vehicle reaches a certain speed. ■Rear passengers' seat belt reminder lights \*1 (warning buzzer\*2)

Warning light Details/Actions
(If equipped)	Warns the rear passengers to fasten their seat belts→ Fasten the seat belt.

^*1 : These lights illuminate on the multi-information display. \*2:Rear passengers' seat belt warning buzzer: The rear passengers' seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the rear passengers that his or her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is unfastened, the buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time, after the seat belt is fastened and unfastened and the vehicle reaches a certain speed.

■Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio sound. ■Front passenger detection sensor, seat belt reminder and warning buzzer - If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat. \- If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warning light may not operate properly.

■ SRS warning light

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact sensors, side impact sensors (front door), side impact sensors (front), driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors), "AIR BAG ON" indicator light, "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light, front passenger's seat belt buckle switch, driver's seat belt pretensioner, front passenger's seat belt pretensioner and force limiter, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources. ( P.36)

■If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

First check the following: ●Is the fuel tank empty? If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately. ●Is the fuel tank cap loose? If it is, tighten it securely. The light will go off after several driving trips. If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)

When the 12-volt battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporarily drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may sound.

■When the tire pressure warning light comes on (vehicles with tire pressure warning system)

Inspect the tires to check if a tire is punctured. If a tire is punctured: →P.658 If none of the tires are punctured: Turn the power switch to OFF then turn it to ON. Check if the tire pressure warning light comes on or blinks. ▶ If the tire pressure warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute then stays on There may be a malfunction in the tire pressure warning system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately. ▶ If the tire pressure warning light comes on 1 After the temperature of the tires has lowered sufficiently, check the inflation pressure of each tire and adjust them to the specified level. 2 If the warning light does not turn off even after several minutes have elapsed, check that the inflation pressure of each tire is at the specified level and perform initialization. (→P.600)

■The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes (vehicles with tire pressure warning system)

The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).

When a tire is replaced with a compact spare tire (vehicles with tire pressure warning system)

The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warn- ing valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the standard tire and adjust the tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will go off after a few minutes. ■Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function properly (vehicles with tire pressure warning system) →P.593 

WARNING

If a warning light comes on or a warning buzzer sounds when a warning message is shown on the multi-information display\* Check and follow the message shown on the multi-information display. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. \*: Warning lights illuminate in red or yellow and the warning buzzer beeps once or sounds continuously. 

WARNING

■When the electric power steering system warning light comes on When the light comes on yellow, the assist to the power steering is restricted. When the light comes on red, the assist to the power steering is lost and handling operations of the steering wheel become extremely heavy. If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold firmly and operate using more force than usual. ■If the tire pressure warning light comes on (vehicles with tire pressure warning system) Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury. - Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately. - If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire is flat, change it with the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer. ● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes. If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur (vehicles with tire pressure warning system) The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

■ Maintenance of the tires (vehicles with tire pressure warning system)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. 

WARNING

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction tell-tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly. 

NOTICE

■To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly (vehicles with tire pressure warning system) Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

If a warning message is displayed

The multi-information display shows warnings of system malfunctions, incorrectly performed operations, and messages that indicate a need for maintenance. When a message is shown, perform the correction procedure appropriate to the message. 

Diagram of a car interior showing airflow direction and seat area (no text or symbols)

If a warning message is displayed again after the appropriate actions have been performed, contact your Toyota dealer.

■Warning messages

The warning messages explained below may differ from the actual messages according to operation conditions and vehicle specifications.

If a message about an operation is shown

\- If a message about an operation of the accelerator pedal or brake pedal is shown A warning message about an operation of the brake pedal may be shown while the driving support systems such as PCS (Pre-Collision system) or the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is operating. If a warning message is shown, be sure to decelerate the vehicle or follow an instruction shown on the multi-information display. A warning message is shown when Brake Override System, Drive-Start Control or Parking Support Brake (if equipped) ( P.190, 298) operates. Follow the instructions on the multi-information display. \- If a message about an operation of the power switch is shown (if equipped) An instruction for operation of the power switch is shown when the incorrect procedure for starting the hybrid system is performed or the power switch is operated incorrectly. Follow the instructions shown on the multi-information display to operate the power switch again. \- If a message about a shift lever operation is shown To prevent the shift lever from being operated incorrectly or the vehicle from moving unexpectedly, a message that requires shifting the shift lever may be shown on the multi-information display. In that case, follow the instruction of the message and shift the shift lever. \- If a message or image about an open/close state of a part or replenishment of a consumable is shown Confirm the part indicated by the multi-information display or a warning light, and then perform the coping method such as closing the open door or replenishing a consumable. If a message that indicates the need for visiting your Toyota dealer is displayed The system or part shown on the multi-information display is malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately. If a message that indicates the need for referring to Owner's Manual is displayed \- If "Engine Coolant Temp High" is shown, follow the instructions (→P.680). \- If the following messages are shown, there may be a malfunction. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous. \- "Hybrid System Malfunction" \- "Check Engine" \- "Hybrid Battery System Malfunction" \- "Accelerator System Malfunction" \- "Hybrid System Stopped" \- "Engine Stopped" \- "Smart Key System Malfunction" \- If the following messages are shown, there may be a malfunction. Immediately have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer. \- "Oil Pressure Low" \- "Braking Power Low" \- If “Maintenance Required for Traction Battery Cooling Parts See Owner’s Manual” is shown, the filter may be clogged, the air intake vent may be blocked, or there may be a gap in the duct. Therefore, perform the following correction procedure. \- If the air intake vent or filter of the hybrid battery (traction battery) are dirty, perform the procedures on P.611 to clean them. \- If the warning message is shown when the air intake vent and filter of the hybrid battery (traction bat- tery) are not dirty, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer.

If "Hybrid System Overheated Output Power Reduced" is shown

The message may be shown when driving under severe operating conditions. (For example, when driving up a long steep hill or driving up a steep hill in reverse.) Coping method: →P.680

If "Traction Battery Needs to be Protected Refrain from the Use of N Position" is shown

This message may be displayed when the shift lever is in N. As the hybrid battery (traction battery) cannot be charged when the shift lever is in N, shift the shift lever to P when the vehicle is stopped.

If "Traction Battery Needs to be Protected Shift into P to Restart" is shown

This message is displayed when the hybrid battery (traction battery) charge has become extremely low because the shift lever has been left in N for a certain amount of time. When operating the vehicle, shift to P and restart the hybrid system.

If "Shift to P when Parked" is shown (if equipped)

Message is displayed when the driver's door is opened without turning the power switch to OFF with the shift lever in any position other than P. Shift the shift lever to P.

If "Shift is in N Release Accelerator Before Shifting" is shown

Message is displayed when the accelerator pedal has been depressed and the shift lever is in N. Release the accelerator pedal and shift the shift lever to D or R.

If "Press Brake when Vehicle is Stopped Hybrid System may Overheat" is shown

Message is displayed when the accelerator pedal is depressed to maintain the vehicle position when stopped on a upward slope, etc. If this continues, the hybrid system may overheat. Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake pedal.

If "Auto Power OFF to Conserve Battery" is shown (if equipped)

Power was turned off due to the automatic power off function. Next time when starting the hybrid system, operate the hybrid system for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the 12-volt battery.

If "Engine Oil Level Low Add or Replace" is displayed

The engine oil level may be low. Check the level of the engine oil, and add engine oil if necessary. This message may be displayed if the vehicle is stopped on a slope. Move the vehicle to a level surface and check if the message disappears.

If "Maintenance Required Soon" is shown

Indicates that all maintenance according to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule\* should be performed soon. Comes on approximately 4500 miles (7200 km) after the message has been reset. If necessary, perform maintenance. Please reset the message after the maintenance is performed. (→P.573) \*: Refer to the separate "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner' Manual Supplement" for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.

If "Maintenance Required Visit Your Dealer" is shown

Indicates that all maintenance is required to correspond to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule\*. Comes on approximately 5000 miles (8000 km) after the message has been reset. (The indicator will not work properly unless the message has been reset.) Perform the necessary maintenance. Please reset the message after the maintenance is performed. ( P.573) \*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’ Manual Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.

If a message that indicates the malfunction of front camera is displayed

The following systems may be suspended until the problem shown in the message is resolved. ( P.248, 642) ●PCS (Pre-Collision System) ●LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) ●Automatic High Beam ●RSA (Road Sign Assist) ^* ● Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range \*: If equipped

If "Radar Cruise Control Unavailable See Owner's Manual" is shown

The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range system is suspended temporarily or until the problem shown in the message is resolved. (causes and coping methods: →P.248)

If "Radar Cruise Control Unavailable" is shown

The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range system cannot be used temporarily. Use the system when it becomes available again.

■Warning buzzer

→P.650 

WARNING

If a warning light comes on or a warning buzzer sounds when a warning message is shown on the multi-information display →P.651 

NOTICE

■ "High Power Consumption Partial Limit On AC/Heater Operation" is frequently shown There is a possible malfunction relating to the charging system or the 12-volt battery may be deteriorating. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer. If “Maintenance Required For Traction Battery At Your Dealer” is shown The hybrid battery (traction battery) is scheduled to be inspected or replaced. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately. ●Continuing to drive the vehicle without having the hybrid battery (traction battery) inspected will cause the hybrid system not to start. \- If the hybrid system does not start, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

If you have a flat tire

Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be replaced with the spare tire. For details about tires: →P.590 

WARNING

If you have a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire. Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair, which could result in an accident.

Before jacking up the vehicle

- Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface. - Set the parking brake. - Shift the shift lever to P. - Stop the hybrid system. ● Turn on the emergency flashers. ( P.634) - For vehicles with power back door: Turn off the power back door system. (→P.146)

Location of the spare tire, jack and tools


A B C D E F G H

A Jack B Tool bag c Spare tire D Jack handle\*1 E Wheel nut wrench\*1 F Jack handle\*2 G Wheel nut wrench\*2 H Towing eyelet ^*2 (if equipped) \*1: Except for models made in Japan \*3 \*2:For models made in Japan \*3 \*3: The country of production is written on the Certification Regulation Label. (→P.684) 

WARNING

■Using the tire jack

Observe the following precautions. Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack, leading to death or serious injury. - Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains. ●The equipped jack can only be used with your vehicle. Do not use it with other vehicles. ●And do not use jacks from other vehicles with your vehicle. ● Put the jack properly in its jack point. 

Diagram showing two safety instructions: one with a no-smoking symbol above a metal bracket, the other with a crossed-out line and a broken handle.

- Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. - Do not start the hybrid system or drive the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by the jack. - Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside. - When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack. - Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire. - Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle. - Stop the vehicle on firm, flat and level ground, firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P. Block the wheel diagonally opposite to the one being changed if necessary. - When lowering the vehicle, make sure that there is no-one near the vehicle. If there are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering.

Taking out the jack

1 Open the deck board (→P.541). 2 Take out the jack. Do not touch the threaded portion of the jack as it is greased. 

Top-down line drawing of a car's rear intake showing the wheel and gear assembly (no text or symbols)

Taking out the tool bag

Take out the tool bag. 

Top-down line drawing of a car tire mounted on the backrest with a tool inserted, showing no text or symbols.

Taking out the spare tire

1 Take out the jack holder. 

Diagram of a car interior showing a central mechanical component with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

2 Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire. 

Diagram of a car tire assembly with a circular component and a pink arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)


WARNING

■When storing the spare tire

Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the spare tire and the body of the vehicle.

Replacing a flat tire

1 Chock the tires. 

Line drawing of a car with tire tracks and motion arrows indicating speed (no text or symbols)

Flat tire W	Wheel chock positions
Front left-hand side	Behind the rear right-hand side tire
Front right-hand side	Behind the rear left-hand side tire
Rear left-hand side	In front of the front right-hand side tire
Rear right-hand side	In front of the front left-hand side tire

2 Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one turn). 

Line drawing of a car wheel with a cable inserted, showing a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

3 Turn the tire jack portion ☐ by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point. After removing the jack from the jack holder, turn the jack portion A in the opposite direction to lower the jack, and then adjust the jack set position. The jack point guides are located under the rocker panel. They indicate the jack point positions. 

Diagram illustrating vehicle suspension system with labeled components and directional arrows

4 Assemble the jack handle and the wheel nut wrench as shown in the illustration. ▶ Except for models made in Japan\* \*: The country of production is written on the Certification Regulation Label. (→P.684) 

Diagram illustrating a tool application with a magnified view showing the tool being inserted into a pin.

For models made in Japan\* \*: The country of production is written on the Certification Regulation Label. (→P.684) 

Illustration of a mechanical clamp tool with a magnified inset showing the hook attachment (no text or symbols)

5 Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground. 

Diagram of car tire assembly with a lever mechanism and rotation arrow (no text or symbols)

6 Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire. When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface. 

Illustration of a car tire being adjusted for a wheel, showing motion lines and a pink arrow (no text or symbols)


WARNING

■Replacing a flat tire

- Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the vehicle has been driven. After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns. ●Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury. - Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m) as soon as possible after changing wheels. - When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed for that wheel. - If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer. - When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the tapered ends facing inward. For vehicles with power back door: In cases such as when replacing tires, make sure to turn off the power back door system (→P.146). Failure to do so may cause the back door to operate unintentionally if the power back door switch is accidentally touched, resulting in hands and fingers being caught and injured.

Installing the spare tire

1 Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface. If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, causing the tire to come off. 

Line drawing of a car wheel rim and wheel rim with hands cleaning the rim (no text or symbols)

2 Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount. When replacing an aluminum wheel with a steel wheel, tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered portion (A) comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat (B). 

Technical diagram showing car tire assembly with labeled parts A and B, including a magnified inset of the component.

When replacing an aluminum wheel with an aluminum wheel, turn the wheel nuts until the washers (A) come into contact with the disc wheel (B.) 

Technical diagram showing car wheel assembly with labeled parts A and B, including a magnified inset view of the mechanical component.

3 Lower the vehicle. 

Diagram of a car suspension system with a tire and lever mechanism (no text or labels)

4 Firmly tighten each wheel nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration. Tightening torque: 76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m) 

Technical diagram showing a car tire assembly with numbered components and a downward arrow indicating motion or positioning.

5 Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools. ■The compact spare tire ●The compact spare tire is identified by the label "TEMPORARY USE ONLY" on the tire sidewall. Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency. ● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire. (→P.690) ■When using the compact spare tire As the compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter (if equipped), low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be indicated by the tire pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on. ■When the compact spare tire is attached The vehicle height may become lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires. If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice Install the compact spare tire on one of the rear wheels of the vehicle. Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the front tires: 1 Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire. 2 Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of the vehicle. 3 Fit tire chains to the front tires. ■When stowing the jack Before storing the jack, adjust the height of the jack to match the shape of the jack holder. The storage direction of the jack differs depending on the type, so make sure to store the jack in the correct direction. Except for models made in Japan\*: 

Diagram of a car interior showing a mechanical component and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

For models made in Japan\*: 

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a lever mechanism with red arrows indicating motion direction (no text or symbols present)

\*: The country of production is written on the Certification Regulation Label. (→P.684) 

WARNING

■When using the compact spare tire Remember that the compact spare tire provided is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle. - Do not use more than one compact spare tire simultaneously. - Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible. ●Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking. ■When the compact spare tire is attached The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly: • ABS & Brake assist • VSC/Trailer Sway Control - TRAC • Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range • PCS (Pre-Collision System) - EPS • LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) - Tire pressure warning system (if equipped) • AHB (Automatic High Beam) • AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) (if equipped) • BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (if equipped) - Rear view monitor system (if equipped) - Panoramic view monitor (if equipped) • Toyota parking assist monitor (if equipped) - Intuitive parking assist (if equipped) - Navigation system (if equipped) Also, not only can the following system not be utilized fully, but it may actually negatively affect the drive-train components: • E-Four (Electronic On-Demand AWD system) 

WARNING

■Speed limit when using the compact spare tire

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle. The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

■After using the tools and jack

Before driving, make sure all the tools and jack are securely in place in their storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or sudden braking.

■When replacing the tires (vehicles with tire pressure warning system)

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly. 

NOTICE

■Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the vehicle

The vehicle height may become lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.

■Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire

Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire. Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.

If the hybrid system will not start

Reasons for the hybrid sys- tem not starting vary depending on the situation. Check the following and perform the appropriate procedure: The hybrid system will not start even though the correct starting procedure is being followed ( P.210, 212) One of the following may be the cause of the problem: ● The electronic key may not be functioning properly. (→P.670) - There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle's tank. Refuel the vehicle. (→P.241) - There may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system. (→P.81) ● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system. - The hybrid system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as electronic key battery depletion or a blown fuse. However, depending on the type of malfunction, an interim measure is available to start the hybrid system. (→P.668) \- There is a possibility that the temperature of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is extremely low (approximately below -22°F [-30°C]). (→P.77, 210, 213) The interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume One of the following may be the cause of the problem: ● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. ( P.672) - The 12-volt battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded. (→P.589) The interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound One of the following may be the cause of the problem: ● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. ( P.672) ● One or both of the 12-volt battery terminals may be disconnected. (→P.589) Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.

Starting the hybrid sys- tem in an emergency

When the hybrid system does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim measure to start the hybrid system if the power switch is functioning normally. Do not use this starting procedure except in cases of emergency. 1 Pull the parking brake switch to check that the parking brake is set. (→P.224) Parking brake indicator will come on. 2 Shift the shift lever to P. 3 Turn the power switch to ACC. 4 Press and hold the power switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly. Even if the hybrid system can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

If you lose your keys

New genuine keys can be made by your Toyota dealer using the other key and the key number stamped on your key number plate. Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. 

NOTICE

■When an electronic key is lost (if equipped)

If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit your Toyota dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys that were provided with your vehicle.

If the fuel filler door cannot be opened

If the fuel filler door opener switch cannot be operated, contact your Toyota dealer to service the vehicle. In case where refueling is urgently necessary, the following procedure can be used to open the fuel filler door.

Opening the fuel filler door

1 Remove the cover inside the luggage compartment by inserting a screwdriver. When removing the cover, to prevent damage, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag. 

Diagram showing car door panel insertion with a magnified view highlighting the switch mechanism

2 Pull the lever. Using the lever to open the fuel filler door may not allow for an adequate reduction in fuel tank pressure before refueling. To prevent fuel from spilling out, turn the cap slowly when removing it. During refueling, fuel may spill out from the filler opening due to air being discharged from inside the fuel tank. Therefore, fill the fuel tank carefully and slowly. 

Technical diagram showing a mechanical component with an inset view of a bracket and a close-up of a switch (no text or symbols present)

If the electronic key does not operate properly (vehicles with smart key system) If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted ( P.148) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the smart key system and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be opened and the hybrid system can be started by following the procedure below. ■When the electronic key does not work properly Make sure that the smart key system has not been deactivated in the customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on. (Customizable features: →P.710) - Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function. (→P.148) 

NOTICE

In case of a smart key system malfunction, or other key related problems Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Locking and unlocking the doors

Use the mechanical key (→P.125) in order to perform the following operations. 

1 2

1 Locks all the doors 2 Unlocks the door Turning the key rearward unlocks the driver's door. Turning the key once again within 5 seconds unlocks the other doors. ■Key linked functions 

1 2

1 Closes the windows and the moon roof ^*1 or panoramic moon roof ^*1 (turn and hold) ^*2 2 Opens the windows and the moon roof ^*1 or panoramic moon roof ^*1 (turn and hold) ^*2 \*1:If equipped \*2: These settings must be customized at your Toyota dealer. 

WARNING

■When using the mechanical key and operating the power windows or the moon roof (if equipped) or panoramic moon roof (if equipped) Operate the power window or the moon roof or panoramic moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the window or the moon roof or panoramic moon roof. Also, do not allow children to operate the mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the power window or the moon roof or panoramic moon roof.

Starting the hybrid sys- tem

1 Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal. 2 Touch the Toyota emblem side of the electronic key to the power switch. When the electronic key is detected, a buzzer sounds and the power switch will turn to ON. When the smart key system is deactivated in customization setting, the power switch will turn to ACC. 

Interior view of a car showing a driver's seatbelt and dashboard with an inset close-up of hands holding a device (no text or symbols visible)

3 Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that  is displayed on the multi-information display. 4 Press the power switch shortly and firmly. In the event that the hybrid system still cannot be started, contact your Toyota dealer.

■Stopping the hybrid system

Shift the shift lever to P, set the parking brake and press the power switch as you normally do when stopping the hybrid system.

■Replacing the key battery

As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted. ( P.618)

■Alarm (Canada only)

If a door is unlocked using the mechanical key when the alarm system is set, the alarm may be triggered.\* \*: These settings must be customized at your Toyota dealer.

■Changing power switch modes

Release the brake pedal and press the power switch in step 3 above. The hybrid system does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is pressed. (→P.216)

If the 12-volt battery is discharged

The following procedures may be used to start the hybrid system if the vehicle's 12-volt battery is discharged. You can also call your Toyota dealer or a qualified repair shop.

Restarting the hybrid sys- tem

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below. 1 Vehicles with alarm: Confirm that the electronic key is being carried. When connecting the jumper (or booster) cables, depending on the situation, the alarm may activate and the doors locked. (→P.85) 

Line drawing of a person standing beside a car with a dog, showing a close-up of the door (no text or symbols present)

2 Open the hood ( P.579) and fuse box cover. Push claw A and to completely release the lock, and then lift up the cover. 

A B

3 Open the exclusive jump starting terminal cover. 

Diagram showing car interior with a highlighted vehicle component and an arrow pointing to it, likely indicating a directional or mechanical change.

4 Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to ☐ on your vehicle and connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to ☐ on the second vehicle. Then, connect a negative cable clamp to ☐ on the second vehicle and connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to D 

Diagram of car engine bay with labeled components and wiring connections, showing engine compartment, battery, and wiring details.

A Exclusive jump starting terminal (your vehicle) B Positive (+) battery terminal (second vehicle) C Negative (-) battery terminal (second vehicle) D Solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the exclusive jump starting terminal and any moving parts as shown in the illustration 5 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the 12-volt battery of your vehicle. 6 Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the power switch OFF. 7 Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the hybrid system of your vehicle by turning the power switch to ON. 8 Make sure the "READY" indicator comes on. If the indicator light does not come on, contact your Toyota dealer. 9 Once the hybrid system has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order from which they were connected. 10 Close the exclusive jump starting terminal cover, and reinstall the fuse box cover to its original position. Once the hybrid system starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. ■ Starting the hybrid system when the 12-volt battery is discharged The hybrid system cannot be started by push-starting. ■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge ●Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the hybrid system is off. ●Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic. ■When the 12-volt battery is removed or discharged ● Information stored in the ECU is cleared. When the 12-volt battery is depleted, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer. Some systems may require initialization. (→P.718) ■When removing the 12-volt battery terminals When the 12-volt battery terminals are removed, the information stored in the ECU is cleared. Before removing the 12-volt battery terminals, contact your Toyota dealer. ■Charging the 12-volt battery The electricity stored in the 12-volt battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the 12-volt battery may discharge, and the hybrid system may be unable to start. (The 12-volt battery recharges automatically while the hybrid system is operating.) ■When recharging or replacing the 12-volt battery (vehicles without smart key system) The hybrid system may not start on the first attempt after the 12-volt battery has recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction. ■When recharging or replacing the 12-volt battery (vehicles with smart key system) In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart key system when the 12-volt battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors. ●The hybrid system may not start on the first attempt after the 12-volt battery has recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction. ●The power switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the 12-volt battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the 12-volt battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the 12-volt battery, turn the power switch to OFF. If you are unsure what mode the power switch was in before the 12-volt battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting the 12-volt battery. Some systems may require initialization. (→P.718) ■When replacing the 12-volt battery - Use a 12-volt battery that conforms to European regulations. ●Type A: Use a battery that the case size is same as the previous one (LN1), 20 hours rate capacity (20HR) is equivalent (45Ah) or greater, and performance rating (CCA) is equivalent (285A) or greater. Type B: Use a battery that the case size is same as the previous one (LN1), 20 hours rate capacity (20HR) is equiv- alent (45Ah) or greater, and performance rating (CCA) is equivalent (286A) or greater. Type C: Use a battery that the case size is same as the previous one (LN2), 20 hours rate capacity (20HR) is equivalent (55Ah) or greater, and performance rating (CCA) is equivalent (345A) or greater. - If the sizes differ, the 12-volt battery cannot be properly secured. - If the 20 hour rate capacity is low, even if the time period where the vehicle is not used is a short time, the 12-volt battery may discharge and hybrid system may not be able to start. ● Use a ventilation type calcium battery \- Use a 12-volt battery with a handle. If a 12-volt battery without a handle is used, removal is more difficult. \- When removing the 12-volt battery: P.589 ●After replacing, firmly attach the following items to the exhaust hole of the 12-volt battery. \- Use the exhaust hose that was attached to the 12-volt battery before replacing and confirm that it is firmly connected to the hole section of the vehicle. \- Use the exhaust hole plug included with the new 12-volt battery or the one installed on the battery prior to the replacement. (Depending on the new 12-volt battery installed, the exhaust hole may be plugged.) For details, consult your Toyota dealer. 

A B C

A Exhaust hole B Exhaust hose C Hole section of the vehicle 

WARNING

■When removing the battery terminals

Always remove the negative (-) terminal first. If the positive (+) terminal contacts any metal in the surrounding area when the positive (+) terminal is removed, a spark may occur, leading to a fire in addition to electrical shocks and death or serious injury.

■ Avoiding 12-volt battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the 12-volt battery: Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal. \- Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” terminal to come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as brackets or unpainted metal. \- Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with each other. 

WARNING

\- Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the 12-volt battery.

■12-volt battery precautions

The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the 12-volt battery: \- When working with the 12-volt battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body. \- Do not lean over the 12-volt battery. In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention. Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received. ●Always wash your hands after handling the 12-volt battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts. \- Do not allow children near the 12-volt battery.

■After recharging the 12-volt battery

Have the 12-volt battery inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. If the 12-volt battery is deteriorating, continued use may cause the 12-volt battery to emit a malodorous gas, which may be detrimental to the health of passengers.

■When replacing the 12-volt battery

For information regarding 12-volt battery replacement, contact your Toyota dealer. ●After replacing, securely attach the exhaust hose and exhaust hole plug to the exhaust hole of the replaced 12-volt battery. If not properly installed, gases (hydrogen) may leak into the vehicle interior, and there is the possible danger of the gas igniting and exploding. 

Diagram showing car seatbelting and safety instructions with labeled parts and a pink arrow indicating a specific component.


NOTICE

■When handling jumper cables

When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entangled in the cooling fan, etc.

■To prevent damaging the vehicle

The exclusive jump starting terminal is to be used when charging the 12-volt battery from another vehicle in an emergency. It cannot be used to jump start another vehicle.

If your vehicle overheats

The following may indicate that your vehicle is over-heating.

- The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge (→P.94, 98) enters the red zone, or a loss of hybrid system power is experienced. (For example, the vehicle speed does not increase.) - “Engine Coolant Temp High Stop in a Safe Place See Owner’s Manual” or “Hybrid System Overheated Output Power Reduced” is shown on the multi-information display. - Steam comes out from under the hood.

Correction procedures

If the engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or “Engine Coolant Temp High Stop in a Safe Place See Owner’s Manual” is shown on the multi-information display 1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system, and then stop the hybrid system. 2 If you see steam: Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides. If you do not see steam: Carefully lift the hood. 3 After the hybrid system has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the hoses and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks. 

A B

A Radiator B Cooling fan If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Toyota dealer. 4 The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the "FULL" and "LOW" lines on the reservoir. 

A B C

A Reservoir B "FULL" line C "LOW" line 5 Add coolant if necessary. Water can be used in an emergency if engine coolant is unavailable. If water was added in an emergency, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. 

Diagram of a car engine bay with internal components and a hand pouring liquid into a container (no text or labels)

6 Start the hybrid system and turn the air conditioning system on to check that the radiator cooling fan operates and to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses. The fan operates when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately after a cold start. Confirm that the fan is operating by checking the fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly. (The fan may not operate in freezing temperatures.) 7 If the fan is not operating: Stop the hybrid system immediately and contact your Toyota dealer. If the fan is operating: Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer. 8 Check if "Engine Coolant Temp High Stop in a Safe Place See Owner's Manual" is shown on the multi-information display. If the message does not disappear: Stop the hybrid system and contact your Toyota dealer. If the message is not displayed: Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer. If "Hybrid System Overheated Output Power Reduced" is shown on the multi-information display 1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place. 2 Stop the hybrid system and carefully lift the hood. 3 After the hybrid system has cooled down, inspect the hoses and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks. 

A B

A Radiator B Cooling fan If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Toyota dealer. 4 The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the reservoir. 

A B C

A Reservoir B “FULL” line C "LOW" line 5 Add coolant if necessary. Water can be used in an emergency if power control unit coolant is unavailable. If water was added in an emergency, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. 

Diagram of an engine compartment with a zoomed-in inset showing a pouring device into a container (no text or labels present)

6 After stopping the hybrid system and waiting for 5 minutes or more, start the hybrid system again and check for the multi-information display. If the message does not disappear: Stop the hybrid system and contact your Toyota dealer. If the message is not displayed: The hybrid system temperature has dropped and the vehicle may be driven normally. However, if the message appears again frequently, contact your Toyota dealer. 

WARNING

■When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns. \- If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has sub-sided. The engine compartment may be very hot. After the hybrid system has been turned off, check that the "READY" indicator is off. When the hybrid system is operating, the gasoline engine may automatically start, or the cooling fan may suddenly operate even if the gasoline engine stops. Do not touch or approach rotating parts such as the fan, which may lead to fingers or clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) getting caught, resulting in serious injury. \- Do not loosen the coolant reservoir cap while the hybrid system and radiator are hot. High temperature steam or coolant could spray out. 

NOTICE

■When adding engine/power control unit coolant Add coolant slowly after the hybrid system has cooled down sufficiently. Adding cool coolant to a hot hybrid system too quickly can cause damage to the hybrid system. 

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the cooling system

Observe the following precautions: ● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust, etc.). - Do not use any coolant additive.

If the vehicle becomes stuck

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:

Recovering procedure

1 Stop the hybrid system. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P. 2 Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the stuck tire. 3 Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide traction under the tires. 4 Restart the hybrid system 5 Shift the shift lever to D or R and release the parking brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.

■When it is difficult to free the vehicle

Press to turn off TRAC. (→P.370) 

Traction Control Turned OFF


WARNING

■When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.

■When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. 

NOTICE

■To avoid damaging the transmission and other components

● Avoid spinning the wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than necessary. - If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehicle may require towing to be freed.

9-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.).... 684 Fuel information ...... 694 Tire information ...... 696

9-2. Customization

Customizable features 706

9-3. Initialization

Items to initialize ...... 718

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)

Dimensions and weights

Overall length*		180.9 in. (4595 mm)
Overall width*		73.0 in. (1855 mm)
Overall height*		67.0 in. (1701 mm)
Wheelbase*		105.9 in. (2690 mm)
Tread*	Front 63.0 in. (1600 mm)
	Rear 63.7 in. (1619 mm)
Vehicle capacity weight (Occupants + luggage)		900 lb. (410 kg)
Trailer Weight Rating (Trailer weight + cargo weight)		1750 lb. (795 kg)

\*: Unladen vehicle

Seating capacity

Seating capacity 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)

Vehicle identification

■Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle. This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel. 

Line drawing of a car's front panel with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols)

On some models, this number is also stamped under the right-hand front seat. 

VEGET No./VITN *10

This number is also on the Certification Regulation Label.

■Engine number

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown. 

Line drawing of a mechanical engine component (no text or symbols)


Mechanical component diagram showing a sliding mechanism with an arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols present)

Engine

Model 2.5 L 4-cylinder (A25A-FXS)
Type 4-cylinder in line, 4-cycle,	gasoline
Bore and stroke	3.44 × 4.07 in. (87.50 × 103.48 mm)
Displacement	151.8 cu. in. (2487 cm3)
Valve clearance Automatic adjustment

Fuel

Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only	ly
Octane Rating	87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher
Fuel tank capacity (Reference)	14.5 gal. (55 L, 12.1 Imp.gal.)

Electric motor (traction motor)

Front

Type Permanent magnet synchronous motor
Maximum output 88 kW
Maximum torque 149 ft•lbf (202	N•m, 20.6 kgf•m)

Rear

Type Permanent magnet synchronous motor
Maximum output 40 kW
Maximum torque 89.2 ft•lbf (121 N•m, 12.3 kgf•m)

Hybrid battery (traction battery)

Model code*	AXAH54L AXAL54L
Type	Nickel-Metal hydride battery	Lithium-ion battery
Voltage 7.2 V/module 3.7 V/cell
Capacity 6.5 Ah (3HR) 4.3 Ah
Quantity 34 modules 70 cells
Nominal voltage 244.8 V 259.0 V

\*: The model code is indicated on the Certification Regulation Label. (→P.684)

Lubrication system

■ Oil capacity (Drain and refill — reference\*)

With filter 4.8 qt. (4.5 L, 4.0 Imp. qt.)
Without filter	4.4 qt. (4.2 L, 3.7 Imp. qt.)

\*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.

■Engine oil selection

"Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved "Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity. Oil grade: API SN/RC multigrade engine oil Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-16 SAE 0W-16 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather. If SAE 0W-16 is not available, SAE 0W-20 oil may be used. However, it must be replaced with SAE 0W-16 at the next oil change. 

0W-16 °C -18 4 27 °F 0 40 80 A

A Outside temperature

Oil viscosity (0W-16 is explained here as an example): \- The 0W in 0W-16 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather. \- The 16 in 0W-16 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions. How to read oil container label: API registered mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use. 

API SERVICE SN SAE 0W-16 RESOURCE CONSERVING ®

Cooling system

Capacity*	Gasoline engine 7.	1 qt. (6.7 L, 5.9 Imp. qt.)
	Power control unit	2.1 qt. (2.0 L, 1.8 Imp. qt.)
Coolant type		Use either of the following:“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technologyDo not use plain water alone.

\* : The coolant capacity is the quantity of reference. If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer. Ignition system (spark plug)

Make DENSO FC16HR-Q8
Gap 0.031 in. (0.8 mm)

 NOTICE

■Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap. Electrical system (12-volt Battery)

Specific voltage reading at 68°F (20°C):		12.0 V or higher(Turn the power switch to OFF and turn on the high beam headlights for 30 seconds.)If the voltage is lower than the standard value, charge the battery.
Charging rates	Quick charge 15 A max.
	Slow charge 5 A max.

Hybrid transmission

Fluid capacity*	4.1 qt. (3.9 L, 3.4 Imp.qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF	WS

\*: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference. If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer. 

NOTICE

■Hybrid transmission fluid type

Using transmission fluid other than the above type may cause abnormal noise or vibration, or ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.

Rear differential (rear electric motor)

Fluid capacity*	1.8 qt. (1.7 L, 1.5 Imp.qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF	WS

\*: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference. If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer. 

NOTICE

■Rear differential fluid type

Using transmission fluid other than the above type may cause abnormal noise or vibration, or ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.

Brakes

Pedal clearance*	4.9 in. (124 mm) Min.
Pedal free play	0.04 — 0.24 in. (1.0 — 6.0 mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Fluid type	FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or SAE J1704

\*: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 67.4 lbf (300 N, 30.5 kgf) while the hybrid system is operating.

Steering

Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

Tires and wheels

▶ Vehicles with 17-inch wheels (type A)

Tire size	225/65R17 102H, T165/80R17 104M (spare)
Tire inflation pressure(Recommended cold tire infla-tion pressure)	Front:36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)Rear:36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)Spare:60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 17 x 7J, 17 x 4T (spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m)

▶ Vehicles with 17-inch wheels (type B)

Tire size	225/65R17 102H, T165/80D17 104M (spare)
Tire inflation pressure(Recommended cold tire infla-tion pressure)	Front:33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)Rear33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)Spare:60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 17 x 7J, 17 x 4T (spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

▶ Vehicles with 17-inch wheels (type C)

Tire size	225/65R17 102H, T165/80D17 104M (spare)
Tire inflation pressure(Recommended cold tire infla-tion pressure)	Front:36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)Rear:36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)Spare:60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 17 x 7J, 17 x 4T (spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

▶ Vehicles with 18-inch wheels (type A)

Tire size	225/60R18 100H, T165/80R17 104M (spare)
Tire inflation pressure(Recommended cold tire infla-tion pressure)	Front:33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)Rear:33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)Spare:60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 18 x 7J, 17 x 4T (spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

▶ Vehicles with 18-inch wheels (type B)

Tire size	225/60R18 100H, T165/80D17 104M (spare)
Tire inflation pressure(Recommended cold tire infla-tion pressure)	Front:33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)Rear:33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)Spare:60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 18 x 7J, 17 x 4T (spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

Light bulbs

Light bulbs Bulb No. W Type
Exterior	Front side marker lights W5W 5 A
	Fog lights*1	— 19 B
	Front turn signal/parking lights (type A: →P.624)	7444NA	28/8 C
	Front turn signal lights (type B: →P.624)	7444NA	28/8*2	C
	Rear turn signal lights WY21W 21 C
	Back-up lights W16W 16 A
	Outer foot lights*1	—	5 A
Interior	Vanity lights	—	8	A
	Front interior lights/personal lights	—	5	A
	Rear interior light	—	8	D
	Luggage compartment light	—	5	A

A: Wedge base bulbs (clear) B: H16 halogen bulbs C: Wedge base bulbs (amber) D: Double end bulbs (clear) \*1: If equipped \*2: The 28/8 W bulb is used. However, only the 28 W filament illuminates.

Fuel information

You must only use unleaded gasoline in your vehicle. Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage. At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A..

Gasoline quality

In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.

■ Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives

●Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid the build-up of engine deposits. - All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems, per EPA's lowest additives concentration program. ●Toyota strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For more information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to the official website www.toptiergas.com.

■ Recommendation of the use of low emissions gasoline

Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol, as well as reformulated gasolines, are available in some cities. These fuels are typically acceptable for use, providing they meet other fuel requirements. Toyota recommends these fuels, since the formulations allow for reduced vehicle emissions.

■ Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline

● Use only gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol. DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that could contain more than 15% ethanol, including from any pump labeled E30 (30% ethanol A), E50 (50% ethanol B, E85 (85% ethanol Ⓐ(which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 15% ethanol). 

A E30 B E50 C E85

\- If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87. ●Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

■Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.

If your engine knocks

- Consult your Toyota dealer. - You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern. 

NOTICE

■Notice on fuel quality

- Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be damaged. - Do not use leaded gasoline. Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle's three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction. - Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated. Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems. ● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking. At worst, this will lead to engine damage.

■Fuel-related poor driveability

If poor driveability (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.) is encountered after using a different type of fuel, discontinue the use of that type of fuel.

■When refueling with gasohol

Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.

Tire information

Typical tire symbols

Full-size tire


J I H G F E D M+S 225/65R17 102H NAME M+LOAD + 1x KO XXX XLS.IAT XXXKPA(XXPSLIMAY.PREAS) MUSTUR'S MAX.LOAD + 1x KO XXX XLS.IAT XXXKPA(XXPSLIMAY.PREAS) A B C MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MAX. LOAD + 1x KO XXX XLS.IAT XXXKPA(XXPSLIMAY.PREAS) MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINi MAX. LOAD + 1x KO XXX XLS.IAT XXXKPA(XXPSLIMAY.PREAS) MINi MAX. LOAD + 1x KO XXX XLS.IAT XXXKPA(XXPSLIMAY.PREAS) MINi MAX. LOAD + 1x KO XXX XLS.IAT XXXKPA(XXPSLIMAY.PREAS) MINi MAX. LOAD + 1x KO XXX XLS.IAT XXXKPA(XXPSLIMAY.PREAS) MINi MAX. LOAD + 1x KO XXX XLS.IAT MAX. LOAD + 1x Max. LOAD + 1x Max. LOAD + 1x Max. LOAD + 1x Max. LOAD + 1x Max. LOAD + 1x Max. LOAD + 1x Max. LOAD + 1x Max. LOAD + 1x Max. LOAD + 1x Max. LOAD + 1x Max. LOAD + 1x Max. LOAD + 1x Max. LOAD + 1x Max. LOAD + 1x Max. Load + 1x Max. Load + 1x Max. Load + 1x Max. Load + 1x Max. Load + 1x Max. Load + 1x Max. Load + 1x Max. Load + 1x Max. Load + 1x Max. Load + 1x Max. Load + 1x Max. Load + 1x Max. Load + 1x Max. Load + 1x Max. Load + Miner TRESARXXXX COMBIXXX COGN MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET MINI-TRIFLET Miner TRESARXXXX COMBIXXX COGN Miner TRESARXXXX COMBIXXX COGN

▶ Compact spare tire


E F D H H TEMPORARY USE ONLY TURLESS RADVAL T165/80R17 10MM K A B G C MINI-TO XXX KPA (XXPSI) 4 PLY TREAD 4 PLY 300WALL MYLON MAXU MAX LONE XXX PLY 300X1 LESS MAX MAFS NAME ACTURERS NAME

A Tire size ( P.698) B DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) ( P.697) C Location of treadwear indicators ( P.590) D Tire ply composition and materials Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire. E Radial tires or bias-ply tires A radial tire has "RADIAL" on the sidewall. A tire not marked "RADIAL" is a bias-ply tire. F TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure. G Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure ( P.700) H Maximum cold tire inflation pressure ( P.700) This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated. I Uniform tire quality grading For details, see "Uniform Tire Quality Grading" that follows. J Summer tires or all season tires ( P.591) An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer tire. K "TEMPORARY USE ONLY" A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.

Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

▶ Type A 

graph TD
    B["B"] --> XX["XX"]
    B --> XXX["XXX"]
    XX --> C["C"]
    XX --> D["D"]
    XXX --> E["E"]
    XXX --> F["F"]
    XXX --> G["G"]

A DOT symbol\* B Tire Identification Number (TIN) C Tire manufacturer's identification mark D Tire size code E Manufacturer's optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters) F Manufacturing week G Manufacturing year \*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. ▶ Type B 

graph TD
    B["B"] --> DOT["DOT"]
    B --> XXXX["XXX"]
    B --> XXXXXX["XXXXXXXX"]
    B --> XXXX1["XXXX"]
    DOT --> A["A"]
    DOT --> C["C"]
    XXXX --> D["D"]
    XXXX --> E["E"]
    XXXX --> F["F"]

A DOT symbol\* B Tire Identification Number (TIN) C Tire manufacturer's identification mark D Manufacturer's code E Manufacturing week F Manufacturing year \*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

Tire size

■Typical tire size information

The illustration indicates typical tire size. 

T165/80 R 17 104M A B C D E F G

A Tire use (P = Passenger car, T = Temporary use) B Section width (millimeters) C Aspect ratio (tire height to section width) D Tire construction code (R = Radial, D = Diagonal) E Wheel diameter (inches) F Load index (2 digits or 3 digits) G Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter)

■Tire dimensions


A B C

A Section width B Tire height C Wheel diameter

Tire section names


graph TD
    A --> B
    B --> C
    C --> D
    D --> E
    E --> F
    F --> G
    G --> H
    H --> I
    I --> J
    J --> K
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

A Bead B Sidewall C Shoulder D Tread E Belt F Inner liner G Reinforcing rubber H Carcass I Rim lines J Bead wires K Chafer

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading. Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

■DOT quality grades

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

■Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

■Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. Glossary of tire terminology

Tire related term Meaning
Cold tire inflation pressure	Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition
Maximum inflation pressure	The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Recommended inflation pressure	Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
Accessory weight	The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not)
Curb weight	The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine
Maximum loaded vehicle weight	The sum of:(a) Curb weight(b) Accessory weight(c) Vehicle capacity weight(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant weight	150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows
Occupant distribution	Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as speci-fied in the third column of Table 1* below
Production options weight	The combined weight of installed regular pro-duction options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim
Rim	A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter(Wheel diameter)	Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim	diameter and width
Rim type designation	The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by style or code
Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight(Total load capacity)	The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.(68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity
Vehicle maximum load on the tire	The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the max-imum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on the tire	The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and dividing by two
Weather side	The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire
Bead	The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation	A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead
Bias ply tire	A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the center-line of the tread
Carcass	The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking	The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall
Cord	The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation	The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds
Cracking	Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner-liner of the tire extending to cord material
CT	A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire	A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner	The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire
Innerliner separation	The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass
Intended outboard side-wall	(a)The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or(b)The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire	A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating	The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating	The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible inflation pressure	The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated
Measuring rim	The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements
Open splice	Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width	The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs
Passenger car tire	A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multi-purpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation	A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies
Pneumatic tire	A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load
Radial ply tire	A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire	A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
Section width	The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands
Sidewall	That portion of a tire between the tread and bead
Sidewall separation	The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall
Snow tire	A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( )on at least one sidewall
Test rim	The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire
Tread	That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road
Tread rib	A tread section running circumferentially around a tire
Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators (TWI)	The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture	The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing

\*: Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants	Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants	Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4 2 2 in front
5 through 10 3		2 in front, 1 in second seat
11 through 15 5		2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat
16 through 20 7		2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

Customizable features

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to suit your preferences. The settings of these features can be changed using the multi-information display, navigation/multimedia system, or at your Toyota dealer.

Customizing vehicle features

■Changing using the navigation/multimedia system

1 Press the "MENU" button. 2 Select "Setup" on the menu screen and select "Vehicle". 3 Select "Vehicle Customization". Various setting can be changed. Refer to the list of settings that can be changed for details.

■Changing using the multi-information display

1 Press or of the meter control switches and select  2 Press or of the meter control switches, select the item. 3 To switch the function on and off, press to switch to the desired setting. 4 To perform detailed setting of functions that support detailed settings, press and hold and display the setting screen. The method of performing detailed setting differs for each screen. Please refer to the advice sentence displayed on the screen. To go back to the previous screen or exit the customize mode, press 

When customizing using the navigation/multimedia system or multi-information display

Stop the vehicle in a safe place, apply the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to P. Also, to prevent 12-volt battery discharge, leave the hybrid system operating while customizing the features. 

WARNING

During customization

As the hybrid system needs to be operating during customization, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard. 

NOTICE

During customization

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the hybrid system is operating while customizing features.

Customizable Features

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further details. A Vehicles with navigation system or multimedia system: Settings that can be changed using the navigation system or multimedia system B Settings that can be changed using the multi-information display C Settings that can be changed by your Toyota dealer Definition of symbols: O = Available, - = Not available

■ Predictive efficient drive ^*1 ( P.75)

Function Default setting	Customized setting	A	B	C
Predictive efficient drive On Off O --

^*1 :Vehicles with navigation system ^*2 \*2: This function can only be used in the mainland U.S.A. It cannot be used in other states and territories, including Alaska and Hawaii.

■ Alarm ^* (→P.84)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	A	B	C
Activates the alarm when the doors are unlocked using the mechanical key	Off On – – O

\*: For vehicles sold in Canada ■ Gauges, meters and multi-information display ( P.94, 98, 103)

Function*1	Default setting	Customized setting	A	B	C
Language*2	“English” (English)	“Français canadien” (Canadian French)	O O -
		“Español mexicano” (Mexican Spanish)
Units*2	miles (MPG US)	km (km/L)	O O -
		km (L/100 km)
		miles (MPG Imperial)
Speedometer display*3	Analog Digital - O -
EV indicator On Off - O -
“Eco Guidance” (ECO Accelerator Guidance)	On Off - O -
“Fuel Economy”	“Total Average”	“Trip Average”	- O -
		“Tank Average”
Audio system linked display On Off - O -
Energy monitor On Off - O -
AWD system display On Off - O -
Drive information type Trip Total - O -
Drive information items (first item)	Distance	Average Speed	- O -
		Total Time
Drive information items (second item)	Total Time	Average Speed	- O -
		Distance
“Trip Summary”	“ECO Guidance”	“Drive Info”	- O -
Pop-up display	On	Off	-	O	-
Multi-Information display off Off On – O –
Suggestion function On		On (when the vehicle is stopped)	O – O
		Off

\*1: For details about each function: →P.109 \*2: The default setting varies according to country. \*3: Vehicles with 7-inch display only ■Door lock (→P.127, 670)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	A	B	C
Unlocking using a key	Driver's door unlocked in first step, all doors unlocked in second step	All doors unlocked in first step	--	O
Automatic door locking function	Shift position linked door locking operation	Off	O	O
		Speed linked door locking operation
Automatic door unlocking function	Shift position linked door unlocking operation	Off	O	O
		Driver's door linked door unlocking operation

■Smart key system \* and wireless remote control (→P.122, 147)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	A	B	C
Operation signal (emergency flashers)	On Off O	- O
Operation buzzer volume 5		Off	O	- O
		1 to 7
Time elapsed before the automatic door lock function is activated if a door is not opened after being unlocked	60 seconds	Off	O	O30	seconds
		120 seconds
Open door reminder buzzer (When locking the vehicle)	On Off – – O

\*: If equipped ■Smart key system ^*1 ( P.147)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	A	B	C
Smart key system On Off -- O
Smart door unlocking	Driver's door	All the doors	O	-	O
Number of consecutive door lock operations	2 times	As many as desired	--	O
Time elapsed before unlocking all the door when gripping and holding the driver's door handle*2	2 seconds	Off	--	O
		1.5 seconds
		2.5 seconds

\*1:If equipped \*2: This setting can be changed when the smart door unlocking setting is set to Driver's door. ■ Wireless remote control ( P.122)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	A	B	C
Wireless remote control	On	Off	-	-	O
Unlocking operation	Driver's door unlocked in first step, all doors unlocked in second step	All doors unlocked in first step	O	-O
Theft deterrent panic mode	On	Off	-	-	O

Function Default setting	Customized setting	A	B	C
Locking operation when door opened	On Off O	– O
The function that activates the switch of the wire-less remote control when locking the door* (→P.137)	On (Unlocking all the door)	Off	– – O
		On (Unlocking back door only)

\*: If equipped ■Power back door ^*1 (→P.137)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	A	B	C
Power back door operations	On Off – O –
Back door opener switch operations	Press and hold	One short press	--	O
switch of the wireless remote control operation	Press and hold	One short press	--	O
		Push twice
		Off
Operation buzzer volume 3		1	-	O -
		2
Operation buzzer while the back door is operating*2	Off On –	O
Opening angle 5		1 to 4	-	O -
		User setting*3
Power back door open operation when the back door opener switch is pressed	On Off –	O
Back door closing assist On Off –	Off –	O
Hands Free Power Back Door*1,4	On Off –	O	O

\*1:If equipped ^*2 : The operation buzzer that sounds when the back door begins to operate cannot be turned off. ^*3 : The open position is set by the power back door switch. ( P.146) \*4: When the towing hitch is installed, Hands Free Power Back Door does not work. ■Driving position memory ^* (→P.156)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	A	B	C
Selection the door linking driving position memory with door unlock operation	Driver's door All doors – – O
Function to prevent contact between the head restraint and ceiling (while moving to memory location)	On Off – – O

\*: If equipped ■Power windows, and moon roof ^* or panoramic moon roof ^* (→P.176, 179, 182)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	A	B	C
Key linked operation (open)	Off On -- O
Key linked operation (close)	Off On -- O
Wireless remote control linked operation (open)	Off On -- O
Wireless remote control linked operation signal (buzzer)	On Off -- O
Side windows open warning function	On Off -- O
Sliding roof open warning function	On Off -- O

\*: If equipped ■Moon roof ^* (→P.179)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	A	B	C
Automatic mode On Off -- O
Opening direction when using the key linked operation	Slide Tilt up -- O
Opening direction when using the wireless remote control linked operation	Slide Tilt up -- O

\*: If equipped ■Lights (→P.229)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	A	B	C
Daytime Running Lights*1	On Off O	- O
Light reminder buzzer On Off	-- O
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System)*2	On Off -- O

\*1: Except for Canada \*2:If equipped ■Automatic light control system ^* (→P.229)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	A	B	C
Light sensor sensitivity	Standard	-2 to 2	O	-	O
Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off after doors are closed	30 seconds60	Off	O	-O
		seconds
		90 seconds
Windshield wiper linked headlight illumination	On Off - - O

\*: If equipped ■Rear window wiper ( P.239)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	A	B	C
Back door opening linked rear window wiper stop function	Off On – – O
Washer linked rear window wiper operation	On Off – – O
Shift position linked rear window wiper operation (→P.239)	Only once	Off	– –	O
		Continuous

■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) ( P.250)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	A	B	C
PCS (Pre-Collision System) On Off – O –
Adjust alert timing Middle		Early	– O –
		Late

■ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (→P.258)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	A	B	C
Lane centering function On Off – O –
Steering assist function On Off – O –
Alert sensitivity High Standard – O –
Vehicle sway warning func-tion	On Off – O –
Vehicle sway warning sensi-tivity	Standard	Low	– O –
		High

■RSA (Road Sign Assist) \* (→P.268)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	A	B	C
RSA (Road Sign Assist) On Off – O –
Excess speed notification method	Display only	No notification	- O	-
		Display and buzzer
Excess speed notification level	1 mph (2 km/h)	3 mph (5 km/h)	- O	-
		5 mph (10 km/h)
Other notifications method (No-entry notification)	Display only	No notification	- O	-
		Display and buzzer

\*: If equipped ■BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) \* (→P.282)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	A	B	C
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) On	Off – O –
Outside rear view mirror indicator brightness	Bright Dim	– O –
Alert timing for presence of approaching vehicle (sensitivity)	Intermediate	Early	– O –
		Late
		Only when vehicle detected in blind spot

\*: If equipped ■RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert) function ^*1 ( P.282)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	A	B	C
RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert) function	On Off - O -
Buzzer volume^*2	Level 2	Level 1	- O -
		Level 3

\*1:If equipped \*2: This setting is linked with the buzzer volume of the intuitive parking assist. ■Intuitive parking assist ^*1 ( P.291)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	A	B	C
Intuitive parking assist On Off	- O O
Buzzer volume^*2	2	1	- O O
		3

\*1: If equipped \*2: This setting is linked with the buzzer volume of the RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert) function. ■PKSB (Parking Support Brake) \* (→P.298)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	A	B	C
PKSB (Parking Support Brake) function	On Off – O –

\*: If equipped ■ Automatic air conditioning system ( P.524)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	A	B	C
A/C Auto switch operation On	Off O – O
Switching to the outside air mode when the vehicle is parked	On Off – – O

■Illumination (→P.534)

Function Default setting		Customized setting	A	B	C
Time elapsed before the interior lights turn off	15 seconds	Off	O	O7	5 seconds
		30 seconds
Operation after the power switch is turned off	On Off – – O
Operation when the doors are unlocked	On Off – – O
Operation when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your person*1	On Off – – O
Footwell lighting*2	On Off – – O

\*1: Vehicles with smart key system only \*2:If equipped

■ Vehicle customization

- When the speed linked door locking function and shift position linked door locking function are both on, the door lock operates as follows. - If the vehicle is started with all the doors locked, the speed linked door locking function would not operate. - If the vehicle is started with any door unlocked, the speed linked door locking function will operate. - When shifting the shift lever to any position other than P, all the doors will be locked. - When the smart key system is off, the selecting door to unlock cannot be customized. - When the doors remain closed after unlocking the doors and the automatic door lock function is activated, the signals will be generated in accordance with the Operation signal (buzzer) and the Operation signal (emergency flashers) settings.

Items to initialize

The following items must be initialized for normal system operation after such cases as the battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on the vehicle: List of the items to initialize

Item When to initialize Reference
Power back door*1	After reconnecting or changing the 12-volt batteryAfter changing a fuse	P.142
Intuitive parking assist*1		P.294
Parking Support Brake*1		P.302
Power windows	When functioning abnormally	P.176
Moon roof*1		P.180
Panoramic moon roof*1		P.183
Maintenance required reminder message	After the maintenance is performed	P.572
Tire pressure warning sys-tem*1	When rotating the tiresWhen changing the tireAfter registering the ID codes	P.599
Toyota parking assist moni-tor*1	After reconnecting or changing the 12-volt batteryAfter changing a fuse	P.331, 363
Panoramic view monitor*1, 2

\*1: If equipped \*2: Vehicles with Audio Plus or Premium Audio, refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

10-1. For owners

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners.... 720 Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French).... 721 SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French).... 722

Reporting safety defects for U.S. own- ers

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-331-4331). If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave. S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual. See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English.

Utilisation adéquate des ceintures de sécurité


Line drawing of a person sitting on a chair wearing a seatbelt and sling (no text or symbols)

- Tirez sur la ceinture épaulière jusqu'à ce qu'elle recouvre entièrement l'épaule; elle ne doit cependant pas toucher le cou ni glisser de l'épaule. - Placez la ceinture abdominale le plus bas possible sur les hanches. - Réglez la position du dossier. Tenez-vous assis bien au fond du siège, le dos droit. - Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de sécurité.

Entretien et soin

■Manipulation des ceintures de sécurité

Avec un chiffon ou une éponge, nettoyez à l'aide d'un savon doux et de l'eau tiède. Vérifiez aussi les ceintures régulièrement pour vous assurer qu'elles ne présentent pas d'usure excessive, d'effilochage ou de coupures. 

AVERTISSEMENT

■Dommages et usure de la ceinture de sécurité

Vérifiez périodiquement le système de ceintures de sécurité. Vérifiez qu'il n'y a pas de coupures, d'effilochures ni de pièces desserrées. N'utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité endommagée avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée. Les ceintures de sécurité endommagées ne peuvent pas protéger les occupants contre les blessures graves, voire mortelles.

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual. See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in English.

Système de coussins gonflables SRS

■ Emplacement des coussins gonflables SRS


A B C D D A B E

▶ Coussins gonflables SRS avant A Coussin gonflable SRS du conducteur/coussin gonflable SRS du passager avant Peuvent aider à protéger la tête et la poitrine du conducteur et du passager avant contre les impacts avec des composants intérieurs B Coussin gonflable SRS de protection des genoux Peut aider à protéger le conducteur C Coussin gonflable SRS du coussin de siège Peut aider à retenir le passager avant Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et en rideau D Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux Peuvent aider à protéger le torse des occupants des sièges avant E Coussins gonflables SRS en rideau \- Peuvent aider à protéger principalement la tête des occupants des sièges latéraux \- Peuvent aider à empêcher les occupants d'être éjectés du véhicule en cas de tonneaux ■ Composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS 

A B C D E F G H I J K F D E H F Q N P O N M L F G

A Capteurs d'impact avant B Voyants "AIR BAG ON" et "AIR BAG OFF" C Coussin gonflable du passager avant D Capteurs d'impact latéral (portière avant) E Coussins gonflables en rideau F Limiteurs de force et dispositifs de tension des ceintures de sécurité G Capteurs d'impact latéral (avant) H Coussins gonflables latéraux I Coussin gonflable du coussin de siège J Contacteur de boucle de ceinture de sécurité du passager avant K Contacteur de boucle de ceinture de sécurité du conducteur L Capteur de position du siège du conducteur M Coussin gonflable du conducteur N Système de classification de l'occupant du siège du passager avant (ECU et capteurs) ☐ Coussin gonflable de protection des genoux P Lampe témoin SRS Q Module de capteur de coussin gonflable Votre véhicule est doté de COUSSINS GONFLABLES ÉVOLUÉS dont la conception s'appuie sur les normes de sécurité des véhicules à moteur américains (FMVSS208). Le module de capteur de coussin gonflable (ECU) contrôle le déploiement des coussins gonflables en fonction des informations obtenues des capteurs et d'autres éléments affichés dans le diagramme des composants du système ci-dessus. Ces informations comprennent des données relatives à la gravité de l'accident et aux occupants. Au moment du déploiement des coussins gonflables, une réaction chimique se produit dans les gonfleurs de coussin gonflable et les coussins gonflables se remplissent rapidement d'un gaz non toxique pour aider à limiter le mouvement des occupants. 

AVERTISSEMENT

■Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

Observez les précautions suivantes en ce qui concerne les cous-sins gonflables SRS. Négliger de le faire pourrait occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles. Le conducteur et tous les passagers du véhicule doivent porter leur ceinture de sécurité de la manière appropriée. Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs supplémentaires qui doivent être utilisés avec les ceintures de sécurité. 

AVERTISSEMENT

Le coussin gonflable SRS du conducteur se déploie avec une force considérable et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notamment lorsque le conducteur se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. La National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), aux États-Unis, fait les recommandations suivantes : La zone à risque du coussin gon- flable du conducteur couvre 2 à 3 in. (50 à 75 mm) de de déploiement du coussin gon- flable. Pour assurer une marge de sécurité suffisante, restez à 10 in. (250 mm) du coussin gonflable. Cette distance est mesurée depuis le centre du volant jusqu'à votre sternum. Si maintenant vous vous tenez assis à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de con- duite de plusieurs manières : - Reculez votre siège à la position maximale vous permettant d'atteindre encore aisément les pédales. - Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège. Bien que les véhicules soient conçus différemment, la plupart des conducteurs peuvent maintenir une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), même si leur siège se trouve complètement vers l'avant, simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier du siège vers l'arrière. Si la visibilité avant est moindre après avoir incliné le dossier de votre siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et non glissant pour être assis plus haut ou relevez le siège si cette option est disponible sur votre véhicule. - Si votre volant est réglable en hauteur, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela vous permet d'orienter le coussin gonflable vers votre buste plutôt que vers votre tête et vers votre cou. Le siège doit être réglé de la manière recommandée ci-dessus par la NHTSA, tout en gardant le contrôle des pédales et du volant, ainsi que la vue sur les commandes du tableau de bord. Si la rallonge de ceinture de sécurité a été reliée à la boucle des ceintures de sécurité des sièges avant sans avoir aussi été attachée à la plaque de blocage des ceintures de sécurité, les coussins gonflables SRS avant considéreront que le conducteur et le passager avant portent tout de même leur ceinture de sécurité même si les ceintures de sécurité ne sont pas attachées. Les coussins gonflables SRS avant peuvent alors ne pas s'activer correctement lors d'une collision, ce qui pourrait occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, en cas de collision. Assurez-vous de toujours porter la ceinture de sécurité avec la rallonge de ceinture de sécurité. 

Illustration of a person sitting on a chair with a stopbelt buckle, no text or symbols present


AVERTISSEMENT

Le coussin gonflable SRS du passager avant se déploie également avec une force considérable et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notamment lorsque le passager avant se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. Le siège du passager avant doit se trouver le plus loin possible du coussin gonflable et le dossier doit être réglé de manière à ce que le passager avant soit assis bien droit. Le déploiement d'un coussin gonflable risque d'infliger des blessures graves, voire mortelles, aux bébés et aux enfants mal assis et/ou mal attachés. Un bébé ou un enfant trop petit pour utiliser une ceinture de sécurité doit être correctement retenu à l'aide d'un dispositif de retenue pour enfants. Toyota recommande vivement de placer et d'attacher correctement tous les bébés et tous les enfants sur les sièges arrière du véhicule à l'aide de dispositifs de retenue adaptés. Les sièges arrière sont plus sécuritaires pour les bébés et les enfants que le siège du passager avant. N'installez jamais un dispositif de retenue pour enfants de type dos à la route sur le siège du passager avant, même si le voyant "AIR BAG OFF" est allumé. En cas d'accident, la force et la vitesse de déploiement du coussin gonflable du passager avant pourraient infliger à l'enfant des blessures graves, voire mortelles, si le dispositif de retenue pour enfants de type dos à la route était installé sur le siège du passager avant. \- Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du siège et ne vous appuyez pas sur la planche de bord. 

Illustration showing a person sitting in a car with a 'no' symbol above, indicating no smoking or no smoking.

\- Ne laissez pas un enfant se tenir face au coussin gonflable SRS du passager avant ni s'asseoir sur les genoux d'un passager avant. 

Diagram showing two scenarios of a child inside a vehicle, one with a no-smoking symbol and the other with it.

● Ne laissez pas les occupants des sièges avant tenir des objets sur leurs genoux. \- Ne vous appuyez pas sur la portière ou sur le brancard de pavillon, ni sur les montants avant, latéraux ou arrière. 

Diagram showing a person sitting in a car seat with a 'no' symbol indicating no restriction.


AVERTISSEMENT

\- Ne laissez personne s'age-nouiller face à la portière sur le siège du passager ni sortir la tête ou les mains à l'extérieur du véhicule. 

Illustration of a child sitting in a car seat with a no-smoking symbol (no text or labels)

\- Ne fixez et n'appuyez rien sur des zones telles que la planche de bord, le tampon de volant ou encore la partie inférieure du tableau de bord. Ces objets peuvent se transformer en projectiles lorsque les coussins gonflables SRS du conducteur, du passager avant et de protection des genoux se déploient. 

Diagram of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and umbrella with no stop sign indicated

\- Ne fixez rien sur des zones telles que les portières, le parebrise, les glaces latérales, les montants avant ou arrière, le brancard de pavillon et la poignée de maintien. 

Diagram showing car interior with directional arrows and a no-smoking symbol, indicating traffic flow or safety warning.

Véhicules non dotés du système Smart key : N'accrochez pas d'objets lourds, pointus ou durs, par exemple des clés ou des accessoires, à la clé. Ces objets pourraient empêcher le déploiement du coussin gonflable SRS de protection des genoux ou être projetés violement dans l'assise du siège du conducteur par la force du déploiement, et donc présenter un danger. 

Diagram showing a car interior with a 'No' symbol indicating no restrictions, and a key inserted into the seat.

N'accrochez pas de cintres ni d'autres objets rigides sur les crochets porte-vêtements. Tous ces objets pourraient se transformer en projectiles et vous occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, en cas de déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS en rideau. Si un recouvrement de vinyle est placé sur la zone de déploiement du coussin gonflable SRS de protection des genoux, veillez à le retirer. 

AVERTISSEMENT

N'utilisez pas d'accessoires recouvrant les parties du siège où les coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et le coussin gonflable SRS du coussin de siège se déploient, car ces accessoires pourraient entraver le déploiement des coussins SRS. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et le coussin gonflable SRS du coussin de siège de s'activer correctement, rendre le système inopérant ou provoquer le déploiement accidentel des coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et du coussin gonflable SRS du coussin de siège, occasionnant des blessures graves, voire mortelles. - Ne frappez pas et n'appliquez pas une pression importante à l'emplacement des portières avant ou des composants des coussins gonflables SRS. Cela peut provoquer un mauvais fonctionnement des coussins gonflables SRS. - Ne touchez à aucun composant des coussins gonflables SRS immédiatement après leur déploiement (gonflage), car ils pourraient être chauds. Si vous avez de la difficulté à respirer après le déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS, ouvrez une portière ou une glace latérale pour laisser entrer l'air frais, ou quittez le véhicule si vous pouvez le faire en toute sécurité. Dès que possible, nettoyez tous les résidus afin d'éviter les irritations cutanées. Si les emplacements de stockage des coussins gonflables SRS, tels que le tampon de volant et les garnitures des montants avant et arrière, sont endommagés ou fissurés, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Toyota. - Ne placez aucun objet, par exemple un coussin, sur le siège du passager avant. Cela disperserait le poids du passager, ce qui empêcherait le capteur de le détecter correctement. Cela pourrait empêcher le déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS du passager avant en cas de collision. ■Modification et mise au rebut des composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS Ne mettez pas votre véhicule au rebut et n'effectuez aucune des modifications suivantes sans d'abord consulter votre concessionnaire Toyota. Les coussins gonflables SRS pourraient fonctionner de manière incorrecte ou se déployer (gonfler) accidentellement, ce qui serait susceptible d'occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles. ● Installation, retrait, démontage et réparation des coussins gonflables SRS Réparations, modifications, retrait ou remplacement du volant, du tableau de bord, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou du capitonnage des sièges, des montants avant, latéraux et arrière, des brancards de pavillon, des panneaux des portières avant, des garnitures des portières avant ou des haut-parleurs des portières avant ● Modifications du panneau de la portière avant (comme le perforer) 

AVERTISSEMENT

- Réparations ou modifications de l'aile avant, du pare-chocs avant ou du côté de l'habitacle Installation d'une protection de calandre (barre safari, barre kangourou, etc.), de lames de déneigement, de treuils ou d'un porte-bagages de toit ● Modifications du système de suspension du véhicule Installation d'appareils électroniques tels qu'un émetteur-récepteur radio ou un lecteur de CD Modifications à votre véhicule pour une personne aux capacités physiques réduites

Index

What to do if... (Trouble-shooting) 732 Alphabetical Index ..... 735

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

If you have a problem, check the following before contacting your Toyota dealer. The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed 

You lose your keys

- If you lose your keys or mechanical keys, new genuine keys or mechanical keys can be made by your Toyota dealer. (→P.668) ● Vehicles with smart key system: If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. (→P.668) 

The doors cannot be locked or unlocked

- Is the key battery weak or depleted? (→P.618) ● Vehicles with smart key system: Is the power switch in ON? When locking the doors, turn the power switch to OFF. (→P.216) ● Vehicles with smart key system: Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle? When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on your person. \- The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio wave. (→P.123, 148) 

The rear door cannot be opened

\- Is the child-protector lock set? The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set. Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the child-protector lock. (→P.132)

If you think something is wrong


The hybrid system does not start (vehicles without smart key system)

- Is the shift lever in P? (→P.210) - Is the 12-volt battery discharged? (→P.672) 

The hybrid system does not start (vehicles with smart key system)

\- Did you press the power switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal? (→P.212) - Is the shift lever in P? ( P.212) - Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle? (→P.147) - Is the steering wheel unlocked? (→P.213) - Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? In this case, the hybrid system can be started in a temporary way. (→P.671) - Is the 12-volt battery discharged? (→P.672) 

The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress the brake pedal

\- Is the power switch in ON? If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the power switch in ON (→P.221) 

The steering wheel can- not be turned after the hybrid system is stopped

● Vehicles without smart key system: It is locked to prevent theft of the vehicle if the key is removed from the power switch. (→P.210) ● Vehicles with smart key sys- tem: It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle. (→P.213) 

The windows do not open or close by operating the power window switches

\- Is the window lock switch pressed? The power window except for the one at the driver's seat cannot be operated if the window lock switch is pressed. (→P.178) 

The power switch is turned off automatically (vehicles with smart key system)

\- The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in ACC or ON (the hybrid system is not operating) for a period of time. ( P.216) 

A warning buzzer sounds during driving

● The seat belt reminder light is flashing Are the driver and the passengers wearing the seat belts? (→P.649, 650) ● The parking brake indicator is on Is the parking brake released? $$ (\rightarrow \mathrm{P}. 2 2 4) $$ Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound. (→P.642, 654) 

An alarm is activated and the horn sounds (if equipped)

\- Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the alarm? The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds. ( P.84) To stop the alarm, turn the power switch to ON or start the hybrid system. 

A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle

- Is the message displayed on the multi-information display? Check the message on the multi-information display. $$ (\rightarrow \mathrm{P}. 6 5 4) $$ 

A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed

\- When a warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed, refer to P.642, 654.

When a problem has occurred


If you have a flat tire

\- Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the spare tire. ( P.658) 

The vehicle becomes stuck

\- Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow. (→P.680)

Alphabetical Index

A

A/C 524

Air conditioning filter......609 Automatic air conditioning system ....524 Eco air conditioning mode....525 Front seat concentrated airflow mode (S-FLOW)....528

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) 369

Function 369 Warning light 644

ACA (Active Cornering Assist) 369

Active Cornering Assist (ACA) 369

Adaptive Front-lighting System (AFS)....232

AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) 232

Airbags 35

Airbag operating conditions....37 Airbag precautions for your child 40 Airbag warning light......644 Correct driving posture......29 Curtain shield airbag operating conditions....38 Curtain shield airbag precautions 40 Front passenger occupant classification system....45 General airbag precautions....40 Locations of airbags ....35 Modification and disposal of air-bags 44 Seat cushion airbag ....35 Side airbag operating conditions 38 Side airbag precautions .....40 Side and curtain shield airbags operating conditions ....38 Side and curtain shield airbags precautions....40 SRS airbags ....35 SRS warning light......644

Air conditioning filter ......609

Air conditioning system......524

Air conditioning filter ......609 Automatic air conditioning sys- tem ....524 Eco air conditioning mode ....525 Front seat concentrated airflow mode (S-FLOW) ....528

Alarm 84

Alarm 84 Warning buzzer 642

AM/FM/SiriusXM (SXM) radio Refer to the table below to identify the problem and take the suggested corrective action442

AM 437

Anchor brackets .....54, 63

Android Auto......419, 422, 449

Android Auto button (Menu screen)....389

Antenna (Smart key system) .147

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)369

Function....369 Warning light 644

Apple CarPlay 446

Apple CarPlay ^® /Android Auto 419, 422

Apple CarPlay button (Menu screen)....389

Approach warning ......278

Apps button (Menu screen)...389

Armrest....556

Assist grips ....556

Audio 432

Operating information......458 Some basics......433 Turning the system on and off 433 Audio button (Menu screen)..389 Audio button (Setup screen) 392, 456 AUDIO button....387 Audio buttons overview......387 Audio settings ......456 Automatic air conditioning sys- tem....524 Air conditioning filter......609 Eco air conditioning mode....525 Automatic headlight leveling system....231 Automatic High Beam ......232 Automatic light control system 230 Auxiliary boxes....539 Average fuel consumption ....115 Average fuel economy......105 Average vehicle speed ..108, 115

B

Back door....133 Hands Free Power Back Door 138 Power back door 137 Wireless remote control .....137 Back-up lights Replacing light bulbs .....624 Wattage....692 Battery (12-volt battery) .....588 If the 12-volt battery is discharged ....672 Preparing and checking before winter....378 Replacing 674 Warning light 642 Battery (traction battery) .....76 Blind Spot Monitor (BSM).....282 Blind Spot Monitor function ..286 Rear Cross Traffic Alert function 288 Bluetooth ^® button (Setup screen)....392 Bluetooth ^® details settings ...406 Bluetooth® setup screen......407 Connecting a Bluetooth ^® device 407 Deleting a Bluetooth® device409 Detailed settings screen .....411 Displaying the Bluetooth ^® setup screen....406 Editing the Bluetooth ^® device information....410 Registering a Bluetooth ^® device 409 Bluetooth ^® device information 410 Bluetooth ^® hands-free system 479 Bluetooth ^® phone message function....490 Calling the message sender.493 Checking received messages 491 Displaying the message screen 490 Receiving a message .....491 Replying to a message (dictation reply) 492 Replying to a message (quick reply) 493 Bottle holders ....539 Brake Brake Hold....227 Fluid....586 Parking brake 224 Regenerative braking .....73 Warning light 642 Brake assist ....369 Brake Hold......227 Break-in tips....190

Brightness control

Instrument panel light control 96, 102

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).....282

Blind Spot Monitor function ..286 Rear Cross Traffic Alert function 288

C

Care

Aluminum wheels ....566 Exterior......566 Interior 569 Seat belts 569

Cargo capacity ......196, 199

Cargo hooks ....541

Chains 380

Child-protectors ....132

Child restraint system ....52

Fixed with a LATCH system...61 Fixed with a seat belt .....56 Front passenger occupant classification system....45 Points to remember....52 Riding with children .....51 Types of child restraint system installation method ....54 Using an anchor bracket .....63

Child safety ....51

12-volt battery precautions .....588, 676 Airbag precautions ....40 Back door precautions .....133 Child restraint system......54 Heated steering wheel and seat heater precautions ....531 How your child should wear the seat belt....32 Moon roof precautions .....180 Panoramic moon roof precautions....184 Power window lock switch....178 Power window precautions...177 Rear door child-protectors....132 Removed key battery precautions....620 Seat belt extender precautions 32 Seat belt precautions......31 Seat heater precautions .....531

Cleaning 566, 569

Aluminum wheels ....566 Exterior 566 Interior 569 Radar sensor....245 Seat belts 569

Clock....97, 102

Coat hooks 557

Command list......473

Condenser....585

Connected Services ....509

Console box 538

Consumption screen......113

Coolant

Checking 584 Preparing and checking before winter....378 Warning light 643

Cooling system....584

Hybrid system overheating...677

Cruise control

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range .....271

Cup holders....538

Current fuel consumption.....115

Current fuel economy .....105

Curtain shield airbags......35

Customizable features .....706

D

Daytime running light system230

Replacing light bulbs ......624

DCM ....510, 512, 513, 516

Deck board ....541

Defogger

Outside rear view mirrors .....526 Rear window ....526 Windshield....526

Digital Rear-view Mirror .....165

Dimensions ......684

Dinghy towing ......209

Display

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).....283 Consumption screen 113 Drive information 108 Driving information .....105 Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range......271 Energy monitor......113 Intuitive parking assist......291 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....264 Multi-information display .....103 RCTA 283 Warning messages ......654

Do-it-yourself maintenance ....573, 577

Door lock

Back door 133 Side doors 127 Smart key system....147 Wireless remote control .....122

Doors

Automatic door locking and unlocking system....132 Back door 133 Door glasses 176 Door lock 127 Open door warning buzzer...131 Outside rear view mirrors .....174 Rear door child-protectors....132 Side doors 127

Drive information ......108

Driver's seat belt reminder light 649

Driver's seat position memory 156

Driving position memory.....156 Memory recall function .....158

Driving

Break-in tips 190 Correct posture......29 Driving mode select switch...366 Hybrid vehicle driving tips.....376 Procedures ......189 Winter drive tips....378

Driving information display ...105

Driving mode select switch ...366

Driving position memory .....156

Memory recall function .....158

Driving support system information display....107

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

Function......271 Warning message 654

E

ECB (Electronically Controlled Brake System)....369

Eco drive mode....366 EDR (Event data recorder)......10

E-Four (Electronic On-Demand AWD system) ....370

Elapsed time ......108

Electric motor

Location....72 Specification 686

Electric Power Steering (EPS)

Function....370 Warning light 644

Electronically Controlled Brake System (ECB)....369

Electronic key

Battery-saving function......148 If the electronic key does not operate properly ....670 Replacing the battery .....618

Electronic sunshade .....182

Jam protection function .....183 Operation 182

Emergency, in case of

If a warning buzzer sounds ..642 If a warning light turns on.....642 If a warning message is dis- played....654 If the 12-volt battery is discharged ....672 If the electronic key does not operate properly....670 If the fuel filler door cannot be opened ....669 If the hybrid system will not start 667 If the vehicle is trapped in rising water 636 If you have a flat tire......658 If you lose your keys .....668 If you think something is wrong 641 If your vehicle becomes stuck 680 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency....635 If your vehicle needs to be towed 637 If your vehicle overheats .....677

Emergency flashers ...... 634

Energy monitor......113

Engine

Compartment ....582 Hood....579 Identification number......685

Engine coolant

Capacity 688 Checking 584 Preparing and checking before winter....378 Warning light 643

Engine coolant temperature gauge....94, 98

Engine oil

Capacity 686 Checking 582 Preparing and checking before winter....378 Warning light 643

Enhanced Vehicle Stability Control (Enhanced VSC)....369

Enhanced VSC (Enhanced Vehicle Stability Control)......369

Entering letters and numbers/list screen operation....397

Entering letters and numbers397 List screen 398

EPS (Electric Power Steering)

Function....370 Warning light 644

Establishing an Android Auto connection ....420

Establishing an Apple CarPlay connection ....419

EV drive mode......217 Event data recorder (EDR)......10 EV indicator....73

F

Flat tire....658

Tire pressure warning system 593

Floor mats ......28

Fluid

Brake 586, 689 Hybrid transmission......689 Rear differential 689 Washer 587

FM 437

Fog lights

Replacing light bulbs ......624 Switch....235 Wattage 692

Footwell lights ....534

Front passenger's seat belt

reminder light ......649 Front passenger occupant classification system ....45 Front position lights Light switch 229 Front seat heaters ....531 Front seats.... 153 Adjustment ......153 Cleaning 569 Correct driving posture......29 Driving position memory.....156 Head restraints......159 Memory recall function .....158 Seat heaters....531 Seat position memory .....156 Seat ventilators ....531 Front side marker lights .....229 Light switch 229 Replacing light bulbs ......624 Wattage....692 Front turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs ......624 Turn signal lever......223 Wattage....692 Fuel Capacity 685 Fuel gauge .....94, 98 Gas station information .....752 Information 694 Refueling 241 Type 685, 694 Warning light 649 Fuel consumption information Average fuel consumption....115 Current fuel consumption.....115 Fuel filler door 242 If the fuel filler door cannot be opened ....669 Refueling 241 Fuel gauge .....94, 98 Fuses.... 621

G

Garage door opener ....557 Gas station information .....752 Gauges ......94, 98 General button (Setup screen) 392, 426 General settings ......426 Displaying the general settings screen....426 General settings screen .....426 Glove box ....537

H

Hands-free system .....479 Headlights 229 Adaptive Front-lighting System (AFS) 232 Automatic headlight leveling sys- tem ....231 Automatic High Beam system 232 Light switch....229 Replacing light bulbs ......624 Wattage 692 Head restraints ....159 Heated steering wheel......531 Heaters Automatic air conditioning sys- tem ....524 Heated steering wheel......531 Outside rear view mirrors .....526 Seat heaters ....531 High mounted stoplight Replacing light bulbs ......624 Hill-start assist control......369 HOME button....396 Home screen 396 Hood 579 Hooks Cargo hooks 541 Coat hooks ....557 Retaining hooks (floor mat) ....28 Horn 162 Hybrid battery (traction battery) Location....76 Specification......686 Hybrid battery air vent .....79 Hybrid system 72 ACC....211, 216 Emergency shut off system....80 Energy monitor/consumption screen 113 EV drive mode......217 High voltage components.....76 How to start the hybrid system 210, 212 Hybrid System Indicator ...94, 98 Hybrid system precautions.....76 Hybrid vehicle driving tips ....376 If the hybrid system will not start 667 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency....635 Ignition switch (power switch) 210, 212 Overheating....677 Power (ignition) switch .210, 212 Regenerative braking .....73 Starting the hybrid system ....210, 212 Hybrid System Indicator....94, 98 Hybrid transmission .....219 S mode....221

|

I/M test....576 Identification Engine 685 Vehicle 684 Ignition switch (power switch) 210, 212 Auto power off function .....216 Changing the power switch modes......211, 216 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency....635 Starting the hybrid system ....210, 212 Immobilizer system ....81 Indicators 88 Info button (Menu screen) .....389 Initialization Items to initialize....718 Maintenance....573 Moon roof 180 Panoramic moon roof ......183 Parking Support Brake ......302 Power back door 142 Power windows .....176 Tire pressure warning system 600 Initial screen....393 Caution screen 393 Restarting the system......393 Inside rear view mirror ...163, 165 Instrument panel light control 96, 102 Interior lights....534 Switch....534 Wattage 692 Intuitive parking assist Function......291 Warning message ......294 iPod/iPhone (Apple CarPlay).446

J

Jack Positioning a floor jack .....580 Vehicle-equipped jack ......659 Jack handle 659 Jam protection function Electronic sunshade .....183 Moon roof 179 Panoramic moon roof ......183 Power back door 140 Power windows .....176

K

Keyless entry

Smart key system.....147 Wireless remote control .....122

Keys......120

Battery-saving function......148 Electronic key......120 If the electronic key does not operate properly....670 If you lose your keys .....668 Key number plate .....120 Keyless entry....122, 147 Mechanical key 125 Power switch ......210, 212 Replacing the battery .....618 Warning buzzer 147 Wireless remote control key.122

Knee airbags....35

L

Lane Tracing Assist (LTA).....258

Operation 258 Warning messages ......267

Language (multi-information display)....111, 708

LATCH anchors ....61

Lever

Auxiliary catch lever .....579 Hood lock release lever......579 Shift lever 219 Turn signal lever....223 Wiper lever ......236, 239

License plate lights

Light switch 229 Replacing light bulbs ......624

Light bulbs

Replacing 624 Wattage....692

Lights

Automatic High Beam system 232 Fog light switch....235 Front interior lights....534 Headlight switch 229 Interior lights....534 Personal lights....535 Rear interior light 535 Replacing light bulbs .....624 Turn signal lever......223 Vanity lights 546 Wattage 692

Linking multi-information display and the system ....401

Lock steering column .....213

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist).....258

Operation......258 Warning messages......267

Luggage compartment light ....136, 139

Wattage 692

Luggage cover ....543

M

Maintenance

Do-it-yourself maintenance ..577 General maintenance .....573 Maintenance data......684 Maintenance requirements...572

Malfunction indicator lamp....643

Menu icons....104

Menu screen....389

Menu screen operation......389

Meter

Clock 97,102 Indicators......91 Instrument panel light control 96, 102 Meter control switches......104 Meters 94, 98 Multi-information display......103 Settings ......109, 707 Units 111,708 Warning lights ....89, 642 Warning messages .....112, 654

Meter control switches .....104

Microphone....482

Mirrors

Digital Rear-view Mirror......165 Inside rear view mirror.....163 Outside rear view mirror defoggers ....526 Outside rear view mirrors .....174 Vanity mirrors ....546

Mobile Assistant......477

Connectable devices and available functions....477 Mobile Assistant operation ...477

Moon roof

Door lock linked moon roof operation ....179 Jam protection function .....179 Operation 179 Warning message ....180

Multi-information display

Audio system-linked display.107 Changing the display......104 Display contents......103 Driving information display ...105 Driving support system information display ....107 Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range......271 Hybrid System Indicator .95, 100 Intuitive parking assist-sensor 291 Language 111,708 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....264 Menu icons....104 Meter control switches .....104 Navigation system-linked display 107 PCS (Pre-Collision System) .250 Pop-up display ....111 Settings 109,707 Suggestion function.....112, 708 Tire pressure 593 Units 111,708 Vehicle information display...108 Warning message display ....112 Warning messages......654

N

Navigation system-linked display 107

Noise from under vehicle......8

Normal mode......366

0

Odometer....94, 98

Odometer and trip meter display "ODO TRIP" switch.....96, 101

"ODO TRIP" switch .....96, 101 Oil

Engine oil....686

Opener

Back door 135, 137 Hood....579

Outer foot lights

Replacing light bulbs ......624 Wattage 692

Outside rear view mirrors.....174

Adjusting and folding .....174 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).....283 Outside rear view mirror defoggers 526

Outside temperature display

95, 101

Overheating......677

P

Panic mode ......123

Panoramic moon roof

Jam protection function .....183 Operation 182 Warning message ....184

Panoramic view monitor......334

Camera switch 336 Checking around the vehicle 339 Checking the front and around the vehicle ....340 Checking the rear and around the vehicle 345 Checking the sides of the vehicle 342 Customizing the panoramic view monitor ....353 Display 336 Driving precautions ....334 How to switch the display.....337 Magnifying function .....353 Panoramic view monitor precautions....354 Things you should know......363 When folding the outside rear view mirrors....352

Parking assist sensors (intuitive parking assist)....291

Parking brake

Operation 224 Parking brake engaged warning buzzer 226 Warning light 648 Warning message ......225

Parking lights

Light switch 229 Replacing light bulbs ......624 Wattage....692

Parking Support Brake (PKSB) 298

Indicator 91 Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles).....309 Parking Support Brake function (static objects) ....303 Warning light 646 Warning message ....302

PCS (Pre-Collision System)

Enabling/disabling the pre-collision system ....252 Function......250 Warning light 645 Warning message ......248, 656

Personal lights....535

Switch....535 Wattage 692

Phone....482

About the contacts in the contact list ....483 Phone screen operation .....479 Registering/Connecting a Bluetooth® phone ....481 Some basics....480 Troubleshooting......505 Voice command system .....483 When selling or disposing of the vehicle ....483

Phone button (Menu screen) .389

Phone button (Setup screen) 392

Phone button 482

Phone settings......495

Contacts/Call history settings497 Message settings ....503 Notifications/display settings 496 Sounds settings......495

PKSB (Parking Support Brake) 298

Indicator....91 Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles).....309 Parking Support Brake function (static objects) ....303 Warning light 646 Warning message ....302

Placing a call using the

Bluetooth ^® hands-free system 484

By call history 484 By contacts list ....485 By favorites list ....485 By home screen ....487 By keypad 486 Power back door switch 137, 138 Power outlets....546 Power steering (Electric Power Steering system) ....370 Warning light 644 Power switch ......210, 212 Auto power off function .....216 Changing the power switch modes ....211, 216 Starting the hybrid system ....210, 212 POWER VOLUME knob......433 Power windows Door lock linked window operation ....177 Jam protection function .....176 Operation 176 Window lock switch .....178 Pre-Collision System (PCS) Enabling/disabling the pre-collision system ....252 Function 250 Warning light 645 Warning message .....248, 656 Projection button (Menu screen) 389

R

Radar cruise control Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range......271 Radiator....585 Radio 437 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) RCTA Function......282, 288 Warning message ......284 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) ......282 Rear passengers' seat belt reminder light....650 Rear seat Folding down the rear seatbacks 155 Head restraints 159 Rear side marker lights Light switch....229 Replacing light bulbs ......624 Rear turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs ......624 Turn signal lever......223 Wattage 692 Rear view mirror Digital Rear-view Mirror.....165 Inside rear view mirror......163 Outside rear view mirrors .....174 Rear view monitor system.....313 Driving precautions......313 Rear view monitor system precautions ....315 Screen description......314 Things you should know......319 Rear window defogger .....526 Rear window wiper .....239 Receiving a call using the Bluetooth ^® hands-free system 487 Refueling 241 Capacity 685 Fuel types....685, 694 If the fuel filler door cannot be opened ....669 Opening the fuel tank cap ....242 Regenerative braking ....73 Registering/Connecting a Bluetooth ^® device .....402 Profiles 405 Registering a Bluetooth ^® audio player for the first time.....404 Registering a Bluetooth ^® phone for the first time ....402

Remote Connect......516

Replacing

Electronic key battery......618 Fuses 621 Light bulbs....624 Tires 658 Wiper insert 615 Wireless remote control battery 618

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners....720

Resetting the message indicating maintenance is required573

Road accident cautions .....77 Road Sign Assist......268 RSA (Road Sign Assist)......268

S

Screen adjustment .....400

Seat belt reminder light .649, 650

Seat belts ....31

Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height ....33 Automatic Locking Retractor ..33 Child restraint system installation 56 Cleaning and maintaining the seat belt....569 Emergency Locking Retractor 33 How to wear your seat belt.....32 How your child should wear the seat belt....32 Pregnant women, proper seat belt use....31 Reminder light and buzzer 649, 650 Seat belt extender .....32 Seat belt pretensioners .....34 SRS warning light......644

Seat heaters ....531

Seating capacity......199

Seat position memory .....156

Seats

Adjustment precautions153, 154 Adjustment 153, 154 Child seats/child restraint system installation ....52 Cleaning 569 Driving position memory.....156 Folding down the rear seatbacks 155 Head restraint....159 Properly sitting in the seat .....29 Seat heaters ....531 Seat position memory......156 Seat ventilators....531

Seat ventilators....531

Secondary Collision Brake....370

Sensor

Automatic headlight system .230 Automatic High Beam system 232 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).....285 Digital Rear-view Mirror......169 Inside rear view mirror......164 Intuitive parking assist ......291 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....258 Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles).....285 Parking Support Brake function (static objects) ......291 Rain-sensing windshield wipers 238 RCTA....285 Toyota Safety Sense 2.0 .....244

Service Connect ....517

Service plug ....76

Service reminder message....573

Setup button (Menu screen) 389, 392

Setup screen 392

Shift lever ......219

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P....221 Shift lock system......221 Side airbags ....35 Side auxiliary box....543 Side doors.... 127 Side marker lights Light switch 229 Replacing light bulbs ......624 Wattage....692 Side mirrors ....174 Adjustment 174 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).....283 Folding 174 Heaters....526 Side turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs .....624 Turn signal lever....223 Side windows ......176 Smart key system......147 Antenna location .....147 Entry functions .....127, 134 Starting the hybrid system....212 Warning message ......654 Snow tires ....378 Spare tire Storage location ......659 Specifications 684 Speedometer 94, 98 Sport mode ....366 Status icon......390 Status icon explanation .....390 Steering lock Column lock release.....210, 213 Steering lock system warning message....213 Steering switch...... 454, 483 Audio switch 454 Steering wheel Adjustment 162 Heated steering wheel .....531 Meter control switches .....104 Stop lights Replacing light bulbs .....624 Storage feature ....537 Storage precautions......537 Stuck If the vehicle becomes stuck 680 Suggestion function......112 Sunglass holder......539 Sunshade 179, 182 Sunvisors 546 Switches "ODO TRIP" switch......96, 101 "SOS" button 67 Automatic High Beam switch232 Brake hold switch 227 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).....284 Digital Rear-view Mirror control switches....165 Door lock switch ....131 Driving mode select switch...366 Driving position memory switches....156 Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range .....272 Electronic sunshade switch ..182 Emergency flashers switch...634 EV drive mode switch.....217 Fog light switch....235 Garage door opener switches 557 Heated steering wheel......531 Ignition switch (power switch) 210, 212 Intuitive parking assist .....293 Light switch....229 LTA switch....263 Meter control switches......104 Moon roof switches .....179 Outside rear view mirror switches....174 Panoramic moon roof switches 182 Parking brake switch .....224 PCS (Pre-Collision System) .252 PKSB (Parking Support Brake) 299 Power back door switch137, 138 Power door lock switch .....131 Power switch ......210, 212 Power window switch .....176 RCTA 284 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch 526 Rear window wiper and washer switch 239 Seat heater switches....531, 532 Seat ventilator switches .....532 Tire pressure warning reset switch 600 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch 271 VSC OFF switch....370 Window lock switch .....178 Windshield defogger switch .526 Windshield wiper de-icer switch 528 Windshield wipers and washer switch 236

T

Tail lights

Light switch 229 Replacing light bulbs .....624

Talking on the Bluetooth®

hands-free system ....488 Call screen operation .....488 Incoming call waiting .....490 Sending tones ....489 Transmit volume setting .....489

Theft deterrent system

Alarm....84 Immobilizer system .....81

Tire inflation pressure

Maintenance data......690 Tire inflation pressure display function....593 Warning light 649

Tire information ......696

Glossary 700 Size 698 Tire identification number .....697 Tire section names ......698

Tire pressure warning system

Function....593 Initializing....599 Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters .....598 Registering ID codes ......602 Warning light 649

Tires 590

Chains 380 Checking 590 Glossary 700 If you have a flat tire .....658 Inflation pressure......605 Information 696 Replacing 658 Rotating tires ....592 Size 690 Snow tires....378 Spare tire....658 Tire identification number .....697 Tire inflation pressure display function....593 Tire pressure warning system 593 Uniform Tire Quality Grading699 Warning light 649

Tools 659

Top tether strap ......63

Total load capacity ......196, 199

Touch screen 394

Touch screen gestures......394 Touch screen operation......395

Towing

Dinghy towing....209 Emergency towing......639 Towing eyelet ......639, 659 Trailer sway control ....369 Trailer towing....200 Toyota Apps ....518 Entering keyword .....520 Toyota Apps button (Setup screen) 392 Toyota Apps settings......522 Toyota parking assist monitor 321 Distance guide line display mode 326 Driving precautions ....321 Estimated course line display mode ....324 Parking assist guide line display mode ....325 Screen display....322 Things you should know.....331 Toyota parking assist monitor precautions....327 Using the system....323 Toyota Safety Sense 2.0 .....244 Automatic High Beam .....232 Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range......271 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....258 PCS (Pre-Collision System) .250 RSA (Road Sign Assist) .....268 TRAC (Traction Control) .....369 Traction battery (Hybrid battery) 76 Hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake and discharge vents 79 Location....76 Specification......686 Warning messages ....80 Traction Control (TRAC)......369 Traction motor (electric motor)72 Trailer sway control......369 Trailer towing ....200 Trail Mode......367 Transmission Driving mode select switch...366 Hybrid transmission......219 Trip meters .....94, 98 Troubleshooting In other situations ....508 When making/receiving a call 506 When registering/connecting a cellular phone ....505 When using the Bluetooth ^® message function .....507 When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth ^® device 505 When using the phonebook..506 Turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs ......624 Turn signal lever......223 Wattage 692

U

USB charging ports......547 USB memory 444 USB port ....434 Utility vehicle precautions .....381

V

Vanity lights Vanity lights 546 Wattage 692 Vanity mirrors ....546 Vehicle button (Setup screen) 392 Vehicle data recordings .....9 Vehicle identification number684 Vehicle proximity notification system....74 Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) 369 Ventilators (seat ventilators) .531 Voice button (Setup screen)..392 Voice command system .....470 Voice command system operation ....471 VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) 369

W

Warning buzzers

Approach warning .....278 Brake hold 648 Brake Override System .....648 Brake system 642 Downshifting......222 Drive-Start Control 648 Electric power steering......644 High coolant temperature.....643 Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator 646 Intuitive parking assist......291 Low engine oil pressure .....643 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....258 LTA indicator 645 Open door 131 Open hood ....131 Open window 177 PKSB OFF indicator......646 Pre-collision warning .....250 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) 283 RCTA OFF indicator......647 Seat belt reminder......649, 650 Vehicle sway warning......262

Warning lights

ABS 644 Brake hold operated indicator 648 Brake Override System .....648 Brake system....642 Charging system 642 Drive-Start Control......648 Electric power steering .....644 Engine 643 High coolant temperature .....643 Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator 646 Low engine oil pressure .....643 Low fuel level....649 LTA indicator 645 Malfunction indicator lamp....643 Parking brake indicator......648 PCS warning light....645 PKSB (Parking Support Brake) 648 PKSB OFF indicator ......646 RCTA OFF indicator......647 Seat belt reminder light 649, 650 Slip indicator......647 SRS 644 Tire pressure 649

Warning messages......654

Washer

Checking 587 Low washer fluid warning mes-sage....587, 654 Preparing and checking before winter....378 Switch......236, 239

Washing and waxing .....566

Weight

Cargo capacity .....196, 199 Load limits 199 Weight 684

Wheels 607

Replacing wheels 607 Size 690

Wi-Fi ^® 414

Connecting a device to the in-vehicle access point .....414 Operating hints ......417 Wi-Fi® button (Setup screen) 392 Wi-Fi ^® Hotspot......414 Window glasses Power windows .....176 Window lock switch .....178 Windows Power windows ......176 Rear window defogger .....526 Washer....236, 239 Windshield defogger......526 Windshield wiper de-icer.....528 Windshield wipers Intermittent windshield wipers 236 Position 236, 239 Rain-sensing windshield wipers 236 Replacing the wiper insert....615 Winter driving tips......378 Wiper insert ......615 Wireless charger ....549 Wireless remote control .....122 Battery-saving function......148 Locking/Unlocking 122 Panic mode 123 Replacing the battery .....618 \- Panoramic view monitor For vehicles with Premium Audio with Navigation or Audio Plus, refer to "NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL" for information regarding the equipment listed below. - Navigation system - Audio system - Rear view monitor system · Toyota parking assist monitor

GAS STATION INFORMATION


A B C D F E

A Auxiliary catch lever ( P.579) B Power back door switch ^* (→P.137) C Fuel filler door opener switch ( P.242) D Fuel filler door ( P.242) E Tire inflation pressure ( P.690) F Hood lock release lever ( P.579) \*: Vehicles with power back door

Fuel tank capacity(Reference)	14.5 gal. (55 L, 12.1 Imp.gal.)
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only P.685
Cold tire inflation pressure P.690
Engine oil capacity(Drain and refill — reference)	P.686
Engine oil type P.686